SERVICE HARBOUR MARINE WORKS AND BUILDINGS

PORT OF FUJAIRAH,
FUJAIRAH, UAE

VOLUME 3-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BUILDINGS
Report 13048-TD-02-VOL3-5; rev.00 dated 14-02-2017
Project: Service Harbour Marine Works and Buildings, Port of Fujairah, Fujairah,
UAE

Employer: Port of Fujairah,

P.O. Box 787,
Fujairah,
United Arab Emirates

Engineer: MUC Engineering,

Ground Floor, Capt. Mousa Building,
Hamad Bin Abdulla Road,
P.O. Box 7718,
Fujairah,
United Arab Emirates
Date: 14-02-2017

Document reference: 13048-TD-02-VOL3-5; rev.00;

Service Harbour Marine Works and Buildings, Port of Fujairah, Fujairah, UAE;
Tender Ref. No. 13048-TD-02

Contents of the tender dossier

Volume 1
Tender and Contract
13048-TD-02-VOL1
Volume 2
Price
13048-TD-02-VOL2
Volume 3
Employer s Requirements

Volume 3-1
General Requirements
13048-TD-02-VOL3-1
Volume 3-2
Performance Requirements
13048-TD-02-VOL3-2
Volume 3-3
Technical Specifications Marine Civil
13048-TD-02-VOL3-3
Volume 3-4
Technical Specifications Marine Topside
13048-TD-02-VOL3-4
Volume 3-5
Technical Specifications Buildings
13048-TD-02-VOL3-5
Volume 3-6
Tender Reference Drawings
13048-TD-02-VOL3-6
Volume 3-7
Approved Vendor List
13048-TD-02-VOL3-7
Volume 4
Data for Information
13048-TD-02-VOL4
Contents of report 13048-TD-02-VOL3-5; rev.00; dated 14-02-2017

List of tables .................................................................

........................................................................... 8
1 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS ....................................................
............................................. 9
1.1 Nature of Soil .............................................................
................................................................... 9
1.2 Original levels ............................................................
................................................................... 9
1.3 Site investigation report ..................................................
............................................................... 9
1.4 Excavation .................................................................
.................................................................... 9
1.5 Finish of excavation and inspection ........................................
..................................................... 10
1.6 Removal of water ...........................................................
.............................................................. 10
1.7 Sheeting and shoring .......................................................
............................................................. 10
1.8 Storage and disposal of excavated material .................................
................................................ 10
1.9 Utilities trench excavation ................................................
........................................................... 10
1.10 Filling, back-filling and compaction ......................................
...................................................... 11
1.11 Soil Improvement by vibro compaction ......................................
................................................. 13
1.12 Disposition of existing utilities .........................................
........................................................... 14
1.13 Safety of adjoining existing buildings/structures .........................
................................................ 14
1.14 De-watering ...............................................................
.................................................................. 15
1.15 Site clearance ............................................................
................................................................... 16
1.16 Blinding...................................................................
.................................................................... 16
1.17 Polythene Sheeting ........................................................
............................................................... 16
1.18 Bitumen treatment/protection ..............................................
........................................................ 16
1.19 Protective membrane to U/G reinforced concrete structures .................
...................................... 17
1.20 Depth of foundations ......................................................
.............................................................. 17
1.21 Anti-termite treatment ....................................................
.............................................................. 17
2 PILING WORKS .................................................................
................................................................. 21
2.1 Scope of work ..............................................................
................................................................ 21
2.2 Standards ..................................................................
................................................................... 21
2.3 Guarantee ..................................................................
.................................................................. 21
2.4 Spoil and rubbish removal ..................................................
......................................................... 21
2.5 Setting out ................................................................
................................................................... 21
2.6 Records ....................................................................
................................................................... 22
2.7 Pile length ................................................................
................................................................... 22
2.8 Cut-off ....................................................................
..................................................................... 22
2.9 Concrete ...................................................................
................................................................... 22
2.10 Piling ....................................................................
....................................................................... 22
2.11 Pile test .................................................................
....................................................................... 23
2.12 Integrity test ............................................................
.................................................................... 24
2.13 Drilling Fluid ............................................................
................................................................... 24
3 CONCRETE WORKS ...............................................................
............................................................ 26
3.1 Concrete ...................................................................
................................................................... 26
3.2 Glass reinforced plastics panel cladding / features ........................
.............................................. 42
3.3 Glass reinforced concrete material (GRC) ...................................
................................................ 47
4 BLOCKWORK ....................................................................
................................................................. 53
4.1 General ....................................................................
.................................................................... 53
4.2 Materials ..................................................................
................................................................... 53
4.3 Mortar .....................................................................
.................................................................... 54
4.4 Workmanship ................................................................
............................................................... 54
4.5 Load bearing walls .........................................................
.............................................................. 55
4.6 Non-load bearing walls .....................................................
........................................................... 55
4.7 Fair faced walls ...........................................................
................................................................. 55
4.8 Protection of finished blockwork ...........................................
...................................................... 56
4.9 Compressible joint fillers .................................................
............................................................ 56
4.10 Partitions ................................................................
..................................................................... 56
4.11 Poly sulphide sealant .....................................................
............................................................... 56
4.12 Lintels ...................................................................
...................................................................... 56
4.13 Reinforcement .............................................................
................................................................. 57
4.14 Source of material ........................................................
................................................................ 57
4.15 Storage of materials ......................................................
............................................................... 57
4.16 Blockwork below ground level ..............................................
...................................................... 57
4.17 Damp proof courses ........................................................
............................................................. 57
4.18 External pointing of joinery or metal work ................................
.................................................. 57
5 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING ....................................................
............................................. 58
5.1 General ....................................................................
.................................................................... 58
5.2 Testing.....................................................................
.................................................................... 58
5.3 Guarantee ..................................................................
.................................................................. 58
5.4 Preparation of surfaces ....................................................
............................................................. 58
5.5 Protection .................................................................
................................................................... 58
5.6 Roofing System .............................................................
............................................................... 59
5.7 Water proofing below ground ................................................
...................................................... 59
5.8 Water proofing for wet areas ...............................................
........................................................ 59
5.9 GRP Water Tank Lining ......................................................
........................................................ 59
6 METAL WORKS & GLAZING ........................................................
.................................................... 61
6.1 General ....................................................................
.................................................................... 61
6.2 Standards ..................................................................
................................................................... 61
6.3 Finished coating ...........................................................
................................................................ 61
6.4 Aluminium ..................................................................
................................................................ 63
6.5 Storage and protection .....................................................
............................................................ 65
6.6 Materials ..................................................................
................................................................... 66
6.7 Shop painting materials ....................................................
............................................................ 66
6.8 Shop coating for ferrous and galvanized surfaces ...........................
............................................. 67
6.9 Workmanship ................................................................
............................................................... 67
6.10 Installation ..............................................................
..................................................................... 68
6.11 Samples ...................................................................
.................................................................... 69
6.12 Sealing joints ............................................................
................................................................... 69
6.13 Glazing ...................................................................
..................................................................... 70
6.14 Glazing Materials .........................................................
................................................................ 70
6.15 Glass opening .............................................................
.................................................................. 71
6.16 Glass Installation ........................................................
.................................................................. 72
6.17 Cleaning ..................................................................
.................................................................... 72
6.18 Cat ladders ...............................................................
................................................................... 72
6.19 Expansion Joint Trims, Etc. ...............................................
.......................................................... 73
7 CARPENTRY & JOINERY ..........................................................
........................................................ 74
7.1 Timber Generally ...........................................................
.............................................................. 74
7.2 Timber for Caracassing .....................................................
........................................................... 74
7.3 Softwood for joinery .......................................................
............................................................. 75
7.4 Hardwood or joinery ........................................................
............................................................ 75
7.5 Preservative treatment .....................................................
............................................................. 76
7.6 Fire Resistance and Flame retardants .......................................
.................................................... 76
7.7 Plywood ....................................................................
.................................................................. 76
7.8 Block Board ................................................................
................................................................ 76
7.9 Chipboard ..................................................................
.................................................................. 77
7.10 Veneers ...................................................................
.................................................................... 77
7.11 Plastic Laminate ..........................................................
................................................................. 77
7.12 Hardboard .................................................................
.................................................................. 77
7.13 Nails and screws ..........................................................
................................................................ 77
7.14 Metal work ................................................................
.................................................................. 77
7.15 Adhesives .................................................................
................................................................... 78
7.16 Access panels and the like ................................................
........................................................... 78
7.17 Workmanship ...............................................................
................................................................ 78
7.18 Packaging and storage .....................................................
............................................................. 78
7.19 Wooden doors ..............................................................
................................................................ 79
7.20 Protection, finishing and re-examination ..................................
................................................... 80
7.21 Ironmongery ...............................................................
................................................................. 81
7.22 Service ducts and access panels ...........................................
........................................................ 82
7.23 Kitchen cabinet ...........................................................
................................................................. 83
7.24 Frames and lining to doors and window .....................................
................................................. 83
7.25 Architrave s stops, etc .....................................................
............................................................. 83
7.26 Dry wall partitions .......................................................
................................................................ 84
8 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES .............................................
........................................... 85
8.1 Cement .....................................................................
................................................................... 85
8.2 Water ......................................................................
..................................................................... 85
8.3 Sand........................................................................
..................................................................... 85
8.4 Lime .......................................................................
..................................................................... 85
8.5 Gypsum Plaster .............................................................
............................................................... 85
8.6 Admixtures and plasticisers ................................................
......................................................... 85
8.7 Color pigments .............................................................
................................................................ 86
8.8 Plasterboards ..............................................................
................................................................. 86
8.9 Metal lathing, stops and beads, expansion joint cover strip ................
......................................... 86
8.10 Ceramic tiles .............................................................
.................................................................. 86
8.11 Adhesives and sealants.....................................................
............................................................ 86
8.12 Surface hardeners .........................................................
................................................................ 86
8.13 Workmanship generally .....................................................
.......................................................... 87
8.14 Defective/damaged work ....................................................
......................................................... 87
8.15 Storage ...................................................................
..................................................................... 87
8.16 Preparation of surfaces ...................................................
.............................................................. 87
8.17 Plastering and rendering...................................................
............................................................ 88
8.18 Gypsum plaster ............................................................
................................................................ 89
8.19 Angle beads ...............................................................
.................................................................. 89
8.20 Beds for floor tiling .....................................................
................................................................. 90
8.21 Sand cement screed ........................................................
.............................................................. 90
8.22 Concrete floor tiles ......................................................
................................................................. 90
8.23 Ceramic floor and wall tiling .............................................
.......................................................... 93
8.24 Floor tiling ..............................................................
.................................................................... 95
8.25 Granite work ..............................................................
................................................................. 95
8.26 Suspended ceilings ........................................................
............................................................... 97
9 PAINTING AND DECORATING ......................................................
.................................................. 99
9.1 General ....................................................................
.................................................................... 99
9.2 Materials ..................................................................
................................................................. 100
9.3 Workmanship ................................................................
............................................................. 102
9.4 Guarantees .................................................................
................................................................ 105
10 EXTERNAL WORKS ..............................................................
........................................................... 106
10.1 General ...................................................................
................................................................... 106
10.2 Boundary walls ............................................................
.............................................................. 106
10.3 Interlocking block pavers .................................................
.......................................................... 106
11 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................
................................................. 111
11.1 General ...................................................................
................................................................... 111
11.2 Structural Specifications .................................................
........................................................... 111
11.3 External Finishes .........................................................
............................................................... 113
11.4 Schedule of finishes ......................................................
............................................................. 121
11.5 Floor Finish ..............................................................
................................................................. 121
11.6 Skirting Finish ...........................................................
................................................................. 122
11.7 Wall Finish ...............................................................
................................................................. 123
11.8 Ceiling Finish ............................................................
................................................................. 123
11.9 False ceiling finish ......................................................
............................................................... 124
11.10 Sanitary ware ............................................................
................................................................. 125
11.11 Sanitary fittings ........................................................
.................................................................. 125
11.12 Sanitary accessory .......................................................
............................................................... 125
11.13 Special items ............................................................
.................................................................. 126
11.14 Door schedule (as per tender drawings/BOQ) ...............................
............................................ 127
11.15 Door .....................................................................
..................................................................... 127
12 PLUMBING ....................................................................
.................................................................... 129
12.1 Common Motor requirements for plumbing equipment ..........................
.................................. 129
12.2 Expansion fittings and loops for plumbing piping ..........................
........................................... 134
12.3 Meters and gages for Plumbing piping ......................................
................................................ 136
12.4 Vibration and Seismic Controls for plumbing piping and equipment ..........
............................. 140
12.5 Identification for plumbing piping and equipment ..........................
.......................................... 143
12.6 Plumbing Equipment Insulation .............................................
.................................................... 145
12.7 Plumbing piping insulation ................................................
........................................................ 149
12.8 Plumbing piping ...........................................................
.............................................................. 155
12.9 Plumbing piping specialties ...............................................
........................................................ 164
12.10 Plumbing Equipment .......................................................
.......................................................... 169
12.11 Plumbing Fixtures ........................................................
.............................................................. 176
13 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) .............................
.................... 183
13.1 Common Motor Requirement for HVAC Equipment ...............................
................................. 183
13.2 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Hvac Piping ..............................
........................................... 186
13.3 Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC piping and equipment ..............
............................... 188
13.4 Identification for Hvac piping and equipment ..............................
............................................. 193
13.5 Testing, Adjusting and balancing for Hvac..................................
.............................................. 195
13.6 Duct Insulations ..........................................................
............................................................... 206
13.7 Hvac equipment insulation..................................................
....................................................... 209
13.8 HVAC Piping Insulation ....................................................
........................................................ 214
13.9 Commissioning of HVAC .....................................................
..................................................... 218
13.10 Instrumentation and control devices for Hvac .............................
.............................................. 224
13.11 HVAC ducts and casings ...................................................
........................................................ 229
13.12 Air ducts accessories ....................................................
.............................................................. 234
13.13 Duct Silencers ...........................................................
................................................................. 240
13.14 Hvac fans ................................................................
.................................................................. 243
13.15 Air terminal units .......................................................
................................................................ 245
13.16 Air outlets and inlets ...................................................
............................................................... 247
13.17 Small split system heating and cooling ...................................
................................................... 250
14 ELECTRICAL ..................................................................
.................................................................. 253
14.1 Low voltage electrical power conductors and cables ........................
......................................... 253
14.2 Grounding and bonding for electrical systems...............................
............................................ 260
14.3 Hangers and supports for electrical systems ...............................
............................................... 264
14.4 Hangers and supports for electrical systems ...............................
............................................... 266
14.5 Conduits ..................................................................
.................................................................. 269
14.6 Cable trays for electrical systems ........................................
....................................................... 278
14.7 Wiring Accessories ........................................................
............................................................ 281
14.8 Identification for electrical systems .....................................
...................................................... 285
14.9 Switchboards ..............................................................
................................................................ 288
14.10 Final distribution boards and switchboard components .....................
........................................ 302
14.11 Variable frequency motor controllers .....................................
................................................... 307
14.12 Battery emergency power supply ...........................................
.................................................... 315
14.13 Static uninterruptible power supply ......................................
..................................................... 317
14.14 Capacitors ...............................................................
.................................................................. 323
15 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY ..............................................
......................................... 335
15.1 Fire detection and alarm system ...........................................
...................................................... 335
15.2 BMS Specifications ........................................................
........................................................... 345
List of tables
Compaction requirements .......................................................
............................................ 11
Drilling fluid properties ......................................................
................................................. 25
Water chemical properties ......................................................
............................................. 28
Concrete mix designs............................................................
............................................... 31
Applicable standards concrete materials ........................................
..................................... 31
Concrete workability ...........................................................
................................................ 34
Striking or Removal of Form-work ...............................................
...................................... 39
Composition and Proportions of Floor Screed Constituents .......................
........................ 42
Concrete mix proportions .......................................................
............................................. 52
Requirements for window construction ...........................................
................................... 65
Glass frame tolerances .........................................................
............................................... 72
Base metals for finishes........................................................
............................................... 82
Anchoring of granite work ......................................................
............................................ 96
Test for compressive strength ..................................................
....................................... 108
Paint Characteristics ..........................................................
.............................................. 109
List of materials and specifications ...........................................
...................................... 112
Minimum concrete cover .........................................................
....................................... 113
External finishes Properties ...................................................
.......................................... 113
Polyurethane Insulation Test Values ............................................
................................... 118
Other Properties ...............................................................
............................................... 122
False ceiling finish ...........................................................
............................................... 124
Storage tank details ...........................................................
.............................................. 171
Flow Control ...................................................................
................................................ 179
Performance Requirement ........................................................
....................................... 241
System Design Unitsl ...........................................................
........................................... 252
Hard Wiring Conductor ..........................................................
......................................... 255
Color Coding ...................................................................
................................................ 274
Conductors .....................................................................
................................................. 277
A. Rectifier and B. Inverter ...................................................
.......................................... 316
Electrical Characteristics .....................................................
............................................ 323
1 EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, and IBC-UPC

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

1.1 Nature of Soil
The Contractor is to visit the Site and ascertain for himself the condition of t
he surface of the
excavations, previously completed by others and the type of substrata encountere
d in the excavation.

The Contractor shall judge for himself the nature of the ground and shall be ful
ly responsible for
ascertaining all necessary information concerning strain, permanent water table,
periods of rainfall, flooding
of the site and all matters affecting the excavations and foundation work. No ex
tra will be allowed due to
want of knowledge in this respect.

The methods of excavation which the Contractor desires to use shall be at the so
le discretion of the
Contractor.

The Contractor shall confirm to the Engineer that excavations are ready to recei
ve foundation concrete
and shall obtain consent before depositing concrete. Any concrete deposited befo
re consent is given
may, at the Engineers request, be broken up and removed at the Contractors expen
se and the work reexecuted
at no extra cost to the Employer.

In the event of additional excavation being made deeper than required, the Contr
actor shall fill in the
excavated void to the correct profile with hardcore or with sulphate resistance
mass concrete as described
in the "Concrete Work" Section hereinafter, at his own expense, and to the satis
faction of the Engineer.
1.2 Original levels
A survey of the existing site excavation shall be made and the results of same s
ubmitted to the Engineer
before commencement of the work.
1.3 Site investigation report
Site investigation report has been carried out for the engineering design at the
consultancy stage. The
Contractor shall carry out his own further site investigation as required.
1.4 Excavation
Excavation shall be carried out in all materials and by whatever means are neces
sary accurately to the lines
and levels shown on the Drawings, or as ordered by the Engineer.
No blasting of any kind will be permitted without the written permission of the
Engineer. Slopes and
formation surfaces shall be trimmed true to line and the required profiles shall
be left well consolidated,
neat and smooth.
Any additional excavation occasioned by slips, falls, wash-ins, etc., shall be m
ade good at the
Contractor's expense with mass concrete or approved filling materials as ordered
by the Engineer's
Representative.
1.5 Finish of excavation and inspection
The Engineer's Representative shall inspect all the excavations before commencem
ent of further work and
the Contractor shall notify the Engineer's Representative when excavations are r
eady for inspection.

The Engineer's Representative may instruct the Contractor to test the bearing ca
pacity of the soil in the
bottom of excavations. Upon receipt of such instructions, the Contractor shall f
orthwith carry out such
tests as the Engineer's Representative may instruct.

Should the bottoms of excavation be found to be unsuitable as bearing surfaces a

s a result of such tests
or inspection by the Engineer's Representative, the Contractor shall excavate fu
rther as directed until a
satisfactory bearing surface is achieved.

No excavation shall be refilled nor any permanent work commenced until the forma
tion has been inspected
by the Engineer's Representative and his permission to proceed given.
1.6 Removal of water
The excavations shall at all times be kept free from storm water, percolating wa
ter or subsoil water by means
of de-watering Systems installed by the Employers previous contractor, and hande
d over to the Main
Contractor for continued operation. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and c
lear away on completion
any equipment necessary together with temporary drains and the like. Under no ci
rcumstances shall concrete
be poured, fill placed, pipes laid or appurtenances installed in excavations con
taining water.
1.7 Sheeting and shoring
Shoring shall be provided where required, at the excavations to ensure complete
safety against collapse of
soil at sides of excavations, to provide protection of workmen and to prevent da
mage to adjacent property,
structures, paving and utilities.
1.8 Storage and disposal of excavated material
Any additional excavated material shall be removed from site.
1.9 Utilities trench excavation
Utilities shall generally be installed in open cut trenches except that short co
nnections may be tunneled if in
the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, the pipe or duct can be safely and
properly installed and backfill
can be properly placed and compacted in such tunneled section.

Bottom of trenches shall be graded evenly to secure the required falls for pipes
and to ensure bearing over
the entire length of the pipe. Bottoms of trenches shall be firm undisturbed soi
l, other than topsoil and free
from rock, stones, hard substances, rubbish, and the like. Where rock, stones or
other hard materials occur,
these shall be removed for a depth of at least 150mm and the space back-filled w
ith selected sand or granular
material compacted in accordance with back- fill requirements. No such material
shall be excavated or backfilling
carried out without the approval of the Engineer's Representative.
1.10 Filling, back-filling and compaction
All filling material shall be imported. The imported filling material shall be s
and and obtained from an
approved source in accordance with the latest instructions issued by the Departm
ent of Municipalities
regarding the winning of material for filling. Imported filling material shall c
ontain no perishable or organic
rubbish and no particles. The maximum dry density of the material shall be not l
ess than 1600 kg/m.

Care shall be taken when filling or back-filling to avoid any wedging action or
eccentric action upon or
against the structure of the work. Before placing of fill, the surface of the su
b-grade shall be compacted at
optimum water content to the same percentage of maximum dry density required of
subsequent layers.

Filling and back-filling shall be placed in layers not exceeding 150mm thick (af
ter compaction). Each layer
shall be uniformly spread and shall be moistened or dried by aeration when requi
red to ensure the optimum
water content and shall be compacted uniformly by hand or machine methods of spe
cified density as
follows:-

Element
Compaction requirements
Filling under concrete beds, sidewalks and other bearing situations
At least 98% maximum dry density
Fill within 300mm, measured horizontally, of foundation walls,
retaining walls, edges of footings, and other below-grade vertical
surfaces. When machine compacted, compaction shall be by means
of a 6 ton smooth wheeled roller
At least 95% maximum dry density

Compaction requirements
The Engineer's Representative shall have the right to disapprove any compacting
device of inadequate
capacity or in his opinion, of type unsuited to the character of the material be
ing compacted. Heavy
equipment for spreading and compacting fill and back-fill shall not be operated
closer to walls than a
distance to the difference in height between the top of the footings and the lay
er being compacted

Testing to determine the density of in place soil shall be by means of ASSHTO St

andard Method of Test
T147 or in accordance with BS 1377: 1975 (or equivalent BSEN standard).The numbe
r of density tests per
layer shall be as instructed by the Engineer's Representative.

When back-filling behind retaining walls, basement walls and the like the said s
tructures shall be kept
propped during the complete operation. The hydraulic compaction of fill shall no
t be permitted and the backfilling
shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 150mm thick. Each layer shall be co
mpacted to 90% of the
modified compaction. No back-filling shall be carried out until the wall concret
e has achieved its full works
cube strength and care shall be exercised so as not to damage the external tanki
ng membrane and its
protection.

Trenches shall not be back-filled until all required pressure tests have been pe
rformed and until the utility
systems, as installed, conform to the requirements of the Specifications governi
ng mechanical, electrical, and
utility work.

Where, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative, damage is likely to resu

lt from withdrawing sheeting,
the sheeting shall be left in place. The trenches shall be carefully back- fille
d with approved back-filling
materials, as herein before specified, deposited in 150mm layers and thoroughly
and carefully hand tamped
until the pipe has a cover of not less than 300mm for electric ducts, and 600mm
for sewers and water mains.
Where the pipe is specially coated for protection against corrosion, care shall
be taken not to damage the
coating. The remainder of the back-fill material shall then be placed in 150mm l
ayers, and compacted by
hand hammers or mechanical tampers to at least 90% maximum dry density. Settling
the back-fill with water
will be permitted, and will be a requirement, when so directed by the Engineer's
Representative. Any
trenches improperly back-filled, or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened t
o the depth required for
compaction, then refilled and compacted, with surface restored to the required g
rade and compaction,
mounded over and smoothed off.
Open trenches across parking areas and trenches at other areas to be paved shall
be back-filled as specified
above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be back-filled in 150mm
layers and each layer shall be
moistened and compacted to at least 98% of maximum dry density, to provide the r
equired bearing value, so
that construction or paving over the area can proceed immediately after back-fil
ling is completed. Along all
other portions of the trenches, the ground shall be graded to a reasonable unifo
rmity and the mounding over
of the trenches left in a uniform and neat condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer's Representative.

Field control density tests shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the E
ngineer's Representative to
determine the degree of compaction being obtained by field compaction procedures
during construction of
sub grade. Each lift of material placed by the Contractor shall be subject to th
e approval of the Engineer's
Representative. No material shall be placed on a prepared sub grade, without the
prior acceptance of the sub
grade by the Engineer's Representative. Sub grade shall be compacted throughout
to 98% of maximum
density at optimum moisture content.

Compaction equipment shall consist of smooth power rollers or other equipment wh

ich will produce the
compaction 7kg/cm2. No compaction equipment may be employed for the permanent wo
rk without the
approval of the Engineer's Representative. Material in the layers shall not be c
ompacted when the moisture
content is more than 2 percentage points above or 3 percentage points below the
optimum moisture content
except for cohesive materials for which no optimum point can be obtained.

If the material is too dry, immediate steps shall be taken to rectify the situat
ion and no additional materials
shall be placed until the compaction can be resumed and the required moisture co
ntent and densities required
can be met. If the material is too wet, compacting work and placement of additio
nal fill shall be delayed until
the material has dried to the extent that the required moisture content will be
required through the layer for
the particular soil involved, wetting or drying and manipulation of the material
will be required, if necessary,
to accomplish this objective. During the progress of the work, the Engineer's Re
presentative will inspect the
material as to type, condition, moisture content and densities, and may direct t
he location of its placement in
the fill. The compaction of each layer shall be completed both in widths and lon
gitudinal extent before the
next lift is started. The quantity of material being placed shall not exceed the
capacity of the compaction
equipment. The Contractor shall make "in place" density and moisture determinati
ons and the Engineer's
Representative will approve the compaction and moisture contents of each layer.
The distribution of
materials shall be such that the compacted materials will be free from lenses, p
ockets, streaks or other
imperfections. Based on unsatisfactory results of 'in place' density and other m
oisture tests, the Engineer's
Representative will require the Contractor to obtain the specified valued for th
ese items, including, if
necessary, replacement of work. The Contractor shall be responsible for the stab
ility of all fill made under
the Contract until the work has been accepted by the Engineer's Representative a
nd shall replace any portion
which, in the opinion of the Engineer's Representative has become displaced.

Compact fill shall consist of approved materials obtained either from excavation
s or from other approved
sources. Compacted fill shall comprise suitable granular materials well graded a
nd shall not include
perishable matter or an excess of fines and should give a dense fill layer.
The material shall be free of organic matter and have the following properties:

Minimum Soaked CBR of 15% when he material is compacted to 95% of the maximum dr
y density.
Insitu CBR of 10% when the compacted layer is field tested at site. Liquid Limit
not more that 35% and
plasticity index not more than 6%. Linear Shrinkage not exceeding 3%
Water Soluble Salts not more than 0.5% by weight of dry material.

Organic Materials no organic material permissible

Maximum Particle Size not more than 75 mm; max passing sieve No.200 < 30%

Lab CBR Tests as determined by Test 16, BS 1377 Sulphate Content as per BS 1377
0.5% maximum.
Chloride Content as per BS 812 1% maximum. Field Density Test as determined by T
est 15B of BS 1377

Linear Shrinkage Test as determined by AASHTO T92: Not to exceed 3%

Organic Matter Test as determined by Test 8 of BS 1377

Maximum Dry Density at Optimum Moisture Content as determined by Test 13, BS 137
7, but not less
than 1600 kg/m3.

Liquid Limit as determined by BS 1377 1975: 2.2 (Test 2 A: Preferred method usin
g the cone
penetrometer)

Plasticity Index as determined by BS 1377: 1975 2.4: Less than 6%

Prior to any approval of the source of fill material, tests will be performed to
ascertain that the material
complies with the above minimum requirements. Subsequently if different material
is to be used other than
the approved one, new tests shall be carried out.
Tests for Density and Compaction
The following gives the minimum testing required for fill. Additional or more fr
equent tests may be required
if materials vary or workmanship is inconsistent:
. Laboratory tests for MDD, optimum moisture contents, for each layer.
. Field density and moisture content, insitu CBR, for each layer as required by
the Engineer.

The areas shall be rejected if the resulting test results do not satisfy specifi
ed requirements.
1.11 Soil Improvement by vibro compaction
Vibro-compaction is a ground improvement technique that densifies clean, cohesio
n-less granular soils by
means of a down-hole vibrator.

The vibrator is typically suspended from a crane and lowered vertically into the
soil under its own weight.
Penetration is usually aided by water jets integrated into the vibrator assembly
. After reaching the bottom of
the treatment zone, the soils are densified in lifts as the probe is extracted.
During vibro compaction, clean
sand back-fill is typically added at the ground surface to compensate for the re
duction in soil volume
resulting from the densification process. The vibratory energy reduces the inter
-granular forces between the
soil particles, allowing them to move into a denser configuration, typically ach
ieving a relative density of 70
to 85 percent. The treated soils have increased density, friction angle and stif
fness. Compaction is achieved
above and below the water table.
The improved soil characteristics depend on the soil type and gradation, spacing
of the penetration points and
the time spent performing the compaction. Generally, the vibro compaction penetr
ation spacing is between
1.8 m and 4.3 m, with centers arranged on a triangular or square pattern. Compac
tion takes place without
setting up internal stresses in the soil, thus ensuring permanent densification.

The use of clean sand back-fill during vibro compaction allows the original site
elevation to be maintained.
However, on sites where the planned final grade is below the existing grade, low
ering of the site elevation
may be desirable. In these instances, the ground surface is allowed to subside d
uring the compaction effort.
Vibro-compaction permits the use of economical spread footings with design beari
ng pressures generally of
240 kpa up to 480 kpa .Settlement and seismic liquefaction potentials are reduce
d. The required treatment
depth is typically in the range of 4.5 to 15 m. Examples of previously performed
applications include
increasing bearing capacity, decreasing settlement and mitigating liquefaction f
or planned structures,
embankments, railways and roadways.

Vibro-compaction rigs can be fully instrumented with an on-board computer to mon

itor parameters
during vibro-compaction. Monitoring these parameters allows the operator to corr
ect any deviations in realtime
during the construction process to keep the vibro compaction within project spec
ifications. Data from
the Data Acquisition (DAQ) system such as amperage and lift rate are recorded an
d displayed in real-time
alongside specified target values on an in-cab monitor.
1.12 Disposition of existing utilities
Before commencing any construction work, the Contractor shall obtain from the va
rious utilities
Departments, Companies or Employer the location of any existing utilities on the
Site. Active utilities on the
Site shall be carefully protected from damage, relocated or removed as required
by the work. When an active
utility line is exposed during construction, its location and elevation shall be
plotted on the Record Drawings
and both the Engineer's Representative and the utility owner notified in writing
.

Inactive or abandoned utilities encountered during construction operations shall

be removed, plugged or
capped. The location of such utility shall be noted on the Record Drawings and r
eported in writing to the
Engineer's Representative.

Active utility lines damaged during the course of construction operations shall
be repaired or replaced as
determined by the Engineer's Representative at the Contractor's expense.

Immediately, when an active utility line is damaged, the Contractor shall notify
the Engineer's
Representative and the utility owners by telephone and in writing.
1.13 Safety of adjoining existing buildings/structures
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during the excavation for th
e Works particularly those
excavation which are adjoining existing buildings/structures and shall protect s
uch buildings/structures
from the damage or collapse by means of temporary or permanent shoring, struttin
g, sheet piling or
underpinning or excavation in short lengths and/or other methods as he deems fit
also he shall properly
support all foundations, trenches, walls, floors, etc. affecting the safety of t
he adjoining existing
buildings/structures.

The Contractor shall alter, adopt and maintain all such works described above fo
r the whole period of
the Contract and shall finally clear away and make good all damages done.
The construction and efficiency of the shoring, underpinning, strutting and the
like for the purpose for
which it is erected shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, should any su
bsidence or any other
damage occur due to the inefficiency of the shoring, underpinning, strutting and
the like or any other
support provided, the damage shall be made good by the Contractor at his own exp
ense and
responsibility.

The shoring, strutting, piling and the like, shall be executed in such a manner
as to cause as little
inconvenience as possible to adjoining owners or the public and the Contractor s
hall be responsible for
negotiating with the adjoining owners the means to safeguard their property and
for the use of any
portion of their land for the purpose of executing the excavations and no claims
submitted on this
ground will be entertained.

The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the safety of the adjoining
existing
buildings/structures the sufficiency of all temporary or permanent shoring, unde
rpinning, piling, and the
like. The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed as to manner in which he i
ntends to proceed with
the execution of the excavations and obtain his approval, such approval if given
shall not absolve the
Contractor of his responsibility under this Clause.

The Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify the Employer in respect of all
claims, demands,
proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever arising out of or i
n relation to any such
matters in so far as the Contractor is responsible under this Clause.
1.14 De-watering
Surface water and ground water shall be prevented from flowing into excavations
and from flooding
the project site and surrounding areas.

Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations and the Contractor shall
provide and maintain
pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other de-watering sy
stem components
necessary to continuously convey water away from excavations.

Temporary drainage systems, pumps and/or other diversions outside excavation lim
its shall be established
and maintained to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to discha
rge locations.

Surface and subsurface water encountered in the course of the work shall be coll
ected and properly
disposed of.

The Contractor shall maintain adequate supervision and control, to ensure that s
tability of excavated and
constructed slopes are not adversely affected by water, erosion is controlled; f
looding of excavation or
damage to structures does not occur.

The Contractor shall ensure that groundwater removal will not cause settlement o
f adjacent soil, or any
displacement, settlement or damage to permanent and temporary works, existing st
ructures, roads, utilities
and other property. He shall monitor conditions at all times to determine that n
o soil or fines is removed in
the pumped water which would cause displacement, settlement or damage.

Water removed from excavations shall be disposed of in a manner to avoid endange

ring public health,
property and portions of work under construction or completed. Sumps, sedimentat
ion tanks, oil
separators, and other flow control devices shall be provided as required by Loca
l Authorities.
Settling tanks are to be provided to collect earth fines and other sediment from
pumped water before it
enters the discharge system. Tanks are to be cleaned out on a regular basis to e
nsure that only clear water
is discharged by the system.

The water pumped from the excavations or well points shall be conveyed to a disc
harge location approved
by the Local Authorities. Under no circumstances may water be disposed of in the
Municipality's foul
sewer system.

Stand-by equipment is to be provided on site, installed and available, for immed

iate operation if required to
maintain de-watering on a continuous basis in event any part of the system becom
es inadequate or fails. If
de-watering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of de-wa
tering system, extra
equipment has to be installed at no additional cost to the Contract.
1.15 Site clearance
The site shall be given to the Main Contractor clear of all obstructions.
1.16 Blinding
The Contractor shall lay min. 100mm blinding to excavations generally as directe
d after inspection of the
excavations by the Engineer. Sand blinding shall be clean sand obtained from an
approved source, crushed
stone blinding shall be well graded from 10mm to dust and obtained from an appro
ved source, concrete
blinding shall be sulphate resisting concrete (1:2:4 mix) as specified in "Concr
ete Work" Section and on the
drawings.

The surface of the blinding shall be floated smooth to receive the building wate
rproofing system or
polythene sheeting in other areas.
1.17 Polythene Sheeting
Cover the whole of the area beneath concrete slabs, other than the raft foundati
on, and elsewhere directed by
the Engineer with polythene sheeting. The polythene shall be 1000 gauge nominal
weight 0-94 kg per sq
meter manufactured by a manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer.

The sheet shall be supplied in rolls and laid by rolling over the prepared base
at the levels and in the areas
shown on the drawings. Joints at the side or end of a sheet shall be 450mm wide
double welts made by
placing the edges together and folding over twice. The joints shall be prevented
from opening prior to
concreting by blocks placed at intervals on top of the joint.
The Contractor shall protect the sheets from damage during laying and subsequent
operations and shall
replace all damaged sheets to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.18 Bitumen treatment/protection
Unless shown otherwise, all surfaces of concrete or block work shall be painted
with 3 coats of bitumen.
This shall be cold applied by rollers to give a minimum thickness of 2mm to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.19 Protective membrane to U/G reinforced concrete structures
All surfaces of foundations, or where indicated on drawing shall be protected by
a proprietary waterproof
membrane system as described in Particular Specifications. The membrane is to be
specified and to be
protected by protective board to the approval of Engineer.
1.20 Depth of foundations
The foundations shall be the minimum depth below original ground level shown on
the drawings and soil
investigation report.
1.21 Anti-termite treatment
General
Work shall be carried out by a qualified specialist sub-contractor registered in
the UAE. The specialists subcontractors
shall be from the list of approved manufacturers / suppliers or equal approved.

The Sub-contractor shall be responsible for all the pre and post termite treatme
nt for the construction. The
Sub-contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for and provide all necessa
ry attendance to the Pest
Control Section, if required.

The Sub-contractor shall carry out the pre and post treatment work for anti-term
ite control to include the
whole of the site areas within the areas defined by the contract limit lines.
Scope of Works
The Contractor shall survey the sites before tendering to ascertain the nature a
nd extent of the work involved
for anti-termite treatment and any conditions and restrictions likely to affect
the execution of the works.
Work consequent upon treatment, but not included in the tender, is to be clearly
identified as such. The
Contractor shall ensure that the sites are adequately prepared before treatment
commences.

Prior to application of the treatment on site all chemical dilution samples and
computations shall be
submitted for approval with a copy of the submission furnished to the Engineer.

Samples of materials, chemical applicator and protective clothing and accessorie

s shall be provided together
with all necessary certificates for approval by the Engineer and Al Ain Municipa
lity, if required.
Samples shall not be incorporated in the works but kept intact for the duration
of the whole contract period
for purposes of comparison with the works carried-out. Samples from manufacturer
s shall be in the
manufacturers packaging sealed and unopened.

A work program shall be prepared taking into account and coordinating all other
related works and shall be
submitted for the Engineer s approval.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit a list of chemicals and their respective manufac
turers technical literature.
The Sub-Contractor shall submit a Method Statement for carrying out the works to
the Engineer for approval
and the works shall be carried out as per the method statement.

The Sub-Contractor shall keep all the working areas clean and shall keep all che
micals and tools/machineries
in a safe place each day after works are completed.
Clear warning notices shall be posted at the entrance to the site during treatme
nt operations and immediately
following completion. The sign shall show the name of the pesticide being utiliz
ed and date of application.

Materials shall include the supply of all chemicals, water, tools, equipment, ma
chineries, protective clothing
and emergency items and clear procedures to be followed for health and safety in
case of accident including
all necessities to complete the application effectively and safely.
The Contractor shall prepare as built drawings for walls, floor slabs and other
areas treated with residual
chemicals and shall submit 4 copies of the drawings to the Engineer, together wi
th Contractors guarantee
certificate.

The Contractor shall provide 4 copies of all documents for submission to the Eng
ineer as required, unless
specified otherwise.
Procedures
All pre and post termite treatment works shall be in accordance with the best in
ternational pest control
practices, paying special attention to safety of workers carrying out the works
and all staff and personnel
within the construction site.

Specifically, all chemicals, equipment, machineries used or supplied and all wor
kmanship shall be in
accordance with the appropriate practices of the British Pest Control Associatio
n (BPCA) and the National
Pest Control Association of the United States of America (NPCA) and the related
requirement of the World
Pest Control Organization (WPCO) and the European Community Council (ECC) guidan
ce directives on the
use of pesticides, unless otherwise approved.

The Sub-Contractor shall note that the Engineer does not have suitably qualified
and certified personnel to
make any recommendations on the use and choice of pesticides and such responsibi
lity shall remain solely
with the Sub-Contractor.

The Sub-Contractor shall obtain the advice of a suitably qualified person prior
to the use of any pesticide.
Such advice shall be taken into account in all respects and full details and rec
ommendations shall be
provided to the Engineer prior to the application of pesticides on the site.

The Sub-Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the choice, application and
storage of any pesticides
utilized for the works all of which shall conform to standard practices recogniz
ed by BPCA and/or NPCA or
as approved.

The Contractor shall use a qualified and locally certified technician and operat
or to apply the pesticides in
accordance with all local and international legislation.

The Contractor shall give the Engineer 3 weeks minimum notice on the proposed ap
plication of pesticides,
giving details of the purpose, chemical dose rate, method of application, propos
ed application dates, and 4
copies of the appropriate current product information.

The Contractor shall keep full and accurate records of all pesticides used. Reco
rds after each application and
a summary recorded at the end of the contract shall be provided to Engineer.

The Contractor shall dispose of all empty containers and unwanted chemicals incl
uding all surplus diluted
tanked mixture, to an off-site location approved by the Engineer.

All areas shall be made clean during and after work operations. No chemicals, di
luted solutions or equipment
shall be left unattended during and after working hours.
During lunch break, works are to be secured and supervised by visible sign board
s which shall be provided
before and after chemical applications. Contractor to prepare and submit pestici
de work safety program.
This program shall include the following:

Advise as to how pesticides can harm human beings, animals, vegetation. Instruct
ion, training and
supervision of pesticide workers.
Emergency care if an accident occurs.
Medical supervision routine following an accident or illness. Special instructio
ns restricting employees
handling toxic pesticides.
Personal hygiene.
Protective clothing.
Safety equipment (personal).
Safety requirements for pesticides application equipment. Maintenance of pestici
de application equipment.
Safety of field workers, general public, animals, vegetation and property. Prote
ction of the soil and
environment.

Copies of the following certificates shall be provided to the Engineer for accep
tance of the chemicals to be
utilized and a method statement for applications.

Certificate from any of the Emirates within the UAE to certify that the said app
licator company is an
authorized and certified pest control contractor.

Importation, transportation and any certification for all chemicals and material
s required by national and/or
local laws, unless otherwise approved.

Chemical certificate confirming the certified analysis of the chemicals to be us

ed and listing the proportions
of the various ingredients, as declared by the original supplier/manufacturer an
d by the approved testing
laboratory.
All pre and post termite treatment applications shall be carried out in appropri
ate season and weather
conditions.

If during the application of chemicals the weather condition changes making cond
itions unfavourable to
works being carried-out, the contractor should immediately stop the works and ap
ply the contingency plan
approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination of all pre and post termite tre
atment applications in relation
to the carrying-out of associated works on site.

Such co-ordination must be approved in advance by the Engineer.

Chemicals shall be stored in a separate locked storeroom with proper ventilation

system approved by the
Engineer.
Contamination of materials due to contact with other materials or alien substanc
es shall be avoided.
Contaminated material shall be immediately removed from site. Material detriment
al to humans, animals and
plants shall be stored separately.

Storage areas and protection of stored materials shall be agreed with the Engine
er in advance of the works.

During lunch break, the works are to be secured and supervised by a qualified me
mber of the staff.
Visible sign boards are to be provided before and after each application.

The Sub-Contractor shall submit a written, 10-year guarantee made out to the Own
er and jointly signed and
sealed by the main Contractor, guaranteeing safety of the building and surroundi
ng areas against termite
infestations.
2 PILING WORKS
2.1 Scope of work
The works comprise the construction of reinforced concrete piles in the position
s shown on the drawings.
2.2 Standards
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, and IBC-UPC.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

Safety regulations throughout the piling operations shall comply with the standa
rds previously listed.
2.3 Guarantee
The Contractor shall guarantee unconditionally in writing that each and every pi
le installed will safely
carry the maximum working load as stated on the drawings. In addition he shall g
uarantee that a load of at
least 1.5 times the working load can be carried by each and every pile without p
rogressive settlement or
creep.

It should be noted that the performance of satisfactory pile tests on the site (
as specified below) does not
release the Contractor from responsibility, liability or consequence arising in
the future due to unsatisfactory
performance of the foundations which can be attributed to the piles
2.4 Spoil and rubbish removal
The Contractor shall include in his work for the prompt removal from site of any
spoil removed from the pile
bores and upon completion of the works shall clear away all spoil and rubbish an
d leave the site clean and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer

Disposal of drilling mud is the responsibility of the Contractor. It must not be

deposited into the local
drainage system etc. The ground water may be removed by passing through settleme
nt tanks and disposed in
accordance with local authority regulations and to the approval and satisfaction
of the Engineer.
2.5 Setting out
The Contractor will be responsible for setting out the base lines and pile posit
ions and establishing datum
and cut off levels as shown on the Engineer's drawings.

A maximum tolerance of 50 mm in any plan direction may be permitted in the posit

ion of any pile. The
maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the vertical is 1 in 100.
If these tolerances are
exceeded, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of and providing the
means of rectifying the error.
The contractor shall propose a method of overcoming the error to the satisfactio
n of the Engineer

Forcible corrections to piles shall not be made.

2.6 Records
The Contractor shall keep full records of each pile for daily submission and app
roval of the Engineer. An
approved format for these records will be agreed before commencement of the pili
ng works.
2.7 Pile length
All piles shall be founded at a common level and any significant variations are
to be notified to the
Engineer before proceeding.
2.8 Cut-off
All piles shall be terminated in faultless concrete at the cut-off level specifi
ed on the drawings, with a
deviation of +200 mm -0.00 mm. The Contractor will be responsible for any additi
onal cost in cutting
down or making up piles outside this tolerance or for replacing defective concre
te up to cut-off level.
2.9 Concrete
Concrete and reinforcement for piles shall fully comply with the requirements of
the appropriate section of
this specification together with the following extra clauses. The minimum cement
content for piles to be 400
kg/cu.m with a maximum 0.45 w/c ratio.

Concrete shall be placed in the piles using an approved tremie system. Where pil
es are concerted in water or
bentonite mud a tremie pipe must be used.

All piles shall contain a minimum of 6 number longitudinal bars with suitable he
lical binding. The bars are to
project a minimum of 1.0 m, as specified on the approved drawings, above the spe
cified cut-off level. The
actual quality and size of the reinforcement bars is to be specified by the Cont
ractor and is to be dependent
upon the loading conditions on the pile shaft.
2.10 Piling
The Contractor shall supply full details when tendering of the type and size of
pile offered, the standards
of control to be used and how the calculation and checking of the load bearing c
apacity and settlement of
the piles will be carried out.

The Contractor shall supply for approval all relevant details of the method of p
iling and the proposed plant
to be used. Any alternative designs to that shown on the tender drawings may be
submitted at tender for
the Engineer's consideration and approval.
Reinforced Bored Cast in-situ Piles
Bored piles shall be formed by boring in an approved method to a minimum of 1 me
ter or two diameters
(whichever is the greater) into a suitable foundation stratum as defined by the
Site investigation report and
approved by the Engineer. Throughout boring, the hole will be fully lined with a
steel casing to ensure whole
stability and avoid loss of or loosening of ground between piles. Where requeste
d by the Engineer any cores
recovered, arisings from boring will be laid out for examination.
On completion of boring, the pile base shall be thoroughly cleaned of all slurry
and loose material in a
manner to be approved by-the Engineer. The reinforcement cage will then be.place
d with appropriate spacers
to ensure that a minimum steel cover of 70 mm (or other cover as directed) is ma
intained throughout the pile.
Concrete will be placed by tremie pipe to the base of the hole and the tremie wi
ll be withdrawn so that its
base is never less than 1 meter below the top of the concrete until concreting i
s completed.

Lining casings may be withdrawn on completion of concreting or during concreting

provided that its base
is never less than 1 meter below the top of the concrete. Delays between adding
individual batches of
concrete to the pile shall not be greater than 15 minutes.

The Contractor shall ensure that when all piles are trimmed back to sound and un
contaminated concrete,
the trimmed level shall not be below the specified finished cut- off level as sh
own on the Engineer's
drawings.
Reinforced Bored Piles by Continuous Flight Auger Method
The construction of piles by the CFA method may only be adopted by prior agreeme
nt with the engineer.
This method may only be used on low rise projects.

During uncased boring with continuous flight auger , the feed forward and speed
(revolutions per minute)
are to be adjusted according to the soil conditions in a way that the excavation
of soil will be limited to a
quantity that the lateral support of the uncased borehole wall will be ensured .
While withdrawing the CFauger,
the auger has to be rotated in the same direction as during drilling into the so
il or has to be withdrawn
without rotation

The number of auger rotations has to be automatically recorded in dependence to

the depth. The records
are to be part of the complete pile records.

The system and equipment used must ensure that neither water nor soil can enter
the hollow stem of the
CF -auger during drilling.
The inclination of piles should not exceed 6 degrees (10:1)

The installation of the reinforcement cage after concreting may be achieved by v

ibration. Concrete
cover and location of the reinforcement cage should be assured. The reinforcemen
t cage should be
installed immediately after pouring concrete. The volume of concrete poured must
be checked to ensure
that it is equal to the excavated volume to be occupied by the pile. In the even
t of significant discrepancies
in these two values the matter must be investigated to establish the cause and n
ecessary action immediately
taken. In all events Al-Ain Municipality must be informed and approval of correc
tive measures must be
obtained prior to effecting repairs and alterations.
Reinforced Cast in situ Driven Piles
These types of pile may be used with the prior agreement of the engineer.
2.11 Pile test
A minimum of two non-working piles shall be installed and tested to a maximum ca
pacity of
2.5 times the working load.

Working piles shall be tested to 1.5 times the working load.

The selection of the working load test piles shall be made by the Engineer and t
he Municipality Engineers.

Pile testing procedures shall be in accordance with BS 8004.

2.12 Integrity test
All piles shall be integrity tested.
2.13 Drilling Fluid
Bentonite as supplied to the site and prior to mixing shall be in accordance wit
h specification DFCP 4 of the
Oil Companies Materials Association.

A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacturer of the b

entonite powder, showing the
properties of each consignment delivered to the site. This certificate shall be
made available to the Engineer
on request. The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent visc
osity range (in centipoises)
and the gel strength range (in newtons per square meter) for solids in water.

Bentonite shall be mixed thoroughly with clean fresh water to make a Suspension
which will maintain the
suitability of the pile excavation for the period necessary to place the water u
sed in mixing the bentonite
suspension and of the suspension when supplied to the borehole, shall be not low
er that 5(C

Where saline or chemically contaminated groundwater occurs, special precautions

shall be taken to modify
the bentonite suspension or prehydrate the bentonite in fresh water so as to ren
der it suitable in all respects
for the construction of piles.

The frequency of testing drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling
shall be proposed by the
Contractor prior to the commencement of the work. The frequency may subsequently
be varied as required,
depending on the consistency of the results obtained.

Control tests shall be carried out on the bentonite suspension, using suitable a
pparatus. The density of
freshly mixed bentonite suspension shall be measured daily as a check on the qua
lity of the suspension
being formed. The measuring device shall be calibrated to read to within 0.005 g
/ml. Tests to determine
density, viscosity shear strength and pH value shall be applied to bentonite sup
plied to the pile boring. For
average soil conditions the results shall generally be within the ranges stated
in Table 1.

The tests shall be carried out until a consistent working pattern has been estab
lished, account being taken
of the mixing process, any blending of freshly mixed bentonite suspension and pr
eviously used
bentonite suspension and any process which may be used to remove impurities from
previously used
bentonite suspension. When the results show consistent behavior, the tests for s
hear strength and pH value
may be discontinued, and test to determine density and viscosity shall be carrie
d out as agreed with the
Engineer.

In the event of a change in the established working pattern, tests for shear str
ength and pH value shall be
reintroduced for a period if required.
Property to be measured
Range of results at 20' C
Test method
Density
Less than 1.10 g/ml
Mud density balance
Viscosity
30 - 90 s or less than 20 Cp

Marsh cone method Fann

viscometer *

Shear strength
(10 minute gel strength)
1.4 - 10 N/m2
or
4-40 N/m2
Shear meter
pH
9.5 - 12
pH indicator
paper strips or electrical pH meter

Drilling fluid properties

Where the Fann viscometer is specified, the fluid sample should be screened by a
number 52 sieve (300 mu)
prior to testing.
3 CONCRETE WORKS
3.1 Concrete
Codes of practice
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities requirements.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

Materials
Except where otherwise specified all materials for which British Standard Specif
ications exist shall
conform to the latest revised editions of such specifications as published at th
e date of tender.
Cement
Except where otherwise required, cement shall be locally manufactured controlled
fineness ordinary
Portland cement complying with BS 12 or ASTM C 150 Type 1.

The source of supply of cement shall be subject to the Engineer's approval and t
he Contractor shall at all
times furnish the manufacturer's certificates and proof that the required specif
ication has been complied
with together with a note of the date of manufacturer, certified by an independe
nt agency. The
Engineer shall have the power to reject a part of the whole of any consignment o
f cement if the
considers it to be unsuitable for use in the works.

The chemical composition of the cement shall comply with the standards as stipul
ated above an in addition
with the following requirements.

. Tricalcium Aliminate (C3A) content shall be within the range of 4% to 12%.

. The total lime (CaO) contents shall not exceed 70% unless agreed otherwise by
the Engineer.
. The total alkali content shall not exceed 0.6%.

One brand as approved by the Engineer shall be used throughout the works unless
otherwise authorized by
the Engineer in writing.
Aggregates for Concrete
General
Aggregates for concrete shall consist of naturally occurring materials complying
with the requirements of
fine and coarse aggregates of BS 882 and as specified herein, except that for Cl
ass D concrete all-in
aggregate within the grading limits of Table 3 of BS 882 may be used. Approval o
f aggregate will not
prevent subsequent rejection if results of subsequent tests of not indicate comp
liance with the specified
requirements. The properties specified for aggregates in below points Nos. ii, i
ii & IV shall be for aggregates
form individual sources. The use of beach sand in mixes for reinforced concrete
is prohibited. The frequency
of testing aggregates shall be one test each 50 m or different batch of aggregate
s received at site. The CI test
shall be as per BS 812 (Part 117), S03 as per BS 812 (118) and water absorption
test as per BS 812
Fine Aggregate
The grading of fine aggregate shall be within the limits of Class C or M, table
5 BS 882: 1983 and the
percentage by weight passing BS 410 test sieve 300 m shall not be in excess of 3
0%.

The amount of deleterious material shall not exceed the following limits when de
termined by the ASTM
standard test stated below.

Clay Lumps & friable particles 1% by weight ASTM C142 Coal, Lignite & shells 1%
by weight ASTM
C123

Fine aggregate shall satisfy the requirements of ASTM C33 with regard to organic
impurities, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C40 and C87. Local sands contain aggressive salts, and it i
s essential to test the fine
aggregate to ascertain that the maximum quantity of acid soluble chlorides shall
not exceed 0.06% by weight
of fine aggregate and the maximum quantity of acid soluble sulphate shall not ex
ceed 0.4% by weight of fine
aggregate. The fine aggregates shall be washed with fresh water complying with B
S 3148 (1980) Unwashed
sand shall not be allowed under any circumstances for any part of the works.

When fine aggregate is subjected to five cycles of the sodium Sulphate Soundness
Test. ASTM C88, the loss
shall not exceed 10% of weight.

Fine aggregate shall be of such uniformity that the fineness modulus as defined
in AASHTO M6 shall not
vary more than 0.20 either way from finest modulus of the representative samples
used in the mix design.

The sand equivalent for fine aggregate (AASHTO T176) shall be a minimum of 70%.
The water absorption
of fine aggregate shall not exceed 2% (BS 812)
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate shall be prepared as single size aggregate and blended to produ
ce normal size grading. The
combined grading of coarse aggregate shall be within the limits given in Table 1
of BS 882 for nominal size
of graded aggregate 20mm to 5mm.
The proportion of soft and friable particles in coarse aggregate shall not excee
d 1% when tested in
accordance with ASTM C142. The maximum quantity of acid soluble chlorides (C1) s
hall not exceed 0.03%
weight of coarse aggregate. The maximum quantity of acid soluble sulphate (SO3)
shall not exceed 0.4% by
weight of coarse aggregate. (BS 812 part 118). No organic matter of any nature s
hall be permissible to be
contained by the aggregates such as wood, paper, plastic, or any other matter. T
he standard test method for
organic matters shall be as per BS 1377 Test 8.

Combined Aggregate in Concrete

For the combined grading, the quantities of acid soluble salts shall not exceed
the following in the concrete
mix.

Chlorides (CI) - Max. 0.3% by weight of cement (OPC) and max 0.06% for SRC Sulph
ates (So3) - Max 4%
by weight of cement (including the sulphate in the cement)
Potential Aggregate-Cement Reactivity
If so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out petrographic anal
ysis in accordance with ASTM
33 and C295 on all aggregates proposed for use. Arising from such analysis the E
ngineer may require the
Contractor to perform further tests in accordance with ASTM C286 and BRE Digest
No. 35; also in
accordance with ASTM C227 and C586 if the Engineer so decides after his examinat
ion of the results of the
proceeding tests. In the event that tests in accordance with ASTM C227 are calle
d for, the cement used in the
test shall have an alkali content (expressed as sodium oxide + 0.658 potassium o
xide) greater than 0.8% by
weight of 2.25 to 1.0. Depending on the results obtained the Engineer may decide
to limit the alkali content
(Na20 and K20) of the cement to 0.6%.
Water
Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the engineer only water form portable
supply system may be used
for mixing concrete and other products containing cement. Similarly only portabl
e water conforming to BS
3148 (1980) may be used for curing purposes. No other source of water shall be a
llowed to be used for any
of the above purposes. The PH requirements of water shall be from 7 - 9. The ino
rganic impurities in water
shall not exceed the following:

Content
Property
Chlorides
600 mg/liters
Sulphates
500 mg/liters
Total dissolved solids
2000 mg/liters
Alkali Carbonate and Bicarbonate
1000 mg/liters

Water chemical properties

Admixtures
No admixture of any type shall be allowed in preparation of concrete unless agre
ed by the Engineer in
writing. In case any admixture are used these should be silicates based (sodium
or calcium or magnesium)
pore blocking type to produce water proof, impervious and dense concrete. The ad
mixture shall be generally
to ASTM-C-260 + C494 standards. The rates and method of application shall be as
instructed by the
manufacturer. Admixture containing chlorides salts will not be permitted under a
ny circumstances.
Reinforcement for Concrete
Steel reinforcement shall generally be one of the following types:

. Hot rolled mild, medium or high yield steel smooth round or deformed bars comp
lying with BS 4449 or
similar approved standard.
. Cold twisted bars complying with BS 4482 or similar approved standard.
. Steel fabric reinforcement complying with BS 4483 or similar approved standard
.

In case any other type of reinforcement is required, it shall comply with the re
quirements of the particular
specification.

All reinforcement shall be free of loose rust and mill scale and any coating suc
h as oil, clay, paint etc.,
which might impair the bond with the concrete. Steel reinforcement shall be stor
ed in clean conditions
and shall be protected from damage at all times. It shall be clean and free of l
oose rust, dirt, mud, loose
mill scale, paint, oil or all other foreign substances at the time of fixing in
position and subsequent
concreting.

Manufacturer's test certificates for all classes of reinforcement shall be suppl

ied when required. Specimens
sufficient for three tensile tests and three cold bending tests per ten tons of
bars or fraction thereof and for
each different size of bar shall be sampled under the supervision of the Archite
ct. Testing shall be in
accordance with BS 4449 or other approved standard and batches shall be rejected
if the average results
for each batch are not in accordance with the specification.

The Contractor shall cut and bend bars to BS 4466 (or ACI (SP-66) and to schedul
e, if provided or
unless otherwise instructed by the Architect. Straight sections of bars must be
kept out of winding. The
internal radius of bends shall in no case be less than two times the diameter of
the bar. Great care is to be
taken to bend stirrups and blinders separately and to the sizes shown.

All bars will be bent cold on approved machines, and at temperatures in the rang
e of 5C to 100C.
Lengthening of bars by welding, and re-bending of incorrectly bent bars will not
be permitted, except
where requested by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise allowed for in the particular specification splices in reinforc

ing bars shall be formed by
lapping. Such laps in bars in any member shall be staggered. Except as otherwise
indicated on the
drawings, the minimum overlap of lapped splices shall be 40 bar diameters or 300
mm whichever is
greater. No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where described in
the Contract or where
approved by the Engineer.

Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the position shown in the Contra
ct. Unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer, all bar intersections shall be tied together and the
ends of the tying wire shall be
turned into the main body of the concrete. 1.2mm diameter stainless steel wire s
hall be used throughout.
Cover Blocks (Buried Concrete Surfaces)
Concrete cover blocks required for ensuring that the reinforcement is correctly
positioned, shall be as small
as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptable to the Engineer
, and designed so that they
will not overturn when the concrete is placed. They shall be made of concrete wi
th 10mm maximum
aggregate size to produce the same strength as the adjacent concrete. Tying wire
complying with the
requirements of above topic e last paragraph shall be cast in the block for the
purpose of tying it to the
reinforcement.

Cover Blocks (Exposed Concrete Surfaces)

Concrete cover blocks required for ensuring that the reinforcement is correctly
positioned, shall be as small
as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptable to the
Engineer, and designed so that they will not overturn when the concrete is place
d. They shall be made of
asbestos cement, factory produced and of the same strength as the adjacent concr
ete. Tying wire complying
with the requirements of above topic e last paragraph shall be cast in the block
for the purpose of tying it to
the reinforcement.

Storage of material
Cement
The cement shall be stored in a weather proof shed used exclusively for this pur
pose. The shed shall be large
enough to allow proper aeration and effectual separation of the various consignm
ents, the old consignments
being used before the latter ones. Cement shall not be stored on site for more t
han 21 days; after this it must
be removed from the site at the Contractor's expense. Alternatively, the cement
may be stored in a Silo, the
design of which has been approved by the Engineer.

All cement received shall be subjected to test at a frequency of one test each 5
0m or at change of source of
supply.
Aggregates
The aggregates are to be stored on a concrete slab in such a way that contaminat
ion from other materials and
inter-mixing of the various grading will be prevented. The aggregate shall be de
posited in a way that will
prevent segregation through dropping on to the peak of a high heap.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that for some of the design mixe
s specified it may be
necessary in order to obtain the required cube strength with minimum cement cont
ent to store the aggregate
in different sizes so that they can be combined in the correct proportion at the
mixer.

Reinforcement
The reinforcement should be stored clear of the ground and should be protected f
rom contamination by other
materials.
Testing of Materials
(All tests to be carried out by an independent approved Lab.)

The costs of all tests required under this clause are to be met by the Contracto
r, whether the test results
show the materials to be satisfactory for the work or not.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer sufficient quantity of material prop
osed to be used for the
works, together with a list of suppliers to be employed. The Engineer's consent
in wiring shall be obtained
to all such samples and source of supply before any concreting work is put in ha
nd and no change
shall subsequently be made without the Engineer's approval. The Engineer shall h
ave access to all
sources of supply for the purpose of inspecting and taking samples of any materi
als which will be later
delivered to the site.
Cement
Cement will be tested at an approved testing station. Samples are to be taken fr
om each delivery of
cement as directed and conveyed by the Contractor to a testing station to the ap
proval of the Engineer, or
as specified.
Aggregate
All aggregates shall be tested by an approved testing laboratory at the beginnin
g of the work and for every
50m of aggregate or before any change is made in the source of supply during the
progress of the work
and the Engineer shall have approved the results of such tests before the prelim
inary test cubes are made.

The size of the sample shall be as required by the testing laboratory but in the
 absence of specific
instruction two samples of not less than 12 kg.of fine aggregate and 50 kg. of co
urse aggregate shall
be quartered down from representative bulk samples for each test. Each sample sh
all clearly and durably
labeled to give the name of the supplier and of the pit of quarry and one of eac
h pair of samples shall be
sent to the laboratory for testing and one retained on the site for reference.
Reinforcement
Generally the manufacturer's test certification should be obtained with each del
ivery of reinforcement
but the Engineer reserves the right to request tests from an independent testing
station from time to time
or from every batch of steel delivered to site.
Testing Equipment
The Contractor shall provide:-
. Sufficient 150mm. cast iron cube moulds to enable him to carry out the require
ments of this specification.
. BS Slump Cone, base plate and tamping rod.
. Maximum and minimum thermometers, also thermometer to measure temperature of c
oncrete.
. Suitable graduated measuring tubes for measuring the moisture content of fine
aggregate.
. Suitable weighing scales

Concrete Mix Design & Concrete Mixing

The concrete to be used in each part of the works shall be of the class describe
d in the drawing and
shall conform to the requirements of the grade as set out in the table, unless o
therwise specified.

Mix for structural concrete shall be designed by the Ready-mix Sub-contractor. T

he grade of concrete shall
be as shown on the drawings and as denoted by the minimum 28 day works cube stre
ngth and the
maximum size of aggregate. Cement for blinding and mass concrete below ground le
vel shall be
sulphate resisting. Cement for reinforced concrete shall be ordinary Portland ce
ment, unless otherwise
specified or approved by Engineer on the basis of Soil Investigation Report or a
ny other related
information.

Grade of Concrete
A
B
C
D
E
Characteristic Strength 28 days N/mm2
40
35
25
15
60
Mixes to be designed for a mean strength (N/mm)
45
40
30
20
68
Slump Max (with Plasticizer or Super-plasticizer
100
100
100
120
120
Max water cement ratio
0.4
0.45
0.55
0.65
0.35
Minimum Cement (kg/m)
400
370
300
250
450
Nominal Maximum Size of aggregate
20mm
20mm
20mm
20mm
20mm

Concrete mix designs

For pump able concrete, plasticizers / Super-plasticizer may be used in particul
ar cases to increase the
work-ability. As there is likelihood of higher strengths due to their use, the r
equirements of average of
four cubes and that of an individual test result have to be correspondingly incr
eased and those figures
shall be agreed upon at the trial mix stage.

7-day strength is 0.8 of 28 days strength.

All materials are to generally conform to following standards:-

material
Standard
Cement
BS 12
Water
BS 3148 (Also as specified for concrete works)
Aggregates
BS 882
Admixtures
BS 5075 Part I

Applicable standards concrete materials

All concrete mixes are to be designed according to requirements of the above tab
le.

The concrete shall be mixed by machine to a uniform color and consistency before
placing. The quantity of
water used shall not exceed that required to produce a concrete with sufficient
work ability to be placed and
compacted in the required location.

The concrete shall be compacted by mechanical vibration.

Trial Mixes
No structural concrete shall be placed in the works until the relevant mix has b
een approved by the Engineer.
Generally for the major concrete only an approved ready-mix supply is to be used
.
For minor concreting sections site mix will be accepted but must comply with thi
s specification. The
Contractor shall, at least 35 days before the commencement of concreting, have t
rial mixes prepared in a
laboratory to be approved by the Engineer. The concrete from each mix shall be t
ested in accordance with
Clause 4.1.6 and must satisfy the strength requirements of Clause 4.1.5.

When the mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the proportions,
the original source of the
cement and aggregates, or in the type, size and grading zone of the latter witho
ut the consent of the Engineer
who may require further tests to be made.

The Engineer may also require practical tests to be made on the site by filling
trial moulds to confirm the
suitability of the mix for the works. In these tests, the type of plant used for
mixing, the method of
compaction used, and the form-work face to the mould shall be similar in all res
pects to those intended for
use in the works.

When the Contractor intends to purchase factory-made precast concrete units, the
Engineer may dispense
with trial mixes and laboratory tests, provided that evidence is given which sat
isfies him that the factory
regularly produces concrete which complies with the Specification. The evidence
shall include details of mix
proportions, water-cement ratio, work-ability and strengths obtained at 7 and 28
days.
Mixing Concrete (for minor elements)
. The weighing and water-dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order
. Their accuracy shall
be maintained within the tolerances described in BS 1305 and checked against acc
urate weights and
volumes when required by the Engineer.
. The mass of cement and each size of aggregate indicated by the mechanisms empl
oyed shall be within a
tolerance of 28% of the respective mass per batch agreed by the Engineer. The ma
ss of the fine and
coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained in the
m. The water to be added
to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free water contained in the fine
coarse aggregates, which
shall be determined by the Contractor by a method approved by the Engineer immed
iately before
mixing begins and further as the Engineer requires.
. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, concrete shall be mixed in a batch ty
pe mixer manufactured in
accordance with BS 1305 or in a batch type mixer, a specimen of which has been t
ested in accordance
with BS 3963 and having a mixing performance within the limits of Table 6 of BS
1305 Where
appropriate the batch capacity, conform to the details furnished in accordance w
ith the requirements of
BS 3963 for the mix which corresponds most closely to the mix proportions being
used. The mixing
blades of pan mixers shall be maintained within the tolerances specified by the
manufacturer of the
mixer and the blades shall be replaced when it is no longer possible to maintain
the tolerances by
adjustment.
. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly
cleaned before any
fresh concrete is mixed, and unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, the next b
atch of concrete
through the mixer shall contain only two-thirds of the normal quantity of coarse
aggregate. Mixing plant
shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of cement to another.
. The Contractor shall ensure that the constituent materials of the concrete are
sufficiently cool to prevent
the concrete from stiffening in the interval between its discharge from the mixe
r and compaction in its
final position.

Ready-Mixed Concrete (for all major concrete pours and elements)

. Ready-mixed concrete as defined in BS 5238, batched off the site, is to be use
d for the works but must
comply with all requirements of the Contract.
. The concrete shall be carried in purpose-made agitations, operating continuous
ly, or truck mixers. The
concrete shall be compacted and in its final position within 2 hours of the intr
oduction of cement to the
aggregates, unless a longer time is agreed by the Engineer. The time of such int
roduction shall be
recorded on the delivery note together with the right of the constituents of eac
h mix.
. When truck-mixed concrete is used, water shall be added under supervision at t
he central batching plant
but in no circumstances shall water be added in transit or at site.
. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer, truck mixer units and their mixing an
d discharge performance
shall comply with the requirements of BS 4251 Mixing shall continue for the numb
er and rate of
revolutions recommended in accordance with Item 9 in Appendix B of BS 4251 or, i
n the absence of the
manufacturer's instructions, mixing shall continue for not less than 100 revolut
ions at a rate of not less
than 7 revolutions per minute.

Precautions against High Temperatures

When the rate of evaporation of surface moisture from concrete is expected to ap
proach 1 kg/m per hour
or when the shade air temperature is 35C and rising, precautions shall be taken,
including the following:

Fig.1108 - effect of concrete and air temperatures, relative humidity, and wind
velocity on the rate of
evaporation of surface moisture from concrete.

. Dampening the forms.

. Reducing the concrete temperature to the lowest practical level by procedures
such as:

i. Shading the aggregate

ii. Cooling the mixing water before use and/or adding flaked ice.
iii. Screening the mixing plant and transporting vehicles from wind, rain and su
n.
iv. erecting wind breaks ad sunshades at the concrete placing location
v. Reducing the time between the placing of the concrete and the start of curing
to the minimum
possible.
vi. Minimizing evaporation (particularly during the first few hours subsequent t
o placing the concrete)
by suitable means such as applying moisture by fog spraying.

All precautions to be taken shall be subject to the Engineer's approval and the
Contractor shall
demonstrate that all approved precautions are available for use prior to the Eng
ineer granting approval to
any concreting operation.

The temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 32C or shall be conc
rete mixed or
placed when the shade air temperature is 40C or above, or is expected to reach su
ch a level during
concreting, without special permission from the Engineer.
Supervision of Concrete Work
The Contractor is to employ a qualified competent person whose main duty is to s
upervise all stages in the
preparation and placing of the concrete work.

Concrete Mixes - See Engineers Drawing "General Notes" which shall supersede the
specified mix in the
general specifications, if so instructed by the Engineer.
Sampling and testing of concrete
General
The cost, including transport to the testing station of all cube tests required
under this specification, it
to be met by the Contractor, whether the test results are satisfactory or not. T
he Contractor shall keep a set
of at least six cube molds on site at all times, together with a standard slump
cone.
Sampling
Sampling shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 1881 (method of Test
ing Concrete) at a
testing station approved by the Engineer.

Concrete shall be sampled in two series as follows:

Series A - one batch shall be sampled at random from every 50 cu.m of concrete p
laced. For strength tests
one sample shall be taken from each batch samples, from which six test cubes sha
ll be made, three of which
shall be tested at 7 days and three at 28 days.

Series B - batches shall be sampled at the direction of the Engineer. For streng
th tests three independent
samples shall be taken from each batch to be sampled, from each of which one tes
t cube shall be made.
Test cbes shall test at 7 days as directed.

The work-ability tests, one sample shall be taken at an early stage the discharg
e of each batch sampled
at the direction of the Engineer.
Testing
Test cubes shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with BS 1881 Parts 101,
108,111 & 116.

Where a batch has been sampled for the purpose of determining the workability of
the concrete, one
test shall be made on each sample using one of the following tests in accordance
with BS 1881 (1983) and
shall be within the following limits of the values for the accepted trial mix:

Slum
25mm or 1/3 of the trial mix value whichever is the greater
Compacting Factor
0.03
`V-B' Consistometer
3 seconds or 15% of the average time for the trial mix whichever is the greater

Concrete workability
Load Tests
Tests loads shall generally be in accordance with relevant clauses of CP-110-197
2, or in such other
manner as may be directed by the Engineer.
Records
Each cube shall be clearly marked showing from which part of the structure the c
oncrete was obtained
and the mix proportions used, and this information must be recorded on the repor
t sheet. An accurate
record is to be kept on site of all test made, indemnifying them to the various
parts of the work.
Work not upto standard
If any of the works tests are not upto standard, the Engineer shall be entitled
t stop the work until the reason
has been investigated and steps taken to prevent further low results.

Any concrete carried out from a batch that afterward appears to be faulty will b
e liable to rejection and,
if so directed, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, cut and replace the de
fective work, or take such
other measures as may be allowed to prove by means of test loading, at his own e
xpense, that the
concrete is capable of safely withstanding the prescribed stresses.
 Quality control of concrete
General
The control of concrete quality shall satisfy the requirements of Clause 4.1.5 (
a to c).
Standard of Control
The Standard of control for structural concrete shall be such that not more than
5% of works concrete test
cubes shall have strengths which fall below the appropriate specified minimum st
rength. Compliance with
this standard of control shall be monitored by the methods described below.

As test results become available average values of test results and values of st
andard deviation shall be
determined on a continuing basis for Series A cubes taking 7 days and 28 days te
sts results separately, but in
each calculating the Standard deviation.

Until the relationship between 7 days strength and 28 days strength has been est
ablished to the satisfaction
of the Engineer, the assessment of control shall be based on the 28 day tests on
ly. The required standard of
control shall be deemed to have been attained if the average value of the 28 day
test results exceeds the
specified minimum strength as detailed on the drawing by not less than 1.64 time
s the standard deviation or
by 7.5N/mm for Grades C and above or by 5N/mm for Grade D, whichever is the greate
r. Where less than
40 tests results are available for the calculation of the standard deviation, th
e average of the 28 days test
shall exceed the specified minimum strength, by 15N/mm for Grades C and above or
10N/mm for
Grade D.

When the Engineer is satisfied that sufficient cube test results from Series A c
ubes are available to
establish the rates of 7 days to 28 days strengths the assessment of control as
described in paragraph
above shall also be based on the 7 days cube tests.
Series B Test Cubes
The strength requirements of each set of three test cubes of Series B shall be d
eemed to be satisfied if
none of the test results for the three cubes is below the required minimum stren
gth, or if the average
value of test results for the three cubes is not less than the required minimum
strength and the difference
between the greatest and the lowest value is not greater than 20% of the average
value. The required
minimum strength shall be the specified minimum strength at 28 days, as detailed
on the drawing,
multiplied by that ratio of 7 days and 28 days strength as determined.

In cases where the standard of control is being met but where anyone cube tested
has a strength less
than 85% of the required minimum strength, or where any set of three cubes in Se
ries B fails to satisfy the
strength requirements as specified, the Contractor shall take such remedial acti
on as the Engineer may
direct. This may require the cutting out of the concrete to which the cubes corr
espond together with any
sound concrete as the Engineer may consider necessary in order to effect a satis
factory repair, the whole
to be carried out at the Contractor's expense.
Additional Tests
Where a subsequent operation is dependent on the strength of the concrete in par
ticular portions of the work,
for example if the Contractor wishes to remove form-work in advance of the minim
um periods stated or to
subject the concrete to early loading, the Engineer will require additional cube
s to be made, stored, cured and
tested on the same basis as is specified for Series A & B in Clause 4.6 (b&c) to
check the concrete has
attained sufficient strength for the subsequent operation to proceed until he is
satisfied that the requisite
strength has been reached.
 Concrete placing
Before the concrete is actually placed in position the inside of the shuttering
or moulds should be inspected by
the Engineer or the Engineer's representative to see that it has been properly a
ssembled and fixed.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a weekly and a monthly concreting pr
ogram, which shall be
approved before the concreting work is executed.

The Contractor shall be responsible for giving 24 hours notice in writing to enab
le the Engineer to have a
representative present during concreting. In the event of the Contractor not giv
ing such notice, the Engineer
reserves the right to cut away such concrete as he may require to expose the rei
nforcement and the cost of
such cutting away shall be borne by the Contractor, even is the position of the
reinforcement is found to be
correct.

As soon as possible after the mixing and before the initial set has taken place,
the concrete shall be deposited
directly in the work from barrows, etc. carefully trimmed into position in layer
s and well rammed and
vibrated. Concrete shall not be thrown or dropped from a height exceeding 2m wit
hout the written authority of
the Engineer.

The concrete shall be worked up against the face of the previously deposited con
crete or against form-work or
molds with rods or long tampers. Very great importance is attached to the deposi
ting and through
consolidating of the concrete to ensure that it is homogenous and free from inte
rstices and that it is in contact
throughout with the forms or molds; all to the entire satisfaction of the Engine
er.

Care shall be taken not to disturb setting concrete by shocks, loading or otherw
ise before it has sufficiently
hardened. Any concrete that it not finally placed within half an hour of mixing
shall be discarded. Any
concrete which shows signs of initial setting before it is deposited in the form
s or molds shall not be used in
the work and shall be removed from the site or otherwise disposed of to the sati
sfaction of the Engineer.

Care shall be taken that at no time segregation of the concrete takes place.
Where concrete is laid on hardcore or any absorbing material, the surface shall
be thoroughly wetted before
the concrete is deposited.

Large areas of un-suspended floor construction shall be of alternate bay constru

ction. Each panel cast shall be
approximately square in plan and not exceeding an area of 20m for the un-reinforc
ed and 50m for the
reinforced slab.

For suspended floor construction generally the area may be increased to 100 m and
the sizes of bays to be
cast should be agreed with the Engineer. The sizes of bays may be increased at t
he discretion of the Engineer
depending on the conditions relating to each individual case.

The specifications for reinforced slabs may be considered to apply for reinforce
d wall construction generally,
but the length of panels to be cast may not exceed 8m.
Vibration
The Contractor shall have available sufficient mechanical vibrators of an approv
ed pattern (having not less
than 6000 vibrations per minute) to cope with the largest volume of concrete lik
ely to be poured at any one
time.

Spare machines shall be kept available over and above those normally used in the
works in case of a
breakdown. The type of vibrator should be applied in a number of places for shor
t periods rather than in one
place for a long time. The spacing between points of application should be such
that all parts of the section
are equally and fully compacted. The vibrations should be removed slowly from th
e compacted concrete.
The vibrations must not be used to cause the concrete to 'flow' horizontally alo
ng the work or cause bleeding
and placing of concrete shall therefore be kept sufficiently ahead of the vibrat
or to prevent this.

Under no circumstances should the vibrator be attached, or allowed to rest on re

inforcement not embedded in
the concrete.

Clamp on vibrators should be rigidly fixed to the formwork and their spacing sho
uld be determined in
relation to the size of the section so that all parts of the concrete are vibrat
ed equally.

Concrete shall not be subjected to vibration between 4 and 24 hours after compac
tion.
Accumulation of water on the surface due to any cause during compaction is to be
prevented as far as
possible and any such water is to be removed before further concrete is placed.

In case bleeding tests are instructed to be carried out by the Engineer these sh
all be as per ASTM-C-232.
Cutting away
The Contractor shall not cut away any concrete work without the written authorit
y of the Engineer and the
Contractor will be held responsible for the safety of any work damaged due to un
authorized cutting by
himself or his sub-contractors.
Waterproof concrete
Particular care shall be taken for all waterproof concrete to use an aggregate o
f the correct grading and the
proportion of fine and coarse aggregate are to be carefully adjusted to obtain t
he maximum density.

All waterproof concrete below ground and in direct contact with water shall incl
ude an admixture similar to
"Conmix Type W2" or Micro-Silica as directed by the Engineer.
Expansion Joints
Expansion joints to be formed in the position and details shown on drawings shal
l be filled with bitumen
impregnated fibre board to their full depth and width. The top portion of the fi
bre board shall be cut back for
a depth of at least 25mm and sealed with a proprietary sealant as specified incl
uding pre-priming of the
concrete surface against which sealant will be applied.

The ground floor slabs shall be generally separated from the tie beams by formin
g such a joint. Similar
treatment shall be ensured to separate the cement and screed from the surroundin
g block work concrete.
Form work
Definition
Form-work is the casing into which concrete is placed and/or its supports.
Materials
Form-work shall be constructed of timber, metal or other approved material; shal
l be so constructed as to
prevent any loss of grout or fine materials during concreting. The materials use
d shall be adequate to provide
the required surface finish to the concrete after removal and be sufficiently ri
gid to produce concrete surfaces
true and plane as required within a tolerance of 6mm in 4 m.
The contractor shall ensure that 50% of the timber used for construction (formwo
rk) shall be reused.
Design
Form-work shall be so designed and constructed that concrete can be properly pla
ced and thoroughly
compacted.

Form-work shall be firmly supported and adequately strutted, braced or tied. It

shall be capable of
adjustment to the lines and dimensions of the finished concrete, and it shall be
sufficiently strong to resist,
without excessive distortion, the pressure of concrete during its placing and co
mpaction, and other loads to
which it may be subjected. It shall not be liable to suffer distortion under the
influence of the weather.

When concrete is to be vibrated, special care shall be taken to ensure that the
form-work will remain stable
and the joints tight.

The Contractor shall, if required, supply to the Engineer drawings and calculati
on for the form-work he
proposes to use.
Deflection and Camber
The Contractor shall make allowance for any settlement or deflection of form-wor
k that is likely to arise
during construction so that the hardened concrete conforms accurately to the spe
cified line and level. The
Contractor shall also make allowance in the form-work for any camber and deflect
ion due to creep of the
concrete.
Supports
Form-work shall be constructed so that the form work to the sides of members can
be removed without
disturbing the soffit form-work or its supports.

Props and supports shall be designed to allow the form-work to be adjusted accur
ately to line and level to be
erected and removed in an approved sequence without injury to the concrete.

Supports shall be carried to construction, which is sufficiently strong to affor

d the necessary support without
injury to any portion of the structure. This may mean in some cases that it be c
arried down to the foundations
or other suitable base.

Props and bracing shall be provided for the temporary support of composite const
ruction where separately
specified.
Joints and Edges
All joints in form-work shall be close fitting to prevent leakage of grout from
the concrete.

At construction joints form-work shall be tightly secured against previously cas

t or hardened concrete to
prevent the formation of stepping or ridges in the concrete.
Form-work shall be constructed to provide straight and true angles, arises or ed
ges. Where chamfers are
shown on the drawings, the fillets shall be accurately cut to size to provide a
smooth and continuous
chamfer.

Form-work panels shall have true edges to permit accurate alignment at sides and
provide a clean line at
construction joints in the concrete.

Form-work panels shall be fixed with their joints either vertical or horizontal,
unless otherwise specified.
Ties
The material and position of any ties passing through the concrete shall be to t
he Engineer's approval.
Except where corrosion of a metal tie is unimportant it shall be possible to rem
ove a tie so that no part
of it remaining embedded in the concrete shall be nearer to the finished surface
of the concrete than the
specified thickness of cover to the reinforcement. Any holes left after the remo
val of ties shall be filled
with concrete or mortar of approved composition.
Sundries
Form-work shall be provided to the top surface of concrete where the slope or th
e nature of the work requires
it.

Provision shall be made for forming holes and chases for services and for buildi
ng in pipes, conduits and
other fixings shown on the drawings.
Cleaning and Treatment of Form-work
All rubbish, chippings, shavings, sawdust and dirt shall be removed from the int
erior of the form-work
before concrete is placed. The form-work to be in contact with the concrete shal
l be cleaned and watered and
treated with a suitable mold oil of approved composition. Care shall be taken th
at oil or composition is kept
from contact with the reinforcement or with concrete at any construction joints.

Retarding agents shall not be used except with the permission of the Engineer. F
orm-work shall be
thoroughly cleaned after each use.
Striking or Removal of Form-work
All form-work shall be removed without shock or vibration that might damage the
concrete. Before the soffit
and props are removed the surface of the concrete shall be exposed where necessa
ry in order to ensure that
the subjected at the time of striking.

The form-work to vertical surfaces such as walls, columns and sides of beams may
be removed after 12-24
hours in normal weather conditions, although care must be taken to avoid damage
to the concrete, especially
to arises and features. In cold weather a longer period may be necessary before
striking and protection
against frost should be afforded to exposed surfaces.
Where the early concrete strengths are not accurately known the following minimu
m times (in days) shall
elapse before removal of form-work.

Ordinary Portland cement

concrete
Rapid-Hardening Portland cement
concrete

Normal Weather (about 30C)

Normal Weather (about 30C)
Slabs (props left under)
3
2
Beam soffits (props left under)
7
4
Props to slabs
7 10
4
Props to beams
16
8

Striking or Removal of Form-work

Any days during which the average temperature is below 2C must be completely disr
egarded in calculating
the minimum time which must elapse before form-work is removed. The Contractor m
ust at such time obtain
the approval of the Engineer before striking any form-work.
The times given for the removal of props are based on the assumption that the to
tal live plus dead weight to
be supported at the time of removal is not more than one half the total design l
oads.
For horizontal members where the loading is a higher proportion of the total des
ign load these times may
need to be increased.

The Contractor shall be responsible for any injury to the concrete work and for
any damage caused by or
arising from the removal and striking of the forms and supports. Any advice perm
ission or approval given
by the Engineer relative to the removal and striking of forms and supports shall
not relieve the Contractor
from responsibility.
Plastered Surfaces
Where concrete surfaces are to be plastered the Contractor shall ensure that the
solution used on form-work
will not in any way reduce the adhesion of the plaster to the concrete.
Construction joint
Construction joints and day work joints are to be formed in positions approved b
y the Engineer, and vertical
stop boards must be provided to form these joints, with joggles wherever possibl
e; provision shall be made
from the reinforcement to run continuously through the joint without being tempo
rarily bent up or otherwise
displaced, and any concrete flowing past the joint is to be hacked off as soon a
s it is set. Once concreting has
started, it must be carried on to its natural completion or to properly construc
ted day work joints.

Before concreting is resumed, the surface of the concrete on the first side of t
he joint shall be thoroughly
cleaned, and the surface removed so as to expose the aggregate. The work require
d to achieve this will
depend on the age of the concrete, and may vary from hacking, if the concrete is
thoroughly hard to mist
spray on horizontal surfaces which can be dealt with whilst the concrete is stil
l green.

The new concrete shall be carefully worked up against the hardened surface of th
e joint. Where possible,
except in the case of exposed face work where color is important, the proportion
s of cement and fine
aggregate to coarse aggregate shall be increased in the batches to be placed aga
inst the joint.

The Contractor must at all times ensure that the supply of concrete is adequate
for pours up to a properly
constructed day work joint. If for any reason this is not achieved the Engineer
shall be entitled to stop the
work and reject the incomplete pour and the Contractor shall at his own expense
remove that concrete either
wholly or partly as directed by the Engineer and re-concrete to a newly prepared
day work joint.
Remedial treatment of surfaces
Any remedial treatment to surfaces shall be agreed with the Engineer following i
nspection immediately
after removing the form-work and shall be carried out without delay.

Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by th
e Engineer, shall be liable
to rejection.
No claim of any sort will be admissible for carrying out any such repair work.
Finishes
All concrete surfaces which are not exposed (sawn form-work) are to be left as s
truck from the mold,
except that any surfaces which are found to be honeycombed shall be made good as
soon as they have been
inspected by the Engineer.

The making good shall be done with a mixture of fine aggregate and cement in sim
ilar proportions to the
concrete, and as dry as possible.
All exposed concrete surfaces with wrought form-work are to have a rubbed finish
, which shall mean the
application of two rubs. The first rub shall be made after the removal of the fo
rms, the surface shall be
wetted and rubbed with a No. of 20 carborundum stone to remove all mold marks. T
he second rub shall be
made when finishing the concrete work when the surface shall again be wetted, an
d rubbed with a No. of 24
carborundum stone, excess paste being removed with a we brush.The final surface
shall be free from all
irregularities and discoloration and shall be an even level surface.

If any honeycombing is found on exposed faces, the Engineer's decision as to whe

ther the concrete shall be
cut out and replaced or made good shall be final.
Curing
General
The concrete shall be protected during the first stage of hardening from the har
mful effects of sunshine,
drying winds, cold, rain or running water.

Unless the following procedures are followed to the satisfaction of the Engineer
the concrete will be
considered defective and unacceptable.

All material needed for curing should be ready for use before concreting begins.
Contractor has to ensure
attendance for the curing before proceeding with concreting.
Top Surface
Immediately upon finishing, the exposed surface is to be covered by polythene sh
eeting, the sheeting to be
in direct contact with concrete and covered with hessian to prevent air circulat
ions over the concrete.

As soon as the concrete has stiffened sufficiently the sheeting is to be removed

and the surface covered
with wet hessian and polythene sheeting to reduce evaporation.

Additional water to be introduced frequently under the polythene sheeting to kee

p the hessian thoroughly
and permanently wet.
This process should continue without interruption for seven days.
Alternatively and whenever possible, bonding of the exposed concrete surface may
be allowed. In such a case
care should be taken to reduce evaporation.

In areas where starter bars protrude and is not possible to pond, as much of the
area as possible is to be
covered with hessian and kept continuously wet.
Vertical Surfaces
For the sides of columns, beams and walls, form-work kept in position and spraye
d with water for at
least 24 hours provides the initial protection needed against evaporation.

Immediately on removal of form-work the concrete should be closely wrapped with

wet hessian and
enclosed with polythene sheeting. The hessian should be kept wet by frequent add
itions of water. This
process should continue for not less than seven days.

Curing by using an approved curing membrane will be allowed on surfaces which ar

e difficult to cure
by any other method.
Traffic or loading shall not be allowed on the concrete until the concrete is su
fficiently matured and in
no case shall traffic or loading be of such magnitude as to cause deflection or
other movement in the formwork
or damage to the concrete members.
Composition and Proportions of Floor Screed Constituents
Composition:
Screed shall be prepared on site or premixed and supplied by an approved ready-m
ix supplier.

Screed shall consist of Portland cement, Sand and Water. Chemical additive may b
e added to improve
work-ability.

A bonding material shall be used to bond the screed to the substrate concrete. T
he material shall be cement
sand grout, cement sand latex grout or an epoxy bonding agent.

Proportions:
In general proportion the mix such that the compressive strength of screed shall
be at least that of the
substrate material with a minimum value of 25 N/mm2 at 28 days.

Other required properties of the screed shall be:

Property
Value
Maximum water cement ratio
0.55
Minimum cement content
300 kg/cu.m.
Minimum bond strength
1 N/mm2

Composition and Proportions of Floor Screed Constituents

Proportion bonding material mixes to obtain minimum bond strength of 1 N/mm2. Su
bmit all mixes for
approval by the Engineer.
Work below ground
All surfaces of concrete or block work below ground level shall be generally pai
nted with three coats of
cold applied bituminous coating with a guaranteed rubber latex content of minimu
m 8%, unless
otherwise specified.
3.2 Glass reinforced plastics panel cladding / features
To be read with Preliminaries/General Conditions.
Design/Performance Requirements
Design
Complete the detailed design of the GRP and associated features shown on the dra
wings to meet the
requirements of this specification.
Weather Resistance:
The cladding and associated features must be weather tight under all conditions
with full allowance
made for deflections and other movements.
Integrity:
The shade structure and associated features must resist all dead and live loads.
Wind loads to be calculated
in accordance with ASCE7-05.
Basic wind speed Topography factor
Ground roughness, building size and height factor determined from ASCE7-05.
The shade structure must accommodate without damage all drying shrinkage, creep,
deflections and
thermal movements.
Fire Rating:
Make specimens of the proposed panel construction (including core if any) and ar
range for specified tests
to be carried out by an approved independent testing authority. Submit results d
emonstrating compliance
before commencing manufacture.
Color Fastness of Opaque GRP:
. Before undertaking the verification work required by this clause confirms choi
ce of color with the
Engineer.
. The manufacturer must report to the Engineer if he considers that use of the p
roposed pigments and resins
is likely to result in an unacceptable change of color with time.
. Pigments must have a color fastness to daylight of not less than standard 6 wh
en measured to BS 1006,
2/7 scales. Submit evidence of compliance.
. If available obtain samples of GRP, made from the proposed pigments and resins
, and naturally
weathered for not less than 2 years.
. If naturally weathered samples are not available, prepare samples using the pr
oposed pigments, resins and
gel coat thickness, and test for 1500 hours in an accelerated weather meter whic
h subjects the samples to
both moisture and ultraviolet light.
. The weathered samples must not show significant change of color. Obtain approv
al of color fastness
before commencing manufacture.

Color Fastness / appearance of Translucent GRP:

. Before undertaking the verification work required by this clause confirms choi
ce of color and
translucency with the Engineer.
. The manufacturer must report to the Engineer if he considers that use of the p
roposed pigments, resins
and reinforcement is likely to result in an unacceptable appearance or change of
translucency or color
with time.
. Pigments must have a light fastness of not less than 6 when measured to BS 100
6, 2/7 scales. Submit
evidence of compliance.
. If available obtain samples of GRP, made from the proposed pigments, resins an
d reinforcement naturally
weathered for not less than 2 years.
. If naturally weathered samples are not available, prepare samples using the pr
oposed pigments, resins and
reinforcement, and test for 1500 hours in an accelerated weather meter which sub
jects the samples to both
moisture and ultraviolet light.
. The weathered samples must not show significant change of color or translucenc
y and no obvious fibre
patterning: obtain approval of these respects before commencing manufacture.

Dimensional Co-ordination:
. The cladding must be detailed to ensure compliance with requirements for accur
acy in manufacture and
erection, and to accommodate deviations in the building structure.
. Select types and methods of fixing which will give ample adjustability in thre
e dimensions.
. Liaise with the party responsible for construction of the building structure t
o ensure co-ordination of
dimensions and tolerances.
. Submit details of the proposed system of tolerances and adjustments.

Design Sample:
At an agreed stage in the detailed design work make a sample of the proposed con
struction, size 2000 x
2000 mm, showing the proposed color, texture and incorporating a completed secti
on of a joint. Obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding.
Mock-Up:
At an agreed stage in the detailed design work construct a mock-up at site.
Arrange for inspection to be carried out jointly with the Engineer and/or arrang
e for tests as instructed.
Obtain approval of appearance before proceeding.
Manufacture
Quality of Work:
Manufacture GRP units carefully to ensure compliance with design and performance
requirements, using
materials and workmanship appropriate for the purpose.
All materials must be compatible with each other, and must be stored and used in
accordance with the
manufacturers' recommendations. Resins must be used as supplied and not adultera
ted: fillers and
admixtures may be used only where authorized.
The standard of finish must be appropriate to the end use and position in the bu
ilding. Ensure that
defects such as wrinkling, spotting, striations, fibre patterning, fish eyes, bl
isters, crazing, cracking, dry
patches and uneven or inconsistent color do not occur.
Workshop Conditions:
Workshops must be warmt dry, clean and well ventilated. Cease manufacture if the
temperature falls below
10 deg.C or if dew point is reached.
Patterns:
Inform Engineer when each master pattern is complete and not less than 20 days b
efore commencing
manufacture of molds.
Manufacturing Accuracy:
Finished dimensions of completed units to be such that the cladding, when erecte
d, complies with clause
630 and all sizes fall within the following permissible deviations:
Gel Coats to External Surfaces:
. Mix resins thoroughly. All units of one color to have gel coats from the same
color batch of resin.
. Apply evenly to give an overall nominal thickness of 500 microns.
. Check the wet film thickness (es) of the gel coat(s) of all units in accordanc
e with BS 3900: Part C5,
Method 6, four readings per sq m per coat over the external surface area.
. If single gel coating is used, no reading to be less than 400 microns or more
than 600 microns. Average of
readings for each unit to be within the range 450-550 microns.
. If double gel coating is to be used, submit proposals for coat thickness limit
s based on the resin
manufacturer's recommendations, and obtain approval.
Laminating:
Ensure that:
. Each GRP skin contains not less than 900 g/sq m of glass fibre, in not less th
an two layers.
. Random reinforcement is distributed uniformly, and non-random reinforcement is
correctly positioned
and aligned.
. Each layer of woven fabric reinforcement has a layer of chopped strand mat on
both sides.
. The glass is fully wetted out by the resin, with a resin: glass ratio of not l
ess than 2:1, higher as
appropriate.
. There is good overall bond between all gel coats and all layers of laminate.
. The GRP is well consolidated and free from air voids.

Cores, Ribs, Etc... :

Ensure that all core materials, ties, ribs, fixings and accessories are fully bo
nded to the GRP skin(s) over the
full contact surface area.
Fixings:
To be of a suitable type of stainless steel, nonferrous metal or GRP and to be s
uch as to avoid bimetallic
corrosion.
Sealing of Units:
. Apply a flow coat to all surfaces of the finished units which are not gel coat
ed.
. Thoroughly seal all cut edges, holes etc., to protect the glass fibre from pen
etration of moisture.

Curing:
All units must be adequately cured at not less than 50 deg.C (higher as necessar
y) for not less than 8
hours (longer as necessary). Ensure that units are not distorted whilst being cu
red.
Hardness:
After curing, and at time(s) to be agreed with the PM, measure hardness of GRP i
n accordance with BS
2782 Part 10: Method 1001, one test for each 1sq m of external surface area, not
less than 2 tests per unit.
Reject any unit in which any Barcol hardness measurement is less than 30 at ambi
ent temperature.
Weight:
The first unit of each type and size produced is to be thoroughly checked for co
mpliance with the design
and specification, and the weight recorded. All subsequent units must then be we
ighed, and must not
deviate from the weight of the first identical unit by more than +/- 10%. Inform
PM if any unit fails to
comply.
Production Control Units:
The first unit produced of each of the type(s) listed below is to be inspected b
y the Engineer and, if its
appearance is approved, clearly marked and kept safely at the shop as a control
standard for appearance
of subsequently produced units.

Control units to be delivered to site last.

Inspection:
All completed units must be carefully inspected and checked by the manufacturer
for match with approved
sample(s) or control unit(s) and compliance with specification before dispatch t
o site. Make arrangements
with the PM for him to inspect completed units in the shop.
Additional Units for Destructive Testing:
Make the following additional units to permit random selection for purposes of o
pening up or other
destructive testing as instructed by the Engineer:
Records:
Keep complete records for each unit including the following information.
.
Unique identification number.
. Full details of composition.
. Date of each stage of manufacture.
. Dates and results of all tests, checks and inspections. Dimensions related to
specified levels of accuracy.
. Specific location in the finished work. Details of any damage and making good.
. Any other pertinent data, e.g. if the unit is an approved production control u
nit.

Records to be available for inspection on request.

Retention of Molds:
After manufacturing ceases retain molds and store in a reusable condition to all
ow manufacturing to
recommence if required.
Erection / Fixing Jointing
Erection, Fixing or Jointing by persons other than the Manufacturer:
The GRP manufacturer must:
. Provide clear and comprehensive instructions and ensure that they are understo
od by the site operatives.
. Provide adequate site supervision by a suitably skilled person.

Protection:
. Prevent mechanical damage and disfigurement. Separate units during transport a
nd storage to prevent
chaffing. Pad all slings, ropes, bearers, ladders, etc.
. Support units as necessary so that they do not bow, twist or distort.
. Adequately protect units from the weather. Surfaces not having a weathering ge
l coat must not have
prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or water.
. Do not cover units with plastics sheeting or stick adhesive tape on exposed su
rfaces.
. Store fixing and jointing materials indoors.
. Do not deliver to site any units which cannot be erected immediately or unload
ed into a suitable well
protected storage area.

Accuracy of Erection:
. Survey the structure, including any fixing inserts, before commencing erection
. Report to Engineer
immediately if structure will not allow the required accuracy of erection.
. Set out joint centers for a complete elevation at a time unless otherwise agre
ed with Engineer. Erect units
using temporary spacers to suit the survey results and ensure generally consiste
nt joint widths.
. The widths of joints must be such as to ensure that the joints perform as inte
nded and are within the
recommendations of the joint sealant or baffle manufacturer.
. The finished work must have a satisfactory appearance, being square, regular,
true to line, level and plane
with a satisfactory fit at all junctions, all to approval.

Final Fixing:
. Obtain approval of appearance of each elevation before tightening fixings or s
ealing joints.
. Lighten threaded fastenings to torque figures recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not over tighten
restraint fixings intended to permit lateral movement.

Open Drained Joints:

. Ensure that rear seals are completely airtight.
. Install baffles and flashings securely and accurately to ensure that they func
tion as intended.

Damaged Units:
Do not repair without approval: such approval will not be given where the units
are badly damaged or
where the proposed repair will impair appearance or performance. Obtain approval
of appearance of all
repaired units. Repairs must be:

. Well keyed onto the surrounding GRP using both abrasion and a suitable chemica
l primer.
. Carried out using the same materials as used in manufacture of the units.
. Adequately cured, using suitable portable heaters for site curing.

Cleaning Down:
Return to site at Completion or when instructed and thoroughly clean down the en
tire area of the GRP
work. Cleaning agents for the purpose must be approved by the GRP manufacturer.
3.3 Glass reinforced concrete material (GRC)
GRC materials and products shall only be obtained from 'Specialists'.

Finishes shall be as shown on the Drawings and specified by the Engineer. Accept
able variations in
texture color and appearances shall be agreed by the Engineer on a range of samp
les.

The finished panels shall be free from surface imperfections such as blowholes,
voids, ridges or any
other defects that will be visible in the finished condition, as the approved sa
mples.

Elements shall be manufactured so as to prevent water penetration.

Materials used for making the GRC units shall comply with relevant British Stand
ards. Any reference to a
British Standard shall mean that current at the time to going to Tender. Where m
aterials are fully covered
by this Specification or alternative materials are offered, the Contractor shall
forward to the Engineer
full details of those he proposes to use for approval prior to commencing the wo
rk.

Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement complying with BS 12 as stated in the C

oncrete Specification
and shall be obtained from one source throughout manufacture. The Contractor sha
ll obtain test
certificates from the cement suppliers showing the results of cement strength te
sts, so that an early
indication may be obtained of possible low strength of GRC units resulting from
low cement strengths.

The glass fibre shall be Cem-fila glass fibre or other equal and approved.

The Contractor shall ensure that any admixture used by the manufacturer are appr
oved by the Engineer
and do not have any harmful effects on the proposed elements.

Sand shall have a 98% minimum silica content by weight with a maximum moisture c
ontent of 2% by
weight and a particle size between 1 mm and 150 microns. The material shall be a
s approved by the Licensor
/ Engineer.

Fillers shall only be used in accordance with recommendations of the Manufacture

r to improve the
GRC properties or to assist the manufacture of the material. The Contractor shal
l seek prior written
approval from the Engineer before using any filler.

Water used in the manufacture of the elements shall be clean, fresh and potable.

Release agents shall be applied and used according to Licensors recommendations

and to the Engineer's
approval.
Manufacture
The elements shall be manufactured by spraying a uniform mixture of glass fibre
and cement matrix
during the application process.
. The glass fibre and cement slurry shall be metered to the spray head at rates
to achieve the desired mix
proportion and glass content. These shall be checked prior to spray up of each e
lement in accordance with
test methods CEM/QC/002 and 003. Distribution of fibre in the mix shall be contr
olled by the operator in
such a way as to be as uniform as possible.
. All weight and volume measurements of mix constituents shall be carried out in
a careful manner such
that the correct mix proportions are achieved.
. Wet mixing and spray application shall be carried with equipment and to proced
ures approved by the
Licensor. These shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

Cleanliness of equipment and working procedures shall be maintained at all times

. Elements, etc., shall be
manufactured using a spray technique as approved by the Licensor.
Spray applicators shall be experienced personnel whose proficiency meets the sta
ndards set by the
Licensor.

Mist coats consisting of the basic composition without fibre may if necessary be
sprayed onto the
moulds. The thickness of this coating shall not exceed 0.5 mm maximum in order t
o avoid an unreinforced
surface.

Spray-up of the main body of material shall proceed before any mist coat has set
.

The method of spraying the main body of material shall achieve the greatest poss
ible uniformity of thickness
and fibre distribution.

Consolidation shall be by rolling and such other techniques as approved by the m

anufacturer which are
necessary to achieve complete encapsulation of fibres and full compaction.

Control of thickness shall be achieved by using a pin-gauge or other method appr

oved by the Engineer.
All hand forming of intricate details, incorporation of formers or infill materi
al, and over- spraying shall
be carried out before the material has achieved its initial set so as to ensure
complete bonding.

The Contractor shall agree the detailed construction of the elements with the En
gineer. Details of the
agreed method of construction shall be recorded by the Contractor in drawing for
m.

The elements shall be manufactured to the tolerance specified for precast claddi
ng in B.A
C.P.297 with the addition that thickness of the GRC material skin shall be to th
e specified thickness with
a tolerance of - 0 mm and + 4 mm.

Immediately after the completion of spraying of the element a curing method appr
oved by the Licensor
shall be adopted in order to achieve sufficient strength for the de-moulding pro
cess.

On de-moulding, the elements shall be uniformly supported in a way agreed betwee

n Contractor and
Engineer, but this shall nevertheless be the Contractor's responsibility; all el
ements shall then be
transferred to the curing enclosure.

Curing shall be continued after demoulding to the method agreed by the Engineer.
The curing
conditions shall be such as to provide free water on the surface of the elements
and an adequate level of
temperature.
At the completion of the curing period external cladding elements shall be store
d inside before
receiving any treatment. The coating shall be applied in accordance with the man
ufacturer's
recommendations particularly with regard to the time and method of application o
f the coating.

Elements, etc., shall be handled, stored and transported in such a way that no d
amage or marking of the
architectural surfaces occurs and so that the elements are not subject to undue
stress.
All elements, etc., shall be identified individually to indicate the type and da
te of manufacture.

Making good of architectural surfaces shall only be permitted on approval of the

Engineer. Structural
making well will not be permitted and the Contractor shall replace at his expens
e any element so
condemned.

Any panel not complying with the specification shall be declared unacceptable.

Details of the methods of transport and erection and site storage shall be agree
d between the Contractor and
the Engineer.

The safety and protection of the GRC units shall be ensured throughout the whole
of the contract until
the issue of the Certificate of Completion.
Test Boards/Tests, etc.
. Test boards shall be produced at a frequency agreed between the Engineer and C
ontractor, but will be as a
minimum manufactured in parallel with the first and last element of each days pr
oduction by each spray
team. (The actual frequency of testing required will depend upon the production
rate and quality). In
order to provide sufficient data to establish compliance an initial increased ra
te of production of test
boards may be required.
. The test board shall be large enough to enable the test coupons to be cut from
it without using the area at
the edge of the test board which may be of uneven thickness.
. When the element is removed from the curing area the test board shall be trans
ferred to the quality control
laboratory for testing as detailed.
. The methods described are those from the Pilkington Quality Control Test bookl
et. Where quality control
testing is carried out continuously the number of specimens may be reduced in ag
reement with the
Engineer and Contractor.

The GRC from which the elements, etc., are to be made shall have the following p
roperties on
completion of curing.
. Characteristic Modulus of Rupture (MOR) 21 N/mm
. Characteristic Limit of Proportionality (LOP) 8 N/mm

Characteristic' MOR or LOP shall have the same general meaning as used for Chara
cteristic Strength in BS
C.P.110 .

The glass content shall be determined on each freshly sprayed test board by the
wash- out method
CEM/QC/004.

Test for Modulus of Rupture (MOR) shall be carried out in accordance with test m
ethod CEM/QC/007.

The Limit of Proportionality (LOP) shall be determined from the load/displacemen

t curve during modulus
of rupture testing above.

The density of the cured material shall be the oven dry bulk density determined
by the test method
CEM/QC/006.

If considered necessary additional tests may be specified by the Engineer.

Quality Control
Quality control of GRC being produced shall be carried out by monitoring test re
sults on a statistical basis
in accordance with the GRCA Specification. Samples for glass content determinati
on shall be taken from the
test board immediately after spraying.
Within 48 hours of completion of the cure schedule the test board shall be cut i
nto test coupons and the MOR,
LOP and density measured.

Requirements shall be as follows:

. Glass Content. The glass content of the GRC shall not be less than 5% by weigh
t.
. Modulus of Rupture. A characteristic MOR Mk of 21 N/mm is to be achieved. This
is defined as the
value which 95% of all the mean strengths of individual test boards shall exceed
. The average MOR
needed to achieve Mk is the overall target mean MOR MTM and MTM = Mk = 1.64 * SD
. Where SD
is the standard deviation of the accumulated test board (mean MOR's, or of the l
ast 40 results if more
than 40 test boards have been processed).
. Density. The density of the GRC shall exceed 1.80 tons/m. Results of the indivi
dual test board mean
MOR and LOP values will be treated statistically for compliance with the followi
ng conditions:
1. No single test board mean result shall fall below 85% of the characteristic v
alue.
2. The average of overlapping groups of four successive results must be greater
than the characteristic
value (Mk Lk) plus half the Margin (where the Margin is the difference between t
he characteristic
and Target Mean prior to the last four results, ie. MTM - Mk and LTM - Lk).

In the event of any result or results not fulfilling the requirements, the eleme
nts that the results represent
shall be deemed defective. Where non-compliance has occurred the current standar
d deviation up to and
including the low results should be calculated. From this, a new temporary margi
n may be calculated and
used to re-assess the results, against the compliance requirement in consultatio
n with the Engineer. It should
be understood that where non-compliance has occurred, all elements represented b
y the four results may be
deemed defective.
Preliminary Testing and Samples
The Engineer shall require preliminary testing to be carried out before the Cont
ractor commences with the
actual mix, equipment, personnel and technique proposed for manufacture to ensur
e that the following can be
achieved.

. That the modulus of rupture and quality control requirements can be achieved.
. That the quality of the finished product is acceptable. Once approved the fini
shed samples shall be
retained on sit by the Engineer as the standard which all elements shall attain
prior to fixing in position.
. A relationship between any special curing regime for quality control proposed
and the curing of the actual
product.

Results of tests shall be submitted before manufacture is due to commence. Failu

re to achieve the quality
control requirements will mean re-testing to a modified mix design, or manufactu
ring method.
Mix Design
Mix designs shall have been determined by the Contractor in conjunction with the
Licensor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval before work commences.

The choice of a mold release must be compatible with architectural finishes and
be approved by the Engineer.

Proposals for forming internal ribs and incorporating infill shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval.
Where sandwich construction is employed, the core material shall comply with the
Licensor's
recommendations for material and use.

The material and manufacture of the molds shall be consistent with the type and
quality of the surface finish
required for the element, with the tolerance specified and to the Engineer's app
roval.
Fixings
Fixing shall be stainless steel (or as approved by the Engineer) and details of
incorporation should also
follow the recommendations of the Licensor.

A safety margin of 7 - 10 of ultimate test load/design working load is required

for all fixings.
Workmanship and Construction
Access shall be allowed to the Engineer at all stages of the work for inspection
of all processes and elements
being manufactured.

The Contractor shall provide a means for producing a replacement element at any
time during the Contract.
Molds shall be adequately cured to eliminate shrinkage and distortion and shall
be properly braced. Molds
shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before production commences.

One or more samples of a typical unit shall be manufactured to the agreed detail
ed construction and submitted
for load testing, as specified by the Engineer.

An agreed number of small samples typical of the manufacture and finish specifie
d are to be submitted to the
Engineer for architectural approval. Approved samples must be clearly marked and
kept safely on site and
further approved comparable samples are to be kept safely by the Contractor so t
hat a preliminary approval of
manufactured units can be made.

The Contractor shall ensure that the existing concrete works shall support the e
rection of the proposed GRC
elements and should there be insufficient support available the Contractor shall
be responsible for providing
such support to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall design, manufacture and install the GRC elements shown on t
he Drawings, all to the
Engineer's approval.

Concrete Works
Particular Requirements
Concrete Mix Proportions

The information in following table supersedes that given in Clause 4.1.5

Mix Usage

RC Work as specified
Mass Concrete
Max Aggregate Size (mm)

20
40
Max W/C Ratio

0.40
0.45
Min Cement Content (kg/m)
MSRC+Micro-Silica Below Ground
400
300

OPC Above Ground

400
300
Works Test Cubes 28 days (N/mm)

45
30
Slump (mm)

50 - 100
50 - 125

Concrete mix proportions

4 BLOCKWORK
4.1 General
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

4.2 Materials
Cement
Ordinary Portland cement shall be used as described under concrete work. White o
r colored cement shall
comply with the physical requirements of BS 12
Lime
Lime shall be hydrated lime complying with BS 890 Class B to be soaked in water
for not less than 16 hours
before use.
Water
Water shall be as described under Concrete Works.
Sand
Sand shall be clean, sharp, and free from salt and organic matter. It shall comp
ly with BS.1200 The chloride
and sulphate contents of sand shall not exceed the limits given for aggregate in
the "Concrete
Specifications".

Concrete Blocks
The blocks, hollow or solid shall be strictly as manufactured to BS 6073 Part I
and II. Blocks shall be
manufactured of cement and sand 1:5 mix (300 Kg cement to one metre cube of sand
) made in vibrated
pressure machines. They shall be hard, sound, square and clean with well- define
d arises and shall be
400 mm ( 5 mm) long x 200mm ( 5 mm) high unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. T
he
tolerance of thickness shall be ( 3 mm).

Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings blocks shall be hollow blocks and shall b
e of approved design.
Immediately after moulding, blocks shall be placed on clean, level, non- absorbe
nt pallets. Blocks shall
not be removed from the pallets until they have been inspected and approved by t
he Engineer. Blocks shall
be steam cured.

Prior to manufacture, the Contractor shall prepare ten nos. sample of each block
for the Engineer's
approval, and the approved samples shall be clearly marked and retained until co
mpletion of the Contract.
Blocks shall be tested for compressive strength whenever required by the Enginee
r. For each test twelve
blocks will be selected by the Engineer.

The concrete blocks shall comply with the following requirements:

Compressive Strength at Twenty Eight Days
Hollow blocks > 7.5N/mm average of 10 blocks (for Non Load Bearing Walls) Solid b
locks > 12.5N/mm
average of 10 blocks (for Load Bearing Walls) Hollow blocks > 6.0N/mm minimum for
any block
Solid blocks > 10.0N/mm minimum for any block

Should a test not meet the above requirements, the batch of blocks from which th
e sample was taken,
will be rejected and shall be removed from the Site.

Water Absorption: (To ASTM C140/75 & ASTM C145/75)

20% or less of dry weight

The design of the cavities and webs of the hollow blocks shall be submitted to t
he Engineer prior to
manufacture. The thickness of the face shell and of the membrane of solid portio
ns shall not be less than
one fourth of the width and length of the block respectively.

Blocks below damp proof course level shall be solid sulphate resisting concrete
blocks, or shall be solid
blocks coated with thick black bitumen or tar composition unless otherwise state
d.

Insulated Concrete Blocks

Insulated concrete blocks generally shall be manufactured as described in Sub cl
ause 5 above as per BS
6073 The blocks shall measure 400 x 300 x 300mm thick or otherwise stated with k
eyed edges to
ensure proper butt-joints. Polystyrene inserts shall have a K-Value of 0.0645 W/
mK or better. The
block work shall contribute towards the achievement of a 1 Pearl Rating for the
project.
4.3 Mortar
Mortar shall consist 1 part cement to 3 parts of sand by volume. For work not in
contact with earth or sand,
one part lime may be added to the mix. Mortar for pointing facing concrete block
s shall be prepared using
white cement. When block work is constructed below ground level sulphate resisti
ng cement shall be used.
Should the Contractor wish to use a plasticizer with mortar, then the mortar sha
ll consist of 1 part cement to
4 parts sand with plasticizer added and used strictly in accordance with the man
ufacturer's instructions. The
plasticizer must be approved by the Engineer before use.

Mixing shall be carried out by means of an approved mechanical batch mixer. The
mortar shall be mixed dry
until a uniform mix is obtained. Sufficient water shall then be added and the mi
xing continued until a
homogeneous mix is obtained. Excess water shall not be used in the mix.

All mortar shall be used before the initial set has taken place and on no accoun
t shall mortar which has
commenced to set be remixed with water or new batches and used.
4.4 Workmanship
Generally in accordance to BS 8000

Block work shall be set out and built to the respective dimensions, thicknesses
and heights shown on the
Drawings and/ or as instructed in writing by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise ordered, hollow blocks shall be used in all closures, end block
s such as at door jambs,
window openings, etc., and blocks of special lengths or size, shall be solid. Th
e blocks shall be well soaked
before being used and the tops of walls left off shall be made wet before work i
s recommenced.

Blocks shall be laid in true and regular courses on a full bed of mortar of 10 m
m average thickness, exclusive
of any key in the jointing surfaces of the blocks. Sufficient mortar shall be us
ed in bedding and jointing to
ensure that all keys are solidly filled. Where blocks abut against concrete each
third course shall be tied
thereto by means of approved galvanized steel ties.

All horizontal joints shall be properly level. The Vertical joints shall be prop
erly lined and quoins, jambs and
other angles plumbed as the work proceeds.

All walls shall be plumbed vertical.

Standard sized block shall be used wherever possible. Broken blocks shall not be
used except where required
for bonding purposes. Walls and partitions shall be bonded to one another at ang
les and junctions.
Joints of faces of block walls which are to be rendered or plastered shall be ra
ked out for depth of 10 mm as
the work proceeds.

Walls shall be carried up regularly without leaving any part more than one meter
lower than another unless
the permission of the Engineer is first obtained. Work which is left at differen
t levels shall be racked back.

The Contractor shall cut and fit block work as required, leave or form chases fo
r edges of concrete slabs,
steps, ends of partitions, etc cut chases for pipes, conduits, etc., and general
ly perform all cutting away for all
trades. Wooden plates and door and window frames shall be bedded and exposed edg
es pointed in mortar
and cramps shall be built in. No hollow blocks shall about any built in fixtures
eg. Doors, frames, louvers
etc.
4.5 Load bearing walls
Load bearing walls shall be constructed in accordance with BS.CP 111 Part 2. Whe
re a horizontal or vertical
joint is not solidly filled or where it is found that the Contractor has used bl
ocks other than the blocks
specified the whole panel of wall will be considered suspect and will be removed
and rebuilt at the
Contractor's expense.
4.6 Non-load bearing walls
Non load bearing walls shall not be constructed at the same time as the load bea
ring walls but built at least
two weeks after the roof or upper floor structure is completed. Toothing into lo
ad bearing walls will not be
permitted.
4.7 Fair faced walls
External and internal walls where described as "fair face" shall be built with b
locks having unblemished
surfaces, with good clean arises to all exposed edges and shall be pointed with
a neat flush joint as the work
proceeds.
4.8 Protection of finished blockwork
The Contractor shall ensure that the finished block work walling is not damaged
by subsequent operations.

The Contractor is to protect newly or partially built walling against it being d

ried out too rapidly by the sun's
heat or from any other adverse climatic effects and is to follow the Engineer's
instructions in this matter.

The Contractor shall in all cases cover all newly erected walling with hessian o
r other material approved by
the Engineer and shall keep the same wet for at least three days.
4.9 Compressible joint fillers
Compressible joint fillers shall be used where specified at joints on drawings o
r requested by the Engineer.
Filler shall be cut to exact widths and shall have all edges neatly trimmed. All
fixing shall be strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Exposed edges of filler
shall be pointed with
approved sealant.
4.10 Partitions
Block work partitions over 3.00 meter high shall be stabilized as follows:
. Provide continuous 200x200/100 mm reinforced concrete lintel at the door linte
l level or as required
by the Engineer.
. For a partition taken between or passing in front of a reinforced concrete col
umn provide two round
steel bars laid in the bedding mortar at 1.00 meter center and fixed to column u
sing threaded bars
locked into cast in "Spit Rock" dowels.
. Provide rebates, toothing and the like at all vertical intersection of walling
every meter of height.

All internal block walls and partitions shall extend up to the underside of the
concrete slab, soffits,
beams and the like.
4.11 Poly sulphide sealant
Gun grade sealant shall be used where specified on the drawing or where requeste
d by the Engineer
including external joinery and metal work bedded against block work or concrete.
The color shall be to the
approval of the Engineer.

The primer shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the sealant. The joints
 will first be thoroughly
cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer and shall be primed before sealing w
ith sealant. Application of
these materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
4.12 Lintels
Prefabricated lintels shall comply with the requirements of BS 5977, Part 2. All
lintels shall be bedded on
cement and sand mortar and the Contractor shall allow for a minimum bearing at e
ach end of 150 mm.
4.13 Reinforcement
Totally embedded metal reinforcement shall be used every second course in the mo
rtar joints. The width of
reinforcement to be such that it is 10 mm from the inner face and 20 mm from the
outer face of the block.
4.14 Source of material
All blocks for use shall be obtained from a source (Vendor Lists) approved by th
e Engineer. The Contractor
shall not change same source without the written approval of the Engineer.
4.15 Storage of materials
Blocks shall be delivered to Site stacked and stored to permit ventilation and p
rotected from rain, dampness
and the like.

In the event that any materials for use in this Section deteriorate and become u
nusable due to inadequate and
poor storage they shall be removed from Site as instructed by the Engineer and r
eplaced at the Contractor's
expense.
4.16 Blockwork below ground level
All blocks used in construction below ground level shall be solid and manufactur
ed using sulphate resisting
cement.
4.17 Damp proof courses
Damp proof course shall be tropical quality bituminized fiber felt (Hessian type
) to comply with BS. 6398
and be provided under every block wall at ground bearing slab level and elsewher
e as indicated on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The damp proof course shall be lapped a
t corners and joints and
bedded in the cement mortar mix and pointed both sides.
4.18 External pointing of joinery or metal work
Joinery or metal work shall be pointed externally with approved standard Silicon
sealant color to match the
external faces or paint finishes and shall be used strictly in accordance with t
he manufacturers printed
instructions.
5 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING
5.1 General
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

The roofing system shall be as shown on the standard roofing detail drawings. Ho
wever, if the Contractor
desires to submit an alternative proprietary system the Contractor should obtain
the Engineer s Approval.
Below are the approved systems and basic specifications of materials.
5.2 Testing
The Contractor is required to test and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all
areas of roofing, waterproofing,
terraces, bathrooms, kitchens and the like for water penetration. These tests ar
e to be carried out after the
membrane has been laid.
The Contractor shall keep the provisions of all relevant required tests to be ca
rried out in the item rates for
such areas to be flooded with water, and left for a minimum of 48 hours and or t
o the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
On completion of roofing works the Contractor is to leave the roof in a sound an
d watertight condition, to the
approval of the Engineer, and in a satisfactory state for final handing over.
5.3 Guarantee
The Contractor and Sub-Contractor both have to provide the Employer with a writt
en unconditional
guarantee for the roofing system installed on site for a period of 10 (ten) year
s from the date of issue of the
Final Certificate and to the completion of the maintenance period. The Contracto
r shall bear the cost of any
of the consequential damages or complete renewal as determined by Engineer durin
g the above period as is
provided for in same guarantee. The text of the guarantee shall be to the Engine
er's approval.
5.4 Preparation of surfaces
All surfaces shall be clear of all deleterious matter and dry all in accordance
with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Prior to the application of any waterproofing/roofing material or
primer the Contractor shall
grind the concrete surface using a mechanical grinder to ensure all surface irre
gularities are removed and
obtain the Engineer's written approval to commence the said works, without prope
r approval all the works
shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
5.5 Protection
Finished and part finished surfaces shall be suitably protected to ensure no dam
ages are made by other
trades. Any roofing or waterproofing so damaged due to non-protection shall be r
emoved and replaced at the
Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer his proposed m
ethods of protecting the
various surfaces and locations prior to their completion or application of finis
hing layers, i.e. tiling and the
like.
5.6 Roofing System
The roofing shall comprise of the following layers: -
. Install one layer of 4 mm elastomeric polyester tropical grade modified bitumi
nous felt, torch applied.
Provide extra strip layer with min 300 horizontal and vertical lap at junctions
with vertical surface.
. Thermal Insulation shall be done with polyisocyanurate or polyurethane (rigid
foam) SHD Grade,
closed cell with minimum density 32 kg/m over water proofing membrane. Insulation
shall be of make
Kingspan, Isolparma, Hapri or equivalent, of suitable thickness. The thermal con
ductivity shall be
0.028W/m.K or better.
. The contractor shall verify and confirm that the thickness of thermal insulati
on provided. The combined
construction U values of the roof shall not exceed more than 0.20W/m2. K. Howeve
r, in all cases the
total construction thickness of the roof including the structural slab shall not
exceed 550mm as shown
on drawings.
. A separation layer of polypropylene fabric (Typar or equal) laid loosely over
roof insulation layer to
receive tiles on screed.
. Light weight foam Concrete of density 650- 800 kg/m, minimum thickness 50mm lay
to falls and cross
falls to drainage outlets. The screed shall be laid in alternate bays not exceed
ing ten square meter panels
and 300 mm wide from the edge with joints between bays in 10mm thick compressibl
e fiber material.
Angle fillet 100x100mm shall be provided at junctions with vertical surfaces.
. 20 mm thick finished Concrete tiles lay over sand cement screed (ratio 4:1). J
oints at 10 m to be filled
with approved polysulphide sealants (two part polysulphide) in accordance with t
he manufacturer's
instructions. The tiles shall be flat, smooth and free from depressions and proj
ections.
. Approved solar reflective aluminium shield flashing tucked into groove with pi
n and flat washers and
covered with 2 part polysulphide sealant.
. Apply gravel mulch at roof drains at a minimum depth of 50mm.

5.7 Water proofing below ground

For concrete surfaces and top of blinding: Apply primer and 3 coat bituminous pa
int.
For solid block work. Apply 3 coats of proprietary bituminous based paint.
5.8 Water proofing for wet areas
The contractor through standard leak tests shall verify and confirm that the wat
erproofing is done properly.

1.5mm thick preformed, self-adhesive water proofing membrane shall be laid on to

 primed smooth concrete
slabs, on to suitably primed up-stands and vertical dressing, applying the prefo
rmed membrane sticky side
downwards to give well rolled 50mm overlaps and shall be laid strictly in accord
ance with the
manufacturer s instructions, to all wet areas, viz, bath room, toilets, Kitchen/Pa
ntry, etc. including dressing
into drainage outlets, and the like and turning membrane as skirting up (minimum
200mm high) on all
perimeter walls and tucking into preformed grooves.
5.9 GRP Water Tank Lining
Waterproof concrete shall be used for the under-ground water tanks. Concrete sur
faces, where lamination is
to be applied shall be dry and free from any chemical, oil or shutter release ag
ent. The concrete shall be
completed, cured smoothed and absolutely dry and free from foreign matters. In o
rder to ensure good wetting
out and adhesion on concrete surface first layer shall be primed with Isophthali
c resin about 0.3mm thick and
effective sealing of pores shall be ensured.
The second layer shall be of chopped strand mat 300 gm / m2 "E" glass with Isoph
thalic resin. Three layers
of chopped strand mat 450 gm / m2 'E' glass impregnated with Isophthalic resin s
hall be applied, followed by
'C' veil impregnated with Isophthalic resin. The final layer shall be Isophthali
c resin flow coat with 5%
paraffin wax. The total GRP lining shall be 4mm thick.

The Contractor shall submit the detailed Method Statement for the Engineer s appro
val. The application for
the same shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instruc
tions.

The Contractor shall submit samples for Engineer's approval.

6 METAL WORKS & GLAZING
6.1 General
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

The Contractor is required to employ approved specialists to supply, or supply a

nd erect all metalwork items.
Working drawings are to be prepared and issued to the Engineer in quadruplicate
for approval in good time
to afford no delay to the project and in no case less than eight weeks before wo
rk needs to be put in hand. No
work at site or fabrication in factory shall commence prior to any approval by t
he Engineer.
6.2 Standards
Materials used in this Section shall comply with British Standards, the British
Codes of Practice, DIN
Standards, American Standards and American Society for Testing and Materials, or
Local Authority
Standards and Codes whichever are the more stringent.

Applicable provision of the following British Standards shall apply to these wor
ks as follows:-

. Mild Steel shall comply with BS 4360, sections generally shall comply with BS
4: Part 1, hollow
sections with BS 4848: Part 2 and angles with BS 4848: Part 4. Steel plate and s
heet shall comply with
BS 1449: Part 1 and steel tubes to BS 1775.
. Stainless Steel Tubes shall comply with BS 3014, and stainless steel plate wit
h BS 1449: Part 2.
. Aluminium alloy extruded sections shall comply with BS 1161 or BS 1474 and alu
minium alloy drawn
tube with BS 1471 Anodizing process when applicable to comply with BS
. Brass work as indicated on the drawings shall comply with the various appropri
ate Standards.
. Fastenings unless otherwise specified shall be of the same metal as the item b
eing fixed, with matching
coating or finish. Wood screws shall comply with BS 1210 Bolts, Screws and nuts
to BS 4190 ,
machine screws and nuts to BS 4138 and self-tapping screws to BS 4174
. Plugs shall be proprietary fiber plastics or other approved type.
. Bitumen solution for cold application shall comply with BS 3416, Type 1.
6.3 Finished coating
General
The finished coating shall be as stated on the Drawings and applied strictly in
accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.

The color of the coating shall be selected from available ranges if not stated e
lsewhere in these Documents.
The Contractor shall offer samples for approval prior to the final selection and
the manufacturer of these
elements.
The contractor shall demonstrate that all paints and coatings used in the buildi
ng are within the maximum
VOC content limits of the European directive 2004/42/CE: 2004/as mentioned in th
e PBRS guide book.
Anodized coating
The aluminium anodizing shall comply with BS 3987 and be integral color hard coa
t anodizing
550kp/mm hardness, minimum 25 microns thick.

The color of anodizing shall be as described on the drawings. Samples of color i

ncluding limits of color
variation shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval before work commen
ces. The Engineer
reserves the right to reject the products of any supplier who cannot guarantee a
reasonable limit of
color variation, the acceptable limit of variation being at the Engineer's discr
etion.
Polyester powder coating
All aluminium sections that are to receive a polyester powder coating shall be g
iven a caustic etch followed
by an anodic oxide treatment to obtain an architectural class 1 anodic coating.
Anodization should be not
less than 20 micron thickness.

All aluminium works shall be finished in colored electrostatic polyester powder

coating as per DIN
standard 53151, 53152, 53153, 53156 or equal and approved to RAL color subject t
o the Engineer's
approval.
Epoxy Paint Coating
Mild steel dipped galvanized to be spray coated with Epoxy based paint shall be
factory applied in
two layers, primer coat 0.4 mils dry film thickness and finished color coat mini
mum 1.0 mils dry
film thickness, minimum overall thickness of 1.3 mils dry film thickness. Inside
corners, channels and the
like shall be visually covered to the extent possible. The Engineer shall select
the color from the range
available.

The coating shall be applied to properly clean and pre- treated galvanized steel
sections. Application shall be
by approved applicators and the Contractor shall provide certified details of sa
me. The pretreatment and
application of the coating shall conform to all ASTM, BS, DIN Standards and the
like as stated in the
Supplier's printed Specifications.
 Coating thickness
As and when instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide certificate
s from independent
laboratories that the minimum thickness as stated in these Documents has been ap
plied to the aluminium
sections. Failure to provide such information shall result in the complete insta
llation being rejected and
replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Dissimilar materials
All aluminium surfaces that are to be in contact with cured concrete, mortar, st
eel and other metals shall
have the contact surfaces protected wherever they may entrap moisture or corrosi
ve elements. Metals that
are to be in contact with mortar or concrete shall be protected with a two coat
bituminous coating.

Prime paint steel parts of anchors, anchor inserts reinforcement, supports, and
all parts after field welding
or bolting with zinc chromate. Minimum dry film thickness of 1 mm for zinc chrom
ate.
6.4 Aluminium
Generally
All aluminum doors, windows, frames, transoms, mullions, etc, where shown on the
drawing shall be
manufactured of extruded section of aluminum alloy to BS 1474 Heat treatable fre
e from defects type,
11.9. They shall be supplied by a manufacturer approved by the Engineer. Fitting
s shall be aluminum
alloy in accordance with BS 1473

All exposed surfaces shall be light etched and anodized in a satin or matt finis
h to the color indicated on the
drawings. The thickness of anodizing shall be guaranteed to be 20 microns (.020
mm) by the manufacturer
and shall be polished to a mirror-like surface.

Aluminum coated materials shall not be permitted in lieu of the aluminum items s
pecified herein.
Samples of the anodized finish must be offered for approval before proceeding.

All aluminum sections shall present clear, straight and shapely defined lines an
d shall be free from defects
and imperfections that may impair their strength.

Samples of aluminum shall include a corner joint and glazing gasket.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all aluminum work unti
l the completion of the
Works, and only units in perfect working order and in perfect condition will be
accepted. All hardware,
screws, bolts and other necessary accessories shall be of aluminum or other non-
corrodible material
and shall match in color and consistency the finish of the anodized aluminum.
Where aluminum is in contact with wood, the wood shall be treated with penta-chl
oro- phenol or
equal and approved, 5% minimum concentration, followed with the protective measu
res described for
aluminum in contact with wood or other absorptive materials.

The aluminum work shall be designed and anchored so that work will not be distor
ted nor the fasteners
over stressed from the expansion and contraction of the metal.
Protection
Before shipment from the factory, aluminum surfaces requiring protection shall b
e given a coating which
will protect the metal during construction. In areas where appearance of the fin
ish on aluminum items is
important a coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied.

Apply two sprayed coats or water-white methacrylate lacquer having a total minim
um thickness of 0.125
mm, which when applied to the aluminum surface shall be capable of withstanding
the action of lime
mortar for a period of at least one week in an atmosphere of 100% relative humid
ity at 100 degree F and
the action or 10% (by weight) muriatic acid for a period of six hours at 70 degr
ee F and the action of
atmospheric weathering for a period of 12 months. Alternatively a thick adhesive
tape may be used. The
coating or tape shall be applied in the manufacturer s plant to the exposed surfac
es of all aluminum
components subject to staining from alkaline mortar and plaster abrasion and oth
er construction abuses.
Workmanship\
The Contractor shall furnish all aluminium units as indicated on the drawings.
Workmanship and installation shall be in accordance with recommended standards o
f First Class
Aluminium Manufacturers.
The Contractor shall furnish all labour materials and equipment to complete the
aluminium work indicated
on the drawings or specified herein to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Work shall include all parts and accessories for all variations of fabrication t
echniques required for a
complete installation, caulking, priming and back coating and shop drawings.

All aluminium work shall be performed in a shop where grade of metal work is of
recognized quality
acceptable to the Engineer. All items shall be installed plump, straight, square
, level and in proper
elevation, plane, location and alignment with other work. All work shall be desi
gned for adjustment to
field variations, fitted with proper joints and intersections and adequately anc
hored in place.

All workmanship and finishes shall be first class, strictly in accordance with t
he best practice. All work shall
be complete in every detail. Finished work shall be approved by the Engineer bef
ore the job will be
accepted.

Where aluminium surfaces come into contact with metals other than stainless stee
l, zinc, white bronze
or small areas of other metal compatible with aluminium, they shall be kept from
direct contact with
such parts by painting the dissimilar metal with a primer, followed by one or tw
o coats of aluminium
metal and masonry paint of other approved suitable protective coating, excluding
those containing lead
pigments, or a non-absorptive tape or gasket shall be placed between aluminium a
nd dissimilar metals.
Steel anchors and connecting members shall be hot dip galvanized or zinc plated
after fabrication.

Aluminium in contact with wood or other absorptive materials which may become re
peatedly wet shall
be painted with two coats of aluminium metal and masonary paint or a coat at hea
vy bodied bituminous
paint. Alternatively paint the wood or other absorptive material with two coats
of aluminium house
paint and seal joints with a good caulking compound.

Before application of lacquer, the manufacturer shall remove all fabrication com
pounds, moisture, dirt
accumulations and other foreign materials to ensure proper lacquer adhesion.
Upon completion, the Contractor shall clean all aluminium work as required by re
moving protective tape
and other coating, using mild soap or detergent and clear petroleum spirits. Aci
d, caustics and abrasives
shall not be used. Where cleaners are used to remove excess sealing compounds ca
re shall be taken to
prevent damage to seal or staining or damage to adjacent work.
Aluminium Windows and Doors
General
All windows and doors are to be constructed by approved specialist suppliers of
light, medium or
heavy section to suit location, local building regulations, and particular requi
rements noted on the drawing
as to weight and profile.

All frames should be made to fit the actual openings with a 5mm clearance all ro
und. Discrepancies
in overall width or height exceeding 5mm will not be allowed and the frames will
be rejected in such
cases. Any small discrepancies shall have the gaps suitably backed and then fill
ed with gun- applied water
repellent mastic sealant.

All nuts, bolts, washers and screws used for assembly and fixing shall be of ade
quate strength for their
purpose within the design and shall be stainless steel grade 18/8.
All fixing of windows to the supporting structure to be achieved using a suitabl
e lug and/or frame anchor
fixing method capable of accommodating all applicable loads, deflection, toleran
ces and expansion expected
on site. Details of the proposed fixing method shall be submitted to the project
engineer for approval prior
to installation.
All sealants used in the assembly of, and in the fixing of cladding and window f
raming, shall be non- setting
to allow thermal movement without detriment to those joint sealants used for per
ipheral caulking and shall
be one part silicone sealant and shall conform to BS 4245 All spliced joints bet
ween mullions will be sealed
with an approved silicone product, compatible with other sealants and packing us
ed.

All ironmongery shall have the same finish as the frames and shall be approved b
y the Engineer.

At all opening windows and doors and where there are louvered screens and doors,
a fly- screen shall be
provided to the approval of the Engineer.

Glazing sections shall be set in special heat resisting PVC and of channel type.
Separate glazing
sections on each side of the glass will not be permitted.

The following table indicates the basic requirements for window construction. Th
e weights of framing
make no allowance for beads, glazing bars, opening light framing, coupling mulli
ons or transoms.

Classification
Minimum weight of basic
frame (kg/m run)
Maximum superficial
area of either window
way (sq.m)
Maximum Dimension (mm)
Remarks
Light
0.60
1
1500

With door
Medium
1.50
5
2500
Medium
2.00
9
3000
Heavy
2.50
12
3500
Heavy
3.00
12
3500

Requirements for window construction

Thermal Performance:
The contractor shall ensure that all windows and sliding windows, in conjunction
with a suitable
glazing shall have efficient thermal barriers and should achieve a target area a
verage weighted U-Value of
1.90 W/m2K. The Solar Heat Gain Coefficient for the glazing unit shall be a maxi
mum of 0.23
The average rated u-value for the entrance doors shall not exceed 2.60 W/m2K.

The contractor shall submit, for approval, details / evidence of all calculation
s / methods of determining
the required target U-value of all windows.

Suitable performance tests are to be conducted to ensure that the thermal breaks
installed are effective and
that infiltration rates are within the specified limits.
Building Air Leakage:
The building shall be tested as per ASTM E779 and should not exceed 3.64 l/s/m2@
75Pa based upon the
area of exposed facade.
6.5 Storage and protection
. All materials shall be stored in protected areas on site and shall be fully pr
otected against the effects of
weather.
. All materials shall be carefully handled and stored under cover in a manner to
prevent deformation and
damage to the materials and to shop finishes, and to prevent rusting and the acc
umulation of mud, dirt
or other foreign matter on the metal work. All such damage and accumulation shal
l be corrected prior to
erection.

6.6 Materials
All materials shall be new stock, free from defects, impairing strength, durabil
ity or appearance and of best
commercial quality for each intended purpose.

Provide all anchors, bolts, sleeves, spigots and other parts required for securi
ng each item of work of this
Section to the construction, including furnishing to concrete workers all requir
ed inserts and sleeves for use
in concrete and furnishing to masons of all anchors, bolts, and other items requ
ired to be built- in masonry.

All exposed fastenings shall be of the same material finish as the metal to whic
h applied, unless otherwise
noted.

Welding rods shall conform to British Standards and the recommendations of the m
etal welding rod
manufacturer.

Bolts and nuts where used, shall be in accordance with BS 1400 or 1769. Bolts sh
all be of sufficient length to
show at least one full thread beyond the nut after tightening. Bolted joints sub
ject to vibration shall be
securely locked.

Washers, where used, shall be in accordance with BS4320 The size of the holes sh
all not exceed the bolt
diameter by more than 2mm.
Crambs, Wall Tiles, Anchors etc.
The cramps for fixing wood frames to walls shall be 200mm long 30mm wide and 3mm
thick and shall
have one end bent and twice countersunk drilled for screwing to the frame and th
e other end fishtailed for
setting into walling.
All fixing cramps, wall tiles, anchors etc., shall be galvanized mild steel prop
rietary type such as Pepcon
International (Al Tayer), Harris and Edgar or equal and approved. The Contractor
is responsible for
submitting suitable samples to Engineer for approval.
Galvanized Steel Channels and Chequered Plate
Where Site Electrical Rooms or Substations are required, the Contractor must all
ow for all necessary
galvanized steel channels and chequered plate as directed by the Engineer includ
ing framing, supports,
hand-railing etc., as necessary.
6.7 Shop painting materials
Shop paint for un-galvanized ferrous surfaces shall be a high quality, lead free
, rust inhibitive primer, as
approved by the Engineer.

Shop paint for galvanized metal shall be high quality, zinc rich, metal primer e
specially formulated for use
on galvanized metal, as approved by the Engineer.

Shop paint for aluminium shall be Dichromate based primer.

6.8 Shop coating for ferrous and galvanized surfaces
Galvanizing
. All ferrous metal under this Section for exterior use in addition to any other
interior items specifically
so specified, shall be of hot dip galvanized, including all bolts,
. Hot- dip galvanizing process shall comply with BS 729 as applicable. After gal
vanizing, processed
items shall be straightened free of all wrap-age and distortion caused by the ho
t dip process.
. Galvanized surfaces to receive paint coatings shall be given hot phosphate (bo
nderizing) shop pretreatment.
. Furnish to the Engineer, a certified statement that galvanizing and hot- phosp
hate pre- treatments
comply fully with this Specification.

Shop Painting
. All materials (plain and galvanized) (including non- ferrous where specified f
or paint finish) under this
Section shall be given a shop coat of primer as specified, using the appropriate
primers specified
previously in this Section.
. Immediately before painting, remove all rust, loose mill scale, dirt, weld flu
x, weld spatter and other
foreign material with wire brushes or steel scrappers. Remove all grease and oil
by use of detergent or
solvent as recommended by the manufacturer of the proposed painting system.
. Apply paint by spray process in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed
instructions to dry film
thickness recommended. Apply thoroughly and evenly and work well into corners an
d joints taking care
to avoid sags and runs.
. Do not paint surfaces to be embedded in concrete, or to be welded in the field
.
. After erection, sand smooth and retouch all portions of the shop coats chipped
or damaged during
erection, and coat all field welds and connections with the same paint used for
all the shop coat.
. All aluminium surfaces in contact with cement or concrete surfaces are to be g
iven two coats of bitumen
based paint before being fitted.

6.9 Workmanship
. Co- ordinate and provide details of the work as necessary to ensure co- ordina
tion with related building
elements and services. Liaise as necessary to ensure co- ordination of the work
with related building
elements and services, provide fabrication/installation drawings and other infor
mation requested, submit
sufficient copies of drawings, etc., for approval. Make any necessary amendments
in accordance with
any comments of the Engineer and without delay and re- submit unless it is confi
rmed that this is not
necessary and submit sufficient copies of final version of drawings, etc., for d
istribution to all parties.
. Take site dimensions and submit Drawings as detailed elsewhere in these docume
nts, showing
elevations, plans and full size sections, proposed methods of fixing, proposed m
ethods of forming
joints, any proposals for fabricating large components in more than one piece.
. Prepare control samples as requested and obtain Engineer's written approval of
appearance before
proceeding with manufacture.
. Fabricate metalwork carefully and accurately to ensure compliance with design
and performance
requirements, using types and grades of metal appropriate for the purpose. Finis
hed work must be free
from distortion and cracks. Use proprietary products to manufacturer's recommend
ations.
. Pre- finished metal may be used if the finish complies with this specification
, the methods of fabrication
do not damage or alter appearance at finish and the finish is adequately protect
ed during fabrication.
. Cold formed work, use brake presses or cold rolling to produce accurate profil
es with straight arrises.
Unless specified otherwise, mitre junctions of identical sections. Remove all bu
rrs and sharp arrises
which would be visible after fixing or a hazard to the user. After thermal cutti
ng stainless steel grind off
material which is liable to corrode.
. When assembled all moving parts must move freely and without binding.
. Prepare surfaces of metals to receive adhesives by degreasing and abrading mec
hanically or chemically
and form bond under pressure. Use adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's wr
itten
recommendations.
. Mechanical joints shall be tight with no visible gaps. Where screw heads will
be visible after component
is fixed, or raised screw heads would interfere with any moving part of componen
t, use counter-sunk
machine screws unless specified otherwise. Mechanical joints of components which
will be located
externally shall be bedded in bedding compound, including all mating surfaces, c
leats and other fixings.
. Thoroughly clean surfaces to be welded and ensure accurate fit using clamps an
d jigs where practicable.
Use tack welds only for temporary attachment unless specified otherwise. Make jo
ints with parent and
filler metal fully bonded throughout with no inclusions, holes, porosity or crac
ks. Completely remove
all traces of flux residue and slag. Prevent weld spatter falling on surfaces of
materials which will be
self-finished and visible in completed work. Butt welds which will be visible in
completed work shall
be finished smooth, flush with adjacent surfaces.
. Metal arc welding shall be to BS 5135 or other methods subject to approval. We
lding of stainless steel
shall be TIG welding to BS 3019: Part 2, or other methods subject to approval. U
se double bevel butt
welds, backing bars to remove heat, jigging, tack welds and any other measures n
ecessary to minimize
distortion.
. Remove slight distortion by light hammering, taking care not to damage surface
finish.
. Welding of aluminium alloys shall be TIG welding to BS 3019: Part I, or MIG we
lding to BS 3571:
Part I, or gas welding to BS 1126, or other methods subject to approval. Welding
of copper alloys shall
be fusion welding to BS 1077 for copper, or other methods subject to approval.
. Apply metal coatings after fabrication is complete and all fixing holes have b
een drilled, unless
otherwise, specified. Before applying coating remove all welding slag, weld spat
ter, anti- spatter
compounds, paints, grease, flux, rust, burrs, and sharp arrises and make good al
l defects which would
show after application of coating and finish surfaces smooth.
. Galvanizing shall comply with BS 729, sherardising to BS 4921, zinc spraying o
f iron and steel surfaces
shall comply with BS 2569: Part I and vitreous enameling of steel surfaces with
BS 3830 Surfaces of
stainless steel, bronze and brass which will be visible in the completed work sh
all be finely polished.
. All sections shall be protected to prevent distortion of metalwork during tran
sit, handling, storage and
fixing and damage to arrises, projecting features and surfaces which will be exp
osed in the finished
work. Prevent contact with mud, ashes, plaster and cement and provide protective
coverings as
necessary and remove on completion.
. Position metalwork accurately, plumb, level and true to line. Fix securely to
prevent pulling away,
deflection, or other movement during use. Do not distort when tightening fasteni
ngs and the like.
. Do not use railings or balustrades as strutting or supports after fixing for o
ther works. Do not weld,
braze or solder on site without approval.
. Fastenings shall be concealed where practicable. Thickness or metal and detail
s of assembly and
supports shall give ample strength and stiffness. Joints exposed to weather shal
l be formed to exclude
water. Do all cutting, punching, drilling and tapping required for attachment of
hardware and of work
by other trades.
. Generally metalwork shall conform to all Local Authority Bye- Laws, and, in li
eu of other specific legal
requirements, shall support any live loads which may normally be imposed plus a
safety factor of 2.5.

6.10 Installation
. All work shall be installed adjusted and glazed by experienced workmen all in
accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions and in full conformity with the approve
d shop drawings,
samples and other submitted data. Under no circumstances shall materials be inst
alled on surfaces that
contain condensation, dirt, grease or other foreign encountered materials that w
ould hinder or prevent
proper installation and functioning for the use intended.
. All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled with proper and approved
provision for
contraction and expansion and set in correct locations as per approved detailed
shop drawings, all level,
square, plumb and aligned with other work. All joints between framing and struct
ural building shall be
sealed in order to be watertight and weatherproof and to satisfy all other requi
rements of the Engineer.
. Frames shall be designed and manufactured with a maximum 2.5mm tolerance aroun
d the opening in
the structure. These joints are to be finished by applying an approved sealant i
nto a polystyrene foam
backing strip.
. All works are to be fully protected for the duration of the contract from dama
ge by other trades. The
Engineer shall approve the method of protection.
. If for any reason final finishes become scratched, abraded or damaged during t
ransport, delivery,
storage or erection, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to remove or re
pair those defective areas or
components as directed and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
. Repair work shall be identical to the manufacturer's applied finish with regar
d to gloss, finish and visual
appearance. Field touch up of painted aluminium is permitted only with the writt
en permission of the
Engineer. Where touch up is not an authorized means of repair the damaged materi
als must be replaced
by new.
. Upon completion of work all protective coverings from all exposed surfaces sha
ll be removed. All
surfaces shall be cleaned using soap or detergents as recommended by the alumini
um manufacturers to
remove sealants, discoloration and any other foreign material. Defection of any
type determined by the
Engineer shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
. Extreme care shall be taken when cleaning the exterior portion to protect all
other adjacent works.

6.11 Samples
. Submit duplicate samples of all finished materials for approval by Engineer. T
he samples will show the
full range of finishes and mechanical properties to be expected in the finished
product. Where physical
samples would otherwise be too large, examples will be given that can be readily
inspected locally, or
the Contractor will provide facilities for the Engineer's inspection at the Cont
ractor's expense.
. Unless specifically called for, size and form of each sample shall be as direc
ted by the Engineer.

6.12 Sealing joints

The contractor shall demonstrate that all sealants used in the building interior
 do not exceed the prescribed
VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) limits in the South Coast Air Quality Management
District Rule
1168.

The Contractor shall ensure that joints are dry and remove all loose material, d
ust and grease.

Joints shall be prepared in accordance with sealant manufacturer's recommendatio

ns using
recommended solvents and primers where necessary.

Adjoining surfaces which would be impossible to clean if smeared with sealant sh

all be masked.

Backing strips shall be inserted in all joints to be pointed with sealant.

When using backing strips, the Contractor shall not leave gaps and shall not red
uce depth of joint for
sealant to less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer.
Cavities shall be filled and jointed with sealant in accordance with the manufac
turer's recommendations.

Sealant shall be tooled to form a smooth flat bead.

Excess sealant shall be removed from adjoining surfaces using cleaning materials
recommended by the
sealant manufacturer, and shall be left clean.
6.13 Glazing
All glazing work shall be installed by skilled workmen experienced in this work
in accordance with BS
6262.

The Contractor shall fix all glass with the required gaskets, clips, beads, etc.

All glass shall be of the type, shape and size indicated on the drawings and/or
specification here under.
All types of glass shall be free of waves, bubbles, and other defects.

All glass panels shall have rounded edges to prevent any damage to gaskets.

The Contractor shall produce on request all invoices or advice notes from suppli
ers to confirm that the
glass is of the standard specified. Any scratched, broken or otherwise defective
glass is to be removed and
replaced by the Contractor at his cost during or on completion of the Works.

The contractor shall submit for approval, details / evidence of all calculations
/ methods of determining
the required target u-value of all windows. Suitable performance tests are to be
conducted to ensure that
the thermal breaks installed are effective and that infiltration rates are withi
n the specified limits.
6.14 Glazing Materials
General
The Contractor shall submit representative samples of all glass he proposes to i
nstall in the Works. On
receipt of the Engineer's approval of same the Contractor shall commence the pro
curement of the
glass.
Alternatively, the combined U-Values of the window units, Glass and frame shall
meet the following
performance parameters: U-Value 1.90 W/m2K , SHGC of 0.23 and infiltration of
0.35 ach.
Sheet Glass
Sheet glass shall be flat-drawn clear sheet glass complying with BS 952, Section
1, and ref 4(a),
Ordinary Glazing Quality .
Plate Glass
Plate glass shall be cast, rolled or drawn glass ground and polished on both sur
faces complying with BS 952
, Section 1, ref 6a(1), Glazing Quality for Glazing .
 Obscured Glass
Obscured glass shall be figured rolled glass complying with BS 952, Section 2, r
ef 14b of approved
type.
Wired Glass
Wired glass shall be polished Georgian wired glass having both surfaces ground a
nd polished and with
square mesh inserted during rolling complying with BS 952 , Section 4, ref 21b.
Heat Absorbing Glass
Heat absorbing glass shall be floated glass substantially opaque to infra-red ra
diation complying with BS
952, Section 4, ref 23. Tint and manufacture to Engineer s approval.
Toughened Glass
Toughened glass shall be tempered or heat-treated and comply with BS 952, Sectio
n4, ref 25. Tint and
manufacture to Engineer s approval.
Poly-carbonate Glass
Translucent and bendable poly-carbonate glass panels to comply with standards.
Double and Multiple Glazing Units
Double and multiple glazing units shall comply with BS 952, Section 4, and ref 3
5. The glazing units
shall be to the size shown on the drawings with the panes hermetically sealed at
their periphery with
dehydrated air in between. The gap between the panes shall be 12mm wide. Glass a
s described shall be
used in the fabrication of the sealed units with the glass tint (Bronze) thickne
ss and manufacture all to the
Engineer s approval. Use panels comprising 6mm thick panes with 12mm wide air spac
e.
Mirrors
Mirrors shall be of uniform thickness, free from waviness, air bubbles and the l
ike. Representative samples
of mirror shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. The mirror glass shall
be clear and silvered by
nitrate precipitation, protected by copper plating with a protective plastic coa
ting on the reverse side. The
mirrors shall be 6 mm thick and cut to sizes as shown with ground and polished e
dges. The mirrors shall be
set on 20 mm thick plywood backing plugged and screwed to wall.
6.15 Glass opening
The glass framing shall both structurally support and adequately cushion the gla
ss. To prevent mechanical
and thermal stresses on the glass, the framing system shall provide openings tha
t are within the tolerances
for squareness, corner offset and bow. These tolerances are listed below.

Item
Tolerance
Squareness
3mm difference in lengths of the diagonals.
Corner Offsets
0.8mm maximum offsets at corners.
Bow
1.6mm bow in a 1.22m length of frame.
 Glass frame tolerances

If the variations from these tolerances are anticipated, details of same shall b
e advised to the Engineer. If
site conditions are found to be outside these tolerances corrections must be mad
e before the openings are
glazed.
6.16 Glass Installation
Workmanship shall generally be in accordance with CP 152 and respective British
Standards. The glass is to
be delivered to the site with adequate protection to prevent damage and where po
ssible it is to be fixed in
position immediately after delivery. When fixed the Contractor is to take all ne
cessary precautions to
prevent damage during succeeding building operations and will be entirely respon
sible for the replacement
of any broken or damaged glass at his own cost.

The Contractor is to be solely responsible for determining the exact sizes of gl

ass required, including a
tolerance of 2mm to each edge and he is recommended to check the necessary dimen
sions on site.
No glazing is to be carried out until rebates have been painted with primer. Gla
zing beads as applicable
are also to be primed before fixing.

All mastic is to be neatly struck off to agree exactly with site lines inside an
d out.

Rates are to include for all necessary springs, clips, setting blocks, location
blocks and distance pieces and
for taking off and later re-fixing loose beads.

Glass apertures in timber doors are to be bedded in chamois leather glazing stri
p, black ribbon velvet or
P.V.C. glazing strip to the approval of the Engineer.
6.17 Cleaning
All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned and polished on both sides and all paint s
pots and the like completely
removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
6.18 Cat ladders
Cat ladders where noted on the drawings shall be aluminium and unless otherwise
detailed shall be
constructed as follows: Stringers shall be 50 x 6mm flat attached to the structu
re with 75 x 75 x 6 mm
plates bolted to the structure at not less than 300mm center to center.

Treads shall be formed of 19mm tube riveted to the stringers.

Safety loops shall be fitted to cat ladders more than 2000mm long and thereafter
at 1000mm intervals.
The width across the loop shall be 685mm and the distance from the centre line o
f the stringers to the inside
of the back of the loops measured at right angles to the stringers shall be 762m
m. The loop material shall be
minimum 50 x 12mm.
6.19 Expansion Joint Trims, Etc.
The Contractor is to provide, at all expansion joints in floors, roofs, ceilings
, walls and columns, appropriate
extruded aluminium expansion joint cover system as appropriate and as shown on t
he drawings and fixed
in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions including all necessa
ry components and fixings.
Floor, wall, roof and ceiling joint covers shall be approved joint seals 50 mm d
eep. Butt joints within
continuing runs shall be a maximum of 6 m apart and will be sealed during instal
lation using patent butt
joint sealing method and be finished standard grey.
Transition pieces at changes of direction and at joints between horizontal and v
ertical joint covers
shall be factory fabricated.
The contractor shall ensure that the sealants wherever used in the interior of t
he building do not exceed the
prescribed VOC limits in the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 11
68.
7 CARPENTRY & JOINERY
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.
The contractor shall ensure that no ACM s (Asbestos Containing Material) or CAA (C
hromated
Copper Arsenate) treated timber are used in the project.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

7.1 Timber Generally
Joiner's work shall be carried out in accordance with the drawings and the princ
iples of first class
construction.
Full details of the timber to be used are to be submitted to the Engineer and th
e quality for any purpose is to
be approved before any timber is delivered to site.
Hardwood is to be defined as BS 881 and softwood as defined in BS 589 and 1186.
The timber is to be of the best quality available having due regard for the purp
ose for which it is required
and it is to be seasoned to a moisture content of 14%- 15% before transportation
.
The Contractor is to take a site reading to determine the moisture content of al
l joinery by Moisture
Meter. Documentation is to accompany each batch shipped to verify the moisture c
ontent. Without such
documentation the whole batch will be rejected.
The Engineer shall reject all unsound timber caused by decay, insect attack, sap
wood, splits, shakes, and
wavy edges, pith pockets, together with large, lose or dead knots.
Unless stated otherwise, sizes shown on drawings are finished sizes. All timber
is wrot on all faces unless
otherwise stated.
Timber which is to be plugged to the structure shall be properly and securely fi
xed by means of rawl plugs,
rawl-plastic or hardwood plugs cut on the twist. Nails shall be in accordance wi
th British Standard
No.1202.
For wood works installed inside the building, the contractor is required to use
timber and composite
wood products that are certified. The certification should be complete with chai
n of custody certificates
associated with each timber product and evidence of purchase and installation of
the certified timber
products from suppliers and installers.
The contractor shall ensure certification under any one approved certification s
chemes such as Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC), Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification S
cheme (PEFC), Canadian
Standards Association (CSA), Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI) and Malaysian
Timer Certification
Scheme (MTCS). The contractor shall also ensure that all timber and timber produ
cts will not include species
on the CITES list of endangered species. Construction timber used may however be
from non-certified
sources.
7.2 Timber for Caracassing
Timber for caracassing generally is to be imported European or Canadian softwood
, free from decayed or
loose knots, splits and any sign of fungus/live insect attack, and to the approv
al of the Engineer.

The structural softwood is to be straight, close grained, with not less than eig
ht annular rings to 25 mm.
Unless otherwise described all sawed softwood members are to be of a permissible
species (as listed in
Schedule 6 of the building Regulations) of Species Group S2 of CP 112 Part 2 and
are to be of GS or
MGS grade, as defined in BS 4978. Imported timber which has been visually or mac
hine stress graded
overseas and which meets the requirement of BS 4978 may be used with the Enginee
r's permission.
7.3 Softwood for joinery
The softwood timber for joinery is to be European Redwood, Swedish, Russian or R
omanian White
wood, or other equal and approved, selected for joinery work.

Softwood joinery timber is to be selected with due regard for the particular pur
pose for which it is to be
used, Appendix A of BS 1186 (Part I) being used as a guide.

Softwood shall comply in all respects with BS. 881/589 and 1186.

Timber shall be of an approved variety and quality suitable for the purpose for
which it is to be used and
equal to samples approved by the Engineer.

All timber shall be properly seasoned and shall be sawed square, straight, and t
rue. All timber shall be free
from the following defects:-

. Splits, ring shakes, soft pith.

. Checks exceeding 300mm long
. Checks exceeding 20mm wide
. Checks exceeding in depth one half of the thickness of the timber
. Knots exceeding 30mm
. Knots exceeding one half of the width of the surface
. Decayed or dead knots unless cut out and plugged
. Loose knot or knot holes unless cut out and plugged
. Pith pockets
. Decay and insects attack.

7.4 Hardwood or joinery

Hardwood for joinery is to be first quality Teak Wood unless otherwise stated, a
nd it is to be suitable for
its intended use in accordance with Appendix B of BS 1186 (Part I).

Hardwood for joinery is to be quarter sawed unless otherwise indicated and is to

show a straight and
regular grain throughout without shakes or other defects which would reduce the
mechanical or physical
properties of the timber. Timber in the finished joinery is to be free from wool
ly texture, soft heart,
sapwood, splits, and shakes, dote, all evidence of fungus/insect attack and all
faults caused by compression
failures. There are to be no wavy edges.
It is to be free from unsound knots and there are to be no knots of any descript
ion on exposed faces, unless
specifically agreed. Plugging or piecing in will not be permitted.

In joined panels each piece shall be of the same species. Joinery for staining o
r polishing shall have all
surfaces of the same character of grain running in the same direction.

Color of hardwood throughout is to be consistent and to the approval of the Engi

neer.
7.5 Preservative treatment
The preservative treatment to all timber shall comply with the requirements of E
N 1995 or equivalent
for any species not listed therein. The Contractor shall provide a certificate o
f assurance that treatment
has been carried out as specified. Any ends cut after treatments are to be given
two coats of preservative.
Factory fabricated timber and components shall be treated therein.

All grounds and other timber to be built into concrete or block walls or otherwi
se covered shall first be
coated all over with approved wood preservative and anti-termite solution suitab
le for the position in
which the member is to be incorporated.
7.6 Fire Resistance and Flame retardants
All timber, plywood and boarding shall comply with the requirements of BS 476 an
d 5669 in respect of
fire resistance and the application/treatment of flame retardants. The Contracto
r shall provide a certificate of
assurance that such compliance/treatment has been carried out as specified.
7.7 Plywood
Plywood generally is to comply with BS 1455 and BS 6566 and is only to be obtain
ed from a
manufacturer approved by the Engineer.

The plywood bonding is generally to be type WBP, except where otherwise stated.
The Contractor is only to
use plywood of the required thickness, and under no circumstances is he to make
up thickness by gluing
together sheets of thinner plywood.

The surface grading is to be Grade 1 where to receive clear finish and Grade 2 e
lsewhere, unless
otherwise described. The Contractor is only to use a fine tooth saw when cutting
plywood.

Plywood shall be free from end joints, (including scarf joints in veneers) overl
aps in core sheets, dead
knots, patches and plugs, open defects, depression due to defects in core, insec
t attack, (except isolated
pin-worm holes through face veneers only), fungal attack and from dis coloration
differing from that
normally associated with the species.
Face veneers shall be durable and shall be capable of being finished to a smooth
surface. Face veneers
shall closely match the general joinery timber supplied. They shall be free from
knots, worm and beetle
holes, splits, glue stains, filling and inlay of any kind or other defects.

Adhesives shall comply with the requirements of BS 1203, Grade W.B.P. and shall
ensure proper
adhesion between plies.
All plywood shall be of exterior grade unless otherwise stated.

Where required, lippings are to be hardwood, tongued and glued to the edge of th
e plywood to finish a
minimum of 12mm thick.
7.8 Block Board
Block board is to comply with BS 3444 and bonding and surface grading are to be
as previously described
for plywood.
7.9 Chipboard
Chipboard is to comply with BS 5669 and is to be of the density specified on the
shop drawings.
Chipboard is to be used in accordance with the recommendations of the Chipboard
Promotion Association.
7.10 Veneers
Veneers shall be roll-cut veneers, minimum 0.6mm thick, having a class a facing
in accordance with
French Standards, NF B 53.504.
The veneers shall be factory applied under pressure using urea-formol adhesive b
y manufacturer of the
various components, all veneers shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer.

The reverse faces of veneered boards shall always have a balancing veneer of the
same type. The choice of
veneer is to be to the approval of the Engineer.
Whole sheets are to be used wherever possible to minimize jointly and edges are
to be lipped with
matching hardwood fillets, which are to be the full thickness of the sheet and 6
mm thick.

The Contractor is only to use a fine tooth saw when cutting the veneer faced boa
rds, and any edges
arising are to be faced with a hardwood fillet to match factory produced edges.
7.11 Plastic Laminate
Decorative plastic laminate (melamine) sheeting shall comply with BS 3794 Class
1.

The sheeting shall be capable of being post formed at the edges without cracking
, breaking, chipping or
the like. Under no circumstances shall edges be stuck on but formed from whole s
heets covering the main
body of the item of work.

Only whole sheets shall be used and fixing of the sheeting shall generally be as
stated above for Veneers.
VGS class laminate shall generally be used for doors while HGP class laminate sh
all be used for all other
applications including post forming. Selection of laminate and choice of color s
hall be to the approval of
the Engineer.
7.12 Hardboard
Hardboard is to be standard quality in accordance with BS 1142 Part 2.
7.13 Nails and screws
Nails are to comply with BS 1201 and screws with BS 1210 they are to be of the a
ppropriate approved type
for their intended use.
7.14 Metal work
Metalwork fixings are to be galvanized and of a make and pattern approved by the
Engineer.

. Bolts are to comply with BS 4190

. Fixing accessories are to comply with BS 1494
. Timber connectors are to comply with BS 1579
. Expanding bolts to the approval of Engineer.

7.15 Adhesives
The contractor shall demonstrate that all adhesives and sealants used in the bui
lding interior do not exceed
the prescribed VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) limits in the South Coast Air Qua
lity Management
District Rule 1168.
Adhesives are to be synthetic resin type complying with BS 1204 Part 1, and they
are to be type WBP.
7.16 Access panels and the like
The Contractor is to provide access doors, panels and traps to the complete sati
sfaction of the Engineer,
wherever access may be necessary in order to maintain the services within the bu
ilding.

Accesses which are likely to be used regularly are to be formed with hinged lock
able panels; those used
irregularly are to be capable of being removed by releasing screws or clips.
7.17 Workmanship
Joinery shall comply with BS 1186 Part 2 and CP 112 for structural carpentry, an
d where possible
shall be fabricated in a manufacturer's shop prior to delivery. It shall be accu
rately, properly and soundly
constructed with all moulds and arises clean and sharp. Joinery shall be protect
ed from damage during
storage at Site and throughout the construction period subsequent to fixing.

The terms "frame" or "framed" or "framing" mean work put together by proper carp
entry or joinery
joints, such as mortising and tenoning, dovetaling, dowelling, etc., and the joi
nts are to be as shown,
specified or directed. Butted and screwed or nailed joints or halved joints and
the like will not be deemed
framed and will not be accepted for framed work.

Fixing of all joinery work, including fillets, architraves, frames, glazing bead
s and the like shall be by
means of screws. Nailed work will not be permitted.

Screw heads in work to be painted shall be countersunk and stopped. Screw heads
in wood to be oiled,
varnished or polished shall be plated, with the grain of the pellet in the same
direction as the grain of the
member.

Unless otherwise described, work described as "plugged" shall be fixed by drilli

ng holes in the wall or floor,
plugging with "Plastic Plugs" well rammed in and fixing the member with screws.
Centers of the fixings
must not exceed those necessary to provide adequate support, and in any case mus
t not exceed 600 mm.
7.18 Packaging and storage
All timber and composite items are to be polythene wrapped at 14% moisture conte
nt before
transportation
The timber is to be properly stored and protected on site until immediately prio
r to fixing when the
polythene is to be removed and the timber stacked above the ground in the shade.

The Contractor is to ensure that the timber is covered in wet weather and uncove
red in dry weather and
is to replace any damaged or otherwise affected items at his own expense.
All factory fabricated units and components shall be stored in their packing unt
il fixing of same commences
to ensure that damage is kept to a minimum.
7.19 Wooden doors
In general for all wooden doors installed inside the building, the contractor is
required to use timber and
composite wood products that are certified. The certification should be complete
with chain of custody
certificates associated with each timber product and with evidence of purchase a
nd installation of the
certified timber products from suppliers and installers.

The contractor shall ensure certification under any approved certification schem
es such as Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC), Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification S
cheme (PEFC),
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI) and
Malaysian Timer
Certification Scheme (MTCS). The contractor shall also ensure that all timber an
d timber products will
not include species on the CITES list of endangered species.

The contractor shall ensure that all wood products used for the doors do not exc
eed class E1 levels for
formaldehyde content and do not exceed 5ppm for Pentachlorophenol (PCP) content.
Wood product must
be tested, classified and marked according to the requirement of BS EN 14342:200
5

Unless shown otherwise the non-fire-rated hollow core flush doors are to be cons
tructed from 25mm x
75mm top and bottom rail and stiles, 25mm x 50mm intermediate cross rails at 100
mm centers , both
sides covered with plywood glued and pinned to framing and veneered as described
for painting or clear
finish and with extra blockings in the lock position.

All flush doors are to comply generally with BS459 (1988) in the case of hollow
cored and semi-solid
doors and BS 459 Part 3 in the case of fire resisting doors. Doors are to be con
structed to the
thickness, size and type as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer
. Flush doors
generally shall be solid core flush faced with a teak veneer finish prepared to
receive varnish decoration.

The core of fire-rated solid core flush doors shall be constructed of longitudin
al laminations of precision
planed timber, butt jointed and glued with resin based adhesive under hydraulic
pressure, the whole
forming a rigid, fire resistant raft.

Where flush doors are to have rebated or rounded stiles the lippings at the edge
s must be increased
sufficiently to allow for these labours. Cutting rebates or forming rounding s on
standard sized lippings
will not be permitted.
In the case of hollow cored or semi-solid doors, blockings shall be built into t
he construction of the door to
provide firm fixings for locks, bolts, hinges, springs, and other ironmongery. P
ositions of these
blockings shall be indicated on the facing of the door, care being taken to avoi
d permanent marking.
All doors are to be hardwood lipped on all edges. The lippings shall be a minimu
m of 12mm thick
securely jointed and tongued into the framing of the door. Where rebate meeting
stiles are required on pairs
of door, the lippings on the meeting edges shall be a minimum of 20mm thick.

Doors shall be properly fitted to give a uniform clearance of not more than 3 mm
all round and hinges shall
be let into doors and frames.
Where observation panels are required they shall be formed to the dimensions and
using the type of
glass shown on the drawings. The opening is to be lipped all round similarly to
the edges of the door.
The glass is to bedded in non-setting mastic as described in the "Glazing Sectio
n" and held in position
with two sets of glazing beads to the section shown on the drawings, fixed with
small brads or lost
head nails.

Where observation panels occur in doors with a clear finish, the lippings and be
ads shall be in a hardwood to
match the veneer, and the beads shall be fixed with brass cups and screw.

Fire doors shall have a 1.5 hour fire rating unless otherwise described, and sha
ll generally be constructed
in accordance with the relevant British Standard or DIN Standard. All fire doors
shall be fixed with an
intumescent strip insert in their frame.

All fire doors shall be provided with appropriate certificate from a recognized
and approved testing
agency to British Standards requirements
7.20 Protection, finishing and re-examination
All the wood for joinery works, whether it is to be painted or left clear finish
ed, shall be supplied
properly planed and rubbed down.
The joinery shall be properly protected during fixing and work by other trades,
especially frames and
door linings which may require temporary casings.

The frames shall be fitted with a temporary threshold to retain frame shape whic
h can be removed
before floor finishes are laid.
Units supplied "pre- finished" (veneered doors, pre painted doors etc.) shall be
supplied with an appropriate
wrapping, and the Contractor shall repair or replace any defective work, no matt
er from whatever cause, in
order to hand over the works in perfect condition.

All joinery shall be accurately set out, framed and executed in accordance with
the detailed drawings.
Where timber work is required to be wrought it shall be machine dressed, unless
otherwise directed.

Joinery shall be cut and framed at an early stage, but shall not be glued or wed
ged until the building is
ready to receive it.
Framed work shall be properly mortised and tenoned, wedged and glued, and crampe
d and dowelled
together where necessary. All joints, mort ices, tenons, housings, etc., shall b
e perfectly formed and fitted,
and all joints shall be painted over with the best red lead before fixing. All f
aces of joinery in direct
contact with block work, concrete or rendering shall be painted over with best r
ed lead before fixing.
All external joinery is to be put together with waterproofing glue. Butted, scre
wed or nailed joints will not
be acceptable for framed work.
The jointing and fabrication are to be such that the shrinkage of any part shall
be compensated at the joint,
and shall not impair the strength of the finished work nor interfere with the co
nstruction tolerances.

The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to check or prevent capillary p
enetration of water in the
joints and open connections of external joinery works.

The use of nails for fixing any items of joinery will not be permitted. Springs
may be used for glazing
beads only.
Screws shall be in accordance with BS1210 All screws shall be countersunk and pu
ttied and all springs
shall be punched and puttied. All joinery work such as architrave s, beads, etc.,
required to fit against
the contour or irregular surfaces shall be accurately scribed to ensure a close
connection.

All joinery which is to be polished varnished or painted shall be finished smoot

h and clean by rubbing
down with fine glass paper.

Except where the work is to be built-in the Contractor shall obtain all dimensio
ns for joinery works from
the building structure. Carpentry work which does not form an essential part of
the structure fabric shall not
be carried out nor brought on to the building site until required.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary covering and box in and
protect all work liable
to damage, and shall provide temporary doors where necessary during the progress
of the work. The
Contractor shall ensure that the work of other trades is properly arranged to ob
tain the best results, both in
the joinery and the other trades.

After the setting, placing and fixing of the joinery, the Contractor shall exami
ne all the works and ensure
that they are fixed correctly. Until the issue of the Practical Completion Certi
ficate and handover of the
entire work, the Contractor shall replace at his own expense, all missing or def
ective parts. At the end of the
works, the Contractor shall check all opening units and their proper functioning
, and shall grease all moving
parts, if necessary.

After handover, the Contractor shall maintain his work and shall, on request, ca
rry out all easing and
adjustments as required.
In the case where defects appear especially, twisting of doors and the like, the
Contractor shall rectify such
defects at his own expense.
7.21 Ironmongery
General
All ironmongery shall be selected for the appearance and performance required an
d shall be obtained from
a well-known reputable manufacturer and shall bear the stamp of the manufacturer
. Unless specified
otherwise all ironmongery shall be supplied from the same manufacturer.
The Contractor shall not use in the works types or classes of ironmongery other
than those specified
except with approval in writing of the Engineer.

The type, location, quality and finish of ironmongery shall be as shown on the d
rawings and the Contractor
shall submit for approval a comprehensive schedule of ironmongery covering all i
tems required to
complete the works. This schedule shall give catalog references and locations fo
r all ironmongery.

All screws used for fixing ironmongery shall be supplied and shall be of the cor
rect type, material,
finish, size and shape to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The base metals for finishes shall be as follows:

Base Metals
Steel
nylon finish
mild steel
aluminium finish
aaluminiu
nickel plated
bronze or brass
stainless steel finish
stainless steel
 Base metals for finishes
Workmanship
All ironmongery shall be carefully wrapped and protected until the completion of
the work and any items
or parts which are damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense before
handover of the works.

Any locks with steel components which are to be used in or near damp rooms shall
be hot galvanized and
painted before fixing.
All ironmongery shall be securely fixed or housed and all rebates, holes, etc.,
to take ironmongery shall be
neatly and cleanly executed.

All hinges shall be carefully housed or let into the hinged elements and to the
frames. Intumescent paste
shall be applied around all ironmongery to be fixed on fire doors.
All fitting shall be removed before starting any painting operations and re-fixe
d in place after all painting
work is completed and approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall check and adjust all ironmongery, and oil or grease moving
parts to ensure good
performance.

On completion, all locks, catches and similar types of ironmongery shall be prop
erly cleaned, tested and
oiled or greased.
Suiting
Locks shall be selected from a range of ironmongery having compatible keys. It w
ill be a requirement
that the locks shall be so arranged as to accept a common master key and sub- di
vided so as to offer a
number of sub master keys.

Locks shall employ a construction key facility and shall be delivered to site wi
th copies of a construction
master key for each building or floor. The Contractor shall propose to the Engin
eer and account for the
number of keys required for the construction period. An additional construction
master key will be required
for the Employer's security personnel.
Upon completion of construction, the manufacturer's representative along with th
e Employer and/or his
appointed agent and the Contractor, shall visit the site with a changeover key t
o reset all cylinders and it
shall not be possible to reinstate the construction key facility once this has b
een done. The `changeover'
key shall be destroyed once the construction key has been canceled.
Permanent individual keys and Master Keys shall be handed directly to the Employ
er or his appointed
agent together with Master key charts upon completion of the above procedures.

Replacement keys and cylinders shall only be obtained from the manufacturer by a
n agreed procedure with
the Employer.
7.22 Service ducts and access panels
Provide service ducts and access panels to sanitary appliances and fittings, dry
riser, electric panel and
the like as shown on detailed and location drawings. Ducts and panels shall gene
rally be de-mountable
comprising plywood board fixing to galvanized steel frames with countersunk mach
ine screws. All framing
shall be galvanized and painted. Outside face of ducts and panels shall be finis
hed to receive the adjacent
wall finish. Externally located ducts and panels shall be constructed accordingl
y using only properly treated
materials.
Size of service ducts and access panels shall be as shown. Contractor shall prov
ide details of proposed
framing and fixing details for Engineer's approval prior to commencing work.
7.23 Kitchen cabinet
The contractor shall source and install wooden kitchen cabinets together with al
l the fixtures and fittings
including the kitchen sink, counter tops, cabinet lighting, platform lighting an
d garbage collection bins
required for waste segregation.

For the kitchen cabinets, the contractor is required to use timber and composite
wood products that are
certified. The certification should be complete with chain of custody certificat
es associated with each
timber product and with evidence of purchase and installation of the certified t
imber products from
suppliers and installers.

The contractor shall ensure certification under any approved certification schem
es such as Forest
Stewardship Council (FSC), Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification S
cheme (PEFC),
Canadian Standards Association (CSA), Sustainable Forestry Initiative (SFI) and
Malaysian Timer
Certification Scheme (MTCS). The contractor shall also ensure that all timber an
d timber products will
not include species on the CITES list of endangered species.

All installed wood works shall meet Class E1 levels of formaldehyde content in a
ccordance to the
information.

Detailed shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architects / Engineer for revie
w and approval prior to any
installation activities.

All sealants and adhesives used in the installation shall be non-polluting and s
hall have low VOC content.
7.24 Frames and lining to doors and window
Frames and linings shall be provided and built to the dimensions and sections sh
own on the drawings or
as directed by the Engineer. Frame members are to be framed together and linings
are to be tongued at
angles all in accordance with the principals of good construction.
7.25 Architrave s stops, etc
All architrave s, stops, cover beads, glazing beads, etc., are to be provided and
fixed to the dimensions
and sections shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer with neatly mi
tred angles.

Stops to half hour fire resisting doors are either to be worked out of the solid
or otherwise fixed with screws
at maximum 18" centers. Stops to one hour fire resisting doors are to be worked
out of the solid, all in
accordance with BS 459 Part 3.

Glazing beads shall be fixed with small brads or lost-head nails or in the case
of work to receive a
clear finish, with brass cups and screws.
7.26 Dry wall partitions
The drywall partitions shall comprise and be constructed using the following spe
cifications:
Materials:
All materials shall be of Gyproc from British Gypsum or equal and approved.
Drywall partitions shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructio
ns. All materials should have
Engineer's approval prior to commencement of Works.
Internal drywall partitions will have a total thickness of 75mm, 0.5 hour fire r
esistance and 44 decibel
average sound reduction index. Two hour resistance drywall partitions shall incl
ude fire resistant lining to
give specified rating.
Drywall partitions having glazing vision panels shall consist of two 6 mm clear
monolithic float glass
with aluminium frame and beading covering the full width of the wall.
Metal Studs:
Metal studs and channels of 48 mm width to be made of light weight cold rolled,
galvanized mild steel to
comply with BS 2989 and BS 2994 Vertical studs shall be installed at 600 mm maxi
mum centers. Dampproof
membrane will be inserted under the floor channel.
Plasterboards:
Gypsum plaster boards of 12.7 mm thick to comply with BS 1230, shall be screwed
to the studs, carefully
cut and jointed.
The lining shall be skimmed with taped joints to receive finish.
Insulation:
All drywall shall receive 40 mm resin bonded glass wool slabs, 68 kg/m, to be ins
talled between the
plasterboard linings.
Services:
Prior to installing insulation and plasterboard on second side, all pipes, switc
h boxes, etc. will be fixed,
inspected and tested if required.
Heavy fixtures such as lavatory cisterns and hand basins shall have a timber fra
me inside the partition
with vertical and horizontal members to take the required fixings.
8 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities,

All suspended ceiling system to comply with the requirements of BS EN 13964:2004

SECTION 4.5, in
relation to asbestos and formaldehyde content i.e. there must be no asbestos, th
e formaldehyde content
must not exceed class E1 levels and must be tested, classified and appropriately
marked.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

8.1 Cement
The cement shall be as described in 'Concrete work'.
8.2 Water
All water used in the completion of the finishes as specified herein shall be cl
ear, clean, potable, fresh water,
free from all deleterious matter or chemical impurities which may adversely affe
ct the finishes and shall
comply with BS 3148.
8.3 Sand
The sand is to be clean, sharp, river or pit sand free from earth, loam, saline
materials or other impurities and
well graded from coarse to fine.

For use in plastering, sand is to comply with the requirements of BS1198 Table 1
.
For use in beds, granolithic finishing, tile bedding and jointing, etc., sand is
to comply with the requirements
of BS 1199 Table 1.
8.4 Lime
The lime used in plasters is to be hydrated complying with BS 890 Class B.
8.5 Gypsum Plaster
Gypsum plaster shall be a dual-purpose plaster (undercoat and finishing) as reta
rded hemi- hydrates
gypsum Class B as BS 1191 The resultant plaster shall be capable of being trowel
ed to a smooth surface,
highly resistant to cracking and crazing and chemically inert when set.
8.6 Admixtures and plasticisers
All additives and the like shall only be used when approved in writing by the En
gineer and in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
8.7 Color pigments
The contractor shall demonstrate that all paints and coatings used in the buildi
ng are within the
maximum VOC content limits of the European directive 2004/42/CE: 2004/as mention
ed in the PBRS guide
book.

All paints and coatings must have fungal resistance in the wet state (to protect
from fungal growth in
the paint tin) and all wet spaces (bathrooms and kitchens) must have fungal resi
stance that also provide
protection in the dry state (after the paint has been applied and dryed)

Color pigments shall comply with the requirements of BS 1014, and are to be lime
proof and non-fading.
8.8 Plasterboards
Plasterboard shall be self- finished gypsum wallboard, or gypsum lath or baseboa
rd where to receive a
skim coat, complying with requirements of BS 1230
8.9 Metal lathing, stops and beads, expansion joint cover strip
Metal lathing, stops and beads are to suit the plaster and tile thicknesses and
are to be as
manufactured by The Expanded Metal Co. Ltd., U.K., Catnic Components Ltd., or Ha
ffan or equal and
approved, and is to be fixed with non- ferrous nails to walls strictly in accord
ance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

Expansion Joint Cover Strip (for all Types of Finishes generally)

Expansion joint, cover strips shall be extruded mill finish aluminium profiles a
s manufactured by
Expandito Ltd. or other equal and approved, fixed in accordance with the manufac
turer's instructions.
8.10 Ceramic tiles
Unglazed ceramic floor tiles and coved skirting are to comply with the requireme
nts of BS 1286 The
glazed ceramic wall and floor tiles are to comply with the requirements of BS 12
81
8.11 Adhesives and sealants
The contractor shall demonstrate that all adhesives and sealants used in the bui
lding interior do not exceed
the prescribed VOC limits as mentioned in the South Coast Air Quality Management
District Rule 1168.

3-4 mm high performance tropical grade thin flatbed water proof membrane adhesiv
e by FEB, BASF or
FOSROC or equal and approved - applied in accordance to manufacturer's written i
nstructions.
Specifically designed for the fixing of tiles in wet areas and provide a waterpr
oof membrane to substrate.
8.12 Surface hardeners
The Contractor shall treat surfaces of cement and sand screeds with suitable med
ium duty surface
hardener, used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
8.13 Workmanship generally
Workmanship shall conform to the recommendations of the appropriate Codes of Pra
ctice and to full
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor is responsible for the provision of
all labour, scaffolding,
materials, tools, plant, etc., required for the completion of the execution of t
he Works, to the full
satisfaction of the Engineer.
8.14 Defective/damaged work
All defective or damaged work shall be cut out and patched as directed by the En
gineer. All patched
surfaces shall match the consistency and finish of the original surface and shal
l be level with adjoining
surfaces.

Damaged or deteriorated materials and manufactured items shall not be used in th

e Works. Any materials or
manufactured items damaged during and after bedding or setting in position shall
be removed and replaced
by and at the Contractor's expense.
8.15 Storage
All branded materials delivered to site are to be properly stored in a watertigh
t shed on a dry floor, or in
equivalent conditions to avoid deterioration prior to use. Any materials which d
eteriorate or become
damaged before use are to be removed from site and replaced at the Contractor's
expense.
8.16 Preparation of surfaces
Surfaces to receive plastering, beds and the like are to be dry brushed to remov
e all loose particles, dust,
laitance, efflorescence and the like, any projecting fins on concrete surfaces s
hall be hacked off. All traces of
mould oil shall be removed from concrete surfaces by scrubbing with water contai
ning detergents and
rinsing with fresh water.
Surfaces are to be wetted and re- wetted as required to equalize suction before
the first coat of plaster or the
like is applied. Particularly dense, hard concrete surfaces are to be wetted and
re- wetted as required before
bonding plaster is applied.
Where surfaces are out of line, they are to be brought to level by hacking or du
bbing out in similar mix to the
undercoat prior to commencement of finishing. Irregularities in surfaces to be p
lastered shall be filled with
mortar (without lime) twenty four hours before plastering commences.
Joints in block work and the like shall be well raked out before re-plastering t
o form a good key. Smooth
concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be treated with an approved proprietary
bonding agent.
Before plastering is commenced all junctions between differing materials shall b
e reinforced. This shall
apply where walls join columns and beams, particularly where flush, and similar
situations where cracks are
likely to develop and as directed by the Engineer. The reinforcement shall consi
st of a strip of expanded
metal lathing 300mm wide which shall be plugged, nailed or stapled as required a
t intervals not exceeding
450mm at both edges fixed to cover both materials evenly.
The reinforcement is also to be provided over all electrical conduits and servic
e pipes running within the
walls.
Plastering shall not be commenced until all mechanical and electrical services,
conduits, pipes and fixtures
have been installed.
The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the suitability of all surfaces prior
to the commencement of
the application of the finishing material.
8.17 Plastering and rendering
Internal plastering is to comply with BS 5492

The plaster for use internally is to be composed of one part cement, one quarter
part lime and four parts of
sand, and is to be applied in two coats to the finished stated thickness.

The render for use externally is to be composed of one part cement and four part
s of sand, and is to be
applied to the finished stated thickness externally. A small quantity of lime ma
y be added to this mix at
the Engineer's discretion.

Plaster or render is to be mixed in clean buckets and gauge boxes. All tools are
to be kept clean and fresh
plaster or render is not to be contaminated with set plaster or render.

The ingredients for the plaster or render are to be mixed three times dry and th
ree times while water is
added. Alternatively mixing may be done by approved mechanical mixers, which are
to be cleaned before
use.

The working time permissible after the addition of water to the plaster or rende
r mix is to be thirty
minutes. Mixed plaster or render that has exceeded this limit is to be removed f
rom the site and not retempered
and used in the works.

The Contractor is to ensure that before plastering or rendering commences the ju

nctions between differing
base materials are reinforced with a strip of galvanized expanding metal lath se
cured at both edges. All
angle beads and the like shall also have been fixed.

All surfaces to be plastered or rendered are to be sprayed with water, with is t

o be allowed to dry out
before a key coat of cement slurry is applied.
All undercoats are to be scratched to form an adequate key for the next coat. Th
e setting coat is not to be
applied until the floating coat has been left in a moist condition for at least
three days.

All Plastering shall be executed in a neat workman like manner and made well to
wood frames skirting,
pipes, fittings and the like.

Plaster work is to be finished with a smooth, trowel face, free from blemishes a
nd fit to receive decoration.
Render is to be finished with a wood float. Any blown, cracked or otherwise dama
ged plaster or
render shall be condemned by the Engineer and is to be hacked off and made good
with quick setting
plaster at the Contractor's expense.

Full use is to be made of grounds, rules and angle trowels to ensure that all wa
ll faces finish plane and
true to line in all direction and that all angles are straight, true and plumb.
Prices for plastering and
rendering are to ensure that work to walls and ceilings are effectively 'cut' at
the joint so as to minimize
damage due to movement.
8.18 Gypsum plaster
Gypsum plaster shall generally be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions and the
requirements of the previous clause of this section.

Mixing of the plaster may be by hand or mechanically whichever is preferred. All

mixing utensils and
equipment shall be clean and thoroughly washed after each mix. It is important t
hat all equipment is kept
clean and free from set plaster and impurities.

Should any plaster be present in subsequent mixes the Engineer shall condemn the
mix and require the
Contractor to clean all the utensils and equipment before continuing with furthe
r mixing?

The gypsum plaster shall be of European origin and suitable for mixing with wate
r. The plaster is gypsum
hemi-hydrates premixed plaster containing special aggregates and additives simil
ar to products
manufactured by British Gypsum and the like.

Preparation of background surfaces shall follow the previous clause for plasterb
oard or concrete which
shall be treated with a proprietary bonding agent. The bonding agent shall be co
mpatible with the gypsum
plaster and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's written instr
uctions.

Application of the gypsum plaster may be by hand or by machine at the selection

of the Contractor
and it shall be carried out as follows:

Hand applied plaster shall be applied to solid background with firm pressure. Th
e initial coat shall firstly
be applied as a tight coat, then turning back with the same batch of material to
give an overall thickness of
11 mm. For thicknesses over 11 mm, scratch the first or render coat thoroughly t
o provide a good
mechanical key for subsequent coats. Apply further coats to a maximum thickness
of 8 mm per coat.
Allow each coat to set before applying the next. Rule the floating coat to an ev
en surface and lightly
scratch to provide a key for the application of the thistle finish coat. The min
imum thickness of the
thistle finish coat shall be 2 mm and finished with a smooth, blemish free surfa
ce.

When application is by machine, the plaster is sprayed onto the background in th

e form of ribbon by
holding the nozzle of the plastering machine close to the surface. The consisten
cy of the mix shall allow the
ribbon to run together. When a substantial area has been covered the plaster is
worked and ruled in
exactly the same manner as for the hand applied undercoat. Scratch undercoat and
apply thistle finish coat
as before.
The Contractor shall only use operatives skilled in the application of plaster i
n this operation. All plaster
shall be finished to receive decoration and any damaged or cracked surface shall
be cut out and replaced at
the Contractor's expense.
8.19 Angle beads
All external angles in walls and at openings such as doors, windows and the like
shall be protected
with stainless steel angle beads complying with BS 1246 Fig.7 Profile C3.

They shall be securely plugged, nailed or stapled as required at intervals not e

xceeding 18" (450 mm) at
both edges.

Work to include as well, supply and fix of galvanized mild steel plaster stops t
o finish the plaster at
meeting with skirting leaving 10 mm joint groove.
8.20 Beds for floor tiling
Beds for floor tiling shall be composed of 1 part cement and 4 parts of sand by
volume. Mixing, all as
previously described.

Prices shall include surface preparation, temporary rules, laying to falls and c
ross falls as required by
the room location, making good and the like.
8.21 Sand cement screed
Floor screeds are to compose of one part cement and three parts sand and are to
be smooth and level. Final
difference in levels in any part of the building shall not exceed 2 mm; otherwis
e the Contractor shall be
required to apply an approved self levelling screed to finish the surface. Thick
nesses are generally as
shown on drawings, 70mm in carpet and granite areas

Where beds are to be laid direct on to a concrete sub- floor that has set, the s
urface of the sub- floor is
to be thoroughly cleaned and prepared to ensure a good bond, the surface being c
hipped with a pick if
necessary, brushed well and washed out to remove all dust and dirt, and thorough
ly soaked with water left
on overnight. Surplus water is to be mopped up and immediately prior to laying t
he bed, the sub- floor is to
be coated with a grout of neat cement wash well brushed on as the work proceeds.
The grout must not be
permitted to set before the bed is laid.

Alternatively the Contractor may use a bonding agent applied in conformity with
the manufacturer's
instructions.

Pipes, conduits and the like to be embedded in a screed or topping shall be secu
rely fastened to the concrete
sub base, then apply cement and sand haunch to the side of pipes/conduits and a
layer of chicken wire
mesh overlaid at least 200 mm wide at each side. When these operations have been
completed the
Contractor may commence the laying of screed/toppings.

The Contractor shall lay screeds or toppings in bay sizes as instructed by the E
ngineer including filling
joints between bays as directed. Joints in the concrete sub base shall be contin
ued through the screeds
or toppings.
The screeds or toppings shall be finished to give the surface stated using eithe
r a hand trowel, mechanical
power float or the like. All finishes shall be uniform, smooth and free from rid
ges, trowel marks and other
blemishes. For a non- slip finish apply carborundum particles between successive
troweling operations to
give a smooth surface.

The beds shall be protected from excessively rapid drying out by means of tarpau
lins or polythene
sheeting for a minimum of 7 days after laying.

Laying beds is preferably to be carried out when the building is fully protected
from adverse weather,
however, the Contractor is to protect all beds as necessary from damage by wet w
eather.
8.22 Concrete floor tiles
General Preparation
Before starting work ensure that:
Bases are sufficiently flat to permit specified flatness of finished surfaces, b
earing in mind the permissible
minimum and maximum thicknesses of the bedding material.

Concrete slabs have been allowed to dry out by exposure to the air for not less
than 6 weeks.
Samples
Before placing orders submit representative samples of floor and skirting tile a
s well as an
ENGINEER agreed section of treads/risers and strings. Ensure that delivered mate
rials match samples.
Control Samples
Complete sample areas, being part of the finished work, in ENGINEER approved loc
ations and obtain
approval of appearance before proceeding.
Laying
Laying Generally:
. Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps, and parallel to the m
ain axis of the space or
specified features.
. Cut tiles to be kept to the minimum, as large as possible and in unobtrusive l
ocations. Cut tiles neatly and
accurately.
. Where positions of dividing strips are not specified they are to be agreed wit
h the engineer.
. Before laying obtain engineers approval for setting out tile joints and any ne
cessary cutting.
. Fix tiles so that there is adhesion over the whole of the background/base and
tile backs.
. Before bedding material sets make adjustments necessary to give true, regular
appearance to tiles and
joints.

Level of finished floor:

Permissible deviation in level from datum for floors and landings to be +/-10 mm
.
Flatness of finished floor:
Sudden irregularities not permitted. When measured with a slip gauge to BS 8204
: Part 1, Figure 3 or
equivalent, the variation in gap under a straight edge (with feet) placed anywhe
re on the surface to be not
more than: - 1 m straight edge: 2 mm
Partially bonded construction:
. Before surface of base (including any associated minor areas such as skirting,
 treads and risers) has
completely hardened brush off all surface laitance with a stiff broom.
. Shortly before laying bedding thoroughly clean surface by scrubbing and washin
g.
. Keep surface wet for several hours before laying bedding. Remove free water th
en brush in cements
slurry of creamy consistency.
. Lay screed bed while slurry or bonding agent is still wet to ensure a good bon
d.

Mortar for bedding:

Unless specified otherwise:
. Cement: Ordinary Portland to BS 12 Sand for walls: To BS 1199, Table 1.
. Sand for floors: To BS 882, Table 5, grading limit M, but where fine sand is s
pecified grading limit F.
. Batch by volume. Specified proportions are for dry sand, allow for bulking if
damp.
. Mix materials thoroughly to a uniform consistence in a suitable forced action
mechanical mixer.
. Do not use a free fall type (tilting drum) mixer. Use the minimum water necess
ary to give required work
ability.
. Use mortar within two hours of mixing at normal temperatures. Do not use after
the initial set has taken
place and do not re-temper.

Tiling Semidry mortar bed:

. Mortar for bed: 1:31/2-4 as clause 390, with water content such that a sample
squeezed in the hand will
retain its shape and not crumble, and such that a film of water does not form on
the surface of the bed
when compacted.
. Dampen base, then lay suitably small working areas of the screed bed and compa
ct thoroughly to the
required level.
. Within two hours, using 1:1 cement: fine sand slurry incorporating an approved
bonding agent, spread an
even layer 2 mm thick, coat backs of tiles, lay on the wet slurry and tap firmly
into position.
. Grout tiles within four hours of completing laying. Color of cement grout to m
atch color of tile/tile
matrix. Apply with a squeegee until joints are completely filled, remove surplus
from face of tiles and
cure as specified before finishing.

Tile Skirting:
. Bed solid to wall with cement based adhesive.
. Ensure joints in skirting are match and align with joints in floor tiles.

In-situ toppings:
. Batch material by volume using accurate gauge boxes.
. Thoroughly mix, including any pigments, in a dry state to a uniform color and
with even distribution of
different size aggregates. Add the minimum water necessary to achieve work abili
ty and mix to a uniform
consistency.
. Lay suitably small areas of screed bed using a 1:3 mortar as clause 390 of a s
tiff plastic consistency and
thoroughly compact to level.
. Within 48 hours brush neat cement slurry into the surface, lay topping and tho
roughly compact by
tamping, toweling and rolling level with the dividing strips.
. Remove excess laitance from the surface and ensure that the aggregate is regul
arly distributed with the
minimum amount of cement matrix visible.
. Cure as specified before finishing.

Dividing strips:
Depth to be such as to give secure anchorage into the mortar bedding. Fix to exa
ct
finished level of floor.
Movement joint metal edgings:
. Stainless Steel angle, size 50 x 50 x 6 mm.
. Fix to base by plastic spacer shims over timber grounds with SS screws at 600
c/c's to exact finished level
of floor.

Preformed strip movement joints:

Manufacturer and reference: By approval.
Finishing Curing:

Immediately after laying, protect tiled surfaces from wind, draughts and strong
sunlight. Cover with
polythene sheets held in close contact with the surface and lapped 100 mm at edg
es. Keep in position for
not less than three days or until grinding commences, whichever is the later.
Grinding:
. Mechanically grind surface using coarse grit stones and water. Dry grinding wi
ll be permitted only where
it is not practicable to use the wet process.
. Thoroughly clean and wash floor to remove all grinding residue and dust.
. Fill holes and depressions in surface with matching grout well pressed in to s
urface and allow to harden.
. Mechanically polish surface with fine grit stones and water to a fine grit fin
ish.
. Wash surface clean and keep free from traffic for at least two days.

Protection:
Adequately protect and keep clean all completed areas. Clean off any droppings i
mmediately.
Cleaning and Maintenance:
. Before practical completion submit the specialist subcontractor's recommendati
ons for cleaning and
maintenance to the ENGINEER.
. Immediately before practical completion thoroughly clean all surfaces in accor
dance with those
recommendations.

8.23 Ceramic floor and wall tiling

Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall comply with the requirements of BS1281
The surfaces to which tiles are to be fixed are to be thoroughly dry before fixi
ng commences and free
from all defects. Any such defects are at being made good before work commences.
Wall tiling shall be
carried out in accordance with CP 212.
The ceramic tiles shall be true in size and shape, free from flaws, cracks and c
razing, uniform in color and
texture and keyed on the back. They shall be equal in all respects to samples ap
proved by the Engineer.

External angles and exposed edges of tile areas shall be formed with rounded edg
e tiles. Misfits as well as
damaged or defective tiles shall be removed and replaced with good. Where tiling
abuts frames,
surrounds, etc., or where holes are required for pipes etc., the tiles shall be
carefully cut and fitted to
form a neat close joint. Fair exposed edges of tiled areas shall be finished wit
h tiles having a polished
edge matching the surface.

The wall tiles shall be fixed with adhesive to a true vertical face with continu
ous vertical and horizontal
joints. Joints shall be straight, level, perpendicular and pointed neatly. The w
idth of joints shall be as
directed by the Engineer. Any surplus grout which adheres to the tiling shall be
wiped off with a damp
cloth before it sets hard.
The floor tiles shall be laid symmetrically about the center lines of the room a
nd any cut tiles shall be
made by using a proper tool leaving the cut edges square and smooth. The tiles s
hall be solidly bedded in
cement and sand mortar (1:4) and pointed in colored cement to match the tiling.

Before setting in position, glazed tiles shall be thoroughly immersed in clean p

otable water for 24 hours
and drained off so that no free moisture remains on the back of the tile.

The surface of concrete or block work shall be thoroughly cleaned, wetted and we
ll dried before
applying the base coats and screeds. Mixes, thicknesses and methods of applicati
on of beds and backings
far wall and floor tiling shall be as shown on the drawings. Mortar for base coa
ts shall be used within one
hour after mixing and re-tempering will not be permitted. The base coat shall be
applied with sufficient
force to prevent air pockets and to secure a good bond and shall be scored or cr
oss-scratched, when nearly
set, to form a key. The surface of the base coat shall be well wetted and dried
immediately before the tiling
is commenced.

Floor and wall tiling to kitchens shall be run under and behind cupboard units.
In the Garbage Room the
ceramic wall tiles shall extend up to the soffit of the ceiling slab.

Movement joints are to be provided at the perimeter of areas of ceramic tiling a

nd at intervals not
exceeding 4m in either direction in larger areas. In addition, the Contractor sh
all take adequate
precautions against lifting or cracking of ceramic tiles for any other person.

Upon completion, all tiling shall be left clean and free from cement or stains.
For areas specified tiles shall be certified acid resistant min. thickness 8mm a
nd size and color to approval
and shall be fixed in Mortar Bed or Adhesive to approval of Engineer.

Tiles shall be necessarily true to line and shape.

The agreement of the Engineer to the setting out of tiles is to be obtained befo
re commencing work and a
sample room is to be set out for the Engineer's approval prior to continuing wor
k on other rooms.

Shop drawings shall be prepared where patterns in the wall tiling are required.

Tiles shall be fixed with true horizontal and vertical joints of an even width o
f 1- 2 mm to a true vertical
plane.

Tiles adhesive shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to the commenc
ement of this work. They
shall have low VOC content.

Adequate time shall be allowed to enable complete setting of the tile bedding be
fore joints are grouted.
Grout of a plastic mix of neat cement, color to Engineer's selection, shall be u
sed in grouting up the
joints. The whole of the tiled surface is to be thoroughly cleaned down on compl
etion and left in perfect
condition.

Any cut tiles are to be neatly and cleanly cut using an approved method and cut
tiles are to be used only at
internal corners or in other locations to be approved by the Engineer. All servi
ce points in wall tiling shall
be of drilled holes if the tiles in which they are located are central to the ti
le.
8.24 Floor tiling
Prior to commencing the floor tiling the Contractor shall satisfy himself that t
he surface on which the
tiles are to be laid is satisfactory to receive the tiles. It is the responsibil
ity of the Contractor to provide a
satisfactory surface and or bedding and any remedial work necessary is to be car
ried out at the Contractor's
expense.

Before laying commences the base is to be free from dust, loose material, grease
, plaster, and the like.
Care is to be taken in cutting and fitting and the setting out of tiles and colo
r patterns are to be as shown on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Shop drawings are required where pa
tterns in the floor
tiling are required. Any adhesive on tile surface or any other finished surface
is to be completely
cleaned off. The tiles shall be laid with true aligned joints of an even width o
f 1- 2 mm and grouted up on
completion.
The work shall be set out from the center of rooms using whole tiles and working
outwards. Rates are to
include for the all cut margins and make up pieces at limits and boundaries.

The flatness of tiled or paved floors must be such that a two meter rule moved i
n all directions shows no
bump or hollow of over 4 mm.

The Contractor is to store ceramic floor tiles in such a way that they are prote
cted from moisture
until laying. Ceramic floor tiles shall be laid in a manner as previously descri
bed in this section onto a
cement and sand bed, with even joints of not wider than 2mm. Care being taken to
adequately fill and
remove all air pockets from beneath the tiles. The tiles are to be grouted with
a tinted mortar mix to
match the tiles, a minimum of twelve hours after completion of the tiling.

All floor tiling in wet area such as bathrooms, toilets, kitchen, washing area,
balconies, garbage rooms and
the like above ground floor level shall be laid over a self- adhesive waterproof
membrane on the
concrete sub base. Provide continuous skirting up walls at least 300 mm high. Fl
oor tiling shall be laid to
falls towards drainage outlet of respective rooms. Protect floor tiling with slu
rry or like material on
completion and clean off and prepare flooring to satisfaction of Engineer.
8.25 Granite work
Granite shall be obtained from a source/quarry that has the capacity to provide
quantity, quality and sizes
required for the Works.

Samples of all granite to be used in the Works are to be submitted to the Engine
er for approval prior to
confirmation of order and commencement of same on site. Actual materials used in
the works shall match
the approved samples.

Granite shall be of the best quality, smooth, uniform in color texture and thick
ness, free from voids, holes,
vents, cracks, earth veins, objectionable irregularities and laminations or stru
ctural weakness.

Where vein colors are acceptable, they shall, insofar as they form a distinct pa
ttern, be laid to complete the
pattern or in the direction of the vein.

The Contractor is to ensure that all granite delivered to site is stored on a ra

ised platform in a water free
area and is protected with suitable sheeting.

Any chipped or stained pieces are to be removed from site and replaced at the Co
ntractor's expense.
Granite for use as counter tops & wall cladding is first to be shown on working
drawings submitted
for the Engineer's approval. These drawings shall give site dimensions, relation
ship with other materials;
detail the key members of each slab together with details of anchorages and the
like. No granite shall
be worked until these drawings are approved. Work in this section shall be compl
eted to the tolerance
set out in CP 298 and BS 5390

The Contractor is to supply all necessary stainless steel fixings, dowels and co
ntinuous stainless steel
supports at the base of wall linings as required, and all in accordance with CP
298. All fixings are to be concealed when the work is complete.

All external angles are to be rebated jointed. Where granite abuts door frames a
nd the like the edges shall
be chamfered.

The Contractor is to use the following tables as a guide to the minimum number o
f anchors required to
support each slab:

Slab Size
No of anchors per slab
Not exceeding 0.06 m
2
over 0.60 not exceeding 1.20 m
3
over 1.20 not exceeding 3.60 m
4
Over 3.60 not exceeding 6.00 m
6

Anchoring of granite work

Over 6.00 m one extra anchor for each additional square meter of slab
The Contractor is to be solely responsible for the provision of sufficient fixin
gs.

The granite finish shall be as described and as samples approved by the Engineer
before ordering of
the material commences.

Unless otherwise instructed wall linings are to be set 45 mm clear of the struct
ural backing and the rear of
each slab is to be coated with shellac or bitumen paint to prevent staining from
behind.

In addition to anchors and the like, internal work is to be bedded on plaster of

paris or non- staining
cement mortar spots, and the joints are to be neatly pointed in non-staining cem
ent mortar. External
work is to be set as internal work, but non-staining, quick setting cement is to
be used. Provide slurry
backing to all granite walls cladding up to 1500 mm from finished floor level. S
ealants, where used, shall
match in color the stone color around it.

Granite cladding is to be protected at the corners with non-staining wood formwo

rk, and floors are to be
protected by suitable boarding or slurry as approved by the Engineer.

On completion of work, all granite is to be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing with

fibre brushes and mild
alkaline solution, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

Thresholds
All thresholds shall be one piece fixed at floor openings of the material type a
pproved by the Engineer.
The threshold shall be bedded in cement and sand mortar and be the same width as
the opening in which
they are being fixed. Shape and finish to Engineer's approval.
8.26 Suspended ceilings
General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the co- ordination of the service and su
spended ceilings, including
checking the ceiling heights and setting to module, which shall be to the exact
locations required by
the Engineer, who shall confirm and approve the setting out and location of all
fittings, luminaries,
switches, smoke detectors, security alarms and detectors, air conditioning grill
es and controls and the like.
Suspended ceilings shall be installed by specialists. They shall be capable of o
utstanding normal air
pressure and suction forces action both below the ceiling and within the ceiling
void.

The Contractor shall prepare, and submit for approval, fully dimensioned working
drawing prepared
from the general working drawings of the Engineer and from a site survey.
These drawing shall coordinate the service and ceiling installation. Setting out
points common to all trades
including service shall be established early in the manner described and shown o
n the working drawings.

Under no circumstances shall work of other sections be concealed by suspended ce

ilings until same has
been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

Rod type suspension system hangers and hook bolts for suspension systems shall b
e fixed to structural
concrete soffits. Self - drilling threaded metal sockets of an approved type sha
ll be used for fixing to
concrete. Suspension and framing shall be of metal sections only. No timber fram
ing will be accepted.

Finished ceiling heights shall be rigorously respected; they shall be measured f

rom the finished floor levels.

The ceilings shall be left perfectly flat and shall not show a deviation of more
than 3 mm from a 3 meter
straight edge. The Contractor shall take all possible precautions to eliminate a
ny defects.

Price shall include for cutting and fitting ceilings around obstacles and neatly
finishing the edges of the
work.

Proprietary suspended ceiling system shall be installed in strict accordance wit

h the manufacturer's
instructions, by workmen skilled in this work in a rigid and secure manner so th
at the final surface is free
of any waves, buckles or sap.

Tiles and ceiling forming a grid or pattern shall be set out on the axis of the
room in both directions.

Suspended ceilings shall not be erected until the windows have been glazed, the
building closed in,
the plaster work dried out, all wet work completed and the building suitably air
conditioned; relative
humidity must not exceed 70% and the temperature must be maintained within the r
ange 15- 30C.
The design of and dimensional tolerances set by the manufacturer for accessory i
tems such as formed
wire hangers, spring spacer clips, tile retainers, and spacer bars shall be such
as to assure satisfactory
performance of their intended function in the suspension system. Failure attribu
table to such
accessories to control alignment, prevent undesirable rotation or other unsatisf
actory performance
which results in unfavorable appearance will be cause for their rejection.

General installation procedures shall be as follows:

. The area to receive treatment shall be dry and be satisfactorily closed agains
t excessive traffic and be
protected against weather before work is started.
. Installation shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications
except as modified by this
Specification.
. Install units in a true and even plane, in straight line course laid out symme
trically about center lines of
ceiling or panel, continuing pattern, through wall openings or as indicated. Bor
der tile shall not be less
than 15 cm wide.
. Fit border units neatly against vertical surfaces.
. Seal joints in units around pipes, ducts, and electrical outlets with acoustic
al sealant.
. Carefully coordinate and fit units to grilles, lighting fixtures and other rel
ated items of work.
. In determining spacing and locations of hangers for main runners and carrying
channels, take into
consideration the weight of grilles, fixtures, etc. that are to be installed in
conjunctions with acoustic
ceilings.

Gypsum Plaster Ceilings

Gypsum plaster ceilings comprising flat tiles, units, mouldings, cornices and th
e like shall be fabricated in
accordance with the relevant Standards and Practices. Before commencing manufact
ure of the components
the Contractor shall submit fully detailed shop drawings. These drawings shall i
ndicate overall dimensions
of the unit together with fixing details and the inter relationship with other c
omponents. On receipt of the
written approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may commence work on this secti
on.

Gypsum plaster shall be procured form an approved European source and comply wit
h the requirements
of BS 1191 Parts 1 and 2 ensure the highest standard of workmanship.

All gypsum components shall be reinforced using 13 mm diameter hollow plastic tu

bes in a grid pattern
with plastic mesh infill. At junction and unions between tiles and cornices, mou
ldings and the like natural
fibres shall be used to reinforce the joints. All exposed surfaces shall be used
to perfectly flat and smooth,
free from blemish and scar.

All units with an external angle shall be moulded to achieve perfectly straight
and slightly rounded
arises. The components shall be fixed on to a rigid framework so as to provide a
level and even surface with
all joints and irregularities made good with gypsum plaster.
The Contractor shall submit his mix proportions for approval, which shall includ
e gypsum, vermiculite
and fiberglass crystals. The minimum thickness of the gypsum components shall be
20mm irrespective of
their purpose. All finishes shall be left clean and smooth to receive the specif
ied finish.

All suspended ceiling system to comply with the requirements of BS EN 13964:2004

SECTION 4.5, in
relation to asbestos and formaldehyde content i.e. there must be no asbestos, th
e formaldehyde content
must not exceed class E1 levels and must be tested, classified and appropriately
marked.
9 PAINTING AND DECORATING
9.1 General
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

The painting materials shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer (but prio
rity shall be given to
local manufacturers when complying with the required specification) and shall be
supplied ready mixed
in the manufacturer's sealed and branded containers. Each container shall bear t
he maker's brand name,
identification of contents and directions for its proper use. All material must
be thoroughly stirred before
use.

All sealers, primers, undercoats and thinners shall be the products recommended
by the manufacturers of
paint used for the finishing coat.

Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings colors shall be selected by the Archi
tect.
The term "Paint" as used herein includes emulsions, enamels, lacquers, sealer an
d other coating or inorganic
finish, whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats.

The Contractor shall protect all painting and decorating work and shall provide
adequate dust sheets,
canvases, etc., in order to protect adjacent work.

All painting and decorating shall be applied by skilled workmen experienced in t

his work.

The Contractor shall repaint at his own expense any work where the paint is foun
d to be incorrectly
applied.

Brushes, pails, kettles, etc. used in carrying out the work shall be clean and f
ree from foreign matter.
They shall be thoroughly cleaned before being used for different types or classe
s of materials.

The Contractor is to submit to the Engineer for approval the brand and quality o
f the paints he proposes to
use. If approval is given to a brand of paint the contractor shall use the prime
rs undercoat, etc.,
manufactured or recommended by the manufacturer of that brand and notwithstandin
g anything herein
contained shall prepare the surface and carry out the work in accordance with th
e manufactures
specification to give the best finish required on the surface to be painted.

All paints to be used under this Contract shall be delivered to and stored on th
e Site in sealed labeled
containers a minimum of 30 days prior to application. Upon notification by the C
ontractor that the material
is at the site, samples of each material shall be obtained at random from sealed
containers by the Engineer
in the presence of an authorized representative of the Contractor.

Samples shall be clearly identified by commercial name, type of paint and intend
ed use. If judged
necessary by the Engineer the paint sample may be tested for compliance at the C
ontractor's expense in a
laboratory designated by the Engineer.
Complete color charts for the paints to be used shall be submitted to the Engine
er for approval and the
preparation of the color schedules.
Paints shall be factory manufactured and delivered to the site in unbroken conta
iners which shall show
the designated name, formula, color, manufacturer's directions and name of manuf
acturer all of which shall
be plainly legible at the time of use.

Pigmented paints shall be supplied in containers not larger than 25 kg. All pain
ts shall be products
that have a minimum of 2 years satisfactory field service.

All paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use.

Mixing and applications of paint shall be in accordance with the specification o

f the manufacturers
concerned and to the approval of the Engineer. The mixing of paints etc., of dif
ferent brands before or
during painting materials shall be allowed except strictly as detailed by the ma
nufacturers and as approved
by the Engineer. Spraying will only be allowed with the Engineer's written appro
val.
9.2 Materials
Materials in General
All paints and coatings must have fungal resistance in the wet state (to protect
from fungal growth in
the paint tin) and all wet spaces (bathrooms and kitchens) must have fungal resi
stance that also provide
protection in the dry state (after the paint has been applied and dried)

The materials to be used as required by the Schedule of Finishes and the drawing
s shall be of the best
quality and of approved types, obtained from an approved manufacturer.

All paints shall comply with the following requirements:

. The product shall be thoroughly mixed and ground. It shall not be settled, cak
ed or thickened to such a
degree that it cannot be mixed easily with a paddle by stirring to a good unifor
m brushing consistency.
. The color of the paint shall match the approved sample.
. Paint shall show no evidence of cracking, chipping, flaking or dusting.
. Paint shall not skin (form a thin membrane surface on the top of the liquid) w
ithin 48 hours in a filled
closed container.
. Paint in the containers during and after application shall not be abnormally p
ungent, offensive or
disagreeable.
. Paint shall show easy brushing, good flowing and spreading and good leveling p
roperties.
. Those properties shall be demonstrated on test specimens at the request of the
Engineer. Coats that have
any noticeable pull under a large brush and that show poor spreading and flowing
properties will not be
acceptable.
. Paint shall dry to a uniform, smooth, flat or semi-gloss appearance under cond
itions of illumination and
wearing. There shall be no laps, skips, high-lighted spots or brush marks. Tinte
d paints shall dry to a
uniform color.
. Relocating of a previous painting surface shall produce no lightening softenin
g or other film
irregularities.

Knotting
Knotting shall be composed of dissolved shellac or other resin which remains una
ffected by the resinous
materials in the wood or the following paint coating, thereby preventing the res
inous materials in the
timber leaching into the paint film and causing discoloration or defective dryin
g, it shall be in
accordance with BS 1336
Filling
Filler shall be "Polyfilla", "Alabastine" or other equal and approved.
Stopping
Stopping for woodwork to receive clear finish shall be tinted to match surroundi
ng woodwork, to approval.
Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardboard, and fiberboard shall be lins
eed oil putty to BS
544 tinted to match the color of the undercoat.

Stopping for external woodwork shall be white lead paste and gold size well mixe
d.
Thinners
Thinners shall be approved turpentine or white spirit to BS 245 Where paints are
specified to be water
thinned, fresh water shall be used for thinning.
Satin
Satin for woodwork shall be an approved brand of oil satin complying with BS.121
5
Etch Primer
The etch primer shall be mordant solution, slightly acidic in nature and contain
ing solvents, for applying
to new smooth metallic surfaces to remove grease, organic soaps and provide a ph
ysical key, or other
equal and approved.
Polyurethane Lacquer
Polyurethane lacquer for woodwork shall be of an approved manufacture.
Varnish
Varnish for interior woodwork shall be an approved brand, oil varnish. Varnish s
hall form a hard flexible
transparent and quick drying film. It shall have low VOC content.
Linseed Oil
Linseed oil for woodwork shall be refined linseed oil to comply with BS 246
Priming Paints
Priming paints shall be the primer recommended by the manufacturer of the finish
ing paint or:
. For woodwork-Alkyd-based or priming paint to comply with BS 2521 and 2523.
. For steel work red oxide priming paint to comply with BS 2524
. For galvanized, zinc or aluminium work- grey zinc chromate priming paint.
. For concrete, block work, plaster, plasterboard and the like- alkali priming p
aint.
 Undercoating
Undercoating shall be:

. Zinc oxide based undercoating paint.

. Alkyd based undercoating paint in accordance with BS 2525- 7 Colors shall appr
oximately match the
finishing paint.
. Synthetic alkyd based undercoating in accordance with the recommendations of t
he paint manufacturer.

Rust inhibiting Primer

The rust inhibiting primer shall be calcium plum bate red head, chromate, zinc c
hromate or other equal
and approved primer.
Finishing Paints
Finishing paints shall have either a matt, eggshell, semi-gloss or gloss appeara
nce as indicated on the
finishes schedule requested by the Engineer or these Specifications. Allowance m
ust be made for a full color
range.
Clear Finish
The clear finish is to be polyurethane matt lacquer or other equal and approved.

Silk/Vinyl Emulsion Paint

Emulsion paint shall have either a matt or eggshell appearance as indicated on t
he schedule or requested by
the Engineer or these Specifications. Allowance must be made for a full color ra
nge.
Special Decorative Finishes
External walls and other surfaces indicated on the drawings shall be painted wit
h proprietary paint as
stated in the Particular Specification. The paint shall be applied strictly in a
ccordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
9.3 Workmanship
General
The Contractor shall carry out all tests necessary for determining the colors an
d shades of the finishes and
the appropriate methods of application. Sample panels shall be completed in acco
rdance with
Architect's instructions.
All work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instru
ctions.
Before application of any paint or finish all surfaces shall be cleaned, dried a
nd prepared as specified
hereinafter, all to the Architect's approval, no work shall commence until this
approval is given in writing
to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall coordinate work to ensure that factory primed items are pri
med or painted as required
in the Specifications.
All metal fittings such as hardware and fastenings, etc., not required to be pai
nted shall first be fitted and
then removed before the preparatory processes are commenced. When all painting i
s completed the fitting
shall be cleaned and re-fixed in position.
Before painting, floors must be washed and every possible precaution shall be ta
ken to keep down dust
before and during the painting processes. No paint shall be applied to surfaces
structurally or
superficially damp and all surfaces must be ascertained to be free from condensa
tion, efflorescence, etc.,
before the application of each coat.
No exterior or exposed painting shall be carried out under adverse weather condi
tions such as rain,
extreme humidity, dust storms, high temperature of surface etc.
All coats of paint must be thoroughly dry before subsequent coats are applied, a
nd rubbed down with
fine waterproof abrasive where necessary.
All coating shall be well applied, leaving no sags, laps, brushes or other defec
ts. Each coat must
thoroughly dry before next coat is applied. All work must be carefully cut into
a true line and left smooth
and clean.
Details of mixing and application shall be in accordance with the Specifications
of the manufacturer
concerned and to the approval of the Architect. The mixing of paint, etc., of di
fferent brands before
or during application will not be permitted. No dilution of painting materials s
hall be allowed except
strictly as detailed by the manufacturers and as approved by the Architect.
On surfaces which are not accessible to paint brushes or rollers paint shall be
applied by spraying or
with sheep skin daubers. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly covered
with paint. Method of
paint applications shall be approved by the Architect prior to the commencement
of the work.
Brushes, pails, kettles and all other tools and equipment used in carrying out t
he work shall be maintained
in good working order, and shall be clean and free from foreign matter. They sha
ll be thoroughly cleaned
before being used for different types or classes of materials.
The Contractor will be required to re-paint at his own expense any work on which
the paint is found to be
incorrectly applied. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting from dam
age the paint work and all
other work during and after operations including the provision of all necessary
dust sheets, covers, etc.
All paints dropping shall be cleaned up as the work proceeds
All loose and defective paint shall be removed from previously painted surfaces
before re- painting.
All burning off must be done by skilled workmen. The blow- lamp must not be used
on surfaces
adjoining glass. Damage to adjacent surfaces shall be made good at the Contracto
r s expense.
Prior to hand over the Contractor shall carry out all remedial painting work due
to damage caused by
others, adjustment and easing of joinery and metal work testing and commissionin
g of service
installations and the like all as instructed by the Architect. On completion, le
ave Works clean and tidy
to the Architect's approval.
Painting to Concrete, Block or Plaster
Concrete, block-work and plaster surfaces to be painted or decorated shall have
all cracks cut out and
made good to the satisfaction of the Architect.

Plasterboard surfaces shall have taped joints and the surface puttied to the sat
isfaction of the Architect.
The surfaces shall be completely dry and shall be brushed free of impurities imm
ediately prior to the
commencement of the painting work.

Efflorescence shall be completely removed by rubbing down with dry coarse cloths
followed by wiping
down with damp cloths and allowed to dry. All surfaces shall be rubbed down with
fine glass paper and
brushed free of dust before applying any form of decoration.
Concrete block work and plastered surfaces which are to receive paint shall be g
iven one thin coat of oil
putty and allowed to dry for at least two days. The surfaces shall then be rubbe
d down with fine glass
paper and given a second thin coat of oil putty and when completely set shall be
rubbed down again with
fine glass paper before applying the painting system.

Emulsion paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of primer a
nd two full coats of paint.

Texture paint shall be uniformly applied at a rate of not less than a 4m per litr
e by overlapping, crisscross
rollers or spray in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where finis
hed surfaces are described
as having smooth texture finish, the overall thickness of the applied finish sha
ll be less than 1.5 mm.
Where finished surfaces are described as having rough texture finish, the overal
l thickness of the applied
finish shall be not less than 2 mm. Finished surface shall be uniform in sheen c
olor and texture, free from
runs, sags, crawls or other defects.

Oil paint shall be applied by brush or roller and shall consist of a priming coa
t, two undercoats and one
finishing coat of paint.

Fire resistant paint shall be applied in three coats over a primer all in strict
accordance with the
manufacturer s instructions.

All plastered or rendered surfaces shall be twice stopped with approved putty fi
ller. The first coat of
stopping shall be applied after the primer coat has dried out completely. And th
e second coat after the first
undercoat application. Each coat of stopping shall be allowed to dry and harden
thoroughly and shall then
be rubbed by sandpaper until smooth surface is achieved.

The emulsion or P.V.A paint is to be applied in three coats, the first a thinned
coat and the other two
full coats. Each coat shall be allowed to dry and harden thoroughly before the n
ext coat is applied.
Lacquer to Woodwork
Woodwork to lacquered shall be cleaned of impurities. Knots shall be treated wit
h two coats of knotting.

Where shown on the Drawings or required by the Architect the wood shall be stain
ed with a water or
spirit stain to the approval of the Architect.

The coats of lacquer shall be applied on joinery by brush or spray, either in th

e joinery shop or on Site as
directed by the Architect.
Oil Stain Finish to Woodwork
The stain finish to woodwork shall be an approved manufacturer's oil stain syste
m applied strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

All surfaces are to be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sanded down and all nail h
oles or similar defects shall
be filled and leveled up with approved stopping.

The finish shall be applied in two coats. The first coat shall be pigmented stai
n wax brush applied. The
surface shall be allowed to dry for 2 - 10 minutes and then rubbed with a cloth
in a rotary motion to remove
excess stain and produce an even surface.

The first coat shall be allowed to dry completely before application of the seco
nd coat. The second coat shall
be natural (clear) stain wax, buffed.
The Architect shall select the stain color and the Contractor shall allow for pr
eparing sample panels for
approval and these sample panels will provide the standard for the work.
Varnishing
All surfaces to be varnished shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned and sanded down
and all nail holes or
similar defects shall be filled and leveled up with approved hard stopping. Sand
ing shall follow the line
of the grain. Knots shall be treated with two coats of knotting.
Two or three coats of clear varnish shall be applied as recommended by the manuf
acturer of the varnish
or as directed by the Architect.
Painting to Woodwork
Woodwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities. Knots shall be treated wi
th two coats of knotting.
Priming paint shall be applied by brush. Two coats shall be applied to end grain
. Priming paint shall be
applied on Site after the Architect has approved the joinery and before it is fi
xed.

When the priming paint is dry, all cracks, holes, open joints and the like shall
be filled with stopping and
rubbed down with fine glass paper.

Two undercoats and one finishing coat of paint shall be applied by brush.

The priming paint and undercoats shall be lightly rubbed down with glass paper t
o remove blemishes,
and all dust removed before the application of subsequent coats.
Painting to Metalwork
Steel work delivered to the Site un-primed shall be cleaned of impurities, scrap
ped and wire brushed to
remove rust and painted with one coat of priming paint applied by brush.

Steel work delivered to Site primed shall be cleaned of impurities and damage to
the priming paint and
made good with priming paint.

Galvanized metalwork to be painted shall be cleaned of impurities. Where rusting

 has occurred the rust shall
be removed by wire brushing and made good with an approved rust inhibitor. The s
urfaces shall be coated
with a mordant solution, washed with clean water and painted with two coats of p
riming paint applied by
brush.

Metal which is concealed shall be prepared and primed as above and shall be pain
ted with two priming
coats and one finishing coat of paint applied by brush.
9.4 Guarantees
For all external and internal painting works, the Contractor shall provide a gua
rantee for material and
workmanship to be valid for a period of five years from the date of practical co
mpletion certificate,
unless stated otherwise.
10 EXTERNAL WORKS
10.1 General
All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC-UPC and Agreement Board Cert
ificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities,

Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.

The provisions of all other sections of these specifications shall be applicable

to this section where relevant.
Also this section is a general guideline specification and to be coordinated wit
h Drawings, which will take
precedence.
10.2 Boundary walls
The Boundary Wall shall be constructed all around the plot as shown in the drawi
ngs.
The following general specifications shall be followed:

. Precast concrete modular units laid on strip footings.

. Upper part of boundary wall shall have cast aluminium Kynar coated fence.
. The precast concrete unit shall be epoxy coated textured finish (3 coats).
. Allow for water proofing for the units in contact with soil-see clause 3.19.
. Expansion joint to be provided.
. Whenever there is side filling, weep holes of 50mm shall be provided at 3m c/c
with gravel around
the hole at the filling side.
. Allow for light filling (pedestal luminar) arrangement at alternate precast un
its and a conduit to the
power source.
. The dimension of the last precast wall shall be adjusted to suit the corner co
ndition of the plot.
. Submit shop drawing showing all the components of the boundary wall including
boundary gate.

10.3 Interlocking block pavers

Interlocking block paving shall be precast concrete blocks as specified, to shap
e, pattern, colors and
layout subject to approval. Blocks shall be uniform in shape and color, supplied
by an approved
manufacturer conforming to the requirements of BS 7617 and laid on well compacte
d bed of 50mm layer
of clean sharp crushed sand over min 250mm layer of road base material compacted
to 95% of the M.D.D.
as obtained in BS 1377 test 13 (field density tests to be carried out at a frequ
ency of 2 tests per 1000m as
per BS 1377 test 15 B) and laid over a properly watered and compacted base cours
e. All the works shall be
subject to final approval of the Engineer.
Precast Concrete Paving Blocks
The requirements for Concrete Paving Blocks for the construction of paved surfac
es used by vehicular
and pedestrian traffic shall be as follows:
Materials
. Cement:

The cement used in the manufacture of precast concrete pavin blocks shall comply
with the requirements
of either BS 12, 4027 or BS146 The cement content of compacted shall not be less
than 400 kg/m.
. Aggregates:

The aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or uncrushed materia

ls which apart from
grading requirements comply with BS 882 The salt contents shall not exceed the f
ollowing limits. Acid
Soluble Chlorides 0.06% by wt. of Fine Aggregate 0.02% by wt. of Coarse Aggregat
e Acid Soluble
sulphates 0.03% by wt. of Coarse and Fine Aggregates
. Water:

The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter having ph value n
the basic range (7-9) and
shall conform to BS 3148 (1990), and as specified for the concrete works.
. Pigments:

Any pigment used shall comply with BS 1014

Dimensions and Tolerances
Standard rectangular blocks shall be manufactured with a nominal length of 200mm
and a nominal
width of 100mm. Alternative sizes and shapes shall have a ration of length to wi
dth of 100mm. Alternative
sizes and shapes shall have a ration of length to width on plan of not less than
1.5 or greater than 2.3; the
width shall not be less than 80mm or greater than 115mm. The minimum nominal thi
ckness for paving
blocks or any size shall be 80mm for areas used by vehicular and 60mm thick for
areas used by
pedestrian such areas like external pavement around the site.

All arises shall be clean and of uniform dimension. Wearing surface area shall b
e not less than 70% of the
plan area.

Tolerance:
Length < > 2mm
Width < > 2mm
Thickness < > 2mm
Compressive Strength
The average compressive strength of the block on delivery when sampled and teste
d in the manner
described below shall not be less than 49 N/mm.
 Sampling Block
Two blocks shall be drawn from each group of 1000 blocks for sampling 10 blocks
every designated
5000 block section or part thereof in a consignment.

All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of sampling in such a way that t
he designated section or
part thereof and the consignment represented by the sample, are clearly defined.

Test for Compressive Strength

The sample specimens shall be tested in a wet condition after being stored for a
t least 24 hours in water
maintained at a temperature of 20C <> 5C. Before the specimens are submerged in wat
er, the necessary
area shall be determined as follows:

. Where possible, the plan area o the wearing surface area shall be calculated b
y multiplying the length
by the width.
. Alternatively the plan area or the wearing area shall be calculated by cutting
our shapes of cardboard
and weighing it to the nearest 0.01g.
As
2000 ms/m
As
Area of block (m)
ms
Mass of the cardboard shape matching test block (g) the block shall be placed
wearing surface uppermost on the cardboard.
ms
Mass of 200 x 100mm cardboard rectangle (g) cut from the same cardboard.

Test for compressive strength

In case of chamfer or radius the width of chamfer or radius shall be measured an

d marked on the
cardboard shape. This shape shall then be cut out accurately and weighed for abo
ve calculation of the
wearing surface area.

Plywood nominally 4m thick, shall be used as packing between the upper and lower
faces of the specimen
and the machine platens, and these boards shall be larger than the specimen by a
margin of at least 5mm at
all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen tested.

The load shall be applied without shock and increased continuously at a rate of
approximately 15 N/mm
per minute until no greater load can be sustained. The maximum load applied to t
he specimen shall be
recorded. The strength shall be expressed to the nearest 0.1 N/mm.
Certificate of Compliance
This certificate is to be provided by the manufacturers at the same time of sale
as per item No. 12 of BS
6717.
Unpaved Areas
Unpaved areas within the boundary of the site shall be rated over to remove all
rubbish and other
unwanted materials and shall be leveled off.
 Precast concrete kerbs
. Precast concrete kerbs shall comply with BS 340 and shall be laid and bedded o
n a mortar bed on a
concrete foundation as shown on the Drawings.
. The carriageway or foundation shall be thoroughly cleaned and prior to placing
the backing, the line
levels and joints of all units shall be approved by the Engineer.
. Precast concrete kerbs shall be hydraulically pressed.
. For radii less than 12m, radius kerbs shall be used.
. Any units deviating more than 3mm in 3m from line or level shall be taken up a
nd re-laid.
. Where filling placed adjacent to the kerb is likely to have a harmful effect o
n the kerbs, due to its
aggressive chemical nature then the kerbs shall be protected from the fill mater
ial by a method agreed
with the Engineer or as shown on the Drawings.
. Expansion joints will be provided at 6m spacing along the kerb run. The expans
ion joints shall be
formed of suitable flexible material to the approval of the Engineer.
. New kerbs shall match existing kerbs around the perimeter of the site and shal
l be painted as required.
. Allow for flush kerbs/drop kerbs at crossings and ramps.

Asphalt Road Surface

. Repair to existing asphalt road surface shall be carried out where necessary t
o exactly match the
existing road construction, and any parching or making good shall be provided wi
th minimum number
of clean, precise joints in alignments to be approved by the Engineer.
. All marking good shall be to existing road levels to match adjacent falls and
inclines.
. All materials and standards of workmanship shall be to the approval of concern
ed Statutory Authorities.
. All road markings and car parking line markings shall be made good upon comple
tion to match the
standard required by Statutory Authorities, and specifications and shall be carr
ied out to their approval.

Road Markings
. The markings shall be white or yellow continuous or intermittent lines, letter
s, figures, arrows or
symbols laid as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
. Road markings shall consist of a hot thermoplastic material complying with the
requirements of BS
3262: Part 1 & 2: 1989. All markings are to be reflectorized incorporating a min
imum 10% of ballotini
glass beads. The grading of glass beads shall be as per BS 6088 The thermoplasti
c shall contain a
minimum of 10% titanium dioxide. The thermoplastic material shall be laid to the
following
thicknesses: - Screed or sprayed markings 1.5 +/- 0.5 mm. The thickness specifie
d shall be exclusive of
surface applied ballotini and not greater than 3mm when finished. The method of
thickness
measurement shall be in accordance with Appendix H of BS 3262
. The Contractor shall state the maximum safe heating temperature, the temperatu
re range of apparatus
and the method of laying to be used.
All markings are to be reflectorised by the incorporation of ballotini and shall
also have a surface
application of ballotini applied evenly at the rate of 400-500 g/m2. Paint shall
be machine applied
except in locations where it is not practical to do so. The paint shall then be
screed applied as agreed or
instructed by the Engineer.
. If required by the Engineer a tack coat compatible with the markings shall be
applied in accordance
with the manufacturer s instructions prior to the application of thermoplastic mat
erial.
. Road marking materials shall only be applied to surfaces which are clean and d
ry.
. Markings shall be free from raggedness at their edges and shall be uniform and
free from streaks.
Carriageway lane and edge lines shall be laid by approved mechanical means to a
regular alignment.
. Paint shall be road marking paint supplied by an approved manufacturer. It sha
ll be suitable for
applying by brush, roller or by airless spray to concrete or asphalt pavements a
nd to kerbs to give a
chemically stable film of uniform thickness and shall be either chlorinated rubb
er, one pack epoxy or
alkyd based.
Colors shall be white, yellow and black. Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer
, the paint shall have the
following characteristics:

Characteristic
Value
Solide (% by volume)
40 min
Specific Gravity
1.20 - 1.32
Viscosity
200 - 250 CPS
Wet film thickness
75 - 125 microns
Dry film thickness
30 - 50 microns

Paint Characteristics

White paint shall be standard not less than 6% by mass of titanium dioxide as a
pigment, conforming to
type A (anatase) or type R (rutile) specified in BS 1851
Yellow paint shall be standard color BS 381C No. 356, except where an alternativ
e shade has been specified
in the contract, and contain not less than 6% by mass of a suitable yellow pigme
nt.

The paint shall be supplied fresh and ready for use in sealed containers and sto
red in accordance with
the manufacturer s instructions. The paint shall be applied without the use of thi
nners or other additives
Paint shall be applied at a covering rate recommended by the manufacturer and ap
proved by the Engineer.

Where markings are to be reflectorised with ballotini it shall be sprayed unifor

mly on to the wet paint film at
the rate of 400 - 500 g / sq.m. Ballotini shall comply with the requirements of
BS 3262 Clause 15.
Tree Grilles (if required by landscape design)
. Tree Grilles shall be cast in high grade grey cast iron, primed and painted to
the Engineer's approval.
. The grilles shall be to the dimensions and patterns detailed on the drawings.
. The tree grilles shall be provided in four (4) pieces, each with access holes
for maintenance of buried
irrigation emitter s sleeves.
. The grilles shall be fixed to the frame with vandal-resistant bolts.
. The grilles shall be supported by a mild steel split frame set in the concrete
haunching to the block trim.
. The tree grille shall be set flush with the surrounding paved surface.
11 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
11.1 General
The particular specification shall be read in conjunction with the general speci
fication. Where discrepancies
occur between the conditions of the general and particular specification then th
e conditions of the particular
specification shall take precedence.

All Materials shall be of the best quality and to the approval of the Engineer i
n accordance to the relevant
standards such as ASTM, British Standards, ACI, IBC, BSEN and Agreement Board Ce
rtificates noted in
Specifications and the Local Authorities.
Workmanship shall be to the highest required standards and codes of practices.
11.2 Structural Specifications
. Design Code: All design works shall be in accordance with the INTERNATIONAL BU
ILDING CODE
IN THE EMIRATE OF ABU DHABI.
. Foundations, Ground Beams & Suspended Slab: The concrete strength for Foundati
ons (pile caps, raft
over piles), Ground beams & suspended slab is fcu= 40 Mpa.
. Reinforcement Steel: The yield strength of steel: fy =460 Mpa.
. Steel material specification :

The following is the list of the materials standards and specifications for whic
h the building components
have been designed
Below are standard material specifications that will be used in the project. MUC
Engineering reserves the right
to make material substitutions and changes in specifications as and when deemed
necessary.
No.
Materials
Specifications
Minimum Strength
1
Built-Up Members
ASTM A 572M Grade 345 Type 1
Fy = 34.5 kN/cm
Or EN 10025-2 2004 S355JR
2
Hot-Rolled Members
Beams & Columns
EN 10025-2 2004 S355JR
Fy = 34.5 kN/cm
Or ASTM A 572M Grade 345 Type 1
Tubes
JIS G 3466 STKR 490
Fy = 32.5 kN/cm
Or EN 10210 - 1 S355J211
Channels
EN 10025-2 2004 S355JR
Fy = 35.5 kN/cm
Pipes
Space Frames : JIS G 3444 STK 500
Fy = 35.5 kN/cm
Handrails: ASTM A 53M Type E or S Grade A
Fy = 20.5 kN/cm
3
Cold Form Secondary Members
Black Steel
ASTM A 607 Grade 50
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Or ASTM A 1011M HSLAS Grade 340 Class 1
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Galvanized Steel
ASTM A 653 SS Grade 340 Class 1, Z275
Fy = kN/cm
4
Sheeting and Liner Panels
Zincalume Steel
ASTM A 792M SS Grade 340 Class 2, Azm 150
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Aluminum
ASTM B 209M SS Alloy 3003 Temper H-26
Fy = 14.5 kN/cm
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M (Grade) Z275
Fy = kN/cm
5
Roof & Wall Sandwhich Panels
Zincalume Steel
ASTM A 792M SS Grade 340 Class 2, Azm 150
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
Aluminum
ASTM B 209M SS Alloy 3003 Temper H-26
Fy = 14.5 kN/cm
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M Grade FS Type B (LFQ) Z275
Fy = 25.0 kN/cm
6
Valley Gutters **
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M SS Grade 340 Class 1, Z275
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
7
Mezzanine Deck Panels
Galvanized steel
ASTM A 653M SS Grade 340 Class 1, Z275
Fy = 34.0 kN/cm
ASTM A 653M SS Grade 550, Z180
Fy = 55.0 kN/cm
8
X-Bracing Members
Cables
ASTM A 475 Extra High Strength
Breaking Load=119.7 kN
Rods
ASTM A 615M Grade 300
Fu = 50.0 kN/cm
Or ASTM A 36M
Fu = 40.0 kN/cm
Angles
ASTM A 572M Grade 345 Type 1
Fu = 45.0 kN/cm
9
Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 36M Hot Dip Galvanized to ASTM A 153 Class C
Fu = 23.5 kN/cm
Fu = 36.0 kN/cm
ASTM F 1554 Grade 55 Hot Dip Galvanized to ASTM A
153 Class C
Fu = 38.0 kN/cm
Fu = 49.0 kN/cm
10
High Strength Bolts
ASTM A 325M Class 8.8 Type 1 Hot Dip Galvanized to
ASTM A 153 Class C Or DIN 939 Class 8.8 Hot Dip
Galvanized
Fu = 83.0 kN/cm
11
Machine Bolts
DIN 939 Class 4.6/4.8 Electro Plated Yellow Chromate
Fu = 40.0 kN/cm

List of materials and specifications

** Other gutters will usually be made from the materials used for sheeting
Fy= Yield Strength Fu= Tensile Strength

MUC Engineering reserves the right to substitute or entirely some of the materia
ls in case of material nonavailability
or supply shortage.
Concrete cover for Foundations:
Foundation Element or Condition
Minimum cover
1) Shallow Foundations

In accordance with section 7.7 of ACI 318

2) Precast non pre stressed deep foundation elements

Exposed to Seawater
Not manufactured under plant conditions
Manufactured under plant control conditions
3 inches (75mm)
2 inches (50mm)
In accordance with section 7.7.3 of ACI
318
3) Precast, pre stressed deep foundation elements

Exposed to seawater
Other
2.5 inches (65mm)
In accordance with section 7.7.3 of ACI
318
4) Cast-in-place deep foundation elements not enclosed by a
steel pipe , tube or permanent casing

2.5 inches (65mm)

5) Cast in place deep foundation elements enclosed by a steel
pipe, tube or permanent casing

1 inch (25mm)
6) Structural steel core within a steel pipe, tube or permanent
casing

2 inches (50mm)
7) Cast in place drilled shafts enclosed by a stable rock steel
1.5 inches (40mm)

Minimum concrete cover

11.3 External Finishes
General:
The following is a general specification different finishes refer to architectur
al, detail drawing for project
specific requirement.
Ceramic Tile Cladding
6mm thick interior quality ceramic tile with ribbed back profile to be provided
inside toilets and along pantry
walls. The tile cladding shall be set flush with the wall with appropriately siz
ed spacers.

General Properties
Property
Value
Frost Acid and Alkali Resistant

Water absorption between 0.7 to 1.5%

Coefficient of thermal expansion

6 x 106 x k-1
Scratch resistant
5 - 6 Mohs
Bending strength
32 - 36 N / mm
Tolerance in size
Length and width 0.6% Thickness 10%0
Compression strength
200 N / mm
Straightness of sides
DIN 18166 - shall not exceed 0.5%
Rectangularity
DIN 18166 1%
Flatness of surface
DIN 18166 Curvature and war pages shall not exceed 0.5% of length
of corresponding diagonal

External finishes Properties

The substrate shall be prepared by grit blasting, etc. to provide a level surfac
e of 2mm tolerance. The
surface shall be pre-wetted to receive high performance epoxy based primer / bon
ding coat. Each ceramic
tile shall be fitted independently and solidly bedded in High Performance Tropic
al grade Epoxy tiling
mortar, minimum bed thickness of 10mm. The joints shall be 5mm wide and be flush
with a High
Performance latex modified grout mortar, color to Engineer s approval. All of the
above to be carried out to
manufacturer s written instructions and to the approval of the site Engineer.

The tiles shall be divided at intervals to form large panels for movement and ex
pansion purposes as well as
for aesthetic reasons. Such joints shall be filled with high quality polysulphid
e sealant, color to Engineer s
approval.

The cladding shall be designed by the specialist supplier to form traditional pa

ttern to the approval of the
Engineer. Allow three color variation and for cut tiles laid to the approved pat
tern.

Tiling setting plans shall be prepared by the Contractor giving all details, jun
ctions, window and door
connections, openings, special shaped fittings, expansion joints, layout etc. fo
r Engineer approval.

Like any other item on the project, the directions and approvals of the Engineer
not relieve the Contractor
from his responsibility towards the works he executes.
Steel Works
Specified in this Section:
The provision, fabrication, erection, connection, grouting, galvanizing and shop
painting of all structural
steel work members.

General Requirements
Method
Fabricate and erect the structural steel in a safe manner, without interfering w
ith or damaging adjacent
structures.

. The steelworks must be done according to the standard DIN or equivalent BS sta
ndards.
. The quality of the steel work and its connections (bolts, weldings etc.) must
be verified with tests and
material certificates. This material certificate must show the mechanical proper
ties of the used material.
. All steel members shall be shop coated with one coat primer and field painted
with two coats vinyl or
equal approved. Color to Engineer s choice.

Adjoining Elements Requirement

Obtain the requirements for adjoining building elements to be fixed to or suppor
ted on the structural steel
and provide for the required fixings.

Identification Marks
Provide suitable and sufficient marks or other means for identifying each member
, and for the correct
setting out, location, erection and connection of the steel work. Mark bolted co
nnections to shows the
bolting category.

Surface Preparation of Steel Work

. Steel work shall be blast cleaned to remove all mill scale and other contamina
tion. The surface shall be
cleaned to second quality standard (CLASS S2).
. No blasting or priming shall take place when the relative humidity exceeds 90%
and condensation is
likely, or when the surface temperature of the steel work is at or below dew poi
nt.
. The abrasive used during blast cleaning shall be steel, malleable iron or chil
led iron grit of a grading
suitable to give maximum surface amplitude of 100 microns.
. All surface defects likely to be detrimental to the protective system such as
cracks, surface laminations
and deep pitting, shall be removed. Fabrication surface defects such as fins at
saw cuts and burns shall
be similarly removed.
. All dirt and debris shall be removed from surface after blasting by vacuum cle
aner, airline or brush. If
any residues are trapped in the paint the affected area shall be re-blasted and
re-coated.
. All shop weld areas and shop bolted or riveted connections shall be blast clea
ned to the same standards
as adjacent steel. All weld stag and spatters shall be removed.
. Blast cleaned surface shall be over coated within four hours of the start of c
leaning, and the steel shall
not be exposed out of doors during this period.

Quality Control
Shop Drawings
Supply shop drawings of the structural steel work prepared in accordance with AS
1101.3, or equal
approved showing the relevant details of each assembly, treatment and erection,
including:

. Identification;
. Steel type and grade;
. Dimensions of items;
. Required camber, where applicable, hot or cold
. Forming and post weld heat treatment
. Location of temporary connections;
. Weld categories and bolting categories;
. Orientation of members;
. Location of temporary connections;
. Surface preparation methods and coating system;
. Procedures necessary for shop and site assemble;
. Lifting and support points for handling and transport;
. Required fixings for adjoining building elements;
. Procedures for erection including temporary bracing.

Fabrication
Do not commence fabrication until the Engineer s permission to use the relevant sh
op drawings has been
obtained.
Materials
Standards
Materials generally: To AS 4100 section 2 or equal approved. Cold formed section
s: To AS 1538 clause 1.7
or equal approved.
Compliance with Standard
For each batch of steel supplied to the works, provide certified mill test repor
ts or test certificates issued
by the mill as evidence of compliance with the material standards specified.

Independent Tests:
Alternatively, have the steel tested by an independent testing authority for com
pliance with the chemical
composition and mechanical test requirements of the appropriate material standar
ds.
Fabrication
Standards: To AS 4100 Section 14 or equal approved.

Splicing: Provide structural members in single lengths otherwise required or app

roved. Availability: If steel
members are not available in the section, grade or length specified, obtain appr
oval before substituting
other sections or grade.

Site Work: Other than work shown on the shop drawings as site work do not fabric
ate structural steel on
site without prior approval.
Welding
Welding Procedures: Before commencing fabrication submit details of proposed wel
ding procedures,
using the form in Appendix E of AS 1554.1 or equal approved.

Approval: Do not commence fabrication until welding procedures have been approve
d by the Engineer.

Weld Category: Use category SP to AS 1554.1 and executed according to DIN 18800
or equivalent BS
standards.

Site Welds: Other than site welds, if any, shown on the shop drawings, do not we
ld on site without
prior approval. Wherever possible locate site welds in positions for down hand w
elding.
Bolting
Connection Bolts: If the connection bolts are not shown on the Drawings or speci
fied, use hot dipped
galvanized high strength bolts, nuts and washers to As 1252 and bolting category
8.8/s or equal approved.

Lock Nuts: Provide lock nuts for bolts in moving parts or parts subject to vibra
tion and for vertical
bolts in tension.
Erection
Temporary Connections:

Anchor Bolts:
For each group of anchor bolts provide a template with setting out lines clearly
marked for positioning
the bolts when casting in.

Grouting at Supports:
Do not grout if the temperature of the base plate or the footing surface exceeds
38 C.

Methods: Use high strength cementitious grout. Minimum thickness: 15mm, Maximum
thickness: 35mm
 Finishes
Steel work Coating System

Definition:
Steel work coating system shall be deemed to include powder coating, painting, g
alvanizing and fire
protection coatings included in the scope of this sections, and the applicable s
urface preparation methods.

Painting, Galvanizing and Metal Spray Coatings:

Steel work is to be sand blasted to a 21/2 finish to AS 1627 or equal approved a

nd then repainted in the shop
with:

Primer: Two pack epoxy zinc phosphate to min. 60-70 microns DFT.

Barrier Coat: Polyurethane to min. 60-70 microns DFT Color and texture to Engine
er s choice.

Surface Preparation
Steel Surfaces Generally: (Including surfaces not otherwise treated, and contact
surface with concrete
encasement or grout): Remove loose mill scale, loose rust, oil, grease, dirt, gl
obules of weld metal weld
slag and other foreign matter.
Insulated Profiled Aluminium Roofing / Cladding
The Aluminium sheeting shall comprise of profiled aluminium sheeting in composit
e insulated panel
form. The material shall conform to relevant BS specification. The fixing shall
be as per recommended
manufacturer's detail and to Engineer's approval. The end laps shall be minimum
200mm.

Roof cladding shall comprise profiled aluminium sheeting in composite insulated

panel form. The panel
shall comprise an external fully protected aluminium weathering sheet. 50mm of u
rethane foam and an
internal lining sheet with a finish to suit the final application. The panel sha
ll be a factory manufactured
unit with the urethane foam bonding the composite parts together in such a way t
o completely fill all
spaces in its panel. The panel shall provide an effective cover width of 1000mm
and shall be
manufactured in precise lengths to suit the structure in order to minimize joint
ing.

The aluminium sheeting shall be of a quality not less than the requirement of BS
4300/6 conforming to
alloy 3105 with H6 or H8 temper.
The aluminium sheeting shall further conform to the requirements for material an
d finishes as laid down
in BS 4868 1972 Profiled Aluminium Sheet for Building".

The roofing and cladding system shall be fully co-ordinated with the space frame
design, roof lights,
drainage and other services. Slope shall be provided for effective drainage as p
er drawings and as instructed
by the Engineer. External and internal flushing, gutters etc. shall be provided
as required. Allow for any
openings required for services such as AC ducts to pass through.

The scope of work shall include design, engineering, fabrication, supply and ins
tallation of roofing /
cladding specified. Shop drawings including but not limited to design, fabricati
on, and installation and
fixing details including necessary calculations and details at all junctions sha
ll be submitted for approval.
Outer Skin
The outer skin is of aluminium alloy 3105 sheet 0.7mm gauge with 45/250 trapezoi
dal profile, (min
45mm high), cover width 1000mm with a factory applied semi-gloss, two coat PVF2
paint system. Color to
Engineer s choice.
Insulation Core
The insulation core comprises factory injected rigid closed cell fire retardant
polyurethane foam. The
minimum depth of insulation will be 50mm between the liner sheet and the valley
bottom of the outer
sheet. The thermal 'U' valve shall be 0.4 W/m2 deg.C or less. The contractor sha
ll ensure that the
thermal insulation material has an ozone depleting potential (ODP) of zero and a
low Global warming
potential of less than five (GWP<5).

Material Property
Test Method
Value
Density
ISO 845
35-40 Kg/m
Compression Strength
ISO 844
C10 = 1.5 Kg/cm
Modulus of Compressibility
ISO 844
37 Kg/cm
Tensile Strength
ISO 1920
2.8 Kg.cm
Thermal Conductivity
ISO 2581
0.019 Watt/m.deg.K
Flame Resistance
ISO 3582
Burning extent = 4 cm.
Self-extinguishing = 26 secs
time.
Water Vapour Transmission
ISO 1663
72 gram/m 24hr
(at 38%-90% Relative Humidity)

Polyurethane Insulation Test Values

The insulation used in these panels shall be resistant to moisture, shall not su
pport fungal growth, nor rot or
deteriorate with age. It shall also be resistant to moist oils, greases; adhesiv
es dilute acids and alkalis at
normal temperature.
Inner Skin
0.55mm gauge Stucco embossed aluminium sheet to alloy specification NS 31 which
conforms to the
stronger of the two alloy specifications as laid down in BS 4868 1972. The sheet
shall be flat with a
shallow 3mm depth profile. The finish to be factory applied semi-gloss two coat
PVF2 paint system.
Color to Engineer's choice.
Side & End Laps
Side laps to be sealed with a non-hardening, permanently elastic, self-adhesive
poly-butyl sealant strip 12m
x 3mm and riveted at 250mm centers using aluminium rivets. Sealing is not requir
ed on the verticals, but
should be riveted at 400mm centers.

End laps are to be 200mm and sealed with two runs of sealant strip (Specificatio
n as side laps).
Flashings
External Trims and Flashings will be manufactured from 1.2mm gauge aluminium to
match the color and
finish of the external sheet where applicable.

Internal flashings where applicable will match material gauge, color and finish
of the internal sheet.
Fixing Accessories

Roof and inclined panels to be fixed to steel purlins with stainless steel grade
316 self-tapping screws
complete with stainless steel (or aluminium) washer incorporating neoprene seali
ng washer and PVC color
cap.

The screws for roof panels shall be fixed through the profile crown and shall in
corporate aluminium and
vulcanized rubber saddle washer to match the roof sheet color. The screw length
shall be 127mm and
diameter min. 6mm. The washer size shall be 22mm.

The screws for inclined panels shall be fixed through the profile trough. The sc
rew length shall be 76mm
and diameter min. 6mm. The washer size shall be 19mm.

Purlin and sheeting rails should be covered by PVC barrier tape extending 10mm p
ast the face of this purlin.

Flashings and side laps to be fastened with an all-aluminium sealed rivet includ
ing mandrill and pin.

Profile filler blocks to be used in conjunction with flashings to adequately sea

l edge of roof lights,
ridge, eaves, gable and drip where applicable.

Filler blocks to be in Black synthetic rubber.

Isolating grommets shall be used to prevent contact between screw and sheet.

The joining between the roofing and inclined cladding of the space frame sides s
hall be completely scaled
and water tight.

Manufacturer to provide necessary supervision and only qualified assembly compan

ies authorized by the
manufacturer to be used.
Submittals

The Contractor shall submit three sets of shop drawings and data details which s
how the manufacturer s
intents in complying with the requirements of this specification section for the
exterior elements as follows:

. Show details of all junctions

. Junction with anchorage to the building structure.
. Air barrier and vapor barrier.
. Dielectric separator details
. Thermal separator details
. Provisions for thermally induced expansion of contraction of members.
. Provisions for absorption of the building structure movements.
. Details at parapet conditions.
. Roof Drainage
. Methods of erection.

Samples

Provide sample panel for showing the construction of the Roof. Actual applied sa
mples of the approved
color to be provided as per the Engineer s requirement.
Warranties
. Complete weather tight work within specified tolerances.
. Structural soundness and freedom from distortion and within elastic deflection
limits specified.
. Metal finish will not crack, peel, pit, corrode or dis-color.
. Sealants and gaskets shall remain free from deterioration, oxidation or disloc
ation due to sunlight and
weather conditions.
. Completed installation shall remain free from rattles, wind whistles and noise
due to thermal and
structural movements and wind pressure.

Poly-carbonate Roof Lights

The roof lights shall be entirely self-supporting over a structured box rafter s
ystem, transferring loads
directly to suitable building curbs. Thus totally eliminating the requirement fo
r structured steel supporting
frame work. The main structured rafters shall be formed to required geometry. Th
e roof light shall be
positively drained via integral extruded condensation channels. The roof light s
hall be pyramid shaped
with concealed external fixings. The roof lights and fixing system shall be engi
neered in accordance with:-

EN 1991 Eurocode 1: Actions on structures

EN 1999 Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium structures

Materials & Components

Stainless steel fixing shall be grade A2 of BS 6105 (grade 304) or equal approve
d. Extruded Aluminium
shall be of grade 6063 T6 conforming to BS 1474 or equal approved. The sheet alu
minium used if any
shall conform to BS 1470 The heat cured gaskets shall conform to BS 4255 and the
silicone based sealant
shall conform to BS 5889 1989 or equal approved.
Finish
The aluminium shall receive all necessary pre-treatments to Engineer s satisfactio
n, followed by polyester
powder coating in accordance with BS 6496 or equal approved. Color to Engineer s c
hoice from standard
range.
Glazing
The glazing shall be double skin U.V protected poly-carbonate comprising of:
. Outer skin 6mm thick diffused opal type with light transmission of approximate
ly 54%.
. 20mm air gap.
. Inner skin 4mm thick clear type with light transmission of approximately 87%.
. The total light transmission through the double skin unit shall be approximate
ly 45% to 50%. Average U
value of the double skin poly-carbonate roof light unit shall be 2.81/W/m degree
C. Glazing material
shall be tested in accordance with BS 476 PT 7 building regulation (1991) or equ
al approved and passed
to class O (surface spread of flame), to Engineer s satisfaction.

Shop drawings showing details of fixing, drainage etc shall be submitted for app
roval. The roof light
system shall be fully coordinated with the supporting structure & its finishes.
Required samples shall be
submitted for approval on site.

The roof light units shall be pyramid shaped, double glazed installed with a gut
ter system to ensure
effective drainage of each unit.
Timber Trellis
The work shall conform to the codes and standards of ASTM, BS , and UI. Affidavi
ts shall be submitted
from the supplier indicating the species grades and moisture content of all fram
ing timber if requested
by the Engineer. The timber shall be new, sound, kiln-dried and seasoned, free f
rom bows, twists,
crooks and waves that cannot be corrected in process of bridging of nailing. Moi
sture content shall not
exceed 5%.

The work shall be completely coordinated with the other adjacent works. Submit s
hop drawings after
verifying dimensions and works of other trades which adjoin materials.

All external timber having direct contact with concrete or masonry shall be give
n a pressure
preservative treatment and shall be accompanied upon delivery with certificates
from the treatment
company certifying the pressure used. The timber shall be fire-retardant in acco
rdance with the governing
code, factory treated and certificates shall be submitted from the manufacturing
company to the
Engineer.

Rough hardware such as nails, screws, clips, etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanized
. Anchor bolts shall conform
to ASTM, dramatic & length required with hooked end at concrete embedded conditi
ons. Provide standard
steel washers & nuts field welding shall not be allowed. It is not the intent of
this specification to define the
types, sizes and installation methods for each item of work. The methods of deta
iling and construction
shall be in equal in quality of similar details as may be shown on the drawings.
The work that is finished
shall be stained and shall be free from defects or blemishes on surface exposed
to view that will show
after the finish coat is applied. Joints shall be tight and so formed to conceal
shrinkage. All nail heads in
finished work shall be sunk.
Ladders
The ladders shall be used for access to the roof. The ladder shall be made of ga
lvanized mild steel flat
section of size 15mm x 60mm and angle sections with 40mm ladder rungs spaced at
300mm with collar
fixing; safety cage construction with security gate hinged gate at bottom of cag
e with padlock provision all
epoxy paint coated.
Louvered Aluminium Doors
Refer section 16 of particular specification for Doors.
11.4 Schedule of finishes
Refer to Tender Drawings for the project specific schedule of finishes.
Note: Availability of all tile sizes mentioned is to be confirmed from approved
manufacturers. Different
manufacturers vary their sizes to suit the modules.
11.5 Floor Finish
Glazed Ceramic tiles 8mm thick of nominal size 500x500mm as shown on the drawing
s including cement
sand bedding to give overall thickness as per Engineer's approval. Allow for 4 c
olor / range variations. The
tile grout shall be waterproofed and matching the color of the tiles or as direc
ted by Engineer. The tiles
shall be laid to falls and cross falls and drains shall be fixed to the center o
f 4 tiles. Shop drawings
showing the design pattern and fixing details at junctions shall be submitted fo
r approval. Allow for
rounded edge tiles where edges are exposed to view. Allow for waterproofing in a
ll areas of the building that
are exposed to the exterior.
Epoxy Resin floor coating, high performance, heavy duty, (Nitofloor FC 140 or eq
ual), 2 coats, minimum
100 microns on cement sand screed laid to falls and cross falls to make up the r
equired levels.

Epoxy Resin floor, exterior quality, slip resistant having dry film thickness of
500 micron, laid on cement
sand screed laid to falls to make up the required level.

Non-slip Ceramic tiles size 300x300x8mm thick for toilets and kitchen, colored,
laid to pattern on mortar
and sand over seamless waterproofing. The tiles shall be laid to falls and cross
falls as per drainage points.
Drains shall be fixed to the center of 4 tiles. Allow for 2 color variation in t
iles and matching water proofed
grout. Submit shop drawings showing the design pattern and fixing details at jun
ctions. Allow for rounded
edge tiles where edges of tiles are exposed.

Terrazzo tiles - 500x500x25mm thick polished terrazzo tiles consisting of marble

chips, locally factory
manufactured, laid on and including sand cement mortar to give an overall thickn
ess with joints grouted
using matching cement. The tiles shall be ground and polished after installation
. Allow for waterproofing
in all areas exposed to the exterior.

Interlock block pavers - The pavers shall be precast blocks to size, shape, patt
ern, color and layout to the
approval of Engineer. The pavers shall be uniform in shape and color, supplied b
y an approved
manufacturer conforming to the requirements of BS7617 It shall be laid on a well
compacted bed of
50mm layer of clean, sharp, crushed sand over a minimum 250mm layer of road base
material
compacted to 95% of MDD as obtained in BS1377 test 13. Field test to be carried
out at a frequency of
2 tests per 1000 m2 as per BS 1377 Test 15B) and laid over a properly watered an
d compacted base
course.

Other properties
Value
Minimum nominal thickness
60mm thick for pedestrian areas & 80mm thick for vehicular areas
Cement
BS 12, 4027, BS 146
Aggregate
BS 882
Water
BS 3148 (pH value 7-a)
Pigments
BS 1014
Compressive Strength
Not less than 49 N/mm2
Certificate of Compliance
BS 6717

Other Properties
For other specific floor finish types refer to tender drawings.
11.6 Skirting Finish
Ceramic Tile:
500 x 100 x 8mm thick ceramic skirting coved type with round edge, including all
external and internal
angles. The skirting shall match in color and range to the floor tiles. Separate
the skirting from the
wall finish by a 10mm x 10mm painted channel groove only where the wall is not c
eramic tiles finish.
Terrazzo Tiles:
100 x 20mm thick polished terrazzo skirting with profiled top edge set flush wit
h the wall finish.
 Epoxy Coating:
300mm high heavy duty high performance epoxy resin based coating (Nitofloor FC14
0 or equal). 2 coats on
15mm thick sand cement render. For other specific skirting refer to tender drawi
ngs.
11.7 Wall Finish
Proprietary self-colored cement render based on selected sand and cement as desc
ribed in BS 5262 to be
applied in one coat to block work and / or concrete suited to receive render. Po
orly keyed surfaced like
smooth concrete shall have a stipple coat applied on it. The cement render shoul
d be through colored and
should have excellent weather and fire (Class 0) resistance and durability.

No painting is required. The render shall have a scraped finish with Ashlar groo
ves marked on surface made
by approved Ashlar cutters. Allow for 2 color variation. Color, pattern and shap
e of Ashlar grooves shall be
as per Engineer's approval. The mixing of cement render shall be done using a su
itable render spray machine,
drill and whisk or tumble mix ashlar cut and 28mm for 10mm ashlar cut.

Render shall be applied by traditional methods to an initial thickness of 23 mm

for, a 5mm. Minimum
thickness of 15mm must be maintained at the base of the cut. The render shall be
ruled level and flattened
with a spatula and allowed to harden (5-16 hours) depending on weather and backg
round condition. When
render is green (set but not fully hardened) it shall be scraped using an approv
ed scraping tool in
circular motion. Thoroughly brush down the surface using a soft bristle brush. R
emove no more than
3mm from the surface to give the required finished thickness. Correct defects if
any. Mark out and cut the
ashlar effect to Engineer's approval.

Cement render shall not be applied in rain or if exposure to rain is likely duri
ng setting and drying.
Curing with clean water required during rapid drying condition. Exact color matc
hing is to be achieved.

Shop drawings showing pattern and shape of ashlars grooves shall be submitted fo
r approval.

15mm thick sand cement render smoothed finish with three coats of approved acryl
ic / silk emulsion
paint.

Three coats of approved paint. In cases where the paint is applied directly onto
poorly constructed block
work allow for appropriate sealant or plaster to be applied as per Engineers ins
truction. The contractor
shall ensure that the paints used are certified with low VOC content.

Colored ceramic tiles 300 x 200 x 6mm thick on plaster to full height of walls i
f no false ceiling or 100mm
above false ceiling. Allow for 3 color variation and or pattern and fixing of ti
les in pattern of varying size
to the approval of Engineer. Tile grout and adhesive shall be waterproof epoxy t
ype and grout shall be
matching in color to the tile. RE, coved tiles and angles to be used at all junc
tions including wall / floor
junctions.

15mm thick sand cement plaster smooth finish.

Note: These walls shall be finished by the end user based on their finishes requ
irements.
11.8 Ceiling Finish
Three coats of approved paint to the soffit of the hollow core slab.
Proprietary self- colored cement render based on selected sand and cement as des
cribed in BS 5262 to be
applied in one coat to concrete suited to receive render. Smooth concrete shall
have a stipple coat applied
on it. The render should be through colored and should have excellent weather an
d fire (Class O)
resistance and durability. The render shall have a scraped finish, color to Engi
neer's approval. The cement
render shall be mixed using a suitable render spray machine, drill and whisk or
tumble mix, and applied
by traditional methods to an initial thickness of 18mm. The render shall be rule
d level and flattened with
a spatula and allowed to harden (5 - 16 hours) depending on weather and backgrou
nd condition. When
render is green (set but not fully hardened) it shall be scraped using approved
scraping tool in circular
motion, and brushed down using a soft bristle brush. No more than 3mm should be
removed from the
surface, leaving a minimum finished thickness of 15mm. Amend defects if any. Cem
ent render shall not be
applied in rain or if exposure to rain is likely during setting and drying. Curi
ng with clean water is
required during rapid drying condition. Exact color matching is to be achieved.

H.W Trellis or pergolas with proprietary preservative treated and stained painte
d.

Concrete slab with no finish.

11.9 False ceiling finish
Gypsum Board Ceiling:
12mm thick gypsum plaster board ceiling / bulkhead on concealed metal proprietar
y suspension system
with taped and skimmed joints, fire resistant with shadow line edge trim with th
ree coats of acrylic
emulsion textured paint. Allow for openings, cut-outs for lights, AC grills etc.
, proprietary lockable
framed access panels as required. Color and texture to Engineer s choice.

Aluminium False Ceiling:

600 x 600mm Aluminium Non-perforated Acoustic Tile on concealed suspension syste
m.

Description: Polyester Painted Aluminium tiles supported on a concealed clip-in

grid system with some
swing down tiles such that the tiles are retained vertically in the grid during
service/maintenance. Most of
the swing down tiles shall be located near the service shaft or below slab mount
ed equipment.

Thickness
0.7mm minimum Un-perforated Aluminium
Edge Detail
5mm bevelled on all sides
Pattern
Plain
Finish
Electro statically applied polyester paint, 45 microns, high opacity
Color
White, RAL shade to Engineer s approval, 20% gloss high opacity
Acoustic Insert
25mm thick, 45kg/m3 density mineral wool insulation faced with
one side aluminum foil and other side black glass tissue

False ceiling finish

Suspension System:
Primary grid system consisting of suspended channel installed at 1500mm centers
and suspended from the
structural soffit slab at 1500mm centers by galvanized MS suspension angle hange
rs. The hangers shall be
secured fixed to the primary grid using M6 or equivalent fixings. Rigid clip in
fixing bars shall be connected
to the primary grid using suspension brackets at 600mm centers.
Perimeter Trim: Extruded aluminum perimeter channel trim in same color as the ti
les. Fire Performance:
System to be tested as per BS 476 Class O.
11.10 Sanitary ware
The contractor shall ensure the building s interior potable water consumption is r
educed through the use of
efficient fixtures and appliances.

Items listed are in vitreous china - all colors to Engineer's selection.

. Vanity Wash Basin, size as per Drawings, under counter, complete with traps et
c.
. Wash Basin pedestal type, size as per drawings complete with traps etc.
. European WC with matching cistern and double seat, open front type with hand s
pray.
. Kitchen Sink: 18/8 stainless steel size as per drawings single/double bowl, co
unter mounted with pillar
mounted sink mixer with swivel nozzle.

11.11 Sanitary fittings

All fittings listed shall be stainless steel unless otherwise stated. All appare
nt cold and hot water pipes
connected to taps shall be rigid and chrome plated.

. Single Lever mixer type for wash basin with pop-up waste set.
. Spray combination consisting of angle-valve, flexible metal hose, wall holder
and trigger controlled hand
spray. The assembly shall be located on the right side of WC.
. Angle valve to wash basin and W.C
. Water supply concealed valve.
. Grab bar as shown in drawings for all Accessible Toilets

11.12 Sanitary accessory

Position and type of accessories shall be as shown on drawings or as directed by
Engineer.

. Soap holder for wash basin, semi recessed.

. Toilet tissue roll holder for W.C
. Hand dryer surface mounted auto pilot, no touch operation in Kitchen.
. Hook & Bumper (included in door ironmongery)
. Paper towel dispenser.
. Mirror 6mm thick with ply backing as per required size.
. Towel Rail and Stainless Steel grab bar.
11.13 Special items
Vanity Counter (As Required)
The counters shall have a 20mm thick good quality polished black granite counter
top, 600mm wide, color
to approval of Engineer and include a 180mm wide fascia work, under frame, a cou
nter top with
vitreous china basin with single hole mixer and a waterfall edge detail.

Counter Height shall be as shown in the drawings or in compliance with one or mo

re reach ranges as
specified in Section 308 & 309 of ANSI A117.1.2003.

The height from bottom of fascia to finished floor level shall not be less than
685mm so as to cater to
the requirements of knee clearance for wheelchair accessibility as described in
ANSI Standards
A117.1.2003 Section 306.

The mirror shall be 6mm thick with ply backing as per required size.
The color and type of granite shall be as per Engineer choice. Samples shall be
submitted for approval.
Steel Staircase Handrail and Balustrade

The handrail shall be Galvanized and painted mild steel pipe of 50mm dia and in
compliance with IBC
Section 1012 as shown in drawings. Color to Clients / Engineers approval.

Balustrades shall be galvanized and painted mild steel pipe of 25mm dia bolted t
o Channel section
Stringer Beams which also shall be galvanized and painted to client / architects
approval.

Treads shall be 4mm thick galvanized heavy duty chequered plate welded between c
hannel section
stringer beams.

Fixing detail shall be as per drawings. Contractor shall submit detailed shop /
fabrication drawings for
Engineer s approval.
Timber Truss & Ceiling Planks
The timber used for the outdoor pergolas over walkways shall be made of good qua
lity hard wood as
specified in the carpentry & joinery general specification. The timber shall be
new, sound, kiln-dried
and seasoned, free from bows, twists, crooks and waves that cannot be corrected
in process of bridging of
nailing.

Moisture content shall not exceed 5%. The design timber posts and beams shall co
nform to relevant
BS standards. The design and installation shall be fully coordinated with the ad
joining works.

Submit shop drawings and calculations showing details of design and fixing for a
pproval. Rough hardware
such as nails, screws, clips etc. shall be hot-dipped galvanized.

The work that is finished shall be stained and shall be free from defects or ble
mishes. Joints shall be tight
and so formed to conceal shrinkage. All nail / screw heads in finished work shal
l be sunk.
Galvanized Steel Ladder for Roof Access.
615mm wide galvanized steel ladder with 300mm center to center vertical distance
between steps shall be
provided near the office building (Block-A). Hardwood stiffeners shall be provid
ed as required. Brackets
shall be provided at every 500mm vertical distance and shall be fixed to the wal
l with anchor bolts. Shop
drawing showing details of ladder and fixing shall be submitted for Engineer's a
pproval.
11.14 Door schedule (as per tender drawings/BOQ)
11.15 Door
Frame types
Frame for Wooden door
. Solid Wood, color and finish to match the leaf and subject to Engineer s approva
l
. 50mm Standard size all around
. Covers the full width of wall including finishes
. Nylon anti-bang gasket
. Solid wood Architrave

Frame for Wooden Main Entry Doors

. Solid wood
. 50mm standard size all around
. Covers the full width of wall including finishes
. Nylon anti-bang gasket
. Intumescent strip seal all around.
. Solid wood Architrave

Frame for Aluminium doors

. Aluminium extruded profiled section with appropriate thermal breaks.
. 50mm standard size all around
. Covers full width of wall including finishes
. Matching silicon mastic
. Nylon anti-bang gasket

Leaf Types
Leaf for internal wooden doors
50mm thick flush door 75% solid wood filling, with 10 mm mahogany lipping and 6
mm MDF on both
sides pressed in 0.6 mm a quality mahogany veneer with 3 mm grove on both sides
stained as per
Engineer s approved color.

Leaf for external main entry doors

6mm thick glass door as per Engineer s approved color.
Louvered Aluminium Doors
The louvered aluminium doors shall conform to BS 1474 with a powder coating fini
sh that conforms
to BS 6496 Color to Engineers approval from standard range. The door shall be bo
lted to galvanized
steel structural angle supports minimum 50 x 50 x 6 mm. Anti-bird & insect scree
n mesh shall be provided.
It shall be of exposure category (design wind pressure: 1600 2000 pa).
Glazing For Doors & Windows
All external (including open to arcade) doors and windows shall be double glazed
units consisting of 6mm
+ 12mm cavity + 6mm, with tinted glass for outer pane & clear glass for inner pa
ne as per general
specification. Doors shall be of tempered safety glass. Inner window glazing sha
ll be 6mm clear glass.

The contractor shall ensure that all windows and sliding windows, in conjunction
with a suitable glazing
shall have efficient thermal barriers and should achieve a target area average w
eighted U-Value of 1.90
W/m2K. The Solar Heat Gain Coefficient for the glazing unit shall be a maximum o
f 0.23
12 PLUMBING
12.1 Common Motor requirements for plumbing equipment
General
Section includes
. Single phase electric motors.
. Three phase electric motors.

Reference Standards
ABMA STD 9
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers
Association, Inc. ; 1990 (Reapproved 2008)
IEEE 112
IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators; Inst
itute
of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edit
ion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d
Supplements.

Submittals
. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and conn
ection requirements.
. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power fac
tor for three phase motors
larger than 1/2 horsepower.
. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connect
ions, lubrication, and wiring
instructions.
. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.
. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacemen
t sizes, and lubrication
instructions.

Quality Assurance
. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of electric m
otors for plumbing use,
and their accessories, with minimum five years documented product development, t
esting, and
manufacturing experience.

Delivery, Storage and Handling

Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory c
overs and suitable
weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipme
nt and store
separately.
Warranty
Provide one year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower.
Products
General, Construction and Requirements
A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 2717 for required electrical characte
ristics.
B. Electrical Service:
1. Motors 4.0 HP and Smaller: 220 volts, single phase, 50 Hz.
2. Motors Larger than 4.0 Horsepower: [400] volts, three phase, 50 Hz.

C. Construction:
1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulatio
n class, service
factor, and motor enclosure type.
4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.

D. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labelled for hazard classification, w

ith over temperature
protection.
E. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM,
full load amps, locked
rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, po
wer factor, efficiency.
F. Wiring Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, an
d materials indicated.
Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.
2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide t
hreaded conduit
connection in end frame.

Application
A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the eq
uipment manufacturer's
standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans, oil burners, and centrifugal pump
s: Split phase type.
C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capaci
tor type.
D. Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor
start type.
E. Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor
run type.
F. Motors located in exterior locations, wet air streams downstream of sprayed c
oil dehumidifiers, draw
through cooling towers, air cooled condensers, humidifiers, direct drive axial f
ans, roll filters, explosion
proof environments, and dust collection systems: Totally enclosed type.
G. Motors located in outdoors, in wet air streams downstream of sprayed coil deh
umidifiers, in draw
through cooling towers, and in humidifiers: Totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-
treated type.
H. Motors located outdoors and in draw through cooling towers: Totally enclosed
weatherproof epoxysealed
type.

Single Phase Power Split Phase Motors

A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEM
A Service Factor, prelubricated
sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Serv
ice Factor, pre-lubricated
ball bearings.

Single phase power permanent split capacitor motor

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.

Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperatur
e rise) insulation,
minimum 1.0 Service Factor, pre-lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic re
set overload protector.
Single phase power capacitor start motors start motors
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/ca
pacitor- run motors with
two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating
speeds.

Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA S

ervice Factor, prelubricated
sleeve bearings.

Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service
Factor, pre-lubricated
ball bearings.
Three phase power squirrel cage motors
A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design
B
characteristics.
D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Desi
gn B motors.
E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine
free from electrical or
mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with en
d brackets of cast
iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors
embedded in motor
windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor
starter; refer to Section
26 2913.
I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equippe
d with plugged provision
for re-lubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Cal
culate bearing load
with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard sh
aft extension.
Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.
K. Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked roto
r starting current to
approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing ap
proximately 50 percent
of full winding locked rotor torque.
L. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressu
re with rotor and
starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with wate
rproof non-washing
grease.
M. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested i
n accordance with IEEE
112.
N. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested
in accordance with
IEEE 112.

Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in
any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
 Schedules

A. NEMA Open Motor Service Factors.

1. 1/6-1/3 hp:

. 3600 rpm: 1.35.

. 1800 rpm: 1.35.
. 1200 rpm: 1.35.
. 900 rpm: 1.35.
2. 1/2 hp:

. 3600 rpm: 1.25.

. 1800 rpm: 1.25.
. 1200 rpm: 1.25.
. 900 rpm: 1.15.
3. 3/4 hp:

. 3600 rpm: 1.25.

. 1800 rpm: 1.25.
. 1200 rpm: 1.15.
. 900 rpm: 1.15.
4. 1 hp:

. 3600 rpm: 1.25.

. 1800 rpm: 1.15.
. 1200 rpm: 1.15.
. 900 rpm: 1.15.
5. 1.5-150 hp:

. 3600 rpm: 1.15.

. 1800 rpm: 1.15.
. 1200 rpm: 1.15.
. 900 rpm: 1.15.

B. Three Phase - Energy Efficient, Open Drip-Proof Performance:

1. 1200 rpm.
a. 1 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 145T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 72.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 81.
b. 1-1/2 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 182T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 73.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 83.
c. 2 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 184T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 75.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 85.
d. 3 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 213T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 60.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 86.
e. 5 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 215T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 65.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 87.
f. 7-1/2 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 254T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 73.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 89.
g. 10 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 256T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 74.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 89.
h. 15 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 284T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 77.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 90.
i. 20 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 286T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 78.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 90.
j. 25 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 324T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 74.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 91.
k. 30 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 326T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 78.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 91.
l. 40 hp:

. NEMA Frame: 364T.

. Minimum Percent Power Factor: 77.
. Minimum Percent Efficiency: 93.
m. 50 hp:
12.2 Expansion fittings and loops for plumbing piping
General
Section - Includes
A. Flexible pipe connectors.
B. Expansion joints and compensators.
C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.

Reference Standard
ASTM A269
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service; 2010.
EJMA (STDS)
EJMA Standards; Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association; 2003.

Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, f
ace-to-face length,
live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per meter and per assembly,
fundamental
frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maxim
um expansion
compensation.

B. Samples: Submit two low pressure compensators 20 mm in size.

C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.
D. Manufacturer s Instructions: Indicate manufacturer s installation instructions, s
pecial procedures, and
external controls.
E. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe connect
ors, expansion joints,
anchors, and guides.
F. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
H. Extra Packing for Packed Expansion Joints: One set for each joint.

Products
Flexible pipe connectors steel piping
A. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.
C. Exterior Sleeve: None.
D. Pressure Rating: 1380 kPa and 121 degrees C.
E. Joint: Flanged.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Maximum offset: 20 mm on each side of installed center line.

Flexible pipe connectors copper piping

A. Inner Hose: Bronze.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
C. Pressure Rating: 1380 kPa and 121 degrees C.
D. Joint: Flanged.
E. Size: Use pipe sized units.
F. Maximum offset: 20 mm on each side of installed center line.
G. Application: Copper piping.
Expansion joints stainless steel bellows type
A. Pressure Rating: 1380 kPa and 121 degrees C.
B. Maximum Compression: 45 mm.
C. Maximum Extension: 6 mm.
D. Joint: Flanged.
E. Size: Use pipe sized units.
F. Application: Steel piping 75 mm and under.

Expansion joints external ring controlled stainless steel bellows type

A. Pressure Rating: 1380 kPa and 121 degrees C.
B. Maximum Compression: 24 mm.
C. Maximum Extension: 8 mm.
D. Maximum Offset: 3 mm.
E. Joint: Flanged.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Accessories: Internal flow liner.
H. Application: Steel piping over 50 mm.

Expansion joints single sphere, elbow compensator

A. Body: Teflon.
B. Pressure Rating, Sizes 20 mm to 50 mm: 1040 kPa and 99 degrees C.
C. Pressure Rating, Sizes 32 mm to 300 mm: 1040 kPa and 121 degrees C.
D. Pressure Rating, Sizes 350 mm to 600 mm: 725 kPa and 121 degrees C.
E. Maximum Compression: 13 mm.
F. Maximum Elongation: 10 mm.
G. Maximum Angular Movement: 15 degrees.
H. Joint: Tapped steel flanges.
I. Size: Use pipe sized units.
J. Accessories: Control rods.
K. Application: Steel piping 50 mm and over.

Expansion joints two-ply bronze bellows type

A. Working Pressure: 550 kPa.
B. Maximum Temperatures: 121 degrees C.
C. Maximum Compression: 12.7 mm.
D. Maximum Extension: 4.0 mm.
E. Joint: Soldered.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Application: Copper or steel piping 75 mm and under.

Expansion joints steel with packed sliding sleeve

A. Working Pressure and Temperature: Class 150.
B. Joint: Flanged.
C. Size: Use pipe sized units.
D. Application: Steel piping 50 mm and over.

Expansion joints copper with packed sliding sleeve

A. Working Pressure: 862 kPa.
B. Maximum Temperature: 121 degrees C.
C. Joint: Flanged.
D. Size: Use pipe sized units.
E. Application: Copper or steel piping 50 mm and over.

Accessories
A. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A269.
B. Pipe Alignment Guides:
1. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard
pipe, frame with four
mounting holes, clearance for minimum 25 mm thick insulation, minimum 75 mm trav
el.

C. Swivel Joints:
1. Fabricated steel body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubbe
r (Buna-N) o-ring seals.

Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association) S
tandards.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to vibration isolated equ
ipment.
D. Provide line size flexible connectors.
E. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end
immediately adjacent to
isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indi
cated otherwise.
F. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so mov
ement is directed along
axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast conne
ctions or apparatus.
G. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction o
f piping. Provide loops,
pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.
H. Substitute grooved piping for vibration isolated equipment instead of flexibl
e connectors. Grooved
piping need not be anchored.

12.3 Meters and gages for Plumbing piping

General
Section Includes
A. Positive displacement meters.
B. Flow meters.
C. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
D. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
E. Static pressure gages.
F. Filter gages.

Reference Standards
ASME B40.100
Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2005.
ASME MFC-3M
Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and Venturi; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004.
ASTM E1
Standard Specification for ASTM Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers; 2007.
ASTM E77
Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers; 2007.
AWWA C700
Cold Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case; American Water
Works Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C700).
AWWA C701
Cold Water Meters -- Turbine Type, for Customer Service; American Water
Works Association; 2012.
AWWA C702
Cold Water Meters -- Compound Type; American Water Works Association;
2010.
AWWA C706
Direct-Reading, Remote-Registration Systems for Cold Water Meters; American
Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C706).
AWWA M6
Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance; American
Water Works Association; 2012.
UL 393
Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions
UL 404
Gages, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service; Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide list that indicates use, operating range, total range a
nd location for manufactured
components.
B. Samples: Submit one of each type of instrument specified.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumen
tation.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
1. Extra G age Oil for Inclined Manometers: One bottle.
2. Spare for one year as per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Extra Pressure Gages: One of each type and size.

Field Conditions
Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for req
uired rough-in, taps, supports
and test plugs.
Products
Positive Displacement Meters (Liquid)
A. AWWA C700, positive displacement disc type suitable for fluid with bronze cas
e and cast iron frostproof,
breakaway bottom cap, hermetically sealed register, remote reading to AWWA C706.
B. Meter: Brass body turbine meter with magnetic drive register.
1. Service: Cold water, 50 degrees C.
2. Service: Hot water, 93 degrees C.

E. Accuracy: 1-1/2 percent.

F. Maximum Counter Reading: 10 million liters.
G. Size: 13 mm.
C. The meters must have data logging capability and be capable of connecting to
a central monitoring
system so that information on the water consumption can be recorded.

Heat Consumption Meters

Meter: Brass body turbine meter with magnetic drive register, platinum temperatu
re sensors.
A. Maximum Service Temperature: 93 degrees C.
B. Accuracy: 1-1/2 percent.
C. Maximum Counter Reading: 1 million kJ.
D. Size: 13 mm.
E. Power: Alkaline Battery).

Liquid Flow Meters

A. ASME MFC-3M Calibrated venturi orifice plate and flanges with valve taps, cha
rt for conversion of
differential pressure readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case.
B. Annular element flow stations with meter set.
1. Measuring Station: Type 316 stainless steel pitot type flow element inserted
through welded threaded
couplet, with safety shut-off valves and quick coupling connections, and permane
nt metal tag
indicating design flow rate, reading for design flow rate, metered fluid, line s
ize, station or location
number.

. Pressure rating: 1896 kPa.

. Maximum temperature: 204 degrees C.
. Accuracy: Plus 0.55 percent to minus 2.30 percent.
2. Portable Meter Set: Dry single diaphragm type pressure gage with 150 mm dial
pointer, stainless steel
wetted metal parts, variable pulsation damper, equalizing valve, two bleed valve
s, and master chart for
direct conversion of meter readings to flow rate, mounted in rust-proof carrying
case with two 3 m
long rubber test hoses with brass valves or quick connections for measuring stat
ions.

C. The meters must have data logging capability and be capable of connecting to
a central monitoring
system so that information on the water consumption can be recorded.

Pressure Gages
Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon t
ube, rotary brass
movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on whit
e background.
A. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
B. Size: 115 mm diameter.
C. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
D. Scale: Psi and KPa.

Pressure Gage Tappings

A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 1034 kPa.
B. Needle Valve: Brass, 6 mm NPT for minimum 1034 kPa.
C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 6 mm connections.
D. Syphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 6 mm angle or straight pattern.

Stem Type Thermometers

A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in gla
ss; ASTM E1; lens
front tube, cast aluminium case with enamel finish.
1. Size: 225 mm scale.
2. Window: Clear Lexan.
3. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.

B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in g

lass; ASTM E1; lens
front tube, cast aluminium case with enamel finish, cast aluminium adjustable jo
int with positive
locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in verti
cal plane.
1. Size: 225 mm scale.
2. Window: Clear Lexan.
3. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.

Dial Thermometers
A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stainl
ess steel case, silicone
fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer, hermetically sealed
lens, stainless steel
stem.
1. Size: 125 mm diameter dial.
2. Lens: Clear glass.
3. Accuracy: 1 percent.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.

B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stai
nless steel case,
adjustable angle with front recalibration, silicone fluid damping, white with bl
ack markings and black
pointer, hermetically sealed lens, stainless steel stem.
1. Size: 125 mm diameter dial.
2. Accuracy: 1 percent.
3. Calibration: Degrees F.

C. Thermometers - Dial type vapor or liquid actuated; ASTM E1; stainless steel c
ase, with brass or copper
bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings and black po
inter, glass lens.
1. Size: 115 mm diameter dial.
2. Length of Capillary: Minimum 1500 mm.
3. Accuracy: 2 percent.
4. Calibration: Degrees F.

Thermometer Supports
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensi
ons as required, and with
cap and chain.
B. Flange: 75 mm outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet
metal air ducts, with brass
perforated stem.

Test Plugs
A. Test Plug: 6 mm or 13 mm brass fitting and cap for receiving 3 mm outside dia
meter pressure or
temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 93 degrees C.
B. Test Plug: 6 mm or 13 mm brass fitting and cap for receiving 3 mm outside dia
meter pressure or
temperature probe with Nordel core for temperatures up to 176 degrees C.
C. Test Plug: 6 mm or 13 mm brass fitting and cap for receiving 3 mm outside dia
meter pressure or
temperature probe with Viton core for temperatures up to 204 degrees C.
D. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 60 mm di
ameter pressure gages,
one gage adapters with 3 mm probes, two 25 mm dial thermometers.

Static Pressure Gages

A. 90 mm diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white
background, front
recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.
B. Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, front
recalibration adjustment,
3 percent of full scale accuracy.
C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead moun
ting, 6 mm diameter
tubing.

Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outle
t to AWWA M6. Provide
full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
C. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on s
uction and discharge of
pump. Pipe to gage.
D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate e
ach gage. Provide siphon
on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance from in
sulation.
E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge
pipes smaller than 60 mm
for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from ins
ulation.
F. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
G. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmit
ter, or sensor sockets.
Refer to Section 23 0943. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, duct
or pipe mounted
thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers are
not required.
H. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 3 m downstream of mixing dampers, co
ils, or other
devices causing air turbulence.
I. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
J. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with larg
est appropriate scale.
K. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from n
ormal operating level.
Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
L. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and c
alibrate to zero.
M. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.

12.4 Vibration and Seismic Controls for plumbing piping and equipment
General
Section Includes
A. Equipment support bases.
B. Vibration isolators.
C. Roof curbs.

Reference Standards
ASCE 7
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ; 2011
ASHRAE (HVACA)
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2011.
SMACNA (SRM)
Seismic Duct Restraint Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association; 2008.

Submittals
A. Product Data:

Quality Assurance
A. Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products s
pecified in this section,
with not less than five years of documented experience.

Products
Performance Requirements
General:
A. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all unif
orm deflection and stability
requirements under all operating loads.
B. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
C. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection
curve over deflection range of
not less than 50 per cent above specified deflection.
D. Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection
at minimum 75 per cent of
specified deflection.
E. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating c
learance of 50 mm
between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise.

Equipment Support Bases

A. Structural Bases:
1. Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for si
de mounting of the
isolators.
2. Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped.
3. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine
, and to transmit design
loads to isolators and snubbers.

B. Concrete Inertia Bases:

1. Construction: Engineered, steel forms, with integrated isolator brackets and
anchor bolts, welded or
tied reinforcing bars running both ways in a single layer.
2. Size: 152 mm minimum depth and sized to accommodate elbow supports.
3. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
4. Connecting Point: 9 Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base incl
uding template and
fastening devices for equipment.
5. Concrete: Filled on site with minimum 20 mPa concrete.

Vibration Isolators
Non-Seismic Type:
A. All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads:
1. Configuration: Flat or molded.
2. Thickness: 6 mm minimum.
3. Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal sepa
ration plate between
each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface.

B. Elastomeric Mounts:
1. Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds.
2. Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate
with anchor hole
bolted to supporting structure.

C. Steel Springs:
1. Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing.
2. Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame.

D. Restrained Steel Springs:

1. Housing: Rigid blocking during rigging prevents equipment installed and opera
ting height from
changing during temporary weight reduction.
2. Equipment Wind Loading: Adequate means for fastening isolator top to equipmen
t and isolator base
plate to supporting structure.

E. Elastomeric Hangers:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to preve
nt rod contact with
housing and short-circuiting of isolating function.
2. Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to
housing.

F. Spring Hanger:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elast
omeric element preventing
metal to metal contact.
2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.

G. Combination Elastomeric-Spring Hanger:

1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring with elastomeric e
lement in series isolating
upper connection of hanger box to building structure.
2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.
H. Thrust Restraints:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elast
omeric element installed in
pairs to resist air pressure thrusts.
2. Bottom Openings: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.

Roof Curbs
Non-Seismic Type:
A. Vibration Isolation Curb Rail:
1. Location: Between existing roof curb and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Aluminium.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.

B. Vibration Isolation Curb:

1. Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Aluminium.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.

Seismic Type:
A. Vibration Isolation Curb:
1. Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Steel.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Snubbers consist of minimum 6 mm thick resilient pads to avoid metal-to- meta
l contact without
compromising vibration isolating capabilities.
5. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.

Execution
Installation General
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Bases:

Adjust equipment level.

C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal
operating conditions.
D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substa
ntially different from
installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When
full load is applied,
adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 1.5 kPa stat
ic pressure, and on hanger
supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.
F. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators
or resilient hangers for
scheduled distance.
1. Up to 100 mm Pipe Size: First three points of support.
2. 125 to 200 mm Pipe Size: First four points of support.
3. 250 mm Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support.
4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source or minimum 25 mm static defl
ection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 25 mm s
tatic deflection or
1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.

Field Quality Control

A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include stat
ic deflections.
B. Perform testing and inspections of the installation in accordance with Sectio
n 01 4533.
12.5 Identification for plumbing piping and equipment
General
Section Includes
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.

Reference Standards
ASME A13.1
Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechani
cal
Engineers; 2007.
ASTM D709
Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001 (Reapproved
2007).

Submittals
A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mech
anical identification.
B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag numb
er, location, function,
and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product requi
red.
D. Samples: Submit labels x mm in size.
E. Manufacturer s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and inst
allation.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.

Products
Identification Application
A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.
C. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
D. Control Panels: Nameplates.
E. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.
F. Ductwork: Nameplates.
G. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
H. Instrumentation: Tags.
I. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
J. Piping: Tags.
K. Pumps: Nameplates.
L. Relays: Tags.
M. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
N. Tanks: Nameplates.
O. Thermostats: Nameplates.
P. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
Q. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.

Nameplates
Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
A. Letter Color: White.
B. Letter Height: 6 mm.
C. Background Color: Black.
D. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.

Tags
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on li
ght contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 40 mm diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 40 mm diameter with
smooth edges.
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

Stencils
Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
A. 20-30 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 15
mm high letters.
B. 40-50 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 20
mm high letters.
C. 65-150 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 300 mm long color field, 30
mm high letters.
D. 200-250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 600 mm long color field, 6
5 mm high letters.
E. Over 250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800 mm long color field,
90 mm high letters.
F. Ductwork and Equipment: 65 mm high letters.
G. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9000, semi-gloss enamel, colors con
forming to ASME A13.1.

Pipe Makers
A. Comply with ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, pref
ormed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identific
ation of fluid being
conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive
adhesive backing and
printed markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic
ribbon tape, minimum
150 mm wide by 0.10 mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
E. Color code as follows:
1. Potable, Cooling, Boiler, Feed, Other Water: Green with white letters.
2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.
3. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters.
4. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters.
5. Combustible Fluids: Brown with white letters.
6. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.
Ceiling Tracks
A. Description: Steel with 20 mm diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.
3. Plumbing Valves: Green.
4. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.

Execution
Preparation
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000 for stencil painting.
Installation
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or
adhesive.

Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear
lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 9000.
D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with man
ufacturer's instructions.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 to 200 mm below finished grade,
directly above buried
pipe.
G. Use tags on piping 20 mm diameter and smaller.
1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3. Locate identification not to exceed 6 m on straight runs including risers and
drops, adjacent to each
valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at eac
h obstruction.

H. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit ide
ntification number and area
served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration
of structure or enclosure,
and at each obstruction.
I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings.
Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.

12.6 Plumbing Equipment Insulation

General
Section Includes
A. Equipment insulation.
B. Covering.
C. Breeching insulation.

Reference standards
ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2011.
ASTM C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form ; 2011
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C553
Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2011.
ASTM C592
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type
Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2012.
ASTM C612
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2010.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
equipment scheduled.
B. Samples: Submit one samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than five years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this
section with minimum five years of experience.

Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufact
urer's identification,
including product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemic
al, and mechanical damage,
by storing in original wrapping.

Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adh
esives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 h
ours.

Products
Requirements for all products of this section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass Fiber Flexible
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.052 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 232 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded
to aluminized film.
1. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.

C. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
1. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
2. Compatible with insulation.

D. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

Glass Fiber Riggid

A. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.036 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 454 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
4. Maximum Density: 128 kg/cu m.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

C. Facing: 25 mm galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of in

sulation.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
Cellular Glass
Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 2.
A. 'Ksi' Value: 0.059 at 38 degrees C.
B. Service Temperature: Up to 482 degrees C.
C. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/Pa s m.
D. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.
E. Density: Minimum 109 kg/cu m.

Hydrous Calcium Silicate

A. Insulation: ASTM C533; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.057 at 148 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 649 degrees C.
3. Density: 249 kg/cu m.

A. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
B. Insulating Cement:
1. ASTM C449/C449M.

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

A. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complyi
ng with ASTM C534
Grade 3, in sheet form.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.036 at 24 degrees Cwhen tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or
ASTM C518.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
4. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insul
ation.
Jackets
A. PVC Plastic:
1. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.
a) Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
b) Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
c) Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
d) Thickness: 0.25 mm.
e) Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
2. Covering Adhesive Mastic:
a) Compatible with insulation.

B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with di
lute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a) Compatible with insulation.

C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.

1. Thickness: 0.8/1.0 mm sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps.
4. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.38 mm thick aluminum.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.

D. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.

1. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.

Execution
Examination
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locatio
ns.
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insula
tion.

Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or band
s.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smo
oth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate ent
ire system.
G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature:
Provide vapor barrier
jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor bar
rier adhesive.
H. For hot equipment containing fluids 60 degrees C or less, do not insulate fla
nges and unions, but bevel
and seal ends of insulation.
I. For hot equipment containing fluids over 60 degrees C, insulate flanges and u
nions with removable
sections and jackets.
J. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature:
Provide standard jackets,
with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field- applied. Finish with gl
ass cloth and adhesive.
K. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 40 mm diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish ja
cket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150 mm long, of same thickness and contour as a
djoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density i
nsulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.

L. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

M. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canva
s jacket sized for
finish painting.
N. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh
reinforced vapor
barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of
horizontal
equipment.
O. Cover glass fiber insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of in
sulating cement
aluminum jacket.
P. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate
over.
Q. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insu
lation so it can be
easily removed and replaced without damage.

Schedules
Plumbing Systems:
A. Cooled Cold Water System:
1. Cooled Cold Water Booster Pump: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation.
2. Cooled Cold Water Recirculation Pump: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation
3. Cooling Water Circulation Pump: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation.

B. Hot Water System:

1. Hot Water Circulation Pump: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation.

C. Condensate Transfer Pump: 25 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation.

Cooling System
A. All chilled water system equipments (other than factory insulated) shall be i
nsulated with 50 mm thick
Glass Fiber, Flexible/Rigid insulation
B. Pump Bodies: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation
C. Air Separators: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation
D. Expansion Tanks: 40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam Insulation
E. Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated):40 mm thick Elastomeric Foam In
sulation
F. Cold Thermal Storage Tanks: Heat loss not to exceed 1%

12.7 Plumbing piping insulation

Section Includes
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.

Reference Standards
ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement: 2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating
and Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2011.
ASTM C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2011.
ASTM C547
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C578
Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation;
2011be1.
ASTM C585
Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.
ASTM C591
Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C610
Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C795
Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel; 2008.
ASTM D1056
Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or
Expanded Rubber; 2007.
ASTM D2842
Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
each service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than five years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this
section with minimum five years of experience.

Delivery, Shortage and Handling

Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product de
nsity, and thickness.
Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24
hours.

Products
Requirements for all products of this section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass Fiber
A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24 degrees C.
2. Maximum service temperature: 454 degrees C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain ad
hered to jacket.
1. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24 degrees C.
2. Maximum service temperature: 343 degrees C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to alum
inized film; moisture
vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.029 ng/Pa s
m.
D. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.

F. Insulating Cement/Mastic:
1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
G. Fibrous Glass Fabric:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 305 g/sq m weight.
2. Blanket: 16 kg/cu m density.
3. Weave: 5x5.

H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:

1. Cloth: Untreated; 305 g/sq m weight.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.

I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:

1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black colo
r.

J. Outdoor Breather Mastic:

1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black colo
r.

K. Insulating Cement:
1. ASTM C449/C449M.

Cellular Glass
Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.053 at 38 degrees C.
B. Service Temperature: Up to 482 degrees C.
C. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/Pa s m.
D. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.

Expanded Polystyrene
Insulation: ASTM C578; rigid closed cell.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.033 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum service temperature: 74 degrees C.
C. Maximum water vapor permeance: 287 ng/Pa s sq m

Expanded Perlite
Manufacturers:
A. Schundler Company; Model: www.schundler.com.

Insulation: ASTM C610, molded.

A. Maximum service temperature: 649 degrees C.
B. Maximum water vapor transmission: 0.1 perm.

Hydrous Calcium Silicate

Insulation: ASTM C533 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
A. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177 and C518; 0.057 at 149 degrees C, when tested in accor
dance with ASTM
C177 or ASTM C518.
B. Maximum service temperature: 649 degrees C.
C. Density: 240 kg/cu m.

Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers.
Insulating Cement:
ASTM C449/C449M.
Polyisocyanurate Cellular Plastic
Insulation Material: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular
plastic.
A. Dimension: Comply with requirements of ASTM C585.
B. 'Ksi' value: 0.026 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
C. Minimum Service Temperature: -51 degrees C.
D. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees C.
E. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance w
ith ASTM D2842.
F. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 5.8 ng/(Pa s m).
G. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

Polyethylene
Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, split lengthwise for insta
llation, complying with
applicable requirements of ASTM D1056.
A. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177; 0.036 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum Service Temperature: 93 degrees C.
C. Density: 32 kg/cu m.
D. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0 percent by volume.
E. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.073 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
F. Connection: Contact adhesive.

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying
with ASTM C534 Grade 3;
use molded tubular material wherever possible.
A. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C 518/ C177; 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degree
s C).
B. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
C. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
D. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulati
on.
Jackets
PVC Plastic.
A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -18 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.0029 ng/Pa s m, maximum, when tested in accord
ance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

B. Covering Adhesive Mastic:

1. Compatible with insulation.

ABS Plastic:
A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature of 82 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.018 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.76 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilut
e fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
C. Lagging Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.
Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.40 mm sheet.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps.
4. Fittings: 0.4 mm thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protec
tive liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.38 mm thick aluminum.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.

Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.

1. Finish: Smooth.
2. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.

Execution
Examination
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire s
ystem including fittings,
valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expan
sion joints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal
laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinc
h expanding staples
and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material
and thickness as adjacent
pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids 60 degrees C or less, do not insulate flanges
and unions at equipment,
but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 60 degrees C, insulate flanges and union
s at equipment.
H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or f
ield-applied. Secure with
self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and th
ickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

I. Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Piping 40 mm diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inser
ts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacke
t.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150 mm long, of same thickness and contour as a
djoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density i
nsulating material suitable
for the planned temperature range.

J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe pene
trations. Finish at
supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section
07 8400.
K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 3 me
ters above finished
floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting.
L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joint
s, and valves with insulation
of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh rei
nforced vapor barrier
cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizont
al piping.
M. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose ser
vice jacket with selfsealing
lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with
N. 0.025 mm thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous co
mpound; outer surface
faced with a polyester film.
O. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of
like material, thickness, and
finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cov
er with aluminum jacket
with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.

Schedules
Plumbing Systems:
A. Domestic Hot Water Supply:
1. Glass Fiber Insulation:

. Pipe Size Range: 150 mm.

. Within air conditioned area Thickness: [1-1/2] inch ([40] mm).
. Outside air conditioned area Thickness: 50 mm.
B. Cooled Cold Domestic Water Supply:
1. Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation

. Pipe Size Range: 150 mm.

. Within air conditioned area Thickness: [1-1/2] inch ([40] mm).
. Outside air conditioned area Thickness: 50 mm.

Cooling Systems:
A. Chilled Water: Preinsulated HDPE (refer to relevant specification section)
B. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils:
1. Elastomeric Cellular Foam Insulation:
. Thickness: 15 mm.

12.8 Plumbing piping

General
Section Includes
Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.
A. Sanitary sewer.
B. Domestic water.
C. Storm water.

Reference Standards
ANSI Z21.22
American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas
Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 1999, and addenda A&B
(R2004).
ASME B16.3
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011.
ASME B16.4
Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011.
ASME B31.1
Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2012 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).
ASME B31.9
Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2011 (ANSI/ASME B31.9).
ASME (BPV IV)
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for
Construction of Heating Boilers; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers;
2010.
ASME (BPV IX)
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and
Brazing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers;
2010.
ASTM A47/A47M
Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings;
1999 (Reapproved 2009).
ASTM A53/A53M
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012.
ASTM A123/A123M
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
ASTM B88
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
ASTM B88M
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric);
2005 (Reapproved 2011).
ASTM B280
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service; 2008.
ASTM D1785
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2012.
ASTM D2235
Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-
Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved
2011).
ASTM D2239
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDRPR)
Based on Controlled Inside Diameter; 2012.
ASTM D2241
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-
Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2009.
ASTM D2447
Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter; 2003.
ASTM D2466
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40; 2006.
ASTM D2564
Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
ASTM D2609
Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene
(PE) Plastic Pipe; 2002 (Reapproved 2009).
ASTM D2665
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2012.
ASTM D2680
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
and Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping; 2001
(Reapproved
2009).
ASTM D2683
Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for
Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2010
ASTM D2729
Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and
Fittings; 2011.
ASTM D2751
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2005.
ASTM D2846/D2846M
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems;
2009b.
ASTM D2855
Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
ASTM D3034
Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008.
ASTM F437
Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2009.
ASTM F438
Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2009.
ASTM F439
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2011.
ASTM F441/F441M
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2009.
ASTM F442/F442M
Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2009.
ASTM F628
Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe with a Cellular Core;
2008.
ASTM F679
Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-
Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2008.
ASTM F876 -
Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing;2010
ASTM F877
Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Plastic
Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2011.
ASTM F1281
Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene/Aluminum/Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PEX-AL-PEX) Pressure Pipe; 2011.
ASTM F1282
Standard Specification for Polyethylene/Aluminum/Polyethylene
(PE-AL-PE) Composite Pressure Pipe; 2010.
AWWA C651
Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association;
2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651).
AWWA C901
Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 In. (13 mm) Through 3 In.
(76 mm), for Water Service; American Water Works Association; 2008.
ICC-ES AC193
Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2012.
MSS SP-58
Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the
Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.
MSS SP-67 -
Butterfly Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-70
Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-71
Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011
MSS SP-78
Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-80
Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization
Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2008 (with 2012 Errata).
MSS SP-85
Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers
Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.
MSS SP-110
Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared
Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc.; 2010.
NFPA 54
National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
NFPA 58
Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.
NSF 61
Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012.

Submittals
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accesso
ries.

Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

A. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout d
eveloped for this project,
with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client s use in maintenance of
project.
1. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve.

Quality Assurance
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. All valves shall be coated with 300 micron epoxy internally and externally.
D. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME (BPV IX) and applicable sta
te labor regulations.
E. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).
F. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM
specification, potable
water certification, water pressure rating.

Delivery, Storage and Handling

A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect
for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in p
lace until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, c
ompleting sections of the
work, and isolating parts of completed system.

Field Condition
Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
Products
Sanitary Sewer Piping, Buried within 1500MM of Building
UPVC Pipes & Fittings: BS EN 1401-1
Sanitary Sewer Piping Above Grade
A. ABS or MuPVC (cPVC) solvent weld waste pipes & fittings 50mm (2") and below:
ASTM D2751 or
BS 5255 or BS EN 1566-1:2000
1. Pipes shall be extruded and fittings shall be injection molded.
2. Ring seal joints shall be provided to accommodate expansion.
3. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D2235 cement or BS 4346: Part 3 cement or BS
6209 as
applicable.

B. UPVC Pipe & Fittings 80 mm (3") and above: BS EN 1329-1:2000

1. Pipes shall be extruded and fittings shall be injection molded.
2. Ring seal joints shall be provided to accommodate expansion.
3. Joints: Solvent welded with ASTM D2235 or BS 4346: Part 3 cement, or BS 6209
as applicable.

Sanitary Sewer Pressure Piping

UPVC Pipe & Fittings:
1. Pipes as per BS EN 1452-2:2000 (BS 3505) Class E.
2. Pipe to pipe joining shall be with Rubber Ring joints.
3. Fitting as per BS EN 1452 (BS 4346 Part 1) solvent joints.
Domestic Water Piping, Above Grade
A. Pipes: Polypropylene (PPR) pipes in accordance with the requirements of DIN 8
077/8078 type 1 or
equivalent ASTM standards.
1. Fittings: Polypropylene (PPR) fittings shall be socket fusion type suitable f
or heat fusion.
2. Polypropylene copolymer random (PP-R) pipes shall be manufactured according t
o DIN 8077/8078;
fittings shall be manufactured according to DIN 16921.
3. Pipes and fittings shall joint using electro-fusion process. Welding shall be
made as recommended by
the manufacturer. Threaded fittings (DIN 2999) shall be used to connect to other
piping systems,
fixtures etc.
4. PP-R piping system shall be installed with special pre-caution for thermal ex
pansion especially for
exposed installation.
5. Thermal expansion shall be compensated by use of proper elbows, fittings, as
recommended by the
manufacturer.
6. PP-R pipes shall not be installed or stored under direct UV light. Pipes in s
hafts and roof shall be of
multi-layer PP-R aluminum consisting of main pipe PP-R coated with aluminium foi
l and covered
with PP-R film treated to resist long time exposure to UV light. Pipes on roof s
hall be insulated and
cladded.
7. Pipe bending shall be generally avoided, in extreme cases pipes may be bent b
y heating with hot air
without direct flames. The minimum bending radius shall be 8 times the pipe diam
eter.
8. PP-R pipes and fittings shall be certified for potable water use by a recogni
zed European standard,
DVGW or approved equivalent.
9. Pressure rating of pipes and fittings at working temperature shall be PN 16.
10. The pre-insulated piping shall be with leak detection system. The leak detec
tion system shall include
but not limited to; addressable sensing cables, monitoring units, jumper cables
and all required
auxiliary equipment. The system shall detect and locate multiple leaks simultane
ously as well as cable
break faults.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).

Storm water Piping, Above Grade

PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

Flanges, Unions and Couplings

A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 80 mm and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 25 mm:

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flang
es; preformed neoprene
gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene ga
skets.

C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved ho
using segments with
continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to se
cure and compress
gasket.
1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.
2. Housing Material: Malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized.
3. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.
4. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.

D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, c

opper solder end, water
impervious isolation barrier.

Pipe Hangers and Supports

A. The Contractor shall strictly follow the pipe supporting details and specific
ations as mentioned in the
acoustic consultant s report. In case of any conflict between the following specif
ications/MEP drawings
and acoustic consultant s details/report then the acoustic consultant s details/repo
rt shall supersede the
following specifications/MEP drawings.
B. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, sel
ect appropriate type using
MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to t
rapeze hangers.
3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
5. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture at
tachment.
6. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on
top of roofing
membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating
the roofing
assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:

. Bases: High density polypropylene.

. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation
of roofing
assembly.
. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fa
brication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indi
cated for
equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 150 mm under pipe to top of roofing.
C. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 mm to 40 mm: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, spl
it ring.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hook.
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp.
5. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flan
ge, and concrete pier or
steel support.
6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

D. Plumbing Piping - Water:

1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 mm to 40 mm: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, spl
it ring.
2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 50 mm to 100 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron
pipe roll, double
hanger.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp.
7. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wro
ught steel clamp
with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.
8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipp
le, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
9. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 100 mm: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
locknut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe
roll and stand, steel
screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
11. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

E. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as

follows:

Double Regulating Valve

Up to 50mm
A. Bronze, hand wheel operated, micrometer style indicator. Non-rising stem, scr
ewed bonnet, parabolic
and slotted regulating disk.
B. As above, but compression end suitable for use with 15mm copper tube.

65mm and larger

Cast iron, conforming to BS 7350, inside screw, non-rising stem, and copper allo
y trim. Flanged to
BS 4504 P N 2 5 / PN16. Fitted with regulating disk, double regulating device an
d indicator,
complete with locking device.
Balancing Commissioning Valves
Install balancing commissioning valves at return water connection of every AHU,
FCU, CCU, Chilled
water pump whether shown on drawings or not. Select valve size as per the manufa
cturer s
recommendation to ensure pressure difference signal at design flow within the re
adable range of a
fluorocarbon manometer. Metering station will be equipped with extra- long self-
closing (Du-Seal) test
points to enable connecting standard manometer probes without disturbing the ins
ulation.
A. Upto 50mm Bronze commissioning valve, comprising of bronze double regulating
valve and bronze
metering station. Equal to Newman Hattersley Fig. CV2432.
B. Above 50mm Cast iron commissioning valve, comprising of double regulating val
ve and cast iron
metering station. To be supplied as a complete unit. Equal to Newman Hattersley
Fig. 5953G.
Butterfly Valve
Cast iron with EPDM seat and aluminium bronze disk, bonded seats.
A. End of line service: Rubber liner bonded to the body by the transfer moulding
process, two plain PTFE
lined steel bearing for upper and lower shafts. Long neck for insulation in acco
rdance with Section 10
of the Department of Environment standard specifications. Equal to Newman Hatter
sley Fig. 950.
B. In line service: As above except for extended neck and lugged features. Equal
to Newman Hattersley
Fig. 940.

Gate Valves
A. Up To and Including 80 mm:

MSS SP-80, Class 250, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, inside
screw, solid wedge
disc, threaded ends.
B. 50 mm and Larger:

MSS SP-70, Class 250, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, hand wheel
, solid wedge disc,
flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 150 mm and larger mounted
over 2400 mm
above floor.
Globe Valves
A. Up To and Including 80 mm:

MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, hand wheel, bronze disc, threade
d ends.
B. 50 mm and Larger:

MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, hand wheel, outside screw and yoke
, renewable bronze
plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for
valves 150 mm and
larger mounted over 2400 mm above floor.
Ball Valves
Construction, 100 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 250, 2760 kPa CWP, bronze bo
dy, 304 stainless
steel ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof ste
m, lever handle with
balancing stops, threaded or flanged ends with union.
Butterfly valves
A. Construction 40 mm and Larger: MSS SP-67, 1380 kPa CWP, cast or ductile iron
body, nickel-plated
ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer ends, extended neck, 1
0 position lever handle.
B. Provide gear operators for valves 150 mm and larger, and chain-wheel operator
s for valves mounted
over 2400 mm above floor.

Flow Controls
A. Construction: Class 250, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet,
temperature and pressure
test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.
B. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating
pressure range of 10 times
minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 24 kPa kPa.

Swing Check Valves

A. Up to 50 mm:

MSS SP-80, Class 250, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, s
older ends.
B. Over 50 mm:

MSS SP-71, Class 250, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat
, flanged ends.
Spring Loaded Check Valves
Class 250, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N
seals, wafer style ends.
Water Pressure Reducing Valves
A. Up to 50 mm:

MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric
reinforced diaphragm,
strainer, threaded single union ends.
B. Over 50 mm:

MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, f
langed.
Relief Valves
A. Pressure Relief:

AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automati
c, direct pressure
actuated.
B. Temperature and Pressure Relief:

AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs
, automatic, direct
pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 98.9 degrees C, capacity ASME (BPV
IV) certified
and labelled.
Strainers
A. Size 50 mm and Under:

Threaded brass body for 1200 kPa CWP, Y pattern with 0.8 mm stainless steel perf
orated screen.
Class 250, threaded bronze body 2070 kPa CWP, Y pattern with 0.8 mm stainless st
eel perforated
screen.
B. Size 40 mm to 100 mm:

Class 250, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1.6 mm stainless steel perforated s
creen.
C. Size 125 mm and Larger:
Class 250, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 3.2 mm stainless steel perfora
ted screen.
Execution
Examination
Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
Preparation
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar me
tals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perp
endicular to walls.
D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with u
se of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,
joints, or connected
equipment. Refer to Section 22 0516.
G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for insta
llation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 0719.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and
location of access doors
with Section 08 3100.
I. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less
than 0.8 m in non-traffic
area and 1.2 m in traffic area m of cover.
J. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof as
sembly
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,
brush clean, and apply
one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
L. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility
companies.
M. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready f
or finish painting. Refer to
Section 09 9000.
N. Excavate in accordance with Section 31 2316.
O. Backfill in accordance with Section 31 2323.
P. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
R. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in wea
ther proof hood.
S. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
T. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.

Application
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections
.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solde
r adapters to pipe.
D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, o
r vertical risers.
E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isola
te equipment.
G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
H. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.

Tolerances
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 10 mm vertically of locat
ion indicated and slope to
drain at minimum of 1:50 slope.
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1:400 and arrange to drain at low points.

Disinfection of Domestic Water Piping system

A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 1300.
B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
C. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (cau
stic soda or soda ash) or
acid (hydrochloric).
D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, thr
oughout system to obtain 50 to
80 mg/L residual.
E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant res
idual at minimum 15 percent
of outlets.
F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water
or 1.0 mg/L.
I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outle
ts and from water entry,
and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
Service Connections
A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elev
ations required for
sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connect
ed with slope for
drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow pr
eventer and water
meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer.
1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with Reinforced C
oncrete Bridge. Calk
enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main i
nside to concrete
wall.
2. Provide 1.20 mm galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 150 mm a
bove floor and 1800
mm minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 50 mm of loose batt insulation stuff
ing.

C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service d
istribution piping to have
initial minimum pressure of 1.75 kPa. Provide regulators on each line serving gr
avity type appliances,
sized in accordance with equipment.

Schedules
Pipe Hanger Spacing:
A. Metal Piping:
1. Pipe size: 15 mm to 32 mm:

. Maximum hanger spacing: 2 m.

. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.
2. Pipe size: 40 mm to 50 mm:

. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.
3. Pipe size: 65 mm to 75 mm:
. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.
. Hanger rod diameter: 13 mm.
4. Pipe size: 100 mm to 150 mm:

. Maximum hanger spacing: 3 m.

. Hanger rod diameter: 15 mm.
5. Pipe size: 200 mm to 300 mm:

. Maximum hanger spacing: 4.25 m.

. Hanger rod diameter: 22 mm.
6. Pipe size: 350 mm and Over:

. Maximum hanger spacing: 6 m.

. Hanger rod diameter: 25 mm.
B. Plastic Piping:
1. All Sizes:

. Maximum hanger spacing: 1.8 m.

. Hanger rod diameter: 9 mm.

12.9 Plumbing piping specialties

General
Section Includes
A. Roof and floor drains.
B. Cleanouts.
C. Hose bibs.
D. Hydrants.
E. Backflow preventers.
F. Water hammer arrestors.
G. Interceptors.
H. Thermostatic mixing valves.
I. Catch basins and manholes.

Reference Standards
ASME A112.6.3
Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2001 (R2007).
ASME A112.6.4
Roof, Deck, and Balcony Drains; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2003.
ASSE 1011
Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers; American Society of Sanitary
Engineering; 2004 (ANSI/ASSE 1011).
ASSE 1012
Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; American
Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2009 (ANSI/ASSE 1012).
ASSE 1013
Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced
Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of
Sanitary Engineering; 2011.
ASSE 1019
Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining
Type; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).
ASTM C478
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections; 2012.
ASTM C478M
Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections [Metric]; 2012.c
DIN 19580
Drainage Channels for Vehicular and Pedestrian Areas - Durability,
Mass per Unit Area and Evaluation of Conformity; 2010.
PDI-WH 201
Water Hammer Arresters; Plumbing and Drainage Institute; 2010.

Submittals.
A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes,
and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and ho
les.
C. Certificates: Certify that grease interceptors meet or exceed local authority
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instruction
s: Indicate assembly and
support requirements.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, ba
ckflow preventers,
water hammer arrestors, etc.
F. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.
G. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, explo
ded assembly views.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client s use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Loose Keys for Outside Hose Bibbs: One.
2. Extra Hose End Vacuum Breakers for Hose Bibbs: One.

Quality Assurance
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this
section with not less than five years documented experience.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
 Products
Drain
A. Roof Drains:
1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4.
2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump.
3. Strainer: Removable polyethylene dome with vandal proof screws.
4. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type, refer to Section relevant:
a. Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop.
b. Adjustable under deck clamp.
c. Roof sump receiver.
d. Waterproofing flange.
e. Controlled flow weir.
f. Leveling frame.
g. Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation.
h. Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof.
i. Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension.

B. Parapet Drains:

Lacquered cast iron body with aluminum flashing clamp collar and epoxy coated sl
oping grate.
C. Canopy and Cornice Drains:

Lacquered cast iron body with aluminum flashing clamp collar and epoxy coated fl
at strainer.
D. Roof Overflow Drains:

Lacquered cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring; pipe extended t
o mm above
flood elevation.
E. Downspout Nozzles:

Bronze round with straight bottom section.

F. Area Drains:
1. Assembly: ASME A112.6.4.
2. Body: Lacquered cast iron with sump.
3. Strainer: Round nickel-bronze.
4. Accessories: Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop, wi
th adjustable under
deck clamp.
G. Floor Drain (FD-1):

ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze strainer.
H. Floor Drain (FD-2):

ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable round nickel bronze strainer w
ith removable
perforated sediment bucket.
I. Floor Drain (FD-3):

ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze strainer with p
olished bronze
funnel or anti-splash rim.
J. Floor Drain (FD-4):

ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze extra heavy dut
y strainer.
K. Floor Drain (FD-5):

ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, w
eep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze extra heavy dut
y strainer with
hinged grate and sediment bucket.
L. Floor Drain (FD-6):
Lacquered cast iron two piece body with drainage flange, heavy duty grate 150 mm
wide, 300 mm
long, dome strainer, end plates with gaskets.
Cleanouts
A. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (CO-1):

Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.

B. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas (CO-2):

Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.
C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (CO-3):

Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threade
d top assembly,
and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed co
ver to accept
floor finish in finished floor areas.
D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas (CO-4):

Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, a
nd round stainless
steel access cover secured with machine screw.
E. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas (CO-5): Calked or threaded
type.

Provide bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.

Hose Bibbs
A. Interior Hose Bibbs:

Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose
thread spout,
chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conforman
ce with ASSE
1011.
B. Interior Mixing Type Hose Bibbs:

Bronze or brass, wall mounted, double service faucet with hose thread spout, int
egral stops, chrome
plated where exposed with handwheels, and vacuum breaker in conformance with ASS
E 1011.
Hydrants
Floor Hydrants:
ASSE 1019; chrome plated (finish subject to architect's approval) lockable reces
sed box, hose thread
spout, lock shield and removable key, and vacuum breaker.
Back Water Valves
A. Cast Iron Back Water Valves: ANSI A112.21.2M; lacquered cast iron body and co
ver, brass valve,
extension sleeve, and access cover.
B. Plastic Back Water Valves: ABS body and valve, extension sleeve, and access c
over.

Backflow Preventers
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:
ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; t
wo independently operating,
spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve lo
cated between check valves;
third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; n
on- threaded vent outlet;
assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
Check Valves
A. Up To and Including 50 mm:

Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, threaded ends.
B. Over 50 mm:
1. Type: Wafer type silent check valves.
2. Ductile iron body, stainless steel trim, stainless steel or CF8M disc and sea
t, flanged ends.

Water Hammer Arrestors

Water Hammer Arrestors:
Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 201,
pre-charged suitable for
operation in temperature range 1 to 120 degrees C and maximum 1700 kPa working p
ressure.
Sumps and Interceptors
A. Sumps:
1. Precast concrete with required openings and drainage fittings.
2. Cover: 9 mm thick checkered steel plate with gasket seal frames and anchor bo
lts.

B. Grease Interceptors:
1. Construction:
a. Material: Epoxy coated fabricated steel.
b. Rough-in: On floor.
c. Accessories: Multi-weir baffle assembly, integral deep seal trap, removable i
ntegral
flow control, sediment bucket.
d. Cover: Steel, epoxy coated, non-skid with gasket, securing handle, and enzyme
injection port,
recessed for floor finish.

C. Oil Interceptors:
1. Construction:
a. Material: Epoxy coated fabricated steel.
b. Rough-in: On floor.
c. Accessories: Integral deep seal trap, removable integral flow control, adjust
able draw-off
assembly, sediment bucket.
d. Cover: Steel, epoxy coated, non-skid with gasket, securing handle, and enzyme
injection port,
recessed for floor finish.

D. Sediment Interceptors:
Mixing Valves
Thermostatic Mixing Valves:
A. Valve: Chrome plated cast brass body, stainless steel or copper alloy bellows
, integral temperature
adjustment.
B. Accessories:
1. Check valve on inlets.
2. Volume control shut-off valve on outlet.
3. Stem thermometer on outlet.
4. Strainer stop checks on inlets.

Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleano
ut plugs with mixture of
graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage s
ystem.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where co
ntamination of domestic
water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler syste
ms, premise isolation,
irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs.
F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
G. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on ho
t and cold water supply
piping to lavatories sinks washing machine outlets as per the requirement and co
nsultant's approval.

12.10 Plumbing Equipment

General
Section Includes
A. Water heaters.
1. Residential Electric Water Heater
2. Solar Water Heater

B. Pumps.
1. Circulators.
2. Sump Pumps.

C. Water pressure booster system.

D. Chlorine Dioxide System
E. Chlorine Dioxide Control System
F. Chlorine Dioxide Detector

Reference Standards
Administrative Requirments
A. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct a pre-installation meeting one week prior t
o the start of the work of
this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
B. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and ex
peditious manner.

Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connect
ions to other
equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type, capacity, and power requirements.
3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with p
ump and system
operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:

Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting

points, tappings, and
drains.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspectio
n data, replacement
part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed i
n Owner's name and
registered with manufacturer.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance o
f project.
1. Extra Pump Seals: One of each type and size.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products specified in
this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rat
ing/capacity identified
by permanently attached label.
C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures with
out vapor binding and
cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate wit
hin 25 percent of
midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

Warranty
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
B. Collectors: 5 years warranty
C. Storage Tank: 5 Years
D. Accessories: 1 Year

Products
Residential Electric Water Heaters
A. Type: Automatic, electric, vertical storage.
B. Electrical Characteristics:
C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel, thermally insulated with one inch (25 mm) thi
ck glass fiber; encased in
corrosion-resistant steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.
D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature r
ange from 120 to 170
degrees F (49 to 77 degrees C), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements, enclosed
controls and electrical
junction box and operating light. Wire double element units so elements do not o
perate simultaneously.
E. Accessories: Provide:
1. Water Connections: Brass.
2. Dip tube: Brass.
3. Drain Valve.
4. Anode: Magnesium

Solar Water Heater

A. Supply, deliver and install where indicated one numbers of solar water heater
s, solar hot water systems
shall comply with European standards or equivalent to American, and manufactured
under a Quality
Assurance System complying with ISO. Technical design, construction quality and
measurement of
performance shall be done as per EN 12975 1, 2: 2006.
B. Manufacturer: As per the schedule of manufacturer.
C. System Capability: The solar system shall supply the said HW in 1500 Lts/day
at 60 deg C (refer
schedule).
D. System Description: The system shall be designed as a fully integrated, packa
ged heating system
incorporating the solar collectors, storage tank with heat exchanger, primary ci
rculating pumps, and all
other necessary controls for safe and efficient operation.

The solar circuit shall be an 'active' pumped system. The closed circuit is cont
rolled by a temperature
differential controller that gives preference to any effective energy available
from solar rather than the
back-up boost.
Solar Panel
Each collector shall have a nominal effective absorption surface area of 2.34 m2
or as recommended by the
Manufacturer.
Collectors shall be accredited to EN 12975, 30 mm mineral wool insulation in bas
e, aluminium outer casing
and aluminium absorber plate. The absorber plate shall be highly selective vacuu
m coated having a
minimum absorbance of 90% and maximum emissivity of 15%. The collector shall be
glazed with low iron
toughened glass of a minimum thickness of 3.2mm with 98% transmittance.

The collectors shall be manifolded in parallel into the appropriate number of ro

ws for complete water
circulation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

The collectors shall have maximum operating pressure of 10 bar & stagnation temp
erature of 234 deg C.

The Solar Panel shall be made of the following materials:

Absorber Aluminum
Surface Highly selective vacuum coating
Storage tank
Water Heater with External Heat Exchanger

Technical Data:

Storage capacity
750 litres
Quantity:
1 no.
Nominal Rating:
9 KW
Working Pressure
6 Bar max
Test Pressure:
7.6 Bar
Connections:
Heat Exchanger

Storage tank details

Construction
Hot water heater for water/water operation. Insulated upright standing hot water
storage tank with internal
flat heating coils located at the bottom of the tank.

All parts in contact with water are made entirely of stainless steel AISI-316Ti
or Duplex. Anti- Legio
design fully compliant with European anti-legionella recommendations. Connection
for electric immersion
heater in upper part of storage tank for low seasonal heating. 3 front connectio
ns for dial thermometer and
optional temperature sensors. All connections in the front side of the tank. Pre
-assembled in the factory for
simple on-site installation.
Insulation
Insulation shall be made of Polyester Fiber Fleece minimum 80 mm thick, all conn
ection openings shall be
precise laser cut to reduce heat loss; the material shall be flame retardant to
DIN 4102-1 class 2. The
insulation shall be enclosed in a Poly propylene outer sheeting of 1.2 mm which
shall have aluminum closure
strip which shall allow quick opening.

Internal spiral Flat Coil Solar Heat Exchanger

The position of the solar heating coil made of stainless steel AISI-316Ti or Dup
lex is located 80 to 240 mm
above the bottom of the tank. This compact design achieves a utilization of 97%
of the water heater volume
and ensures a low water temperature in the solar return line to reduce the therm
al losses of the solar panels.
Heating Elements
Incoloy 825 (UNS NO 8825) electric immersion heating element with low watt densi
ty, star configured for 3
phase operation, with individual thermostat with temperature adjustment 30C - 75C
or safety temperature
limiter (98C), factory preset to 60C, screwed connections, All elements electrical
ly tested, wired and preassembled
for easy installation. The heating element shall have efficiency factor of 80%.
All parts shall meet
European safety standards.
Anodes
The Tank shall be provided with Non sacrificial titanium anodic protection which
shall give a permanent
potential control, no anode consumption & shall be maintenance free.
Circulating Pump
A circulating pump module shall be supplied along with the storage to circulate
the fluid between the storage
and the collectors. The working of this pump shall be controlled through a delta
T controller. The pump shall
circulate the fluid only if the temperature in the system falls below the set po
int and if there is enough
radiation to heat the fluid.

The solar pump shall be of a centrifugal design and circulate (as required) L/s
at a total pressure head of (as
required) kPa.
Solar Controller
A differential control unit that has to be easy to install and operate in temper
ature of up to 55 Deg c.

It should offer the following functions:

A. All of the switch-on and switch-off points should be set separately A clear d
isplay with icons for all of
the values displayed
B. Status display for the immediate recognition of extraordinary conditions Sola
r start function
C. Heat quantity counter
D. Data link (for temperature evaluation on PC via D-LOGGUSB or BL-NET)
E. Pump speed control
F. Pump blockage if collector overheats
G. Use of KTY (2 kO) or PT1000 temperature sensors Overvoltage protection at all
inputs
H. Easy to install and operate
Expansion Vessel
Expansion vessel shall be used in the solar circuit, the membrane that can withs
tand temperatures of 212 F
and should be made of synthetic rubber.

Max working pressure: 10 bar

Max operating temperature membrane: + 100C
Max operating temperature system: + 120C
Factory pre charge: +2, 5 bar
Piping
Flex Insulated Solar Hoses (2 in 1)
Solar flex are installed to system for solar panel water connection to the other
heating items.
A. -Low heating-loss with its EPDM Rubber insulation,
B. -Real-time feedback transfer with its sensor cable
C. -Easy installation with its flexible body and screwed fittings,
D. -Low cost expense for installation,
E. -Easy and quick installation,

Materials:
A. Hose: AISI 316L Stainless steel
B. Insulation: Rubber (13mm or 19 mm)
C. Braid: Special polyamide PA 6.6(optional)
D. Fittings: Carbon steel or Stainless steel
E. Max. Working pressure: 16 Bars
F. Working Temperature: -40C to 150C

Chlorine Dioxide System

A. Pedestal arrangement Individual chemical bond
B. One rector with calculated volume to warrant contact time for all Chlorit rea
ction
C. Two dosing pumps with same capacities
D. Flow detectors on the pumps to confirm real dosing
E. Level switch lance to warrant both products to produce ClO2.
F. Water flow meter to warrant water dilution
G. Static mixer to warrant turbulence on the reactor output.
H. One PLC as a brain to manage all signals
I. 2 x DP100 chemical tanks
J. Synoptic panel to monitoring all functions
K. Selectable Running mode:
L. Manual from 0 to 100% capacity
M. External pulses with multiply and divide factor
N. External thought 4...20 mA signal control
O. Chlorine dioxide system with maximum capacity of 100 g ClO2 / hr

Chlorine Dioxide Control system

Controller in one channel version for ClO2 sensor, TFT multicolor display 2, 8 , f
rontal command keys and
the latest generation electronics processor.

Configuration:
A. PPM Chlorine measurement
B. 2 x all range configurable setpoints
C. All range proportional band
D. Selectable mode control for OFF, ON/OFF, P, PI, PD, PID
E. Minimum and Maximum alarm
F. Minimum and Maximum Dosing from 0 to 100%
G. Date, Time & language

Outputs
A. 4 x On/Off or Pulsewidth, at 230 VAC (2A) or free contact.
B. 2 x pulse frequency - reed relay (48 VDC / 40 mA)
C. 2 x configurable analogical outputs 0/4... 20 mA

Safety
A. 2 x independent chemical levels
B. 1 x relay for general alarm NO/NC, up to 230 VAC, 2A
C. 1 x input for ON/OFF remote control or flow detector
D. Maxim. Dosing time from 0 to 240 min
E. Flow detector alarm delay 0 a 3600 s
F. Start-up delay 0 to 15 min
G. General alarm delay 0 to 3600 s

Sensor, cables, acrylic support and all needed accessories included as a plug an
d play principle
Electromagnetic diaphragm dosing pump, 4, 5 L/h @ 7 Bar
PVDF liquid head
Stroke length manual adjustment
4 steps frequency adjustment
External pulses accepted- 1 ph 230V, 50/60 Hz, 0.01 kW
Suction valve, Injection valve, 6 meters hose and connection accessories
Low level switch
Dosing tank 100 L capacity
Chlorine Dioxide Detector
A. Gas Sensor compact Module with electrochemical cell to monitor ClO2 gas, requ
iring minimal
maintenance internal continuous self-diagnostics and automatically fault indicat
ion.
B. Non-intrusive one-person calibration interval of 180 days
C. 2-wire loop powered for easy installation and direct interface to common PLC
D. Integral scrolling LCD 2-line, 16 character display
E. Aluminum enclosure
F. 4-20 mA output
G. To be mounted in any orientation

In-Line Circulating pumps

A. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig (860 kPa) working pressure, with stainless
steel rotor assembly.
B. Impeller: Bronze.
C. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze
sleeve bearings.
D. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
E. Drive: Flexible coupling.
Pressure Booster Systems
A. System: Packaged with two pumps, factory assembled, tested, and adjusted; shi
pped to site as integral
unit; consisting of pumps, valves, and galvanized piping, with control panel ass
embled on fabricated
steel base with structural steel framework.
B. Controls and Instruments: Locate in NEMA 250 Type 1 general purpose enclosure
with main
disconnect interlocked with door, fused circuit for each motor, magnetic starter
s with three overloads,
control circuit transformer with fuse protection, selector switch for each pump,
low limit pressure
switch, low pressure alarm light, running lights, current sensing devices, minim
um run timers, manual
alternation, and suction and discharge pressure gages.
C. Lead Pump: Operate continuously with lag pump operating on system demand. Sho
uld lead pump fail
to operate, next pump in sequence shall start automatically.
D. Time Delay Relay: Prevent lag pump short cycling on fluctuating demands.
E. Thermal Bleed Circuit with Solenoid Valve: Prevent overheating during low dem
and.
F. Low Pressure Control: Stop pump operation if incoming water pressure drops to
atmospheric.
G. Pump Switch: Permit manual or automatic operation.
H. Valving: Each pump outlet combination pressure reducing and check valve to ma
intain constant system
pressure. Provide gate or butterfly valves on suction and discharge of each pump
. Provide check valve
on each pump discharge.
I. Time Clock for Automatic Day-Night Changeover:
1. Day cycle: System shall operate continuously with pressure to fixtures mainta
ined by pressure
reducing valves.
2. Night Cycle: Pump shall operate intermittently on pressure switch located nea
r pressure tank
operating pump for pre-determined adjustable time period.

Sump Pumps
A. Type: Vertical centrifugal, direct connected, simplex arrangement.
B. Casing: Cast iron volute with radial clearance around impeller, inlet straine
r, slide away couplings.
C. Impeller: Cast iron; open non-clog, keyed to corrosion resistant alloy steel
shaft.
D. Support: Cast iron pedestal motor support on steel floor plate with gas tight
gaskets.
E. Bearings: Forced grease lubricated bronze sleeve spaced maximum 48 inches (12
00 mm) and grease
lubricated ball thrust at floor plate.
F. Drive: Flexible coupling to vertical, solid shaft ball bearing electric motor
.
G. Sump: Steel cover plate with steel curb frame for grouting into concrete sump
with inspection opening
and cover, and alarm fittings.
H. Controls (Simplex): Float switch with float rod, stops, and corrosion resista
nt float, and separate
pressure switch high level alarm with transformer, alarm bell and stand-pipe.

Execution
Installation
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as
required by code, and
complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve opera
ting system.
C. Pumps:
1. Ensure shaft length allows sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches (600 mm
) below lowest
invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches (150 mm) clearance from bottom of sump
pit.
2. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
3. Provide line sized isolating valve and strainer on suction and line sized sof
t seated check valve and
balancing valve on discharge.
4. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support
piping adjacent to
pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports under elbo
ws on pump
suction and discharge line sizes 4 inches (100 mm) and over.
5. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor bin
ding and cavitation,
are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 p
ercent of midpoint
of published maximum efficiency curve.
6. Align and verify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
7. Provide electrical interlocking from cooling condensate pump safety switch to
associated HVAC
unit(s) furnished under other Sections.
D. Solar hot water collectors must be installed with tilt and exposed to direct
sun (without shadowing).
They should be tilted towards equator (south direction) with angle of 25. Single
unit or multiple units
can be connected together in parallel and connected to common Headers (CWS, HWS,
and HWR) to
cover the desired daily hot water load and shall be as per the design of special
ist solar manufacturer.
E. The system shall also be equipped with all necessary safety devices that guar
antee the system shall
function in a satisfactory way. A pressure reduction valve should also be fitted
to maintain the
incoming pressure less than 6 Bar.
F. It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that all civil, electric
al, mechanical (piping etc) and
all work related to solar water heater system are done according to the specific
ations. All hot water
piping shall be adequately insulated to ensure minimum heat losses during re-cir
culation. A hot water
circulation pump set (with 24 hrs timer) shall be provided to ensure continuous
hot water availability in
the ring main.
Field Quality Control
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representat
ive to supervise the field
assembly of components and installation of solar system, including piping and el
ectrical connections.
Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipm
ent.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices,
inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes includin
g chips, scratches, and
abrasions with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

Commissioning
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service
.
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submi
ttal and installation
requirements. Do not proceed with startup until wiring installation is acceptabl
e to equipment supplier.

Schedules
Refer Drawings for Equipment Schedules.
12.11 Plumbing Fixtures
General
Related Documents
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple
mentary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly ap
plicable to this Section,
and this Section is directly applicable to them.

Summary
This section includes the furnishing of all labor and materials necessary for a
complete installation of all
plumbing fixtures indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
Reference standards
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Proje
ct unless identified by a
specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract
shall be applicable to this
Project.
1. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable
requirements and
standards addressed within the following references:

Americans with Disabilities Act, 28 CFR Part 35 Non-discrimination on the Basis

of Disability in
State and Local Government Services, Final Rule, as published in the Federal Reg
ister
2. Local Health and Safety Codes
3. Steadman, UPC
4. ANSI/ASME A112, Plumbing Standards
5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI/ICPA SS-1-2001 - Performan
ce Standard for
Solid Surface Materials.
6. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): ASSE 1016 - Individual Therm
ostatic,
Pressure Balancing and Combination Pressure.
7. ASME International (ASME):
a. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
b. ASME A112.18.2 - Plumbing Fixture Waste Fittings.
c. ASME A112.18.3M - Performance Requirements for Backflow Protection Devices an
d
Systems in Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
d. ASME A112.19.1M - Enamelled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
e. ASME A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
f. ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enamelled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
8. ASTM International (ASTM):
a. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Build
ing Materials.
b. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
c. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
d. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal

Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a

e. Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
f. ASTM D 785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Elect
rical
Insulating Materials.
g. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): CSA B125 - (See ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbi
ng
Fixture Fittings).
h. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): Unifo
rm Plumbing
Code (UPC).
9. International Code Council (ICC): ICC/ANSI A117.1 Accessible and Usable Build
ings and
Facilities.
10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 70 - National Electrical C
ode.
11. NSF International (NSF): NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects.
12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
a. UL 723 - Test For Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
b. UL 1951 - Electric Plumbing Accessories.

Products Not Furnished but Installed Under This Section

A. Rough-in for and make final connection to Owner furnished fixtures and equipm
ent requiring plumbing
services.
B. Rough-in for and make final connection to fixtures and equipment furnished un
der other divisions of
these Contract Specifications requiring plumbing services.
Quality Assurance
A. Fixtures, trim, accessories and carriers of any one type shall be by the same
manufacturer throughout.
B. All fixtures and trim shall be new, institutional/commercial quality and free
from mars, chips,
scratches, blemishes or any defects.

Submittals
A. Product Data:

Provide manufacturer s data sheets indicating code and Standards compliance, illus
trations of fixtures,
physical sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim and finishes.
B. Record Documents:
1. Provide full written description of manufacturer s warranty.
2. Manufacturer s installation instructions.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:

Include installation instructions, exploded assembly views. Servicing requiremen

ts, inspection data,
installation instructions, spare parts lists, replacement part numbers and avail
ability, location and
contact numbers of service depot, for all plumbing specialties installed.
Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Accept fixtures on Site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect all fixtures and trim before and after installation from exposure to
rain, freezing temperatures
and direct sunlight. Exception: Materials manufactured for installation within e
xterior environments.
C. Protect installed fixtures and trim from damage and/or entry of foreign mater
ials by temporary covers
during the construction phase of this project.
D. Do not allow use of installed fixtures and trim for any reason, other than te
sting, during the
construction phase of this project.

Extra Materials
Provide two service kits for each type of faucet, flush valve, Ablution valve an
d all other trim/accessories
having serviceable parts.
Field Measurements
Verify that field measurements are either as indicated on Shop Drawings or as in
structed by the
manufacturer. Designate within Submittals that measurements have been verified,
and note which
measurements are the basis for construction.
Products
Materials General

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666 Type 316, 0.034-inch (22-gage) minimum thickness.
B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized afte
r fabrication.
C. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B
456, Type SC
D. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class
1, Quality q2, and
with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective organic coating.
E. Steel channels, ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized for vanity counter support.
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory uni
t, or of galvanised steel
where concealed.
G. Solid surface: Nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same compositi
on throughout the
part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigme
nt.
General
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, feder
al, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdic
tion.
B. Provide plumbing fixtures as indicated and scheduled on the Contract Drawings
and as specified
herein.
C. Fixtures, trim and accessories of any one type shall be by the same manufactu
rer.
D. All vitreous china fixtures shall be white in color unless noted otherwise on
Drawings.
E. All plumbing fixture trim within public toilet rooms shall be furnished with
vandal-proof trim.
F. All exposed brass fixture trim shall be heavily chrome plated.
G. Fittings and piping shall be brass and, wherever exposed, shall be polished c
hrome-plated. Provide
tight fitting wall or floor escutcheons of chrome-platedbrass or stainless steel
wherever pipes pass
through floors, walls or ceilings.
H. Fixture supplies shall be loose key angle stops with 1/2" I.P.S. female inlet
s and shall include wall
flanges and brass risers. All components shall be chrome plated. In all cases, a
ll piping, tubing, fittings
and faucets shall be installed using mechanical non-slip connections, such as bu
ll-nose, flanged,
ferrule or threaded fittings. Fittings requiring a friction fit using slip-on or
gasket connections are not
acceptable. [Exception: Hose type riser supplies are acceptable when supplied an
d required by the
fixture manufacturer]. Supply riser tubing for lavatories and sinks shall be min
imum 3/8 O.D.
I. Provide A.D.A. compliant molded insulation on exposed water and drain piping
beneath handicap
accessible lavatories and sinks. Insulation shall be designed to allow removal a
nd re-installation for
pipe servicing.
J. Unless noted otherwise, install each lavatory, sink and drinking fountain wit
h chrome-plated, 17 gauge
trap with cleanout plug that is easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Sli
p joints shall be
permitted only on the fixture trap inlet, within the trap seal and at outlet con
nection to the trap adapter.
K. Wall mounted lavatories, urinals and drinking fountains shall be supported wi
th commercial carriers
bolted to floor, model to suit installation. Provide concealed arm type carriers
for lavatories.
L. Fixtures shall have flow control devices to limit the flow of water to a maxi
mum rate in accordance
with the following table:

Item
Capacity
Shower Valve or Head
5 litres / min at 551.6kPa
Pantry tap
4.5 litres / min at 417.7kPa
Bathroom wash basin tap, drinking fountain
1.5 litres / min at 417.7kPa
Toilet dual flush
4.5/ 3 litres / min at 417.7kPa
Bidets
6.0 litres/min at 413.7 kPa
Urinals
0.5 litres /flushing cycle at 417.7kPa
Flow Control
M. Stainless Steel Sinks
1. Stainless steel sinks shall be 18 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel with insula
tion undercoating.
2. Provide stainless steel covers for all unused sink faucet/accessory holes.
3. Covers shall be secured with stainless steel bolt and wing nut. Snap-in type
covers are not
acceptable. Covers shall provide a watertight seal by utilizing rubber gasket or
plumbers putty.
4. Sink strainer shall be 316 stainless steel.
N. Housekeeping Mop Sinks
1. Provide mop sink having dimensions as scheduled on Contract Drawings
2. Receptor shall be precast terrazzo composed of marble chips and Portland ceme
nt, ground smooth,
grouted and sealed to resist stains.
3. Stainless steel caps shall be cast integral on all curbs.
4. Shoulders shall not be less than 9-3/4" high inside (12 high outside) measurem
ent, and not less
than 1-1/4" wide. Drop front shoulders shall have 6 high outside measurement.
5. Tiling flanges shall be cast integral and extend 1" above shoulder on 1, 2 or
3 sides (as required per
Project).
6. Drain shall be cast brass with stainless steel strainer cast integral and sha
ll provide for a code
compliant connection to a 3" pipe.
O. Water Closets
1. Water closets shall be vitreous china, wall-mounted. Conforming to BS 3402 Sh
all be with seat and
cover, hand shower set (Shattaf assembly), Angle valve , concealed cistern- self-
supporting &
completely pre-assembled complete with frame and wall union, push plates. Comply
ing with
German standard and dual flush -flow volume adjustable from 4.5 to 3 litres.
2. Water closet bowl gaskets shall be neoprene, felt gaskets and wax rings are n
ot permitted.
3. For wall mounted WC, it shall be supported with extra-heavy duty commercial c
arriers bolted to
floor and rated for a 500 pound load. Carrier model shall be designed for the ac
tual fixture being
supported and provided with all options and accessories manufactured by the carr
ier manufacturer
for a complete installation. Provide auxiliary foot support as recommended by th
e manufacture to
prevent bending of fixture support stud bolts.
4. Water closet seats shall be commercial/institutional grade, white in color, h
ave open front and
stainless steel self-sustaining check hinges.
P. Bidet, if applicable

Vitreous china, 4 hole model, Floor mounted. Conforming to BS 3402 Complying wit
h German
standard and maximum flow 6.0 litres/min at 413.7 kPa, with flushing rim and ver
tical spray, for deckmounted
faucet with diverter and vacuum breaker. Shall have Integral overfl ow complete
with
mounting hardware.
Q. Squatting Pan, if applicable

Vitreous China BS 3402 , One Piece Squatting WC pan with foot rest inlcuded, wit
h P-trap, hidden
dual-flush system, complete with 1/2in inclined bib tap, flexible hose, jet and
wall hook. Complying
with German standard and dual flush-flow volume adjustable from 4.5 to 3 litres.

R. Wash Basin
1. Vitreous China Recessed type Wash Basin conforming to BS 3402, with undercoun
ter sink and
chrome plated pop-up and waste plate conforming to Standards, bottle tarp 1 dia. c
hrome plate
pair of angle valve with chrome plated pulling-rod conical head.
2. Shall be installed complete with steel subframe (over Concrete upstand- to be
covered in Concrete
section) and stone surface on horizontal and vertical surfaces as per the drawin
gs.
S. Urinals, if applicable

White vitreous China Wall Hung Urinal with partition walls, Conforming to BS 340
2 , with P- trap,
50mm dia waste elbow with rubber seal, rear spud and inlet connector. Shall be ei
ther waterless or
less-water-consumption type (0.5 lit/ flushing cycle).
T. Flush Valves
All electronic flush valves shall be provided with manual override activators.
U. Faucets (normal toilets and ablution taps)
1. Chrome plated Basin Mixer with mixing device, pop-up waste, flexible connecti
on hose and other
associated components to make the basin mixer system complete. Shall have low fl
ow head and
aerator technology. Similar properties for Ablution taps, with different physica
l design, as per the
drawings.
2. Faucet flow control devices shall be located at the spout outlet.
3. Mains/4XAA alkaline batteries (minimum 2-Year lifespan), Hands free infrared
activation. Sensing
distance: 10-31cm. Respond time: 1 Second.
4. Provide vacuum breakers for all faucets that have threaded or serrated hose c
onnection outlets.
5. Gooseneck spout outlets shall terminate five inches minimum and five & one ha
lf inches maximum
above top rim of lavatory or sink. Horizontal dimension from spout inlet to spou
t outlet shall be a
minimum five & one half inches.
6. Provide integral hot and cold water inlet check stops in all mixing type sink
faucets that have hose
connection outlets.
7. All non-public use electronic faucets shall be designed and manufactured to a
llow continuous water
flow during usage for at least sixty seconds after initial activation.
8. All electronic lavatory faucets located within public toilet rooms shall be d
esigned and
manufactured to allow continuous water flow during usage for a maximum duration
of ten seconds
after initial activation.
9. AC powered electronic faucets located within VIP areas shall be connected to
the emergency
electrical system.
10. All lavatory faucets within general toilets shall have low-profile (non- goo
seneck) spouts and
electronic sensor activation.
V. Shower/ Ablution Mixing Valves, where applicable
1. Shower/ Ablution mixing valves shall be ASME A112.18.1M, CSA B125, ASSE 1016
and ADA
compliant, having combination thermostatic/pressure balancing replaceable cartri
dge, integral
check valves, integral stops and high temperature limit set at 110 F.
2. Thermostatic/pressure balance mixing valves shall have brass body constructio
n with polished
chrome plated finish, lever control handles for volume and temperature, and 1/2"
NPT connections.
3. Provide accessories as scheduled on Contract Drawings.
W. Spray Hose Assembly

Spray hose assembly shall be consisting of hand-spray with trigger control, wall
holder, metal tube and
angle valve or approved Equal.
Fixtures Schedule
Refer to the layout drawings for the quantity of Fixtures.
Execution
Fabrication
A. General: Only a maximum 37 mm diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo
, as approved by
the Engineer, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On
either interior surface
not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by either
a printed, waterproof
label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model n
umber.
B. Surface- Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicate
d, fabricate units with
tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Provide concealed anchorage wherev
er possible.
C. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permi
t rigid, tamperproof, and
theft proof installation.

Examination
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation
of fixtures.
B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installa
tion of countertop
lavatories, sinks, faucets and related trim and accessories.
C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

Preparation
Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes required by
code, as recommended
by the manufacturer, and as indicated in Contract Drawings fixture rough-in sche
dule.
Installation
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable federal, state and local req
uirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction
.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer s published recommend
ations.
C. Furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services and p
erform all operations
required in connection with or properly incidental to the installation of comple
te plumbing fixtures, as
indicated on Contract Drawings, reasonably implied therein or as specified herei
n, unless specifically
excluded.
D. Each piece of trim shall be furnished whether specifically mentioned or not,
in order to provide a
complete first-class installation. Furnish and install all required water, waste
, soil and vent connections
to all plumbing fixtures, together with all fittings, supports, fastening device
s, cocks, valves, traps, etc.,
leaving all in complete working order.
E. Provide accessible check valves in the individual cold and hot water fixture
supply lines serving mixing
valve type faucets or assemblies having hose connection outlets that are not equ
ipped with integral
check stops.
F. Coordinate mounting heights of plumbing fixtures with architectural details/e
levations.
G. Install A.D.A. compliant water closet flush valve handles on wide side of toi
let stalls.
H. Install fixtures and trim in accordance with manufacturer s instructions.
I. All exposed chrome plated, polished or enameled fixtures and trim shall be in
stalled with special care,
leaving no tool marks on finishes. Install flexible brass fixture supply risers
using manufactured tube
bending tools. Bending tubes only with the use of hands shall not be permitted.
J. Install each fixture trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
K. Provide chrome-plated deep escutcheons where required to cover non-chrome- pl
ated piping projecting
through walls.
L. Thoroughly fill spaces between fixtures and walls, countertops and/or floors
with waterproof, mold
resistant, non-toxic, non-shrinkable white tile caulking.
M. Install components firmly fixed, level and plumb.
N. Install and secure all wall mounted fixtures in place with commercial carrier
s and bolts as per
manufacturer s instructions. Fixture weight shall not be transmitted to walls, par
titions or service
piping. Installation shall prevent any movement of fixture during use.
O. All non-monolithic shower/ Ablution floors shall be provided with drain pan a
ttached to floor drain
flange in accordance with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code. Refer
to Architectural
Contract Specifications and Drawings for pan materials and additional installati
on requirements.

Interface with Other Products ad Trades

A. Review millwork Shop Drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and open
ings before rough-in
and installation.
B. Provide templates for all fixtures to be mounted in millwork to General Contr
actor.
C. Coordinate with Electrical Contractor and insure proper power is provided for
electric drinking
fountains, sensor operated faucets and sensor operated flush valves.

Electrical Connections
Item requiring connection to electric supply shall have characteristics in accor
dance with the Electrical
Drawings and shall be installed in accordance with appropriate paragraphs of Ele
ctrical Division.
Testing
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splas
hing, noise or overflow.
B. Adjust and set sensor faucet mixing valves to provide desired water temperatu
re at spout outlet.
C. Insure that all traps are filled with water and maintain trap seal. Each fixt
ure shall be filled and then
drained. Traps and fixture connections shall be proven water tight by visual ins
pection.
D. After fixtures have been installed and water systems are pressurized, test ea
ch fixture and associated
trim for proper operation and inspect for leaks. Replace malfunctioning fixtures
and components, then
retest. Repeat procedure until all components operate properly.

Cleaning
A. Thoroughly clean all plumbing fixtures and equipment furnished under this Con
tract prior to final
acceptance.
B. Thoroughly flush and clean all faucet spout outlet screens and flow control d
evices.

Protection of Finished Work

Do not permit use of fixtures until after Substantial Completion has been announ
ced by Owner.
13 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
13.1 Common Motor Requirement for HVAC Equipment
General
Section includes
A. Single phase electric motors.
B. Three phase electric motors.

Reference standards
ABMA STD 9
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American
Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
IEEE 112
IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; Most Recent Edi
tion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and con
nection requirements.
B. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power fa
ctor for three phase motors
larger than 1/2 horsepower.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connec
tions, lubrication, and
wiring instructions.
D. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replaceme
nt sizes, and lubrication
instructions.
Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of electric
motors for HVAC use,
and their accessories, with minimum five years documented product development, t
esting, and
manufacturing experience.
B. Conform to NFPA 70.
C. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwrite
rs Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory c
overs and suitable
weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipme
nt and store
separately.
Warranty
A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 20 horsepower.
 Products
General Construction and Requirements
A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 2717 for required electrical characte
ristics.
B. Electrical Service:
1. Motors 2.5 HP and Smaller: 220 volts, single phase, 50 Hz.
2. Motors larger than 2.5 Horsepower: 400 volts, three phase, 50 Hz.

C. Construction:
1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulatio
n class, service
factor, and motor enclosure type.
4. Motors with frame sizes 254T and larger: Energy Efficient Type.

D. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labelled for hazard classification, w

ith over temperature
protection.
E. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM,
full load amps, locked
rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, po
wer factor, efficiency.
F. Wiring Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, an
d materials indicated.
Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.
2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide t
hreaded conduit
connection in end frame.

Applications
A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the eq
uipment manufacturer's
standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans, oil burners, and centrifugal pump
s: Split phase type.
C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capaci
tor type.
D. Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor
start type.
E. Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor
run type.
F. Motors located in exterior locations, wet air streams downstream of sprayed c
oil dehumidifiers, draw
through cooling towers, air cooled condensers, humidifiers, direct drive axial f
ans, roll filters, explosion
proof environments, and dust collection systems: Totally enclosed type.
G. Motors located in outdoors, in wet air streams downstream of sprayed coil deh
umidifiers, in draw through
cooling towers, and in humidifiers: Totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-treated
type.
H. Motors located outdoors and in draw through cooling towers: Totally enclosed
weatherproof epoxy-sealed
type.

Single Phase Power Split Phase Motors

A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEM
A Service Factor, pre
lubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Serv
ice Factor, pre lubricated
ball bearings.

Single Phase Power Permanent-Split Capacitor Motors

A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C tempera
ture rise) insulation,
minimum 1.0 Service Factor, pre lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic re
set overload protector.

Single Phase Power Capacitor start Motors

A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/ca
pacitor- run motors with two
capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating spee
ds.
F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEM
A Service Factor, prelubricated
sleeve bearings.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Serv
ice Factor, pre lubricated
ball bearings.

Three Phase Power Squirrel Cage Motors

A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design
B characteristics.
D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Desi
gn B motors.
E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine
free from electrical or
mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with en
d brackets of cast iron
or aluminum with steel inserts.
H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors
embedded in motor
windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor
starter; refer to Section 26
2913.
I. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equippe
d with plugged provision for
relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculat
e bearing load with
NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft e
xtension. Stamp
bearing sizes on nameplate.
J. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.
K. Part Winding Start Where Indicated: Use part of winding to reduce locked roto
r starting current to
approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor current while providing ap
proximately 50 percent
of full winding locked rotor torque.
L. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressu
re with rotor and
starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with wate
rproof non-washing
grease.
M. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested i
n accordance with IEEE
112.
N. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested
in accordance with IEEE
112.

Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in
any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

13.2 Expansion Fittings and Loops for Hvac Piping

General
Section Includes
A. Flexible pipe connectors.
B. Expansion joints and compensators.
C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.

Reference Standards
ASTM A269
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
for General Service; 2010.
EJMA (STDS)
EJMA Standards; Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association; Ninth Edition.

Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, f
ace-to-face length,
live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per meter and per assembly,
fundamental
frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maxim
um expansion
compensation.

B. Samples: Submit two low pressure compensators 20 mm in size.

C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate manufacturer's installation instruction
s, special procedures, and
external controls.
E. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe connect
ors, expansion joints,
anchors, and guides.
F. Maintenance Data: Include adjustment instructions.
G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
1. Extra Packing for Packed Expansion Joints: One set for each joint.

Regulatory Requirements
Conform to UL requirements.
Products
Flexible Pipe Connectors Steel Piping
A. Inner Hose: Carbon Steel.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, stainless steel.
C. Exterior Sleeve: None.
D. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 232 degrees C.
E. Joint: Flanged.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Maximum offset: 20 mm on each side of installed center line.

Flexible Pipe Connectors Copper Piping

A. Inner Hose: Bronze.
B. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
C. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 232 degrees C.
D. Joint: Flanged.
E. Size: Use pipe sized units.
F. Maximum offset: 20 mm on each side of installed centre line.
G. Application: Copper piping.

Expansion Joints Stainless steel Bellows Type

A. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 204 degrees C.
B. Maximum Compression: 45 mm.
C. Maximum Extension: 6 mm.
D. Joint: Flanged.
E. Size: Use pipe sized units.
F. Application: Steel piping 75 mm and under.

Expansion Joints External \Ring Controlled Stainless Steel Bellows Type

A. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 204 degrees C.
B. Maximum Compression: 24 mm.
C. Maximum Extension: 8 mm.
D. Maximum Offset: 3 mm.
E. Joint: Flanged.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Accessories: Internal flow liner.
H. Application: Steel piping over 50 mm.

Expansion Joints Single Sphere, Elbow Compensator

A. Body: Teflon.
B. Pressure Rating, Sizes 20 mm to 50 mm: 1040 kPa and 99 degrees C.
C. Pressure Rating, Sizes 32 mm to 300 mm: 1040 kPa and 121 degrees C.
D. Pressure Rating, Sizes 350 mm to 600 mm: 725 kPa and 121 degrees C.
E. Maximum Compression: 13 mm.
F. Maximum Elongation: 10 mm.
G. Maximum Offset: 10 mm.
H. Maximum Angular Movement: 15 degrees.
I. Joint: Tapped steel flanges.
J. Size: Use pipe sized units.
K. Accessories: Control rods.
L. Application: Steel piping 50 mm and over.
Expansion Joints Two-Ply Bronze Bellows Type
A. Construction: Bronze with anti-torque device, limit stops, internal guides.
B. Pressure Rating: 862 kPa and 204 degrees C.
C. Maximum Compression: 45 mm.
D. Maximum Extension: 6 mm.
E. Joint: Soldered.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Application: Copper piping.

Expansion Joints Low Pressure Compensator with Two-Ply Bronze Bellows

A. Working Pressure: 510 kPa.
B. Maximum Temperatures: 121 degrees C.
C. Maximum Compression: 12.7 mm.
D. Maximum Extension: 4.0 mm.
E. Joint: Soldered.
F. Size: Use pipe sized units.
G. Application: Copper or steel piping 75 mm and under.

Expansion Joints Steel with Packed Sliding Sleeve

A. Working Pressure and Temperature: Class 150.
B. Joint: Flanged.
C. Size: Use pipe sized units.
D. Application: Steel piping 50 mm and over.

Expansion Joints copper with Packed Sliding Sleeve

A. Working Pressure: 862 kPa.
B. Maximum Temperature: 121 degrees C.
C. Joint: Flanged.
D. Size: Use pipe sized units.
E. Application: Copper or steel piping 50 mm and over.

Accessories
A. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A269.
B. Pipe Alignment Guides:

Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard pi
pe, frame with four
mounting holes, clearance for minimum 25 mm thick insulation, minimum 75 mm trav
el.
C. Swivel Joints:
Fabricated steel body, double ball bearing race, field lubricated, with rubber (
Buna-N) o-ring seals.
Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association) S
tandards.
C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end
immediately adjacent to
isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indi
cated otherwise.
D. Anchor pipe to building structure where indicated. Provide pipe guides so mov
ement is directed along
axis of pipe only. Erect piping such that strain and weight is not on cast conne
ctions or apparatus.
E. Provide support and equipment required to control expansion and contraction o
f piping. Provide loops,
pipe offsets, and swing joints, or expansion joints where required.

13.3 Vibration and seismic controls for HVAC piping and equipment
General
Section Includes
A. Equipment support bases.
B. Vibration isolators.
C. Roof curbs.
Reference Standard
ASCE 7
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ; 2011
ASHRAE (HVACA)
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. ; 2011
IAS AC172
Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
International Accreditation Service, Inc. ; 2011
SMACNA (SRM)
Seismic Duct Restraint Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'
National Association ; 2008

Submittals
A. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer's product literature.
2. Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint componen
t accounting for
horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide schedule of vibration isolator type with location and load on each.
2. Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration
isolation bases, member
sizes, attachments to isolators, and supported equipment.
3. Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases, c
oncrete weights, equipment
static loads, support points, vibration isolators, and detailed layout of isolat
or location and orientation
with static and dynamic load on each isolator.
4. Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance w
ith the applicable
building code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
5. Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies o
f any calculations.
6. Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable buildin
g code for seismic
controls and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.

C. Manufacturer s Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special pr

ocedures and setting
dimensions.
Quality Assurance
A. Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Profess
ional Engineer experienced
in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in United Arab Emirat
es.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products s
pecified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.

Member of Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association (VIS

CMA).
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
section with minimum five
years of experience.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing te
sting and inspections of the
type specified in this section.

Products
Performance Requirements
General:
A. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all unif
orm deflection and stability
requirements under all operating loads.
B. Steel springs to function without undue stress or overloading.
C. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection
curve over deflection range of
not less than 50 per cent above specified deflection.
D. Lateral to vertical stiffness ratio to not exceed 0.08 with spring deflection
at minimum 75 per cent of
specified deflection.
E. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating c
learance of 50 mm
between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise.

Equipment Support Bases

Structural Bases:
A. Construction: Engineered, structural steel frames with welded brackets for si
de mounting of the isolators.
B. Frames: Square, rectangular or T-shaped.
C. Design: Sufficiently rigid to prevent misalignment or undue stress on machine
, and to transmit design
loads to isolators and snubbers.
D. Applications: Adjustable motor slide rails for centrifugal fans.

Concrete Inertia Bases:

A. Construction: Engineered, steel forms, with integrated isolator brackets and
anchor bolts, welded or tied
reinforcing bars running both ways in a single layer.
B. Size: 152 mm minimum depth and sized to accommodate elbow supports.
C. Mass: Minimum of 1.5 times weight of isolated equipment.
D. Connecting Point: Reinforced to connect isolators and snubbers to base includ
ing template and fastening
devices for equipment.
E. Concrete: Filled on site with minimum 20 mPa concrete.

Vibration Isolators
Non-Seismic Type:
A. All Elastomeric-Fiber Glass Pads:
1. Configuration: Flat or molded.
2. Thickness: 6 mm minimum.
3. Assembly: Single or multiple layers using bonded, galvanized sheet metal sepa
ration plate between
each layer with load plate providing evenly distributed load over pad surface.

B. Elastomeric Mounts:
1. Material: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant compounds.
2. Assembly: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate
with anchor hole
bolted to supporting structure.

C. Steel Springs:
1. Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing.
2. Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame.

D. Restrained Steel Springs:

1. Housing: Rigid blocking during rigging prevents equipment installed and opera
ting height from
changing during temporary weight reduction.
2. Equipment Wind Loading: Adequate means for fastening isolator top to equipmen
t and isolator base
plate to supporting structure.

E. Elastomeric Hangers:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to preve
nt rod contact with
housing and short-circuiting of isolating function.
2. Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to
housing.

F. Spring Hanger:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elast
omeric element preventing
metal to metal contact.
2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.

G. Combination Elastomeric-Spring Hanger:

1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring with elastomeric e
lement in series isolating
upper connection of hanger box to building structure.
2. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.

H. Thrust Restraints:
1. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elast
omeric element installed in
pairs to resist air pressure thrusts.
2. Bottom Openings: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.

Seismic Restraints for Suspended Components and Equipment

A. Comply with:
1. ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications
2. FEMA 412
3. FEMA 413
4. FEMA 414
5. FEMA E-74
6. SMACNA - Seismic Duct Restraint Manual

B. Cable Restraints:
1. Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all late
ral directions.
2. Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand b
reakage.
3. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into accoun
t bracket geometry.
4. Connections:
a. Use overlapping wire rope U clips, cable clamping bolts, swaged sleeves or se
ismically rated
tool-less wedge insert lock connectors.
b. Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.

5. Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to p

revent rod buckling
from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.

C. Rigid Restraints:
1. Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions a
nd carry both compressive
and tensile loading.
2. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into accoun
t bracket geometry.
3. Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent def
ormation.
4. Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads
generated by the
vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any stati
c load requirements
on the system.
5. Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to
prevent rod buckling
from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.

Roof Curbs
Non-Seismic Type:
A. Vibration Isolation Curb Rail:
1. Location: Between existing roof curb and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Aluminum.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.

B. Vibration Isolation Curb:

1. Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Aluminum.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.
Seismic Type:
A. Non-isolated Curb and Fabricated Equipment Piers:
1. Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Steel.
3. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.

B. Vibration Isolation Curb:

1. Location: Between structure and rooftop equipment.
2. Construction: Steel.
3. Integral vibration isolation to conform to requirements of this section.
4. Snubbers consist of minimum 6 mm thick resilient pads to avoid metal-to- meta
l contact without
compromising vibration isolating capabilities.
5. Weather exposed components consist of corrosion resistant materials.

Execution
Installation General
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Bases:
1. Set steel bases for 25 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and base.
2. Set concrete inertia bases for 50 mm clearance between housekeeping pad and b
ase.
3. Adjust equipment level.

C. On closed spring isolators, adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal
operating conditions.
D. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substa
ntially different from
installed weights, block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When
full load is applied,
adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
E. Provide pairs of horizontal limit springs on fans with more than 1.5 kPa stat
ic pressure, and on hanger
supported, horizontally mounted axial fans.
F. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators
or resilient hangers for
scheduled distance.
1. Up to 100 mm Pipe Size: First three points of support.
2. 125 to 200 mm Pipe Size: First four points of support.
3. 250 mm Pipe Size and Over: First six points of support.
4. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 25 mm static def
lection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 25 mm s
tatic deflection or
1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
Field Quality Control
A. Inspect isolated equipment after installation and submit report. Include stat
ic deflections.
B. Perform testing and inspections of the installation in accordance with Sectio
n 01 4533 - Code-Required
Special Inspections.

Schedule
A. Pipe Isolation Schedule.
1. 25 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 120 diameters from equipment.
2. 50 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 90 diameters from equipment.
3. 80 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 80 diameters from equipment.
4. 100 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 75 diameters from equipment.
5. 150 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment.
6. 200 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 60 diameters from equipment.
7. 250 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 54 diameters from equipment.
8. 300 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 50 diameters from equipment.
9. 400 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 45 diameters from equipment.
10. 600 mm Pipe Size: Isolate 38 diameters from equipment.
11. Over 600 mm Pipe Size: As indicated.

13.4 Identification for Hvac piping and equipment

General
Section Includes
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe Markers.

Reference Standards
ASME A13.1
Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers ; 2007
ASTM D709
Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials; 2001
(Reapproved 2007).

Submittals
A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mech
anical identification.
B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag numb
er, location, function,
and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue literature for each product req
uired.
D. Samples: Submit two labels x mm in size.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and in
stallation.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
 Products
Identification application
A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates.
B. Air Terminal Units: Tags.
C. Automatic Controls: Tags. Key to control schematic.
D. Control Panels: Nameplates.
E. Dampers: Ceiling tacks, where located above lay-in ceiling.
F. Ductwork: Nameplates.
G. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates.
H. Instrumentation: Tags.
I. Major Control Components: Nameplates.
J. Piping: Tags.
K. Pumps: Nameplates.
L. Relays: Tags.
M. Small-sized Equipment: Tags.
N. Tanks: Nameplates.
O. Thermostats: Nameplates.
P. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling.
Q. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates.

Nameplates
Tags:
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on li
ght contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 40 mm diameter.
B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 40 mm diameter with
smooth edges.
C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

Stencils
A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 20-30 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 15
mm high letters
2. 40-50 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 200 mm long color field, 20
mm high letters
3. 65-150 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 300 mm long color field, 30
mm high letters
4. 200-250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 600 mm long color field, 6
5 mm high letters
5. Over 250 mm Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 800 mm long color field,
90 mm high
letters.
6. Ductwork and Equipment: 65 mm high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9000, semi-gloss enamel, colors con

forming to ASME
A13.1.

Pipe Makers
A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, pref
ormed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identific
ation of fluid being
conveyed.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive
adhesive backing and printed
markings.
D. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic
ribbon tape, minimum
150 mm wide by 0.10 mm thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
E. Color code as follows:
1. Heating, Cooling, and Boiler Feedwater: Green with white letters.
2. Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Orange with black letters.
3. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.

Ceiling Tacks
A. Description: Steel with 20 mm diameter color coded head.
B. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red.
3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue.

Execution
Preparation
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 9000 for stencil painting.
Installation
A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive
. Apply with sufficient
adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 9000.
D. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with man
ufacturer's
instructions.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 to 200 mm below finished grade,
directly above buried
pipe.
G. Use tags on piping 20 mm diameter and smaller.
1. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.
2. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
3. Locate identification not to exceed 6 m on straight runs including risers and
drops, adjacent to each
valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at eac
h obstruction.

H. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit ide
ntification number and area
served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration
of structure or enclosure, and
at each obstruction.
I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings.
Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.

13.5 Testing, Adjusting and balancing for Hvac

General
Section Includes
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic, steam, and refrigerating syst
ems.
C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
D. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
E. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
F. Commissioning activities.

Reference Standards
AABC MN-1
AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated Air Balance
Council ; 2002
ASHRAE Std 111
Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating,
Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems; American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
NEBB (TAB)
Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems;
National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition
SMACNA (TAB)
HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002

Submittals
A. Qualifications: Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency and TAB supervi
sor for approval
within 30 days after award of Contract.
B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balanc
ing standard to be
followed and the specific approach for each system and component.
1. Submit to Consultant.
2. Submit six weeks prior to starting the testing, adjusting, and balancing work
.
3. Include certification that the plan developer has reviewed the contract docum
ents, the equipment and
systems, and the control system with the Consultant and other installers to suff
iciently understand the
design intent for each system.
4. Include at least the following in the plan:
a. Preface: An explanation of the intended use of the control system.
b. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency
measurements to be
performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to
be used.
c. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equi
pment to be tested,
adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.
d. Identification and types of measurement instruments to be used and their most
recent
calibration date.
e. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping
drawings
during the process.
f. Final test report forms to be used.
g. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, incl
uding:
1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type).
2) Diffuser proportioning.
3) Branch/sub-main proportioning.
4) Total flow calculations.
5) Rechecking.
6) Diversity issues.

h. Expected problems and solutions, etc.

i. Criteria for using air flow straighteners or relocating flow stations and sen
sors; analogous
explanations for the water side.
j. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:
1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood
readings of
all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pivot traverse, SA or RA flow sta
tions.
2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc.

k. Specific procedures that will ensure that both air and water side are operati
ng at the lowest
possible pressures and methods to verify this.
l. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under a
ll conditions.
m. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verifie
d and set and for
what level (total building, zone, etc.).
n. Method of checking building static and exhaust fan and/or relief damper capac
ity.
o. Proposed selection points for sound measurements and sound measurement method
s.
p. Methods for making coil or other system plant capacity measurements, if speci
fied.
q. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor, etc.).
r. Description of TAB work for areas to be built out later, if any.
s. Time schedule for deferred or seasonal TAB work, if specified.
t. False loading of systems to complete TAB work, if specified.
u. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room
pressure
differentials.
v. Interstitial cavity differential pressure measurements and calculations, if s
pecified.
w. Procedures for field technician logs of discrepancies, deficient or uncomplet
ed work by others,
contract interpretation requests and lists of completed tests (scope and frequen
cy).
x. Procedures for formal progress reports, including scope and frequency.
y. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and dist
ribution.

C. Field Logs: Submit at least twice a week to Consultant.

D. Control System Coordination Reports: Communicate in writing to the controls i
nstaller all set point and
parameter changes made or problems and discrepancies identified during TAB that
affect, or could
affect, the control system setup and operation.
E. Progress Reports.
F. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper test
ing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and of equipment to achieve specified performance.
1. Submit under provisions of Section 01 4000.
2. Submit to the Consultant within two weeks after completion of testing, adjust
ing, and balancing.
3. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final repo
rt.
4. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project
.
5. Provide final copies for Consultant and for inclusion in operating and mainte
nance manuals.
6. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete w
ith index page and
indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduc
ed drawings with air
outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating
thermostat locations.
7. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and da
te of calibration.
8. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a repo
rt format use
that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.
9. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units.
10. Include the following on the title page of each report:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.
d. Project name.
e. Project location.
f. Project Consultant.
g. Project Engineer.
h. Project Contractor.
i. Project altitude.
j. Report date.

G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations

and balancing valves
and rough setting.

Products
General Requirements
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:
1. AABC MN-1, AABC National Standards for Total System Balance.
2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing o
f Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
3. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Sy
stems.
4. SMACNA HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
5. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all
times.

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced an

d complete work prior to
Substantial Completion of the project.
C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, incl
uding fire and smoke
detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection
procedures with the
authorities having jurisdiction.
D. TAB Agency Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems spec
ified in this section.
2. Having minimum of five years documented experience.
3. Certified by one of the following:
a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabchq.com; upon completion submit
AABC
National Performance Guaranty.
b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org.
c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Managem
ent
Institute: www.tabbcertified.org.

E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization

as TAB agency.
F. TAB Supervisor Qualifications: Professional Engineer licensed in United Arab
Emirates.

Examination
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure
the following
conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in
addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.
15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prev
ent proper system balance.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

Preparation
A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.
Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or bal
anced.
B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations
. Make instruments
available to Consultant to facilitate spot checks during testing.
C. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

Adjustment Tolerances
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for
supply systems and plus
or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 5 percent and minus 5 per
cent of design to space.
Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

Recording and Adjusting

A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including:
1. Running log of events and issues.
2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others.
3. Contract interpretation requests.
4. Lists of completed tests.

B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices al
lowing settings to be
restored. Set and lock memory stops.
D. Mark on the drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurem
ents were taken and
cross reference the location in the final report.
E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted
or that such disruption
has been rectified.
F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access
doors, closing doors to
electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Re
check points or areas as
selected and witnessed by the client.
H. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and
submit report.

Air System Procedure

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design su
pply, return, and exhaust
air quantities at site altitude.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cros
s sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from obj
ectionable drafts and
noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adj
ustments do not create
objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal
devices such as
dampers and splitters.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive c
hanges required. Vary
branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at
each outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter
and coil pressure drops, and
total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters
.
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust da
mpers for design
conditions.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust da
mpers to check leakage.
K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extre
me conditions.
Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at m
inimum air flow rate,
full heating.
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air s
ystems to provide required
relationship between each to maintain approximately 12.5 Pa positive static pres
sure near the building
entries.
M. Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air quantities wi
th mixing dampers set
first for cooling, then heating, then modulating.
N. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flo
w setting indicated.
Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic var
iable air volume
temperature control.
O. On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust air flow switches for proper operation.

Water System Procedure

A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressur
e gauges to determine flow
rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base fl
ow balance on
temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system.
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat tra
nsfer elements prior to
thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in
conjunction with air
balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transf
er elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks,
valves, and fittings. Do
not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance poin
t.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individ
ual system parts, full flow
in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.

Commissioning
A. Perform prerequisites prior to starting commissioning activities.
B. Fill out Pre-functional Checklists for:
1. Air side systems.
2. Water side systems.

C. Furnish to the Commissioning Authority, upon request, any data gathered but n
ot shown in the final
TAB report.
D. Re-check minimum outdoor air intake flows and maximum and intermediate total
airflow rates 4
percent of the air handlers plus a random sample equivalent 2 percent of the fin
al TAB report data as
directed by Commissioning Authority.
1. Original TAB agency shall execute the re-checks, witnessed by the Consultant.
2. Use the same test instruments as used in the original TAB work.
3. Failure of more than 5 percent of the re-checked items of a given system shal
l result in the rejection
of the system TAB report; rebalance the system, provide a new system TAB report,
and repeat
random re-checks.
4. For purposes of re-check, failure is defined as follows:
a. Air Flow of Supply and Return: Deviation of more than 10 percent of instrumen
t reading.
b. Minimum Outside Air Flow: Deviation of more than 20 percent of instrument rea
ding; for inlet
vane or VFD OSA compensation system using linear proportional control, deviation
of more than
30 percent at intermediate supply flow.
c. Temperatures: Deviation of more than 0.5 degree C.
d. Air and Water Pressures: Deviation of more than 10 percent of full scale of t
est instrument reading.
e. Sound Pressures: Deviation of more than 3 decibels, with consideration for va
riations in
background noise.
5. For purposes of re-check, a whole system is defined as one in which inaccurac
ies will have little or
no impact on connected systems; for example, the air distribution system served
by one air handler
or the hydronic chilled water supply system served by a chiller or the condenser
water system.

E. In the presence of the Consultant/Commissioning Authority, verify that:

1. Final settings of all valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices
have been permanently
marked.
2. The air system is being controlled to the lowest possible static pressure whi
le still meeting design
loads, less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established c
ontrol set points, and
physical verification of at least one leg from fan to diffuser having all balanc
ing dampers wide
open and that during full cooling of all terminal units taking off downstream of
the static pressure
sensor, the terminal unit on the critical leg has its damper 90 percent or more
open.
3. The water system is being controlled to the lowest possible pressure while st
ill meeting design
loads, less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established c
ontrol set points, and
physical verification of at least one leg from the pump to the coil having all b
alancing valves wide
open and that during full cooling the cooling coil valve of that leg is 90 perce
nt or more open.

F. No seasonal tests are required.

G. No further monitoring is required.
H. No deferred testing is required.

Scope
Test, adjust, and balance not limited to the following:
A. Fire Pumps
B. Complete fire protection system
C. Plumbing Pumps
D. Condensate Pumps
E. HVAC Pumps
F. Air Cooled Water Chillers
G. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers
H. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units
I. Unit Air Conditioners
J. Air Coils
K. Air Handling Units
L. Fans
M. Air Filters
N. Air Terminal Units
O. Air Inlets and Outlets
P. Fresh Air Handling Units
Q. Thermal Energy Storage system

Minimum Data to be Reported

A. Electric Motors:
1. Manufacturer
2. Model/Frame
3. HP/BHP
4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
5. RPM
6. Service factor
7. Starter size, rating, heater elements
8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

B. V-Belt Drives:
1. Identification/location
2. Required driven RPM
3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
4. Belt, size and quantity
5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM
6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual

C. Pumps:
1. Identification/number
2. Manufacturer
3. Size/model
4. Impeller
5. Service
6. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP
8. Discharge pressure
9. Suction pressure
10. Total operating head pressure
11. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
12. Shut off, total head pressure

D. Air Cooled Condensers:

1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Manufacturer
4. Model number
5. Serial number
6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
8. Number of compressors

E. Chillers:
1. Identification/number
2. Manufacturer
3. Capacity
4. Model number
5. Serial number
6. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual
7. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual
8. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual
9. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual
10. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual
11. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual
12. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual

F. Heat Exchangers:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Model number
6. Serial number
7. Steam pressure, design and actual
8. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual
9. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual
10. Primary water flow, design and actual
11. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual
12. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
13. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual
14. Secondary water flow, design and actual
15. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual

G. Cooling Coils:
1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Service
4. Manufacturer
5. Air flow, design and actual
6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
10. Water flow, design and actual
11. Water pressure drop, design and actual
12. Entering water temperature, design and actual
13. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
15. Air pressure drop, design and actual

H. Electric Duct Heaters:

1. Manufacturer
2. Identification/number
3. Location
4. Model number
5. Design kW
6. Number of stages
7. Phase, voltage, amperage
8. Test voltage (each phase)
9. Test amperage (each phase)
10. Air flow, specified and actual
11. Temperature rise, specified and actual

I. Air Moving Equipment:

1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge
6. Air flow, specified and actual
7. Return air flow, specified and actual
8. Outside air flow, specified and actual
9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
10. Inlet pressure
11. Discharge pressure
12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
13. Number of Belts/Make/Size
14. Fan RPM

J. Return Air/Outside Air:

1. Identification/location
2. Design air flow
3. Actual air flow
4. Design return air flow
5. Actual return air flow
6. Design outside air flow
7. Actual outside air flow
8. Return air temperature
9. Outside air temperature
10. Required mixed air temperature
11. Actual mixed air temperature
12. Design outside/return air ratio
13. Actual outside/return air ratio

K. Exhaust Fans:
1. Location
2. Manufacturer
3. Model number
4. Serial number
5. Air flow, specified and actual
6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
7. Inlet pressure
8. Discharge pressure
9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
10. Number of Belts/Make/Size
11. Fan RPM

L. Duct Traverses:
1. System zone/branch
2. Duct size
3. Area
4. Design velocity
5. Design air flow
6. Test velocity
7. Test air flow
8. Duct static pressure
9. Air temperature
10. Air correction factor

M. Duct Leak Tests:

1. Description of ductwork under test
2. Duct design operating pressure
3. Duct design test static pressure
4. Duct capacity, air flow
5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
6. Test apparatus
a. Blower
b. Orifice, tube size
c. Orifice size
d. Calibrated

7. Test static pressure

8. Test orifice differential pressure
9. Leakage

N. Air Monitoring Stations:

1. Identification/location
2. System
3. Size
4. Area
5. Design velocity
6. Design air flow
7. Test velocity
8. Test air flow

O. Flow Measuring Stations:

1. Identification/number
2. Location
3. Size
4. Manufacturer
5. Model number
6. Serial number
7. Design Flow rate
8. Design pressure drop
9. Actual/final pressure drop
10. Actual/final flow rate
11. Station calibrated setting

P. Terminal Unit Data:

1. Manufacturer
2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
3. Identification/number
4. Location
5. Model number
6. Size
7. Minimum static pressure
8. Minimum design air flow
9. Maximum design air flow
10. Maximum actual air flow
11. Inlet static pressure

Q. Air Distribution Tests:

1. Air terminal number
2. Room number/location
3. Terminal type
4. Terminal size
5. Area factor
6. Design velocity
7. Design air flow
8. Test (final) velocity
9. Test (final) air flow
10. Percent of design air flow

R. Sound Level Reports:

1. Location
2. Octave bands - equipment off
3. Octave bands - equipment on

S. Vibration Tests:
1. Location of points:
a. Fan bearing, drive end
b. Fan bearing, opposite end
c. Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
d. Motor bearing, drive end
e. Motor bearing, opposite end
f. Casing (bottom or top)
g. Casing (side)
h. Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
i. Duct after flexible connection (suction)

2. Test readings:
a. Horizontal, velocity and displacement
b. Vertical, velocity and displacement
c. Axial, velocity and displacement

3. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration

4. Unusual conditions at time of test
5. Vibration source (if non-complying)
13.6 Duct Insulations
General
Section Includes
A. Duct insulation.
B. Duct Liner.
C. Insulation jackets.

Reference Standards
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;
2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C553
Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2011.
ASTM C612
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2010.
ASTM C916
Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 1985
(Reapproved 2007).
ASTM C1071
Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and
Sound Absorbing Material); 2012.
ASTM C1290
Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to
Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2011.
ASTM C1338
Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials
and Facings; 2008.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
ASTM G21
Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi; 2009.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. ; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
each service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to en
sure acceptable
workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products o
f the type specified in
this section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this
section, with minimum five years of experience and approved by manufacturer.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufact
urer's identification,
including product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemic
al, and mechanical damage,
by storing in original wrapping.

Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adh
esives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 h
ours.

Products
Requirements for All Products of this Section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying
with ASTM C534 Grade 3;
use molded tubular material wherever possible.
A. 'Ksi' Value: 0.032 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
B. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
C. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
D. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulati
on.
Glass Fiber, Flexible
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, non-combustible blanket.
1. 'Ksi' value: 0.31 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 232 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Barrier Tape:

Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive
rubber based adhesive.
D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:

Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 1.5 mm.

Glass Fiber, Rigid

A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'Ksi' value: 0.32 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
2. Maximum service temperature: 232 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.
4. Maximum Density: 48 kg/cu m.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pasm, when tested in accordance with AS
TM E96/E96M.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

C. Vapor Barrier Tape:

Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive
rubber based adhesive.
D. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 305 g/sq m weight, glass fabric.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

Jackets
A. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with di
lute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive:
a. Compatible with insulation.

B. Mineral Fiber (Outdoor) Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 2.45 kg
/sq m.
1. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
a. Thickness: 0.8 / 1.0 mm sheet.
b. Finish: Smooth.
c. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 100 mm laps.
d. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps.
e. Fittings: 0.8/1.0 mm thick die shaped fitting covers with factory
attached protective liner.
f. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.6 mm thick aluminum.
g. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.
Duct Liner
A. Insulation: Non-corrosive, incombustible glass fiber complying with ASTM C107
1; flexible blanket;
impregnated surface and edges coated with poly vinyl acetate polymer, acrylic po
lymer, or black
composite.
1. Fungi Resistance: ASTM G21.
2. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 24 degrees C.
3. Service Temperature: Up to 121 degrees C.
4. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 25.4 m/s, minimum.
5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:
a. 25 mm Thickness: 0.45.

B. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916.

C. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.

Execution
Examination
A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide flexible elastomeric cellular insulation.
2. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrati
ons.
3. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, fle
xible connections, and
expansion joints.

D. Ducts Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with j

acket as specified in
Section 2.05 C with thickness 0.8 mm
E. Exterior Applications (exposed to outside): Provide insulation with vapor bar
rier jacket. Cover with
jacket as specified in Section 2.05C with thickness 1.0 mm.
F. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow.

Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.

Schedules
A. Exhaust Ducts Exposed to Outdoor Air
B. Outside Air Intake Ducts: flexible elastomeric cellular insulation
C. Plenums: flexible elastomeric cellular insulation
D. Plenums (Cooling System)
E. Ventilation Equipment Casings
F. Supply Ducts:

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 25 mm thick.

G. Return Ducts:
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 25 mm thick.
H. Fresh Air Intake & Exhaust Air Intake:

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 25 mm thick.

I. Ducts Exposed to Outdoors:

Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: 25 mm thick.

13.7 Hvac equipment insulation
General
Section Includes
A. Equipment insulation.
B. Covering.
C. Breeching insulation.

Reference Standards
ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheetand Plate; 2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheetand Plate
[Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus;
2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;
2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating an
d
Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means
of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation;
2011.
ASTM
C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2011.
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C553
Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and
Industrial Applications; 2011.
ASTM C592
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pip
e
Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type); 2012.
ASTM C612 -
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2010.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
;
National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for
equipment scheduled.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than five years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this section
with minimum five years of experience.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufact
urer's identification,
including product density and thickness.
B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemic
al, and mechanical damage, by
storing in original wrapping.

Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adh
esives, mastics, and
insulation cements.
B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 h
ours.

Products
Requirements for All Products of this Section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass Fiber, Flexible
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.052 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM
C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 232 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded
to aluminized film.
1. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
2. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
3. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

C. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:

ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

Glass fiber Rigid
A. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.036 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 454 degrees C.
3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.
4. Maximum Density: 128 kg/cu m.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM
E96/E96M.
3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

C. Facing: 25 mm galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of in

sulation.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:

ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

Cellular Glass
Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 2.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.059 at 38 degrees C.
2. Service Temperature: Up to 482 degrees C.
3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/Pa s m.
4. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.
5. Density: Minimum 109 kg/cu m.
Hydrous Calcium Silicate
A. Insulation: ASTM C533; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.057 at 148 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or C518.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 649 degrees C.
3. Density: 249 kg/cu m.

B. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
C. Insulating Cement:

ASTM C449/C449M.
Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation
A. Insulation Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complyin
g with ASTM C534 Grade
3, in sheet form.
1. 'Ksi' Value: 0.032 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
4. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insul
ation.

Jackets
PVC Plastic:
A. Jacket: Sheet material, off-white color.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

B. Covering Adhesive Mastic:

1. Compatible with insulation.
Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilut
e fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
A. Lagging Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.

Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.

A. Thickness: 0.80 mm sheet.
B. Finish: Smooth.
C. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps.
D. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.38 mm thick aluminum.
E. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.

Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.

A. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
B. Finish: Smooth.
C. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.

Execution
Examination
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locatio
ns.
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insula
tion.

Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or band
s.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smo
oth surface. On cold
equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate ent
ire system.
G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature:
Provide vapor barrier
jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor bar
rier adhesive.
H. For hot equipment containing fluids 60 degrees C or less, do not insulate fla
nges and unions, but bevel and
seal ends of insulation.
I. For hot equipment containing fluids over 60 degrees C, insulate flanges and u
nions with removable
sections and jackets.
J. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature:
Provide standard jackets,
with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field- applied. Finish with gl
ass cloth and adhesive.
K. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Equipment 40 mm diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish ja
cket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 150 mm long, of same thickness and contour as a
djoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.

L. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density i

nsulating material suitable for
the planned temperature range.
M. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
N. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with canva
s jacket sized for
finish painting.
O. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh
reinforced vapor barrier
cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizont
al equipment.
P. Cover glass fiber insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of in
sulating cement aluminum
jacket.
Q. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate
over.
R. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insu
lation so it can be easily
removed and replaced without damage.

Schedule
Cooling Systems:
A. Pump Bodies: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation 25mm thick.
B. Air Separators: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation 25mm thick.
C. Expansion Tanks: Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation 25mm thick.
D. Chiller Cold Surfaces (Not Factory Insulated): Flexible Elastomeric Cellular
Insulation 50mm thick.
E. Cold Thermal Storage Tanks: Glass Fiber Flexible Insulation 100mm thick.
13.8 HVAC Piping Insulation
General
Section Insulation
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.

ASTM A666
Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
ASTM B209
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 2010.
ASTM B209M
Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate [Metric]; 2010.
ASTM C177
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate
Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C195
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement;
2007.
ASTM C449
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal
Insulating and Finishing Cement; 2007.
ASTM C518
Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties
by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.
ASTM C533
Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal
Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C534/C534M
Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric
Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2011.
ASTM C547
Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012.
ASTM C552
Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2007.
ASTM C578
Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation; 2011be1.
ASTM C585
Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System); 2010.
ASTM C591
Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C610
Standard Specification for Molded Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation; 2011.
ASTM C795
Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact With
Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008.
ASTM D1056
Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or
Expanded Rubber; 2007.
ASTM D2842
Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid CellularPlastics;
2006.
ASTM E84
Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2012.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
ASTM E96/E96M
Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
NFPA 255
Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
UL 723
Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of m
aterials and thickness for each
service, and locations.
B. Samples: Submit two samples of any representative size illustrating each insu
lation type.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acc
eptable workmanship and
installation standards will be achieved.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Produc
ts specified in this
section with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of wor
k specified in this section
with minimum 3 years of experience.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product de
nsity, and thickness.
Field Conditions
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24
hours.

Products
Requirements for All Products pf this section
Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, ma
ximum, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
Glass fiber
A. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177, 0.035 at 24 degrees C.
2. Maximum service temperature: 220 degrees C.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to alum
inized film; moisture
vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.029 ng/Pa s
m.
C. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

Compatible with insulation.

E. Insulating Cement/Mastic:

ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

F. Fibrous Glass Fabric:
1. Cloth: Untreated; 305 g/sq m weight.
2. Blanket: 16 kg/cu m density.
3. Weave: 5x5.

G. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:

1. Cloth: Untreated; 305 g/sq m weight.
2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.

H. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:

Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
I. Outdoor Breather Mastic:

Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
J. Insulating Cement:
ASTM C449/C449M.
Cellular glass
Insulation: ASTM C552, Grade 1.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.053 at 38 degrees C.
B. Service Temperature: Up to 482 degrees C.
C. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.007 ng/Pa s m.
D. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume, maximum.

Expanded Polystyrene
Insulation: ASTM C578; rigid closed cell.
A. 'Ksi' value: 0.033 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum service temperature: 74 degrees C.
C. Maximum water vapor permeance: 287 ng/Pa s sq m

Expanded Perlite
Insulation: ASTM C610, molded.
A. Maximum service temperature: 649 degrees C.
B. Maximum water vapor transmission: 0.1 perm.

Hydrous Calcium Silicate

A. Insulation: ASTM C533 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, asbestos free, gold color.
1. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177 and C518; 0.057 at 149 degrees C, when tested in accor
dance with ASTM
C177 or ASTM C518.
2. Maximum service temperature: 649 degrees C.
3. Density: 240 kg/cu m.

B. Tie Wire: 1.22 mm stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 300 mm centers
.
C. Insulating Cement:
ASTM C449/C449M.
Polyisocyanurate Cellular Plastic
Insulation Material: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified polyisocyanurate cellular
plastic.
A. Dimension: Comply with requirements of ASTM C585.
B. 'Ksi' value: 0.026 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.
C. Minimum Service Temperature: -51 degrees C.
D. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees C.
E. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum, when tested in accordance w
ith ASTM D2842.
F. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 5.8 ng/ (Pa s m).
G. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

Polyethylene
Insulation: Flexible closed-cell polyethylene tubing, split lengthwise for insta
llation, complying with
applicable requirements of ASTM D1056.
A. 'Ksi' value: ASTM C177; 0.036 at 24 degrees C.
B. Maximum Service Temperature: 93 degrees C.
C. Density: 32 kg/cu m.
D. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 1.0 percent by volume.
E. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.073 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
F. Connection: Contact adhesive.
Flexible Elastometric Cellular Insulation
Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying
with ASTM C534 Grade 3;
use molded tubular material wherever possible.
A. 'Ksi' Value: 0.032 at 24 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASTM C177
or ASTM C518.
B. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
C. Maximum Service Temperature: 104 degrees C.
D. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulati
on.
Jackets
PVC Plastic.
E. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -18 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 66 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.0029 ng/Pa s m, maximum, when tested in accord
ance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

F. Covering Adhesive Mastic:

Compatible with insulation.

ABS Plastic:
A. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white co
lor.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees C.
2. Maximum Service Temperature of 82 degrees C.
3. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.018 ng/Pa s m, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Thickness: 0.76 mm.
5. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
Canvas Jacket: UL listed 220 g/sq m plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilut
e fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
A. Lagging Adhesive:
1. Compatible with insulation.

Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.

A. Thickness: 0.80 mm sheet.
B. Finish: Smooth.
C. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm laps.
D. Fittings: 0.4 mm thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protec
tive liner.

Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666, Type 304 stainless steel.

A. Thickness: 0.25 mm.
B. Finish: Smooth.
C. Metal Jacket Bands: 10 mm wide; 0.25 mm thick stainless steel.
13.9 Commissioning of HVAC
General
Summary
A. This section covers the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning; each
subcontractor or installer
responsible for the installation of a particular system or equipment item to be
commissioned is
responsible for the commissioning activities relating to that system or equipmen
t item.
B. The Commissioning Authority (CA) directs and coordinates all commissioning ac
tivities.
C. The Contractor shall provide Pre-functional Checklists and Functional Test Pr
ocedures for
Commissioning Authority's (CA) approvals.
D. The entire HVAC system is to be commissioned, including commissioning activit
ies including but not
limited to the following items:
1. Control system.
2. Major and minor equipment items.
3. Piping systems and equipment.
4. Ductwork and accessories.
5. Terminal units.
6. Sound control devices.
7. Vibration control devices.
8. Variable frequency drives.
9. Special Ventilation: Process Ventilation fans.
10. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Docu
ments as requiring
commissioning.
11. Indoor Air Quality Procedures: The Commissioning Authority will coordinate;
Contractor will
execute.
12. Background noise testing due to the HVAC systems for each areas.

E. The Pre-functional Checklist and Functional Test requirements specified in th

is section are in addition to,
not a substitute for, inspection or testing specified in other sections.

Reference Standards
ASHRAE Guideline 1.
The HVAC Commissioning Process; 2012

Submittals
A. Updated Submittals: Keep the Commissioning Authority informed of all changes
to control system
documentation made during programming and setup; revise and resubmit when substa
ntial changes are
made.
B. DRAFT Pre-functional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures for Control Sy
stem: Detailed written
plan indicating the procedures to be followed to test, checkout and adjust the c
ontrol system prior to full
system Functional Testing; include at least the following for each type of equip
ment controlled:
1. System name.
2. List of devices.
3. Step-by-step procedures for testing each controller after installation, inclu
ding:
a. Process of verifying proper hardware and wiring installation.
b. Process of downloading programs to local controllers and verifying that they
are
addressed correctly.
c. Process of performing operational checks of each controlled component.
d. Plan and process for calibrating valve and damper actuators and all sensors.
e. Description of the expected field adjustments for transmitters, controllers a
nd control
actuators should control responses fall outside of expected values.

4. Copy of proposed log and field checkout sheets to be used to document the pro
cess; include space for
initial and final read values during calibration of each point and space to spec
ifically indicate when a
sensor or controller has passed and is operating within the contract parameters.
5. Description of the instrumentation required for testing.
6. Indicate what tests on what systems should be completed prior to TAB using th
e control system for
TAB work. Coordinate with the Commissioning Authority and TAB contractor for thi
s determination.

C. Startup Reports, Prefunctional Checklists, and Trend Logs: Submit for approva
l of Commissioning
Authority.
D. HVAC Control System O&M Manual Requirements. In addition to documentation spe
cified elsewhere,
compile and organize at minimum the following data on the control system:
1. Specific step-by-step instructions on how to perform and apply all functions,
features, modes, etc.
mentioned in the controls training sections of this specification and other feat
ures of this system.
Provide an index and clear table of contents. Include the detailed technical man
ual for programming
and customizing control loops and algorithms.
2. Full as-built set of control drawings.
3. Full as-built sequence of operations for each piece of equipment.
4. Full points list; in addition to the information on the original points list
submittal, include a listing of
all rooms with the following information for each room:
a. Room number.
b. Room name.
c. Air handler unit ID.
d. Reference drawing number.
e. Air terminal unit tag ID.
f. Heating and/or cooling valve tag ID.
g. Minimum air flow rate.
h. Maximum air flow rate.

5. Full print out of all schedules and set points after testing and acceptance o
f the system.
6. Full as-built print out of software program.
7. Electronic copy on disk of the entire program for this facility.
8. Marking of all system sensors and thermostats on the as-built floor plan and
HVAC drawings with
their control system designations.
9. Maintenance instructions, including sensor calibration requirements and metho
ds by sensor type, etc.
10. Control equipment component Submittals, parts lists, etc.
11. Warranty requirements.
12. Copies of all checkout tests and calibrations performed by the Contractor (n
ot commissioning tests).
13. Organize and subdivide the manual with permanently labeled tabs for each of
the following data in the
given order:
a. Sequences of operation.
b. Control drawings.
c. Points lists.
d. Controller and/or module data.
e. Thermostats and timers.
f. Sensors and DP switches.
g. Valves and valve actuators.
h. Dampers and damper actuators.
i. Program setups (software program printouts).

E. Contractor shall submit detailed background noise testing procedures due to H

VAC system for
consultant's/ Commissioning Authority's approvals. Any comments shall be incorpo
rated in the
procedures and resubmitted for final approval.
F. Project Record Documents
1. Submit updated version of control system documentation, for inclusion with op
eration and
maintenance data.
2. Show actual locations of all static and differential pressure sensors (air, w
ater and building
pressure) and air-flow stations on project record drawings.

G. Draft Training Plan: In addition to requirements specified in Section 01 7900

, include:
1. Follow the recommendations of ASHRAE Guideline 1.
2. Control system manufacturer's recommended training.
3. Demonstration and instruction on function and overrides of any local packaged
controls not
controlled by the HVAC control system.

H. Training Manuals:
1. Provide three extra copies of the controls training manuals in a separate man
ual from the O&M
manuals.

Products
Test Equipment
A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initia
l checkout and required
functional performance testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment wi
ll NOT become the
property of client.
B. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instrume
nts are specific to a
piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in orde
r to accomplish startup
or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of
the work at no extra
cost to client; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the propert
y of client.

Execution
Preparation
A. Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority in development of the Prefunctiona
l Checklists and
Functional Test Procedures.
B. Furnish additional information requested by the Commissioning Authority.
C. Prepare a preliminary schedule for HVAC pipe and duct system testing, flushin
g and cleaning,
equipment start-up and testing, adjusting, and balancing start and completion fo
r use by the
Commissioning Authority; update the schedule as appropriate.
D. Notify the Commissioning Authority when pipe and duct system testing, flushin
g, cleaning, startup of
each piece of equipment and testing, adjusting, and balancing will occur; when c
ommissioning
activities not yet performed or not yet scheduled will delay construction notify
ahead of time and be
proactive in seeing that the Commissioning Authority has the scheduling informat
ion needed to
efficiently execute the commissioning process.
E. Put all HVAC equipment and systems into operation and continue operation duri
ng each working day
of testing, adjusting, and balancing and commissioning, as required.
1. Include cost of sheaves and belts that may be required for testing, adjusting
, and balancing.

F. Provide test holes in ducts and plenums where directed to allow air measureme
nts and air balancing;
close with an approved plug.
G. Provide temperature and pressure taps in accordance with the contract documen
ts.
1. Provide a pressure/temperature plug at each water sensor that is an input poi
nt to the control
system.

Inspecting and Testing - general

A. Submit startup plans, startup reports, and Prefunctional Checklists for each
item of equipment or other
assembly to be commissioned.
B. Perform the Functional Tests directed by the Commissioning Authority for each
item of equipment or
other assembly to be commissioned.
C. Provide two-way radios for use during the testing.
D. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:
1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position a
gainst the control
system readout.
2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.
3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and
adjust output zero
signal as required.
4. Command valve/damper open; verify position is full open and adjust output sig
nal as required.
5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.
6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actua
tor or add pilot
positioner (for pneumatics).
7. Closure for Cooling Coil Valves - Normally Closed:
a. Set cooling setpoint 11 degrees C above room temperature.
b. Observe the valve close.
c. Remove control air or power from the valve and verify that the valve stem and
actuator
position do not change.
d. Restore to normal.
e. Set cooling setpoint to 11 degrees C below room temperature.
f. Observe valve open.
g. For pneumatics, by override in the control system, increase pressure to valve
by 20 kPa (do not
exceed actuator pressure rating) and verify valve stem and actuator position doe
s not change.
h. Restore to normal.

E. Coil Valve Leak Check:

1. Method 1 - Water Temperature With 2-Way Valve:
a. Calibrate water temperature sensors on each side of coil to be within 0.1 deg
ree C of each
other.
b. Turn off air handler fans, close outside air dampers. Keep pump running.

Make sure appropriate coil dampers are open.

c. Normally closed valves will close.
d. Override normally open valves to the closed position.
e. After 10 minutes observe water delta T across coil. If it is greater than one
degree C, leakage is
probably occurring.
f. Reset valve stroke to close tighter.
g. Repeat test until compliance is achieved.
2. Method 2 - Air Temperature with 2 or 3-Way Valve: Water leak-by less than 10
percent will likely
not be detected with this method.
a. Calibrate air temperature sensors on each side of coil to be within 0.1 degre
e C of each other.
b. Air handler fans should be on.
c. Change mixed or discharge air setpoint, override values or bleed or squeeze b
ulb pneumatic
controller to cause the valve to close.
d. After 5 minutes observe air delta T across coil. If it is greater than 0.5 de
gree C, leakage is
probably occurring.
e. Reset valve stroke to close tighter.
f. Repeat test until compliance is achieved.

3. Method 3 - Coil Drain Down: Not for 3-way valves.

a. Put systems in normal mode.
b. If cooling coil valve, remove all call for cooling; if heating coil valve, pu
t system in full
cooling.
c. Close isolation valve on supply side of coil, open air bleed cap, open drain-
down cock and
drain water from coil.
d. If water does not stop draining, there may be a leak through the control valv
e.
e. Return all too normal when done.

F. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not by coils.
1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.
2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.

G. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable,

at no extra cost to client.

Tab Coordination
A. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing of HVAC.
B. Coordinate commissioning schedule with TAB schedule.
C. Review the TAB plan to determine the capabilities of the control system towar
d completing TAB.
D. Provide all necessary unique instruments and instruct the TAB technicians in
their use; such as
handheld control system interface for setting terminal unit boxes, etc.
E. Have all required Prefunctional Checklists, calibrations, startup and compone
nt Functional Tests of the
system completed and approved by the Commissioning Authority prior to starting T
AB.
F. Provide a qualified control system technician to operate the controls to assi
st the TAB technicians or
provide sufficient training for the TAB technicians to operate the system withou
t assistance.

Control System Functional Testing

A. Prefunctional Checklists for control system components will require a signed
and dated certification
that all system programming is complete as required to accomplish the requiremen
ts of the Contract
Documents and the detailed Sequences of Operation documentation submittal.
B. Do not start Functional Testing until all controlled components have themselv
es been successfully
Functionally Tested in accordance with the contract documents.
C. Using a skilled technician who is familiar with this building, execute the Fu
nctional Testing of the
control system as required by the Commissioning Authority.
D. Functional Testing of the control system constitutes demonstration and trend
logging of control points
monitored by the control system.
1. The scope of trend logging is partially specified; trend log up to 50 percent
more points than
specified at no extra cost to client.
2. Perform all trend logging specified in Prefunctional Checklists and Functiona
l Test procedures.

E. Functionally Test integral or stand-alone controls in conjunction with the Fu

nctional Tests of the
equipment they are attached to, including any interlocks with other equipment or
systems; further
testing during control system Functional Test is not required unless specificall
y indicated below.
F. Demonstrate the following to the Commissioning Authority during testing of co
ntrolled equipment;
coordinate with commissioning of equipment.
G. Set point changing features and functions.
H. Sensor calibrations.
I. Demonstrate to the Commissioning Authority:
1. That all specified functions and features are set up, debugged and fully oper
able.
2. That scheduling features are fully functional and setup, including holidays.
3. That all graphic screens and value readouts are completed.
4. Correct date and time setting in central computer.
5. That field panels read the same time as the central computer; sample 10 perce
nt of field panels; if
any of those fail, sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail test all rema
ining units at no extra
cost to client.
6. Functionality of field panels using local operator keypads and local ports (p
lug- ins) using portable
computer/keypad; demonstrate 100 percent of panels and 10 percent of ports; if a
ny ports fail,
sample another 10 percent; if any of those fail, test all remaining units at no
extra cost to client.
7. Power failure and battery backup and power-up restart functions.
8. Global commands features.
9. Security and access codes.
10. Occupant over-rides (manual, telephone, key, keypad, etc.).
11. O&M schedules and alarms.
12. Occupancy sensors and controls.
13. After hours use tracking and billing.
14. Communications to remote sites.
15. Fire alarm interlocks and response.
16. Fire protection and suppression systems interfaces.
17. Security system interlocks.
18. That points that are monitored only, having no control function, are reporti
ng properly to the
control system.
19. All control strategies and sequences not tested during controlled equipment
testing.
20. Trend logging and graphing features that are specified.
21. Other integrated tests specified in the contract documents
22. That control system features that are included but not specified to be setup
are actually installed.

J. Perform and submit trend logging on the following using the control system, f
or minimum period of 5
days including one weekend, if the control points are monitored by the control s
ystem:
1. Duty cycling, if specified.
2. Demand limiting, including over-ride of limiting.
3. Sequential staging ON of equipment; optionally demonstrate manually.
4. Optimum start-stop functions.
5. Miscellaneous equipment current or status for duty cycling and demand limitin
g.
6. Equipment or building kW or current for demand limiting.
7. Equipment optimum start/stop functions.

K. If the control system, integral control components, or related equipment do n

ot respond to changing
conditions and parameters appropriately as expected, as specified and according
to acceptable operating
practice, under any of the conditions, sequences, or modes tested, correct all s
ystems, equipment,
components, and software required at no additional cost to client.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

A. Add design intent documentation furnished by Consultant to manuals prior to s
ubmission to client.
B. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Autho
rity for review;
make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.
C. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submi
ssion to client.
Demonstration and Training
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of HVAC system to client' personnel; if
during any
demonstration, the system fails to perform in accordance with the information in
cluded in the O&M
manual, stop demonstration, repair or adjust, and repeat demonstration. Demonstr
ations may be
combined with training sessions if appropriate.
B. These demonstrations are in addition to, and not a substitute for, Prefunctio
nal Checklists and
demonstrations to the Commissioning Authority during Functional Testing.
C. Provide classroom and hands-on training of client s designated personnel on ope
ration and
maintenance of the HVAC system, control system, and all equipment items indicate
d to be
commissioned. Provide the minimum durations of training required to be agreed wi
th the client.
D. TAB Review: Instruct client's personnel for minimum to be agreed hours, after
completion of TAB,
on the following:
1. Review final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type
.
2. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that ma
y affect the proper
delivery of air or water.
3. Identify and discuss any terminal units, duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans an
d pumps that are close to
or are not meeting their design capacity.
4. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that
are not finished.
5. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relativ
e to TAB.

E. HVAC Control System Training: Perform training in at least three phases:

1. Phase 1 - Basic Control System: Provide minimum of to be agreed hours of actu
al training on the
control system itself. Upon completion of training, each attendee, using appropr
iate documentation,
should be able to perform elementary operations and describe general hardware ar
chitecture and
functionality of the system.
a. This training may be held on-site or at the manufacturer's facility.
b. If held off-site, the training may occur prior to final completion of the sys
tem installation.
c. For off-site training, Contractor shall pay expenses of up to two attendees.

2. Phase 2 - Integrating with HVAC Systems: Provide minimum of to be agreed hour

s of on-site,
hands-on training after completion of Functional Testing. Include instruction on
:
a. The specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this facility and
specific instruction
for operating the installed system, including interfaces with other systems, if
any.
b. Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and restart
routines,
changing setpoints and alarms and other typical changed parameters, overrides, f
reeze
protection, manual operation of equipment, optional control strategies that can
be considered,
energy savings strategies and set points that if changed will adversely affect e
nergy
consumption, energy accounting, procedures for obtaining vendor assistance, etc.

c. Trend logging and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization,

etc.), including
setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular and graphically and pri
nting trends;
provide practice in setting up trend logging and monitoring during training sess
ion.
d. Every display screen, allowing time for questions.
e. Use of keypad or plug-in laptop computer at the zone level.
f. Use of remote access to the system via phone lines or networks.
g. Setting up and changing an air terminal unit controller.
h. Graphics generation.
i. Point database entry and modifications.
j. Understanding DDC field panel operating programming, when applicable.
3. Phase 3 - Post-Occupancy: Six months after occupancy conduct minimum of to be
agreed hours of
training. Tailor training session to questions and topics solicited beforehand f
rom client. Also be
prepared to address topics brought up and answer questions concerning operation
of the system.

F. Provide the services of manufacturer representatives to assist instructors wh

ere necessary.
G. Provide the services of the HVAC controls instructor at other training sessio
ns, when requested, to
discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment be
ing discussed.

13.10 Instrumentation and control devices for Hvac

General
Section Includes
A. Thermostats.
B. Humidistats.
C. Control valves.
D. Automatic dampers.
E. Damper operators.
F. Miscellaneous accessories.

Reference Standards
AMCA 500-D
Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
ASME B16.22
Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2010).
ASTM B32
Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
ASTM B88
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
ASTM B88M
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2005
(Reapproved 2011).
ASTM B819
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas Systems;
2000 (Reapproved 2011).
ASTM D1693
Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics;
2012.
NEMA DC 3
Residential Controls - Electrical Wall-Mounted Room Thermostats; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association ; 2008
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
NFPA 90A
Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
Administrative Requirments
Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before start
ing work of this section;
require attendance by all affected installers.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control syste
m component.
Include sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software
module.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate complete operating data, system drawings, wiring diag
rams, and written
detailed operational description of sequences. Submit schedule of valves indicat
ing size, flow, and
pressure drop for each valve. For automatic dampers indicate arrangement, veloci
ties, and static pressure
drops for each system.
C. Samples: Submit two of each type of room thermostat and cover.
D. Design Data: Provide design data for sizing and selection of compressor.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide for all manufactured components.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, incl
uding panels, thermostats,
and sensors. Accurately record actual location of control components, including
panels, thermostats, and
sensors.
G. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include inspection period, cleaning methods,
recommended cleaning
materials, and calibration tolerances.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer s warranty and ensure forms have been filled out
in client s name and
registered with manufacturer.
J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
1. Extra Thermostats and Other Exposed Sensors: One of each type.

Quality Assurance
A. Designer Qualifications: Design system under direct supervision of a Professi
onal Engineer experienced
in design of this work and licensed at United Arab Emirates.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum five years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this

Section with minimum five years experience approved by manufacturer.

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwrite
rs Laboratories Inc., as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

Warranty
Correct defective Work within a one period after Substantial Completion.
Products
Automatic Control Dampers
.A The control specialist shall provide all automatic control dampers ofthe type
s indicated on the plans
and not specified to be integral with other equipment. Frames shall not be less
than 13 gauge
galvanized steel. Blades shall not be over 200mm (8 inches) wide nor less than 1
6 gauge galvanized
steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 13mm (1/
2") shafts, side seals
shall be stainless steel of the tight-seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall
be suitable for
temperature ranges of 0 to 120C.
.B All proportional control dampers and 2-position dampers shall be opposed blad
e type and all twoposition
dampers shall be parallel blade types or approved equal.
.C Dampers shall be sized to meet flow requirements of the application. The shee
t metal contractor
shall furnish and install baffles to fit the damper to duct size. Baffles shall
not exceed 150mm
(6").
.D Dampers shall be minimum leakage type (Class 1) to conserve energy. The tempe
rature control
manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control d
ampers with the
temperature control submittal. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of
75mm (3 inches) of
W.C.
.E Where ultra-low leakage dampers are specified (especially for motorized fire
dampers for Inergen
protected areas) the blade edges shall be fitted with replaceable, Snap-On, infl
atable seals to limit damper
leakage to 1/2 percent at applied static pressure.
.F The control contractor shall provide all smoke dampers in accordance with the
contract documents.
Dampers shall be parallel blade minimum leakage type with operable temperature r
ange rated at
200C. Dampers shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A. All fire dampers and smoke fir
e dampers
shall be dynamically rated for the design flow.
.G All motorized fire dampers and smoke fire dampers shall be UL 555 rated for C
lass 1 leakage
rating (UL 555S) and shall be provided complete with colored embossed position i
ndicators.

Automatic Control Valves

.A All automatic control valves 63mm (2.1/2") and smaller shall be screwed type,
and valves or
75mm (3") and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory-rated to withstan
d the pressures
encountered. Valves shall have stainless steel stems and spring loaded teflon pa
cking with
replaceable seats and discs.
.B Two way modulating and two position straight through water valve shall be pro
vided with equal
percentage contoured throttling plugs. Three way valves shall be provided with l
inear throttling
plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardles
s of the valve's
position. Valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve
. Valves shall have
replaceable seats and discs.
.C Butterfly valves shall be supplied in accordance with Section 23 2113, sized
to meet the
requirements.
.D All automatically controlled devices, unless specified otherwise elsewhere, s
hall be provided with
electronic actuators which shall be sized to operate their appropriate loads wit
h sufficient reserve
power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and tight close
off as specified.

Where two or more actuators are to be operated in sequence with each other, sequ
encing shall be
by digital sequencing with separate analogue outputs, as specified in the sequen
ce of operation.
Thermostats
.A Thermostats shall be line voltage or low voltage type suitable for the applic
ation.

Low voltage type shall have heat anticipation. Ratings shall be adequate for the
applied load. Also,
refer to clause 2.4.3 as below.
.B Electronic room thermostats shall be used for zone control of VAV terminals c
ommunicating to the
VAV controller via twisted pair non polarized cable. Digital LCD display will sh
ow room
temperature, set point, and occupancy mode and air flow rate. Temperature set po
int up/down push
buttons and occupied button and a jack for connecting a portable terminal.
.C Key controller test and reset switches plus an easily accessible test jack sh
all be provided. It shall
include alarm relay contacts (DPDT) capable of handling loads of up to five (5)
amperes at 220 VAC
or 28 VDC resistive. Unit shall have self-contained power supply requiring 220V
power.
.D Thermostats for VIP area shall as per the client s specifications.

Execution
Examination
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to instal
lation of similar
components in other systems.
E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical
systems equipment
such as air handling units and air terminal units.
F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar
components.
G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical
systems equipment
such as air handling units and air terminal units.

Installation
A All wiring and tubing shall be properly supported and run in a neat and clean
workmanlike manner.
All wiring and tubing exposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at
right angles to the
building structure. All piping and wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bund
led and anchored to
prevent congestion on devices and terminals.
B The control contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation re
quired for a fully functional
control and automation system and not shown on the electrical plans or required
by the electrical
specifications. All wiring shall be in accordance to all local codes and Divisio
n 16.
.1 All line voltage wiring, all wiring exposed, and all wiring in equipment room
s shall be installed
in conduit in accordance to the electrical specifications.
.2 All electronic wiring shall be #18 AWG minimum THHN and shielded except stand
ard
network (Ethernet, LonWorks, etc.) cabling shall be as tested and recommended in
lieu of #18
gauge twisted, #22 or #24 gauge is acceptable if used as a part of an engineered
structured
cabling system. The control manufacturer must submit this cabling system has bee
n tested
and approved for use by the manufacturer technical and application documentation
demonstrating that of both the control system and the engineered structured cabl
ing system.
All wiring in the central control room shall be concealed in an approved manner.
.3 All wiring in the Control Room shall be concealed in approved manner.
.4 All wiring shall be in accordance with UAE local and national codes, as well
as NFPA and
National Electric Code.

C The control contractor shall enter all computer programs and data files into t
he related computers
including all English descriptors, all control programs, approved parameters and
settings. Samples of
the following features shall also be fully implemented.
.1 Bar chart (four different bars on one chart).
.2 Curve plot (five curves on one plot).
.3 Trend log.
.4 Alarm message (action taking message).
.5 Run time maintenance message.
.6 Trouble action message.
D The control contractor shall maintain diskette copies of all data file and app
lication software for reload
use in the event of a system crash or memory failure. A complete set of original
licensed software
packages shall be handed over to the Employer during training sessions complete
with original user's
manuals & one copy shall be archived in the control manufacturer's local softwar
e vault.

Validation and acceptance

A The control contractor shall completely check out, calibrate and test all conn
ected hardware and
software to insure that the system performs in accordance with the approved spec
ifications and
sequences of operation approved.
B Witnessed acceptance demonstration shall display and demonstrate each type of
data entry to show site
specific customizing capability; demonstrate parameter changes; execute digital
and analogue
commands; and demonstrate DDC loop stability via trend of inputs and outputs.
C The control contractor shall furnish a portable programming tool with pre-load
ed software and
necessary interface cable to the balancing contractor for use during system bala
ncing. The balancing
contractor shall be responsible for proper use and care of this tool, and shall
return it to the control
contractor immediately upon balancing completion. The control contractor shall p
rovide the balancing
contractor up to four hours training on the use of this tool in order to exercis
e actuators and enter
calibration and balancing parameters. Additional training or assistance required
by the balancing
contractor shall be contracted directly with the control contractor by the balan
cing contractor.
Manuals
A Manuals shall be provided including revised As Built Documents of all material
s required under the
paragraph "SUBMITTALS" of this section, and further defined in the applicable di
vision of the
specifications.
B An Operators Manual shall be provided with graphic explanations of keyboard us
e for all operator
functions specified under Operator Training.
C Computerized printouts of all GPC data file including all point processing ass
ignments, physical
terminal relationships, scales and offsets, command and alarm limits, etc.
D Two Operators Manuals, and two As-Built Manuals shall be provided to the owner
.

Training
A All training shall be by the control contractor and shall utilize specified ma
nuals and as-built
documentation.
B Provide the training instruction to Clients staff in accordance with other art
icles of this specification.
C Operator training shall include two 16 hour sessions encompassing modifying te
xt and graphics,
sequence of operation review, selection of all displays and reports, use of all
specified OWS
functions, use of Portable Operators Terminals, troubleshooting of sensors (dete
rmining bad sensors),
and password assignment and modification
D One training session shall be conducted at system completion, and the other sh
all be conducted fortyfive
days after system completion.
E This training program will include training for Maximo program, to be carried
out by the Maximo
certified personnel.

Warranty
A All components, system software, parts and assemblies supplied by the control
contractor shall be
guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from accept
ance date.
B Labour to troubleshoot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components shall
be furnished by the
control contractor at no charge to the Client during the warranty period.
C All corrective modifications made during warranty service periods shall be upd
ated on all user
documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.

Maintenance
A. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of control system for one year from Date of S
ubstantial Completion.
C. Provide complete service of controls systems, including call backs, and submi
t written report of each
service call.

13.11 HVAC ducts and casings

Section Includes
A Metal ductwork.
B Casing and plenums.
C Buried ductwork.
D Kitchen hood ductwork.
E Duct cleaning.

Reference standards
ASHRAE (FUND)
ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; 2009.
ASTM A36/A36M
Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
ASTM A480/A480M
Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-
Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 2012.
ASTM A653/A653M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
ASTM A1008/A1008M
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy
with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2012
ASTM A653/A653M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
ASTM A1008/A1008M
Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2012
NFPA 90A
Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems;
National Fire Protection Association; 2012.
SMACNA (LEAK)
HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 1985, First Edition.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and
Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.
SMACNA (FGD)
Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, weld
s, and configuration
prior to start of work for ducting systems.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct fittings.
D. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested
, test pressure, and leakage
rate, following SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that installation of glass fiber ductwork
meet or exceed specified
requirements.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings.
Record changes in fitting
location and type. Show additional fittings used.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products specified in
this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work
specified in this section,
with minimum ten years of documented experience.

Regulatory requirements
Construct ductwork to NFPA/local authority standards.
Field Conditions
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommende
d by sealant
manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation o
f duct sealants.

Products
Ductwork
A. Velocity Range
1. Low velocity ductwork up to 10 m/sec (2000 fpm).
2. High velocity ductwork above 10 m/sec (2000 fpm).

B. Pressure Range
1. Low Pressure up to 50mm (2") w.g.
2. Medium Pressure 50mm to 100mm (2 to 4") w.g.
3. High Pressure above 100mm (4") w.g.

C. Materials
1. Provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting,
seam marks, roller
marks, oil canning, stains and discolorations.
2. Fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A527
or BS 2989 ,
lock forming quality, zinc coated, having nominal 389 g/m2 minimum 275 g/m2 to G
90 as per
ASTM A525 and ASTM 90 or BS 729
3. Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A167 or BS
1449 , Part 2;
A.I.S.I Type 316 with No.4 directional polish where exposed to view in occupied
spaces. Protect
finished surfaces with mill applied adhesive protective paper, maintained throug
h fabrication and
installation.
4. Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ANSI/ASTM B209 alloy,
Temper H14 or
BS 1470
5. Duct routing and height in equipment and telecom rooms to be coordinated and
approved by Etisalat
before installation.

D. Low velocity low pressure ductwork.

1. Provide ductwork constructed of galvanized steel in accordance with ASHRAE St
andards
unless otherwise noted as follows:
a. Sheet metal gauge and reinforcement:
1) Base on 50mm (2") w.g. duct pressure regardless of possible lower pressures.
2) Round ductwork - spiral seam.
3) Cross break and reinforce as required for rigid support without flexing and d
rumming.

b. Sealing:
1) All transverse joint and fitting connections sealed.
2) Not more than 1 longitudinal seam unsealed on the perimeter.
3) Application:
4) All ductwork downstream of V.A.V. boxes.
5) All return air ductwork to Air Handling Units.
6) All exhaust systems unless otherwise noted.
7) All Pressurization fan systems.

E. High Pressure Ductwork

1. Provide ductwork constructed of galvanized steel unless otherwise noted.
2. Rectangular ductwork:
a. Sheet metal gauges and reinforcement:
1) Supply main duct from the fan discharge to all VAV inlets to be constructed a
s per
SMACNA recommended construction based on 500Pa or 120% of fan external static
pressure (whichever is higher) regardless of possible reduction in pressure alon
g the
main duct.
2) Ducts 1500mm wide and within 9m from fan discharge, use next heavier listed g
auge
thickness to that indicated in SMACNA Standards.

b. Joints to be welded flange, or Duct mate flanged joint only.

1) Inside slip, double S slip, standing seam and pocket lock not permitted.
2) Fittings and/or joints of two different gauges, connected joint rating to mee
t more
stringent condition.

F. Round Ductwork:
1. Spiral seam single and double wall construction only. Construction of acousti
cally-lined spiral
duct shall be perforated liner similar to United sheet metal acoustic K27 double
walled
internally insulated type P, or shop fabricate if so equipped and approved.
2. Gauges: + Fittings - SMACNA Standards.
3. Joints:
a. Interior neoprene gasket push fit coupling as manufactured by FLAKT Veloduct:
1) Fastened to duct with rivets to prevent rotation.
2) Sealing compound applied as necessary to achieve the low leakage rating requi
red.

b. Wrap joints with 75mm wide duct tape.

4. Application:
a. All supply ductwork leaving fan systems having static pressures in excess of
0.5 kPa (2")
of static pressure.
b. All branches from main ducts to the inlets of VAV boxes.

5. Water tight construction where noted:

a. Edges bent 15mm for water tight seal.
b. Longitudinal seam sealant: Similar to 3M Brand No.800.
c. Stiffeners: Plug or spot welded.
d. Transverse joints:
1) Bolted companion angles.
2) Bolted 6.5mm cadmium plated bolts, minimum 250mm on centres.

6. Airtight construction where noted:

a. Longitudinal seams soldered, welded or sealed.
b. Stiffeners: Plug or spot welded.
c. Transverse joints:
1) Bolted companion angles, or Ductmate flanges with full PVC cleats
2) Bolts 6.5mm cadmium plated, minimum 150mm on centres.

7. Fan discharge plenums and risers

a. Construct airtight.

8. Exposed to weather.
a. Construct watertight.

9. Outside air, exhaust and relief:

a. Construct watertight from louvers to equipment casings.

10. Kitchen range hood exhaust including fan discharge to kitchen extract duct s
ystem.
a. Welded steel ducts as below.
b. Carbon steel of following gauges and thicknesses, fire rated.
1) Inside building - 1.0mm (18 gauge).
2) Outside ductwork - 2.0mm (14 gauge).

c. Seams - continuous arc welded.

d. Joints:
1) 40mm x 40mm x 4.8mm bolted matched angle flanges, with glass cloth gasket.
2) With 40mm x 40mm x 4.8mm angle reinforcing maximum 1.2m from joints or on
centres.

e. Cleanout doors:
1) Horizontal ducts: Maximum 6m apart on side of duct. Bottom edge not less than
50mm above bottom of duct.
2) Vertical duct: At base.
3) Hinged door and frame: Same gauge as duct, with glass cloth gasket betwe en d
oor
and frame.
4) Size: 500mm x 600mm.
5) Exhaust from kitchen hood to be in accordance with NFPA Standard 96 or equiva
lent
British Standard.

Flexible Ducts
A. NFPA 90A; UL180 Class 1 or equivalent British Standard (maximum flame spread
25, maximum smoke
developed 50).
B. ASHRAE Flexible Duct Performance Standards.
C. Maximum size 400mm no intermediate seams.
D. Construction:
1. Polyester reinforced aluminium foil over corrosion resistant wire helix, wrap
ped with 1.1/2"
fibreglass blanket and outer vapour barrier.
2. Rated pressure 250mm (10") w.g.
3. Equal to Cana-Flex Type Cl - IV.

E. Flexible duct permitted only at connections to:

1. Terminal boxes:
a. From unit to outlet.
b. Maximum length 10 feet.

2. Boots of linear slot air terminal.

3. Boots of combination light and air fixtures.
4. Ceiling outlet below supply duct to compensate for misalignment.

F. Secure flexible ducts with clamps and sealer or screws, sealer and tape.
G. Flexible duct shall not lay across lighting fixtures or other surfaces; provi
de hanger supports as
required to ensure full specified air flow.

Ducts Supports, Hangers and Openings

General
A. All ductwork shall be securely supported so as to prevent vibrating movement,
but allow expansion due
to thermal stresses without distortion of the ductwork, rupture of insulation or
damage to the supporting
structure.
B. All ducts are to be suitably supported at intervals according to size and con
struction, with approved
hangers, cradles or
C. Where ducts pass through floors and walls, the clearance space shall be caulk
ed tight with approved
material and a close fitting metal angle flange fitted to cover such clearance s
pace.
D. The Contractor shall provide a access door to each duct in which dampers are
located.
E. Steel straps used for hangers shall be 25mm x 3mm for a maximum duct size of
760mm and 32mm x
3mm for duct size above 760mm, painted with aluminium bit mastic paint before in
stallation.

Vertical Ducts
A. Shall be rigidly supported at least at each floor level and at a maximum of 3
.5m spacing. Supports shall
be structural angles or channels fixed securely to the duct and structure in an
approved manner.
High velocity ducts supports shall be isolated from the duct by means of 12mm th
ick neoprene pads or
equivalent.

B. Horizontal Ducts
1. Low Velocity Ducts

Ducts up to 450mm width may be suspended by means of 'U' shaped flat iron hanger
s taken around
the bottom of the ducts and secured on each side and bottom by bolts.
Flat iron hangers to be used for wider ducts by fixing to duct stiffening angle
frames.
Hangers shall be 25 x 3 mm flat bar up to 760mm maximum side and 32 x 3 mm bar f
or ducts
above 800mm maximum side. Spacing as for round duct.
Where ducts run at floor level, they shall be supported on 50 x 50 x 5 mm angle
iron saddles bolted
to the floor. The ducts shall be held in the saddles by 40 x 3 mm flat iron bolt
ed to the angle
supports.
2. High Velocity - Round

Details and spacing of hangers to SMACNA High pressure duct construction standar
ds.
3. High Velocity Rectangular / Oval
Suspend from the structure by means of angle iron trapezes, hung with flat bar a
nd isolate the
bottom and sides (if necessary) by 3mm neoprene strops or equivalent.
For ducts with maximum side up to 1500mm 40 x 40 x 3 mm angle grapeze, with 25 x
3 mm
hanger shall be used and for ducts over 1550mm use 40 x 40 x 5 mm angle trapeze
with 32 x 3 mm
flat bar hanger.
Where duct is required to be installed tight against the structure, hangers of a
ngle iron constructions
may be fitted directly to flanges for support. In oval ducts, angle iron shall b
e used as support at the
bottom of the duct, suspended to the structure by hangers to SMACNA details and
spacing of
hangers.
Load spreader sheet of dimension and thickness to approval must be used between
the duct
insulation and hangers if used outside the insulation.
4. Flexible Duct Support

Metal straps of width and spacing to manufacturer's recommendation to be used.

13.12 Air ducts accessories
General
A. Air turning devices/extractors.
B. Backdraft dampers - metal.
C. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
D. Duct access doors.
E. Duct test holes.
F. Fire dampers.
G. Flexible duct connections.
H. Smoke dampers.
I. Volume control dampers.
J. Iris Control Dampers.
K. Activated Carbon Filters.

Reference Standards
NFPA 90A
Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; Natio
nal
Fire Protection Association; 2012
NFPA 92
Standard for Smoke-Control Systems; 2012.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including duct access do
ors.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume contr
ol dampers, duct
access doors, and duct test holes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for all produc
ts..
D. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test hol
es.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client s use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Fusible Links: One of each type and size.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. All fire related products such as Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, and Combinatio
n Fire & Smoke
Dampers shall be approved by authority having jurisdiction.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
Products
General
Provide ductwork accessories of types, and of materials indicated, compatible wi
th the ductwork systems,
and with proper connections between ductwork and equipment. Shut off dampers sha
ll be of the low
leakage type.
Backdraft Dampers
A. Provide backdraft dampers at:
1. All discharges from exhaust fans.
2. Stairwell exhaust louvers.
3. Damper shall be air tight to avoid condensation.

B. Backdraft dampers to have multiple parallel blades.

C. Blades to be individually hinged using full length axles supported at each en
d on sealed bearings.
D. Blade to open outwards under air pressure.
E. Frames to be heavy gauged to support dampers and bearings and be suitable for
direct
connection to ductwork or fan discharges.
F. Stairwell damper to be weighted to guarantee positive air pressure inside of
stairwell when
pressurization fan is operated.

Motorised Fire and Smore Dampers (MFSD)

A. Whether shown on drawings or not, supply and install UL classified or BS fire
/smoke control
dampers of sizes to suit openings or ducts passing through walls of all clean ag
ent gas protected
areas, SFD will be rated for 1 hours for fire walls up to and including 2hours ra
ting. Smoke fire
dampers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL 555S labelled for the
flow rate with
leakage class I or British Standard 476 Part 8 and the Department of Civil Defen
ce.
B. Damper construction and fusible links shall be as for fire dampers. Double sk
in opposed blades
factory supplied with 20g sleeve and actuator.
C. Dampers shall be equipped with an electric actuator having an instant spring
return closure (using
stainless steel springs), galvanized steel damper blades, linkage, actuator moun
ting bracket, and
suitable terminal block assembly for connection to smoke detection and fire alar
m systems. Actuators
shall be mounted outside of the air stream.
D. Dampers to be equipped with over-ride release mechanism to permit the Civil D
efence Department to
maintain discretionary control over the damper as part of the dynamic smoke mana
gement system.
E. Install combination smoke and fire dampers where shown on drawings and as fol
lows:
1. All branch connections to smoke exhaust risers at each floor level.
2. On transfer openings for stairwell & lift well cooling.
3. Gas protected areas.

F. Contractor is responsible for co-ordinating with the applicable divisions for

wiring, smoke damper
actuator and over-riding thermostat and micro switch for status signal at 220/1P
/50 Hz.
G. It shall be possible to remotely control and monitor these dampers from fire
alarm and voice
communication central control facility.
H. Where MFSD is to be installed on a transfer air grille that is exposed from b
oth sides special
MFSD to be used with side recessed compartment for damper actuator and fire alar
m modules. As
manufactured by Belimo. Actuator shall be explosion proof in cable chambers.
Duct Access Doors
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as i
ndicated.
B. Provide duct access doors as required sized 500mm x 340mm minimum except wher
e duct depth is less
than 400mm in which case make access door 50mm less than duct depth to a minimum
of 150mm.
Provide larger access panels where required to facilitate adequate access for se
rvice work.
C. Construct doors from same or greater gauge than the ductwork served and provi
de insulated doors for
insulated ductwork. Flush frames shall be used for uninsulated ductwork and exte
nded frames for
insulated ductwork.
D. Doors shall have at least two cam locks on one side and two hinges on the oth
er side unless the
pressure rating and door size require more as per SMACNA recommendations.
E. Provide access doors at locations where access to elements is required, examp
les are:
1. Linkage side of automatic dampers.
2. Main balancing dampers.
3. Smoke dampers.
4. Fire dampers.
5. Smoke detection heads.
6. Filter banks.
7. Fan bearings where enclosed in ducts.
8. Inlet side of each single width centrifugal fan.
9. Inlet and outlet sides of each axial or tubular in-line centrifugal fan.
10. On the upstream side of all turning vanes.
11. Coordinate with the General Contractor for provision of all required access
doors.

Duct Test Holes

A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patche
s, neoprene plugs,
threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with scr
ew cap.

Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.

Fire Dampers
A. Whether shown on drawings or not, supply and install UL Listed or BS equivale
nt fire dampers at
all positions where ducts/builders work holes or return air transfer openings pe
netrate fire rated
walls, floors and partitions. Sizes to match duct sizes and ratings to match the
fire rating of the
fire separation. Fire dampers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A, UL5
55 or BS 476 Part
8 and the Department of Civil Defence.
B. Casings constructed from 1mm thick galvanized steel, with a spring loaded cur
tain type
interlocking blade assembly housed out of air stream. Damper blade material to b
e galvanized steel,
provided with positive lock in closed position and have stainless steel springs
and side seals.
C. Fusible link shall be rated at 68+/-1 deg C unless otherwise indicated.
D. Where fire dampers are installed in stainless steel or aluminium ductwork the
y shall be constructed
from type 304 stainless steel.
E. Sleeves to be fabricated of gage 20 galvanized steel sheets and mounting angl
es to be fabricated
from 10 gauge steel.
F. Fire dampers shall be provided as noted in ducts and openings, whether shown
on the drawings or
not, in the following locations:
1. Shafts.
2. Floors.
3. Fire Walls.
4. Fire Partitions.

G. Each fire damper shall be provided with an access door located in adjacent du
ctwork, suitably sized
to permit proper INSITU maintenance and testing of the Fire Damper.
H. Where motorized fire damper is required it will be similar to MFSD s as specifi
ed this section.

Flexible Duct Connections

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as i
ndicated.
B. Provide at fans and at air handling units, neoprene coated glass fabric, fact
ory fabricated, flexible
connections.
C. Allow for minimum 25mm of space between ductwork and connecting equipment for
each 25mm of
fan static pressure.
D. Crimp fabric into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment.
E. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to
NFPA 90A, minimum
density 1.0 kg/sq m.
a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 50 mm wide.

2. Metal: 75 mm wide, 0.6 mm thick galvanized steel.

F. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 14 mm thick, 4.2 kg/sq m, 10 dB attenuation in 10

to 10,000 Hz range.

Volume Control dampers

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and as i
ndicated.
1. Single and multi-blade volume control dampers designed for quiet, efficient a
nd reliable air
volume control.
2. Dampers to be the same materials as the ductwork enclosed in heavy gauged fra
mes of minimum
1.2 mm thickness.
3. Use single blade on ductwork up to 150mm (6") width and multi-blade above 150
mm (6") width.
All sizes of round dampers will be single blade. Round damper blades larger than
150mm shall
be beaded for stiffening.
4. Multi-blade dampers shall be opposed blade pattern, aerofoil shape and double
skin construction.
5. Dampers shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standards except as follows:
a. Flanged bushing with bearing pin at one end of damper rod.
b. Quadrant at other end of damper rod with indicating lever handle, gasket, spr
ing washers,
bearing pin and locking nut.
c. Insulated ducts to have quadrants mounted on collar to clear insulation, dept
h of collar
selected to suit insulation thickness.

6. Dampers on internally lined ductwork systems shall be provided with two inter
nal saddles to
protect the lining.
7. Whether shown on the drawings or not dampers shall be provided at the followi
ng locations:
a. In duct splits and branch connections of supply, return and exhaust systems a
s requested by
the engineer and as recommended by the commissioning specialist.

Splitter Dampers:
A. Provide splitter dampers at each bull-nosed branch duct.
B. Splitter damper to be manufactured using same material as ductwork.
C. Refer to ASHRAE manual for acceptable construction and installation.
D. Splitter damper positioning rod to be 6mm dia. complete with set screw and lo
cking device.
E. When installed, splitter to be free of vibration or chatter.
F. Provide shield plate to protect acoustic insulation.
G. On square bull-nosed branches install double thickness hollow aerofoil turnin
g vanes across each
branch.
Turning Vanes
A. Provide factory fabricated air turning vanes in accordance with ASHRAE Standa
rds.
B. Vanes to be constructed of the same material as the ductwork system in which
they are installed.
C. Turning vanes to be installed at all square duct elbows and where called for
on the drawings.
Reference to be made to standard turning vane detail in accordance with the cont
ract documents.
D. Acoustic turning vanes constructed from aerofoil section aluminium extrusions
with perforated faces
and fiberglass infill to be used in all acoustically lined ductwork.

Iris Control Dampers (ICD)

A. The Iris Control Damper (ICD) shall be used for measuring and adjustment of t
he air flow at the
location as indicated in the drawings.
B. ICD shall be low noise level, centrally-formed air flow and fixed test points
for precise measurements.
C. ICD shall also have an adjustment aperture which could be opened completely.
D. ICD shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel with circular extended spi
got and fitted with a
rubber seal tested for air-tightness.
E. ICD shall comply with noise level requirements of the project.
F. ICD shall be installed in accordance with the distances required to minimise
air- flow deviation.

Miscellaneous Products
A. Internal Strut End Plugs: Combination end-mounting and sealing plugs for meta
l conduit used as
internal reinforcement struts for metal ducts; plug crimped inside conduit with
outside gasketed
washer seal.
B. Duct Opening Closure Film: Mold-resistant, self-adhesive film to keep debris
out of ducts during
construction.
1. Thickness: 0.6 mm.
2. High tack water based adhesive.
3. UV stable light blue color.
4. Elongation Before Break: 325 percent, minimum.

C. Sealants
1. Seal all transverse joints in supply, return and exhaust ductwork with Bakeli
te 530-09 high velocity
duct sealer or equivalent, to limit rate of leakage to 5% maximum.
2. Where interior of duct is visible through diffusers registers or grilles, pai
nt interior of duct with flat
black Tremco or equal paint formulated for galvanized surfaces.
3. Seal all exposed edges, perforations and joints in acoustic duct lining with
H.B. Fuller Company's
Foster Sealfas 30-36 coating compound or approved equivalent.
4. Use Bakelite 230-38 adhesive, full coverage, for internal insulation.
5. Tape joints with 3M Brand No.474 or approved equivalent.

D. Perforated sheets
1. Perforated galvanized sheet steel with 50% area perforation will be used as a
ir straiteners
longitudinally fixed inside linear plenums for linear bar grilles and linear slo
t diffusers to equally
distribute the air along the outlet in the following cases:
a. Plenum longer than 600mm with single inlet spigot
b. All plenums with multiple inlet spigots

E. Sound Linings
1. Supply and install acoustic linings to ductwork in accordance with the contra
ct documents or as
required to maintain specified room noise level. Duct sizes indicated on drawing
s are inside of
acoustic lining and must be increased accordingly to maintain equivalent free ar
ea.
2. Linings shall be manufactured from glass fibre with a Neoprene coating or fac
ed with a black coated
matt (fire rated in accordance with NFPA 90 or equivalent British Standard) for
low pressure
ductwork, or perforated 24 gauge galvanized steel with 28% minimum open area for
high pressure
ductwork.
3. Linings in ductwork shall be minimum of 25mm thick and in plenums a minimum o
f 50mm thick.
Where lining is also used as thermal insulation thickness shall conform to the r
equirements of the
insulation specification.
4. The glass fibre lining shall have a minimum density of 32 kg/m3 with a flame
spread rating of 25 or
less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less.
5. Linings shall be suitable for duct velocities up to 25.4 m/s and meet with th
e requirements of the
erosion test method as described in UL publication No. 181 or equivalent British
Standard.
6. The dynamic loss coefficient shall be a maximum of 1.2, 'K' value to be a max
imum of 0.036
watts/moC at 40oC, noise reduction for 25mm thick lining shall be a minimum of 0
.75.
7. Adhesive and sealant fire rating shall conform to NFPA 90A and non- hardening
caulking shall be
guaranteed to be permanently elastic, similar to Tremco Polybutene.

F. Boot and plenum connectors.

1. Provide conical spin-on collars at the following locations:
a. From main trunk to V.A.V. terminals. Where main duct height does not allow fo
r symmetrical
conical collar, use one sided taper shoe collar.
b. Connections to boots or plenums of combination lighting and air diffusers.
c. Connections to boots or plenums of combination lighting and air grilles.

G. Activated Carbon Filters

1. The Activated Carbon Filter shall be suitable for adsorption of gaseous odoro
us substances and
contaminants such as toilet odours, food odours, solvent vapours, smog etc. from
intake/extract
air.
2. The Filters shall be in the form of cylinders (cartridge) with profiled cover
s on the bottom and
top in plastic or galvanised steel, with 3 bayonet locks, with flat section seal
.
3. The cartridges will be selected based on the required flowrate.
4. The cartridges will be installed in a galvanised steel frame to maintain the
appropriate separation
distance between the cartridges as per the manufacturer's recommendation.
5. The installation frame shall be suitable for duct installation.
6. The installations frame shall be provided with side service door with handles
and clamps.

Execution
Preparation
Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
Installation
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A,
and follow SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction
and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside
and where indicated.
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filter
s, coils, fans, automatic
dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as i
ndicated. Provide for
cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 200 x
200 mm size for
hand access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 100 x 100 m for
balancing dampers
only. Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancin
g purposes.
E. Provide fire dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers at locations indi
cated, where ducts and
outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities ha
ving jurisdiction.
Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connect
ions, corrosion
resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance wi
th NFPA 92.
G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to client's representative.
H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct
connections immediately
adjacent to the equipment.
I. At equipment supported by vibration isolators, provide flexible duct connecti
ons immediately adjacent
to the equipment.
J. For fans developing static pressures of 500 Pa and over, cover flexible conne
ctions with leaded vinyl
sheet, held in place with metal straps.
K. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems wh
ere branches are taken
from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths f
rom duct take-off.
L. Use splitter dampers only where required.
M. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where required.
N. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registe
rs, regardless of whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.

13.13 Duct Silencers

General
Section Includes
A. Duct Silencers.
B. Cross-Talk Silencers.
C. Acoustic Housings.
D. Ductwork Lagging.
E. Acoustic Louvers.

Duct Silencers
Reference Standards
AABC MN-1
AABC National Standards for Total System Balance; Associated
Air Balance Council; 2002.
AMCA 300
Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and
Control Association International, Inc.; 2008.
AMCA 301
Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test
Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1990.
AMCA 302
Application of Sone Ratings for Non-Ducted Air Moving Devices; Air
Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 1973 (Reaffirmed 2001).
ANSI S1.4
American National Standard Specification for Sound Level Meters ;
1983 (R2006) with Amd.S1.4A-1985.
ANSI S1.8
American National Standard Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels; 1989
(R2006).
ANSI S1.13
American National Standard Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air;
2005.
AHRI 270
Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and
Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
AHRI 575
Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within an Equipment Space;
Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
ASHRAE Std 68
Laboratory Method of Testing In-Duct Sound Power Measurement Procedure
for Fans; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers, Inc.; 1997.
ASHRAE (HVACA)
ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2011.
ASTM E477
Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow
Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers; 2006a.
ASTM E596
Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Noise
Reduction of Sound-Isolating Enclosures; 1996 (Reapproved 2009).
NEBB (STDS)
Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of
Sound and Vibration; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2006.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet
Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

Performance Requirment
Use acoustical devices to maintain sound level of spaces at levels not to exceed
those listed below.

Area / Room Description

Building Services Noise Limit
NC Level in dB L90(T)
All Prayer Areas
NC 30
Majlis & Information Center
NC 35
Entrances & Lobbies
NC 40
Abulution, Changing Rooms (Abaya +Kandoora), Shoe Rack & Slipper Areas,
Store Rooms ( Clean Gowns), Toilets & Washing Areas Service Corridors
NC 45
Arcades, Pantires, Storage Rooms +
NC 50
Electrical, LV, MV + Transformers Rooms
NC 55
Mechanical + AHU Rooms
NC 60
Pumps Rooms
N/A
Generator Rooms
N/A

Performance Requirement
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide catalog information indicating, materials, dimensional
data, pressure losses,
and acoustical performance.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, materials, thicknesses, dimensional data, p
ressure losses,
acoustical performance, layout, and connection details.
C. Design Data: Provide engineering calculations, referenced to specifications a
nd AMCA 301
standards indicating that maximum room sound levels are not exceeded.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures ne
cessary to maintain
integrity of sound isolation.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate installation is complete and in accord
ance with
instructions.

Quality assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products
specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
B. Design application of duct silencers under direct supervision of a Profession
al Engineer
experienced in design of this work.
C. Perform Work in accordance with AMCA 300 standards and recommendations of ASH
RAE Std
68. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
Regulatory Requirements
Conform to applicable code for sound levels at property line.
 Products
Duct Silencer
A. Description: Duct section with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fill
material, and inner
casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar cons
truction. Fabricate in
accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, wi
th mastic filled
lock formed seams, 50 mm long, 2.9 mm slip joints on both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.

Cross-Talk Silencers
A. Description: Duct sections with sheet metal outer casing, sound absorbing fil
l material, and inner
casing of perforated sheet metal; incorporating interior baffles of similar cons
truction. Fabricate in
accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel with mastic filled lock f
ormed seams, 75
mm long, and 2.9 mm slip joint on both ends.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.

Acoustic Housings
A. Description: Modular panels, including access doors and windows, nominal 100
mm thick, with
filled outer and inner casing. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA H
VAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. Materials:
1. Outer Casing: Minimum 1.2 mm thick galvanized steel stiffened as required, wi
th mastic filled
lock formed seams for internal flange butt joining.
2. Inner Casing and Splitters: Minimum 0.8 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
3. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
4. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.

Ductwork Lagging
A. Acoustic Insulation: 50 mm thick, 50 to 80 kg/cu m density glass fiber or min
eral wool insulation.
B. Covering: sheet lead with surface weight minimum 20 kg/sq m.

Acoustic Louvers
A. Configuration: 200 mm deep louvers with blades on 45 degree slope; sound abso
rbing fill
material, and inner surface of perforated sheet metal, heavy channel frame, bird
screen.
B. Materials:
1. Louvers: 1.50 mm galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory prime coat fi
nish.
2. Louvers: 2.50 mm extruded aluminum, welded assembly, with factory prime coat
finish.
3. Inner Surface: Minimum 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanized steel.
4. Fill: Glass fiber or mineral wool of minimum 64 kg/cu m density.
5. Fill Liner: Bonded glass fiber matting.
6. Bird screen: 25 mm square wire mesh.
7. Mounting: Interior flat flange.

Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Support duct silencers independent of ducts with flexible duct connections, l
agged with leaded vinyl
sheet on inlet and outlet. Refer to Section 23 3100 and Section 23 3300.
C. Install cross-talk silencers in wall. Seal wall penetrations; refer to Sectio
n 07 9005.
D. Where indicated, lag ductwork by wrapping with insulation and covering. Apply
covering to be
air tight. Do not attach covering rigidly to ductwork.
E. Attach ductwork to acoustic louvers with flexible duct connections. Refer to
Section 23
3300.

Field Quality Control

A. Provide services of an independent testing agency to take noise measurements
in accordance with
provisions of NEBB (STDS). Use meters meeting requirements of ANSI S1.4.
B. After start-up, final corrections and balancing of systems take octave band s
ound measurements
over full audio frequency range in areas adjacent to mechanical equipment rooms,
duct and
pipe shafts, and other critical locations, as directed.
C. Provide one-third octave band measurements of artificial sound sources in are
as indicated as
having critical requirements.
D. Submit complete report of test results including sound curves.

System Start-up
Inspect installation periodically. Prepare and start systems.
13.14 Hvac fans
Reference Standards
ABMA STD 9
Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers
Association, Inc.; 1990 (Reapproved 2008).
AMCA 99
Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;
2010.
AMCA 210
Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Ratings; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007
(ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE 51).
AMCA 300
Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2008.
AMCA 301
Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test
Data; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007.
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data on axial fans and accessories including fan curves
with specified
operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inl
et and outlet at
rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of axial fans and accessories including fan
curves with specified
operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outle
t at rated capacity, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Test Reports: Indicate performance data for adjustable axial fan blades for a
t least five blade
settings, including maximum.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
E. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive repla
cement, spare parts
list, and wiring diagrams.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client s use in maintenance of
project.
1. Extra Fan Belts: One set for each individual fan.

Quality Assurance
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of p
roducts specified in
this section, with minimum five years o f documented experience.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.
Field Conditions
Permanent fans may not be used for ventilation during construction.
Products
Axial Fans (For Duty and Application Refer To Equipment Schedule)
A. Casings shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel. The unit shall be complete w
ith a sight inspection port
and a motor terminal box.
B. Impeller blades shall be cast aluminum aero foil section.
C. Motors shall be totally enclosed air stream rated class F insulation with IP
55 protection and suitable for
45C ambient temperature. Motors shall be supplied with sealed-for-life bearings.
D. All external fans shall be with weather resistant coatings.

Mixed Flow Fans (For Duty and Application Refer To Equipment Schedule)
A. Fan casings to be fabricated from corrosion resistant pre-galvanized sheet st
eel with proprietary flanges.
Fan support arms shall be resiliently mounted to a diaphragm plate.
B. Impellers shall be manufactured from aluminum. The fan shall be complete with
an integral inlet bearing
to provide optimum performance.
C. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed air stream rated class F insulation. Mot
or protection shall be IP55
and suitable for 45C ambient temperature. Bearings shall be sealed-for-life units
.

In-Line Centrifugal Fans (For Duty and Application Refer To Equipment Schedule)
A. Fan casings to be manufactured from fire retardant polyamide glass-fiber impr
egnated material. It shall
have circular inlet and outlet connections and be complete with a built in termi
nal box.
B. Fan impellers for sizes up to 315mm shall be of plastic with metal back plate
s. An all metal construction
shall be used for a size of 315mm and over.
C. Fan motor shall be an external-rotor unit to IP44 standards and class B insul
ation.

The motor shall be moisture proof. It shall be fitted with sealed-for-life beari
ngs and suitable for
45C ambient temperature.
Twin Fan Units (For duty and application refer to Equipment Schedule)
A. The parallel fan units shall be suitable for duct mounted on curb installatio
n as required. The casings
shall be manufactured from pre-galvanized sheet steel. It shall be complete with
access panels to
facilitate servicing. A terminal block and integral isolator shall be included.
The fans shall be double
inlet, double width type using forward curved impellers within a scroll suitable
for belt drive.
B. Fan motors shall be manufactured to BS 5000 Anti-vibration mountings shall be
fitted between the
common fan base plate and the unit casing.
C. Automatic shutters shall be provided to prevent recirculation of air between
fans.
D. The shutters shall also act as a back draft damper if the unit is shut down.

Each fan shall be fitted with an airflow detector switch. In the event of the du
ty fan failing the airflow
switch shall signal the standby fan to start via the changeover panel.
Each unit shall be provided with an automatic changeover panel. The panel shall
start the standby fan in
the event of the duty fan failing. The panel shall also have the facility for du
ty sharing of the two fans on
a 12 hour cycle.
All internal wiring shall be done by the manufacturer in the factory. The whole
unit shall be acoustically
lined.
E. All fans and intervals to be accessible for Mainteance.

Roof Mounted Extract/Supply Fans (For duty and application refer to Equipment Sc
hedule)
A. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed drip proof rated to Class F, 220/380V, 1
phase/3 phase, 50 Hz. as
indicated in equipment schedule.
B. Fan ambient temperature range: 0-50 Degrees C.
C. Casing (cowl) shall be manufactured of cold pressed fibre glass for long life
in harsh or extreme
weather conditions. The coloring shall contain an ultra violet stabilizer to ens
ure the cowl will not
fade due to sunlight.
D. Fan shall be curb mounted.
E. Fan shall be complete with bird guards, inlet guards and local power disconne
ct (isolator).
F. Aluminium mesh shall be thicker than bird mesh (submit sample)
13.15 Air terminal units
General
A. Constant volume terminal units.
B. Variable volume terminal units.
C. Airflow Measurement Stations.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data indicating configuration, general assembly, and ma
terials used in
fabrication. Include catalogue performance ratings that indicate air flow, stati
c pressure, and NC
designation. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. The noise data of the unit shall comply with the project requirement and appr
oval on the noise
performance of the unit is a must.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration, general assembly, and materials used i
n fabrication, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate support and hanging detail
s, and service clearances
required.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer s descriptive literature,
operating instructions,
maintenance and repair data, and parts lists. Include directions for resetting c
onstant volume
regulators.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed i
n client's name and
registered with manufacturer.

Quality assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products specified in
this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwrite
rs Laboratories Inc. as
suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

Warranty
Provide one year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.
Products
Manufactured Units
A. Ceiling mounted variable air volume supply air control terminals for connecti
on to single duct, central
air systems, with electric variable volume controls.
B. Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and air
flow indicator. Include unit
nominal air flow, maximum factory set airflow, minimum factory set air flow, and
coil type.

Single Duct Variable Volume Units

A. Basic Assembly:
1. The VAVs shall be pressure independent type.
2. Casings: Minimum 0.8 mm zinc-coated steel housing.
3. Lining: Minimum 25 mm thick neoprene or vinyl coated fibrous glass insulation
, 24 g/L density,
meeting NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Face lining with
Mylar film.
4. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections for duct attachment.
5. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip and drive connections.
B. The noise levels of the VAV shall be within the limits of the project require
ments.
C. Basic Unit:
1. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate control
components inside
protective metal shroud.
2. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-
lubricating
bearings; maximum damper leakage: 1 to 2 CFM air flow at 0.063 kPa rated inlet s
tatic pressure.
3. Mount damper operator to position damper normally closed.
4. The unit shall have an integral flow measurement system designed to maintain
control accuracy
independent of field installation conditions.
5. The unit shall have an integral electronic actuator for damper operation.

D. Attenuator Section: Line attenuator sections with 50 mm thick insulation.

E. Attenuator will be provided only if required to maintain the specified noise
levels.
F. Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.
G. Automatic Damper Operator:

Electric Actuator: 24 volt with high limit.

 Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling c
omponents.
C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent ductw
ork.
D. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 3100.
E. Provide minimum of 3 m of 25 mm thick lined ductwork downstream of units.
F. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

Adjusting
Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modul
ation from 100 percent
of design flow to 15 percent full flow.
13.16 Air outlets and inlets
General
Section Includes
A. Diffusers.
B. Jet Nozzles.
C. Registers/grilles.
D. Door grilles.
E. Louvers.
F. Goosenecks.

Reference Standards
AMCA 500-L
Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; Air Movement and Control
Association International, Inc.; 2012.
ASHRAE Std 70
Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society
of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006 (R2011).
SMACNA (DCS)
HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review ou
tlets and inlets as to
size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outle
ts and inlets showing
type, size, location, application, and noise level.
B. Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.

Quality assurance
A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std
70.
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L.
C. All supply air outlets shall be provided with balancing dampers.
D. Noise regeneration in the outlets to be provided for approval. Noise level re
generation should be at
least 10 units below the room requirements. Where such information is not provid
ed by the
manufacturer, it is the responsibility of the contractor to test the regenerated
noise with the design
factors in the presence of the acoustic consultant.
Quality Assurance
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of p
roducts specified in this
section, with minimum fifteen years of documented experience.
Mock-Up
A. Provide mock-up of typical exterior ceiling module with supply and return air
outlets.
B. Locate where directed.

Products
Rectangular Ceiling Diffusers
A. Type: Provide square, stamped, multi-core diffuser to discharge air in four w
ay pattern with sectoring
baffles where indicated.
B. Connections: Round.
C. Frame: Provide surface mount, snap-in, inverted T-bar, and spline type. In pl
aster ceilings, provide
plaster frame and ceiling frame.
D. Fabrication: Steel with baked enamel finish.
E. Color: As selected by the Architect.
F. Provide butterfly volume control damper; removable core with damper adjustabl
e from diffuser face
but concealed.
G. Diffusers shall be suitable for operation at 5% more and 25% less than schedu
le duty without causing
objectionable air motion at occupied level.
H. Provide gaskets and seals with all units and accessories as required to preve
nt air leakage. Furnish
four complete sets of wrenches and special tools required to adjust, dismantle a
nd install all units and
accessories furnished for this project.

Jet Nozzles
A. The Jet Nozzles shall be of eyeball type with a single air outlet aperture an
d must not have concentric
rings within the discharge cone.
B. The Jet must allow easy adjustment and be able to provide jet direction throu
gh 360 degree over a 60
degree arc.
C. Model: Trox DUK-V/315/0/0/P0 or approved equal.
D. Color: [As selected by the Architect]
Ceiling Slot Diffusers
A. Type: Continuous 13 mm wide slot, 1 slots wide, with adjustable vanes for lef
t, right, or vertical
discharge.
B. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory clear lacquer finish.
C. Color: As selected by the Architect.
D. Frame: 32 mm margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket, mitered end b
order.
E. Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated.

Ceiling supply Registers Grilles

A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air
along face of grille, oneway
deflection.
B. Frame: 32 mm margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory enamel finish.
D. Color: As selected by the Architect.
E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operat
or, operable from
face.

Ceiling Exhaust and Return Registers Grilles

A. Type: Streamlined blades, 19 mm minimum depth, 19 mm maximum spacing, with bl
ades set at 45
degrees, vertical face.
B. Frame: 32 mm margin with countersunk screw mounting.
C. Fabrication: Steel with 0.90 mm minimum frames and 0.80 mm minimum blades, st
eel and aluminum
with 0.90 mm minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel fi
nish.
D. Color: As selected by the Architect.
E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operat
or, operable from
face where not individually connected to exhaust fans.

Ceiling Linear Exhaust and Return Grilles

A. Type: Streamlined blades with 90-degree one-way deflection, 3.2 x 19 mm on 6
mm centers.
B. Frame: 32 mm margin, extra heavy for floor mounting, with countersunk screw m
ounting.
C. Fabrication: Steel with 0.90 mm minimum frames and 0.80 mm minimum blades, st
eel and aluminum
with 0.90 mm minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel fi
nish.
D. Color: As selected by the Architect

Linear Wall Registers Grilles

A. Type: Streamlined blades with 0-degree deflection, 3.2 x 19 mm on 6 mm center
s.
B. Frame: 32 mm margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
D. Color: As selected by the Architect.
E. Damper: Integral gang-operated opposed blade damper with removable key operat
or, operable from
face.
Linear Floor Supply Registers/Grilles
A. Type: Streamlined blades with 0-degree deflection, 3 x 19 mm on 6 mm centers,
assembled on
expanded tubes mandrel construction.
B. Frame: 32 mm heavy margin frame with countersunk screw mounting, and mounting
frame.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory baked enamel finish.
D. Color: As selected by the Architect.
E. Damper: Integral gang-operated opposed blade damper with removable key operat
or, operable from
face.

Floor Supply Registers/Grilles

A. Individually adjustable blades, wide stamped border, single or double blade d
amper with set screw
adjustment.
B. Fabricate of steel, welded construction, with factory baked enamel finish sub
ject to Architect
approval.

Door Grilles
A. Type: V-shaped louvers of 0.90 mm thick steel, 25 mm deep on 13 mm centers.
B. Frame: 0.90 mm steel with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance on both
sides of door, with
factory prime coat finish.

Louvers
A. Type: 100 mm deep with blades on 45-degree slope with center baffle and retur
n bend, heavy channel
frame, 13 mm square mesh screen over exhaust and 13 mm square mesh screen over i
ntake.
B. Fabrication: 1.50 mm thick galvanized steel welded assembly, with factory pri
me coat finish.
C. Color: As selected by the Architect.

Goosenecks
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards of minim
um 1.20 mm
galvanized steel.
B. Mount on minimum 300 mm high curb base where size exceeds 230 x 230 mm.

Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in positi
on to conform to
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Obtain Architect app
roval for exact
locations fixing and details.
C. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and regi
sters, despite whether
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

13.17 Small split system heating and cooling

General
Section Includes
A. Indoor fan & coil units.
B. Split Units (DX Type).
C. Controls.

Reference Standard
AHRI 210/240
Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.
ASHRAE Std 15
Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems; American Society of Heating,
Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/ASHRAE Std
15).
ASHRAE Std 23.1
Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and
Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010.
ASHRAE Std 90.1
Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2010,
Including All Addenda (ANSI/AHSRAE/
NEMA MG 1
Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide rated capacities, weights, accessories, electrical name
plate data, and wiring
diagrams. Contractor is required to submit manufacturer s statement and test certi
ficates confirming
that designed equipment will achieve the CoP values claimed in the specification
. Contractor is
required to provide prior to procurement supporting third party test certificate
s at full load conditions
and / at AHRI conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly, required clearances, and location and size
of field connections.
C. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation ins
tructions.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connectio
ns.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer s descriptive literature,
operating instructions,
installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out
in client s name and
registered with manufacturer.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.
1. Extra Filters: One for each unit.
2. Extra Pilot Thermocouples: One for each unit.

Quality Assurance
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type o
f products specified in
this section, with minimum ten years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
section with minimum
ten years of experience and approved by manufacturer.

Products
System Design
A. Split-System Heating and Cooling Units: Self-contained, packaged, matched fac
tory-engineered and
assembled, pre-wired indoor and outdoor units; UL listed.
1. Provide refrigerant lines internal to units and between indoor and outdoor un
its, factory
cleaned, dried, pressurized and sealed, with insulated suction line.

B. Performance Requirements: The selected units shall comply with the cooling ca
pacities indicated in
the drawings and System Efficiency listed below.
The following table outlines the minimum permissible seasonal system efficiency
for various system types.
The target efficiency quoted is based upon performance under standard test condi
tions and procedures as
outlined by AHRI standards specific to each system type. The performance of air
conditioning equipment
according to the relevant AHRI standard should be obtained from the equipment ma
nufacturer.
In the subsequent tables, the following units apply:
SEER/EER = Btu/Wh
SCoP/Cop = unit less
IPLV = Btu/Wh
Equipment
Type
Size
Category
Subcategory or
Rating
Condition
Minimum Efficiency as
per Prescriptive Path
Method for Units1
Efficiency
achievable
by
Units as per
Design
Test
Procedure
Air
Conditioners,
Air cool
< 19kW
Split System
13.0 SEER
3.81 SCop
13.0 SEER
AHRI
210/240
> 19kW
and
< 40kW
Split System and
Single Package
11.2 EERc
3.28 CoP
11.2 EER
> 70kW
and
< 223 kW
Split System and
Single Package
10.0 EER
2.93 CoP
2.95 CoP

Split System and

Single Package
9.7 IPLV
9.7 IPLV

AHRI
340/360
 System Design Unitsl
IPLVs are only applicable to equipment with capacity modulation

Electrical Characteristics:
Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch on equipment under provisions
of Section 26 2717.
Indoor Units
A. Indoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit con
sisting of cabinet,
supply fan, evaporator coil, and controls; wired for single power connection wit
h control transformer.

Fan: Line-flow fan direct driven by a single motor.

B. Evaporator Coils: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymer dr
ain pan sloped in all
directions to drain, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricte
d distributor or
thermostatic expansion valve.
1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL listed.
2. Manufacturer: System manufacturer.

Outdoor Units
A. Outdoor Units: Self-contained, packaged, pre-wired unit consisting of cabinet
, with compressor and
condenser.
1. Comply with AHRI 210.
2. Refrigerant: Ozone friendly refrigerant such as HFC.134a, HFC-407C, HFC- 410a
or approved
equivalent. The proposed refrigerant shall have zero ozone depletion potential.
3. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 with testing in acc
ordance with
ASHRAE Std 23 and UL listed.

B. Accessories: Filter drier, high pressure switch (manual reset), low pressure
switch (automatic reset),
service valves and gage ports, thermometer well (in liquid line).
Provide thermostatic expansion valves.
C. Operating Controls:

Control by room thermostat to maintain room temperature setting.

Execution
Examination
A. Verify that substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are a
s indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available and in correct location.
C. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection.

Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of lo
cal authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE Std 15.
C. Pipe drain from split unit to nearest floor drain.
14 ELECTRICAL
14.1 Low voltage electrical power conductors and cables
General
Section Includes
A. Single conductor building wire.
B. Non-metallic-sheathed cable.
C. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.
D. Service entrance cable.
E. Armoured cable.
F. Metal-clad cable.
G. Wiring connectors.
H. Electrical tape.
I. Heat shrink tubing.
J. Wire pulling lubricant.

Reference Standards
ASTM D4388
Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and
Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2008.
FS A-A-59544
Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation);
Federal
Specification; Revision A, 2008.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection
Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority
Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments
and Supplements.
UL 854
Service-Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
UL 1569
Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
(AADC).
Regulations and bylaws laid by Al Ain Distribution Company
IEE
The Institution of Electrical Engineers - Regulations for the
Electrical Equipment of Buildings, 16th Edition.
BS
British Standards Institution.
BS 5839 Parts 1 & 4/1988 (AMD
1992), Part 2 1983 (AMD 1986), Parts
3 & 5
(1988)
Fire Detection and Alarm Systems in Buildings.
BS 5266 1988
The emergency lighting of premises
BS 7430:1991
Earthing
BS 6651 1992
The Protection of Structures against Lightning.
ASTA
Association of Short Circuit Testing Authority
BS 6724
or equivalent IEC- XLPE Insulated, LSF Power Cables for
voltages up to And including 1000V.
BS 6346 1989 (AMD 1992)
PVC Insulated single copper conductors.
BS 6004 1991 0r IEC 227
PVC insulated single copper conductors.
BS 5486:Part 1 1990 (1993) or EN
60439 or IEC 439-1
Factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear for
voltages up to and including 1000 V.A.C. and 1200 V.D.C.
BS EN 60947-2: 1992
Air Circuit Breakers - Horizontal Draw out.
BS EN 60947 - 3: 1992
Switches and switch fuses.
BS 5486:Part 1 1986 and Part 19 1989
Circuit Breaker Panel boards.
BS 5486: Part 1 1990 & EN 60439
Distribution Panel Boards
BS 88 1988 (AMD 1992) or EIC-269
H.R.C. Fuse Links
BS 159 & BS 5486: Part 2:1988 or
EIC -439-2
Rising Main Bus Trunking
BS 3871 Part 1:1965 (AMD 1984) &
BS EN 60898:1991 or EIC 898
Miniature and Moulded Base Circuit Breakers.
BS 1363 1984 (AMD 1990)
Socket Outlets 13 Amp.
BS3676 Part 1: 1989
Light Switches.
BS EN 60947-4-1
Direct-on-Line (full voltage) a.c. Starters
BS EN 60947-4-1
Reduced Voltage a.c. Starters; Star Delta.
BS EN 60947-4-1;1992
Rheostatic Rotor Starters.
BS EN 60947-4-1:1992
Reduced Voltage a.c. Starters: Two-step Autotransformer
BS 7211
LSF non-armoured stranded copper conductors.
IEC 255
Electrical protective relays.
BS 159
Busbars and busbar connections.
IEC 185
Current transformers.
IEC 186
Voltage transformers.
IEC 529
Specification for classification of degrees of protection
provided enclosures.

Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
A. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under
other sections with the
actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes inc
reased for voltage drop.
B. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid
conflicts with piping or
other potential conflicts.
C. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provid
e terminations suitable
for use with the conductors to be installed.
D. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets f
or conductors and
cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, list
ings, and available sizes,
configurations, and stranding.
B. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for copper condu
ctors. Include proposed
modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to accommodat
e substituted
conductors.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling
, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Re
cord actual routing for
underground circuits.

Quality assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.

Delivery Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with man
ufacturer's instructions.
Products
Materials General
A. LSF, non-armoured single core stranded copper conductors not less than 2.5mm2
and not less than
750 volt grade for all types of branch circuit wiring in conduit to BS 7211. Siz
e of cables as detailed
on drawings.
B. Heat resisting three core circular flexible cable, copper strands and rated n
ot less than 15 amp, to BS
7211. Compression glands for making final termination to conduit systems.
C. Copper conductors and copper sheath with PVC outer covering over sheath. Not
less than 750 volt
grade.
D. General: Cable marking tabs for identification of circuits.

Conductor Sizes for Lighting, Power, Controls Etc

A. Conductors for all cables and flexible cords provided on this Contract shall
be to standard metric
cross-sectional areas and stranding as shown in columns 'A' and 'B' of Tables No
s.1 and 2 below. The
term 'hard wiring' conductors shall mean those conductors installed within racew
ays and multicore
armoured or metal sheathed cables.
B. Hard wiring conductor sizes smaller than 2.5 mm2 for lighting circuits and 4m
m2 for small power
circuits shall not be used. The sizes of current carrying conductors for all sub
-circuit and distribution
wiring shall be as indicated on the Drawings, Load Schedules and in these Specif
ications, and shall
comply with the regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 45% occupancy sh
all be considered in
conduits and trunking sizing. No trunking shall be installed within mechanical r
ooms. For underfloor
trunking sizing shall be as shown on the drawing.
Column A
Column B
Cross Section Area (mm2)
Number & Diameter of Wires (mm)
4.00
56/0.30
6.00
84/0.30
10.0
80/0.40
16.00
126/0.40
25.00
196/0.40
35.00
276/0.40
50.00
396/0.50
70.00
360/0.50
95.00
475/0.50

Hard Wiring Conductor

Cores
The metal core of the conductor shall be annealed high conductivity copper.
Rubber insulated cables shall have high conductivity tinned copper conductors.
Insulation
A. The core of each conductor shall be surrounded by insulation. The insulation
shall have a constant
thickness which shall not be less than those given in the relevant BS Specificat
ions. The insulation
characteristics and testing shall correspond with the requirements of these stan
dards. The
characteristics of cross-linked polyethylene shall conform to the requirements o
f BS 6724 Standard.
The mix composition must satisfy the stringent requirements regarding water abso
rption and the
addition of the appropriate stabilizing agent to prevent aging.
B. The insulation shall be applied by extrusion, hard against the core, without
however, adhering to it, in
a single layer.
C. No natural rubber or synthetic Butadiene-stryene insulated cables shall be us
ed.
D. The synthetic rubber used in the manufacture of flexible cables must have exc
ellent resistance to
thermal aging, good flexibility and low water absorption properties.
E. Flexible cables which are synthetic rubber insulated shall not be used wherev
er cables are subjected to
mechanical stress.
F. High temperature PVC or silicone rubber insulated cables shall be used where
high ambient
temperatures are expected. They shall be designed to function continuously in an
ambient temperature
range between 80 Deg. C and 150 Deg C.
G. L.S.F cables are only permitted for installation within the building.

Outer Covering/Sheets
A. Unless specified otherwise, multi-core cables shall have one or more outer co
verings and armouring.
The outer covering must ensure the following characteristics:
1. Resistance to vermin.
2. Resistance to oil.

B. Satisfactory thermal aging.

1. Resistance to mechanical stresses and to abrasion.
2. Waterproof.
3. Non-flame propagating property.

C. The outer covers shall be PVC and single wire armour.

D. The PVC outside sheath must be of homogenous manufacture, consist of a single
layer and be
flexible.
E. Single conductor armoured cables shall have non-magnetic armouring of aluminu
m wire or strip. The
armouring of all single core cables in the same circuit shall be solidly bonded
together at both ends of
their run.

Volt Rated Single Conductor Cable

A. All cable shall have copper conductors with 750 volt, 85 Deg.C rated XLPE ins
ulation, conforming to
BS 6724 except where higher temperatures are expected, in which case silicone ru
bber cables shall be
used.
B. Unless otherwise specified, raceway systems shall be wired using PVC insulate
d cables. All
conductors shall be stranded, not solid type.

1000 Volt Rated Multiple Conductor Cable

A. All cables shall conform to BS 6724 with the following additional requirement
s:
1. Number of insulated conductors as shown on the Drawings.
2. Insulation shall be minimum 85 Deg. C rated XLPE as indicated for specific ca
bles on the
Drawings.
3. Metallic armour covering shall be galvanized steel wire with overall PVC jack
et.

Core Identification
A. The color identification for single core insulated cables shall be as follows
:

Phase conductor : Red, Yellow or Blue.

Neutral conductor : Black.
Protective conductor : Green or Green/Yellow
B. The color identification for multi-core insulated cables shall be as follows:
1. Two core:

. Red (Phase conductor).

. Black (Neutral conductor).
2. Three core

. Red, Yellow and Blue (Phase conductor).

. Red (Phase conductor).
. Black (Neutral conductor).
. Green/Yellow (Protective conductor).
3. Four core

. Red, Yellow and Blue (Phase conductor).

. Black (Neutral conductor).
C. All cables which do not form part of the mains voltage power and lighting dis
tribution system
shall be wired in white cables which shall be fitted with numbers tight-fitting
rubber or
plastic marker sleeves, at each end, as listed below. Combinations of markers ea
ch bearing a
single digit may be used to make up each number.
1. The sleeves for fire alarm system cables shall be numbered:
a. 100 for positive or live feed conductors.
b. 110 for negative or neutral conductors.
c. 121 up to and including 399 used in sequence as necessary to identify individ
ual alarm
detection circuits.
d. 401 up to and including 599 used in sequence as necessary to identify individ
ual
plant/equipment activation relay circuits.

2. The sleeves for fire alarm sounding system cables shall be numbered:
a. 600 for positive or live feed conductors.
b. 610 for negative or neutral conductors.
c. 620 up to 749 for individual alarm sounding circuits switch lines in sequence
.
XPLE cable
A. XLPE armoured cable (XLPE) 1000 volt grade. Single, twin, three and four core
shaped stranded
copper conductor. Each conductor protected with an XLPE insulation sleeve. Drawn
over the
conductors an extruded PVC bedding. Wound over the bedding galvanized steel wire
armour. Drawn
over the steel wire armour, an external PVC cover sheath to BS 6724
B. Mechanical cable glands manufactured brass complete with earth tags and shrou
ds shall be suitable of
cable to ensure exact tolerances of outside diameter of cable.
C. Cable termination insulated lugs shall be of the compression type and shall b
e manufactured from
high conductivity copper, electric tin-plated to resist corrosion and give good
electrical continuity.

Execution
Cable Protection
A. Sleeves consisting of plastic conduit shall be installed for all cables passi
ng through brick, concrete
and similar structures to permit future withdrawal without disturbing the struct
ure. All sleeves shall
be tightly packed with fire-resisting material of approved type.
B. All exposed or concealed cables rising from the ground or floor as well as ho
rizontally run cables 2
metres or lower from finished floor level shall be protected. The protection sha
ll be by means of
galvanized steel sheet covers of minimum thickness 2mm. An upstand of 100mm shal
l be projected
from the floor around the pipe or conduit with fire sealant around.
C. Power cables installed in trays within a height of 2 meter from finished floo
r level shall be protected
throughout that distance. Means of protection shall be by manufacturer supplied
galvanized steel
covers of minimum thickness 1.0mm

Cable Sizes
A. The sizes of all main and sub-main cables shall be as indicated on the drawin
gs.

Submit voltage drop calculations and increase the cable sizes if required.
B. Sizes have been determined by reference to various factors including the rele
vant, IEC, BSI standards
for cable ratings, and ambient temperature of 50 Degree C for cables installed i
nside the building and
85 Degree C for cables installed exposed outside the building and the run length
s have been taken as
the most direct route consistent with the main cable routes indicated on the dra
wings. Should the
Contractor deviate from the installation indicated, he shall re-evaluate the cab
le sizes and provide full
details for the Engineer's review. Any deviation shall be agreed with the Engine
er.
C. Multi-core cables with reduced neutral conductor will not be permitted.

Installation of Multi-Core Armoured and Metal Sheathed Cables

A. No cable installation work shall be carried out in temperatures at which the
cable being installed
is likely to suffer damage.
B. The arrangement of cables and all methods of installation shall be reviewed b
y the Engineer.
C. Cables shall be installed from terminal point to terminal point and straight
through joints shall not be
made unless approved.
D. The radius of each bend or change in direction of the route of any cable shal
l not be less than that laid
down in the relevant table or current issues of the IEE Regulations and the rele
vant British Standards
Specification and shall not be less than the manufacturer's recommended minimum.
E. The spacing of cable supports shall be those laid down from the relevant size
and type of cable in the
current issue for the IEE Regulations, but the horizontal longitudinal distance
between wire armoured
cable support centres shall not exceed 1 metre, the horizontal distance between
support centres of shall
not exceed 1meter the distance between support centres for any type of cable on
vertical runs is not to
exceed 1 metre. Cables shall be fixed using cleats as specified at every 1 meter
(approx.).
F. The cables may be installed in a number of different ways:
1. Installed in floor trenches with concrete walls and base.
2. Installed to concrete encased duct banks.
3. Installed on racks.
4. Installed on cable tray or ladder systems.
5. Fixed to concrete, brickwork and blockwork.
6. Fixed to steelwork.

G. Single core cables forming a three phase group shall be fixed in trefoil clea
ts of the alloy pattern. Flat
formation may be used where specified.

Cables Laid in Ducts

A. Where cables are shown as being in ducts on the drawings, the cables shall be
drawn into ducts. The
removal of temporary plugs, rodding and cleaning of the ducts shall be the respo
nsibility of the Contractor
who shall seal the ends of these ducts immediately after installation of the cab
les by firstly caulking with
hemp and spun yarn, then a 150mm fill of plastics compound and a final wood infi
ll block.
B. Particular attention shall be given to the sealing of ducts where any of such
ducts enter cable trenches
within the confines of the building.
C. Cable markers shall be fixed on the surface at every 10 meters and or change
of direction. The cable
markers shall be made of solid brass.

Cables in Covered Concrete Trenches

A. All cables shall be so arranged and fixed that any one cable may be removed w
ithout disturbance of the
remainder.
B. XLPE/SWA/PVC multi-core cables shall be installed on cable hangers or traywor
k fixed to backstraps
which in turn are fixed to the side of the trench or as directed by the Engineer
.
C. All single core phase cables shall be installed in die-cast, non-ferrous, tre
foil cleats and neutral cables in
similar single way cleats of the same manufacture. Flat formation may be used in
specified cases when
approved cleats shall be used.
D. The crossing over of cables in the same trench shall be avoided as far as pos
sible.
E. All unnecessary bends shall be straightened after laying.
F. In very exceptional circumstances, and then only by agreement with the Engine
er, cables installed under
this method shall be laid in the bottom of trenches and then in a neat and order
ly manner with support
underneath.
G. The laying of cables will require the removal of trench covers from time to t
ime, and the Contractor shall
include in his price for the removal and immediate replacement of covers after l
aying each cable. The
trenches shall not at any time therefore be left to be fouled and trench covers
damaged. Whilst trenches
are open the Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that covers are undamaged
and trenches are clean
before recovering; any damage to covers shall be made good by the Contractor at
this own expense.

Cables on Racks
A. Where agreed with the Engineer, a cable racking system may be run. The rack s
hall be of adequate width
for disposing the cables with a width allowance of 25% for additional cables. Ca
re shall be taken to
ensure that the rack does not foul overhead cranes, doors or other features. The
 rack shall be of such
strength that, when loaded with all the cables for which it is designed, plus an
additional 15kg/m, it shall
not deflect from the horizontal by more than 3 Deg.
B. The Contractor shall supply where necessary all steel racks, fixing bolts, et
c., for supporting the cable,
including marking out and checking.
C. Cables shall be supported on steel racks using approved cleats. All single co
re phase cables are to be
installed in die-cast, non-ferrous, trefoil cleats with elastic protection and n
eutral cable in similar way
cleats of the same manufacture unless flat formation is used when single cleats
may be used.
D. For cables of core area of and less than 25 sq. mm multicore cleats on a comm
on bolt or spindle will be
acceptable. Multiple cables shall be secured with PVC cleats at a spacing consis
tent with the size of cable
used.
E. Every care shall be taken in cable handling during erection to avoid the slig
htest damage to cables. When
cables are clamped in the racks, the Contractor shall ensure that undue stress i
s not placed on any
sheathing or armouring.
F. All supports and racks shall be arranged as far as practicable for the easy r
emoval of any single cable in a
multi-cable run, without disturbing other cables and without threading through s
upports or racks.
G. Cutting away, fixing and grouting of raw bolts and making well shall be done
by the Contractor. Cables
shall be run in a near and orderly manner. The Contractor shall be responsible f
or the design and detailing
of the steelwork for cable racks and shall submit such design for review before
putting the work in hand.
The Contractor shall include the cost of this design work in his price for this
method of installation.
Cable on Trays
A. Trays shall be adequately supported to prevent sagging by more than 3 Deg. be
tween fixed points; all
supporting steelwork shall be fixed at no more than 1m centres unless otherwise
specified.
B. All cables shall be saddled to tray work. Fire Rated and Flexible cable cabli
ng shall be saddled at not
more than 500mm centres and all other cabling at no more than 1m centres all on
cable trays.
C. All cables, other than pilot or control, when installed on trays shall not be
in more than one layer.
D. 2D spacing between centres to be maintained for all power cables on their ent
ire run.

Cables Fixed to concrete, Brickwork and Blockwork

A. Fire resistance cables run individually shall be saddled with spacer bars at
intervals of not more than
500mm. Where five or more cables are required to be supported, the fixing saddle
s and spacer bars shall
be fabricated from 12mm copper strip.
B. Where multiple runs of cables are to be installed along walls, or in ducts, t
he hangers shall be of the 'claw'
type sized to suit cables and mounted on slotted channel the full height of the
ducts.
C. All cleats, clamps and hangers shall have rounded edges and a single lapping
of bitumastic felt inserted
between the cable and the metalwork of any hanger or bracket. Spacing of fixings
shall be in accordance
with the relevant IEE regulations and where a number of cables are run together,
the spacing of the
fixings shall be that required by the smallest cable in the run.
D. Bends in cables shall not exceed the limits as laid out in the IEE regulation
s or relevant manufacturers
recommendations whichever gives the largest radius.
E. Cables installed in open positions shall be cased to the full height of the c
able.
F. Wherever possible sheet steel of not less than 2mm shall be used for this pur
pose.

Cables Fixed to Steelwork

Structural steelwork shall not be drilled for cable fixing. Individual cables ru
n on steelwork shall be
supported in cleats fixed to backstraps clamped or welded to the structural stee
lwork. These cleats shall
be spaced so as to avoid sagging of cables and in no case at more than 1m betwee
n centres.
Cables Routes
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the lengths of all cable
s covered by the specification
and to be supplied under this Contract.
B. Final cable routing details are to be issued to the Engineer for review.

14.2 Grounding and bonding for electrical systems

General
Description of Work
A. Supply, Installation, testing, and commissioning of complete earthing system
as specified hereafter and as
indicated in the related electrical system drawings. Scope of work shall include
but not limited to the
following for each building:
B. Main earthing system of each of the building consists of ECC conductors, eart
h bars, earth pits, all related
accessories including bonding and terminations.
C. Earthed equipotential bonding of all exposed and extraneous conductive parts
D. Earthing system for the telephone and data communication system including ECC
conductors, earth bars,
earth pits, all related accessories including bonding and terminations.
E. Substation earthing system including transformer neutral earthing
Quality Assurance
A. Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and
materials furnished under
requirements of these specifications shall conform to latest publications or sta
ndard rules of the following:
B. Al Ain Distribution Company (AADC) regulations for electrical installation wo
rks.
C. Regulation and Supervision Bureau (RSB)Regulations
D. Department of Civil Defense requirements.
E. ETISALAT Standards and requirements.
F. Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings (IEE), (BS) London.
G. British Standards.

The quality Control/Quality Assurance duties shall be performed by the Contracto

r. The system of
quality control verification shall be in accordance with ISO 9000 standards of q
uality assurance.
Codes and Standards
The following codes and standards to the extent specified herein form a part of
this specification.
When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest edition
enforce at the time of
proposal submitted shall apply.

CP 1013
BS Code of Practice - Earthing
BS 7671
BS Requirement for Electrical Installation BS EN
340
BS for earthing system material and testing
BS 2784 & BS 970
BS for earthing material, solid copper rods and accessories.
BS 62305 -1 -4 :2006
Protection against Lightning AADC Al Ain Distribution Company

Submittals
A. The Contractor shall submit the following drawings and documents related with
 each electrical system for
consultant and owner s approval:
B. Original catalogues for various proposed components.
C. Schedule of Accessories and Fitting
D. Test Certificates.

Quality assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
A. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications for Signal Reference Grids: Company with minimum fiv
e years documented
experience with high frequency grounding systems.

Delivery, Storage and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer s ins
tructions.
Products
Earthing system materials shall include but not limited to the following:
A. Bonding Conductors
B. Earth continuity conductors
C. 150mm2 earth bar risers cable.
D. 150mm2 copper conductor connecting Earth Marshalling bars
E. Earth grid bar
F. Thermal welding kits and accessories.
G. Lugs, terminals, clamps, accessories etc.
H. Earth pits, earth wells and related accessories
I. Any other material indicated on the drawing or required by BS7340, BS7671. Wi
re and cable earthing
conductors
J. Material: copper - Only copper wire for both insulated and bare earthing cond
uctors in direct contact with
earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone and similar materials.
K. Equipment earthing conductors: Insulated with green/yellow color insulation
L. Earthing electrode conductors: Stranded copper cable
M. Bare copper conductors shall conform to the following: Solid conductors: IEC
60228, BS EN 60228
Class 2 Assembly of Stranded conductors: IEC 60228, BS EN 60228 Class 1 Tinned c
onductors: IEC
60228, BS EN 60228 Class 2

Miscellaneous Conductors
A. Earthing Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section
B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided bare copper wire, terminated wi
th copper ferrules
C. Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 1 mm thick and 50 mm wide, except as indicated C
onnector Products
D. Pressure Connectors : High conductivity plated units
E. Bolted Clamps : Heavy duty type

Exothermic-Welded Connections: selected as per manufacturer s written instructions

for specific types,
sizes, and combinations of Conductors and connected items.
Earthing Electrodes Earthing Rods: Copper
Plate Electrodes: Copper, square or rectangular shape. Minimum 3 mm thick, size
as indicted.
Technical Requirements
A. The complete installation covered by this specification shall be efficiently
bonded back to the main
switchboards through the metal sheathing of cables, the steel conduit, the truck
ing system and earth
wires/bars.
B. The nominal cross-sectional area of all earth continuity conductors shall be
in accordance with the IEE
regulations and to AADC approval. The earth wire size shall be equal to the phas
e wire if the conductor
cross section is less than 16 square millimeter and shall have half of the phase
conductor size for sizes
higher than 16 square millimeter.
C. Earth bar with enough number of ways and mounted on high impact uPVC channel
with disconnecting
link provided in each electrical room and shall be connected to the individual s
witchboard earth bar
through a cable sized in accordance to IEE Regulations and to the equipotential
bonding conductor
connecting metal conduits, trucking systems, metal frames, enclosures, cable she
aths, A/C duct work,
pipe riser etc.
D. All such earth pits and wells shall be connected together and with the earthi
ng system pit in order to
create an earth grid extending throughout the site in the form of an earth ring
with branches connected to
the equipment and building to be earthed. The earth grid shall comprise copper e
arthing cable with
green/yellow PVC sheathing.
E. All switchboards, metal conduit and trucking systems, metal frames, enclosure
s, lighting fittings and
cables sheaths shall be bonded together and connected through Green/Yellow PVC c
able to the earth bar
of the appropriate switchboard. Similarly all earth pins and metallic plates of
socket outlets, switches,
accessories and enclosures shall be bonded to earth with earth continuity conduc
tors. Each individual
earth path shall be electrically continuous throughout its length from the farth
est point of the associated
part of the system back to the main earth.
F. Where separate pieces of apparatus connected to different phase are, of neces
sity erected or positioned
less than three meters apart, an equipotential bonding conductor of single core
PVC earth cable shall be
installed between such pieces of apparatus.
G. In the substations, earth grid bus shall be provided and shall connect all th
e electrical equipment to the
earth pit.
H. The star point of the transformers shall be solidly earthed through separate
earth well.
I. All earthing cables shall be installed in accordance with the relevant requir
ements called for in the cables
section of this specification.
J. All bonding leads shall be carried out using threaded fittings, lockout/hardw
are, thermite welding or any
other method approved by THE CONSULTANT
K. A test connection link shall be provided for testing purpose.

Earth well
Earth wells shall be provided if required only to provide the earth grid at the
Substations. Earth well with
100mm diameter GS pipe shall be driven up to the water table. An earth bar shall
be welded to the top of
the earth well for branch connections. The well shall be protected by a concrete
housing with MS or
concrete cover of 250mm x 250mm x 10mm at grade level.

Double Flange Earth Pits

20mm diameter copper earth rod shall be driven to a minimum depth of 6M and an e
arth bar shall be
provided to the top of the earth pit for branch connections. Earth pit shall be
protected by concrete
housing and MS or concrete cover at grade level. Bentonite shall be provided in
the pit around the earth
rod.
The number /depth of pits shall be sufficient to make the system resistance less
than one ohm.
Earth cables shall be buried at a minimum depth of 500mm after coordinating the
same with other
services.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has
been completed.
B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting wo
rk.
Installation
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike man
ner in accordance with
IEE Wiring Regulations.
C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections with
out cutting, nicking
or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion
into connector.
2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact po
ints, and contact
surfaces.
3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for
the items to be
connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recomme
nded torque
settings.
5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended t
ools and dies.

D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 2

6 0553.
14.3 Hangers and supports for electrical systems
General
Section Includes
Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and othe
r electrical work.
Reference Standards
ASTM A123/A123M
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2012.
ASTM A153/A153M
Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
ASTM B633
Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 2011.
MFMA-4
Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers
Association; 2004.
NECA 1
Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; MostRecent
Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
BS EN 10142, EN 10147
Standard specification for Zinc coating on Iron and steel
products

Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
A. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipm
ent and components to be
installed.
B. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and mater
ials required for
installation.
C. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting s
urfaces at the installed
locations.
D. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and o
ther potential conflicts
installed under other sections or by others.
E. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.

Sequencing:
A. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until c
oncrete has fully cured

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue pages and data sheets
for metal channel
(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post- installed c
oncrete and masonry
anchors.
B. Shop Dr awi n g s : Include d e t a i l s for fabricated hangers and supports
where materials or methods
other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
C. For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluat
ion Service, LLC
(ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.
D. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified req
uirements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination,
preparation, and installation of product.

Quality Assurance
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.
D. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Cert
ified by fastener system
manufacturer with current operator's license.
E. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding: As specified in Section 05 5000.

Delivery, Storage and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's i
nstructions.
Products
Support and Attachment Components
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accesso
ries, and hardware as
necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
2. Provide products listed, classified, and labelled by Underwriter's Laboratori
es Inc. (UL) or
testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the pur
pose indicated,
where applicable.
3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, sel
ect in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to
be supported
with a minimum safety factor of 15%. Include consideration for vibration, equipm
ent
operation, and shock loads where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and p
roduct listing.
5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environm
ent where installed.
a. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
b. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AST
M
A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or
cable to be supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be sup
ported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot met
al channel (strut) and
associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field- assembly of s
upports.

Comply with MFMA-4.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:

Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor an
d fastener types
indicated for the specified applications.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment com
ponents.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting wo
rk.

Installation
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in
accordance
with NECA 1.
C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support f
rom piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from suspended
ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from roof deck.
F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approva
l of Structural
Engineer.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut
) to support
equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface- moun
ted on hollow
stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to
provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that i
t relies on its own
weight for support.

H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

I. Remove temporary supports.

14.4 Hangers and supports for electrical systems

General
Section Includes
Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and othe
r electrical work.
Reference Standards
ASTM A123/A123M
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
ASTM A153/A153M
Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;
2009.
ASTM B633
Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;
2011.
MFMA-4
Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers
Association; 2004.
NECA 1
Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National
Electrical Contractors Association; 2010.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association ; Most
Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All
Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
BS EN 10142, EN
10147
Standard specification for Zinc coating on Iron and steel
products
Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
A. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipm
ent and components to
be installed.
B. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and mater
ials required for
installation.
C. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting s
urfaces at the installed
locations.
D. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and o
ther potential conflicts
installed under other sections or by others.
E. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.

Sequencing:
A. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until c
oncrete has fully cured in
accordance with Section 03 3000.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue pages and data sheets
for metal channel
(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post- installed c
oncrete and masonry
anchors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where mate
rials or methods other
than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
C. For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluat
ion Service, LLC
(ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.
D. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified req
uirements.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
Quality Assurance
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.
D. Installer Qualifications for Powder-Actuated Fasteners (when specified): Cert
ified by fastener system
manufacturer with current operator's license.
E. Installer Qualifications for Field-Welding:

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's i
nstructions.
Products
Support and Attachment Components
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accesso
ries, and hardware as
necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
2. Provide products listed, classified, and labelled by Underwriter's Laboratori
es Inc. (UL) or
testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the pur
pose indicated,
where applicable.
3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, sel
ect in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to
be supported
with a minimum safety factor of 15%. Include consideration for vibration, equipm
ent
operation, and shock loads where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and p
roduct listing.
5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environm
ent where installed.
a. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
b. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AST
M A123/A123M
or ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or
cable to be supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be sup
ported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot met
al channel (strut) and
associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field- assembly of s
upports.

Comply with MFMA-4.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:

Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor an
d fastener types
indicated for the specified applications.
Execution
Examination
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment com
ponents.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting wo
rk.
Installation
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in
accordance with
NECA 1.
C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support f
rom piping, ductwork,
or other systems.
D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from suspended
ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Consultant, do not provide suppo
rt from roof deck.
F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approva
l of Structural
Engineer.
G. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut
) to support
equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface- moun
ted on hollow
stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to
provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that i
t relies on its own
weight for support.

H. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

I. Remove temporary supports.
14.5 Conduits
General
Section Includes
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).
D. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).
E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.
G. Electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT).
H. Conduit fittings.

Reference Standard
A. Flexible conduit comply with BS 4607 Part 3
B. Circular conduit comply with BS 4607 and BS 6099

Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be install
ed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, pip
ing, equipment and
other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, an
d equipment installed
under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that prese
rve the integrity of the
roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:
1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of cond
uit is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets f
or conduits and fittings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural
concrete slabs, where
permitted.
2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for seal
ing.

C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underg
round, conduits
embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and large
r.

Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution requirements.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manu
facturer's instructions.
 Products
Conduit
A. Rigid galvanized steel, with exterior zinc coating, external galvanized threa
ds where factory cut, red lead
coated external threads where site cut, factory made bends where site bending is
not possible, factory
made and threaded fittings with flanges as required, concrete tight where requir
ed. Conforming to British
Standard BS- 4568 Class 4 heavy protection, ASTA certified to British Electrical
System Association
(B.E.S.A.) Certification Scheme.
B. Rigid plastic (PVC) conduit complete with site made heat gun bends to 50mm di
ameter, factory made
bends for conduit larger than 50mm, solvent weld joints with socket couplings, a
nd proper connectors
and adaptors at terminations. Conforming to British Standards BS-4607 and BS-609
9.
C. Galvanized steel flexible liquid-tight metallic conduit with PVC shielding co
mplete with proper and
suitable liquid-tight flexible conduit connectors at terminations shall be used
for connections to
motorized equipment (minimum length 450mm maximum length 600mm with 180 Deg. loo
p.
Conforming to British Standard BS- 4568 similar to Type KEBF by COPEX. All surfa
ce conduit shall be
galvanized steel.
D. Conduit racks shall be Unistrusat Ltd., Electrovert Ltd., "Cantruss", Burndy
Ltd., "B.I.C.C. or approved
equal.
E. Conduits shall not be less than 20mm diameter size, and shall be complete wit
h all necessary threaded
fittings, couplings and connecting devices. Conduits Fire alarm shall be of mini
mum 25mm.
F. Conduits and fittings used for electrical installation shall be manufactured
especially for electric wiring
purposes. When manufactured by a continuous weld process, weld heads both inside
and outside the tube
shall be completely removed prior to galvanizing, i.e.: Seamless.
G. All conduits and fittings shall be free from rust or other defects on deliver
y to the site and shall be
properly stored in covered racking so that it is protected from mechanical damag
e and damage by
weather and water whilst stored on the site.
H. All conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wire ways using brass mal
e bushes. All such bushes
shall be hexagon headed, heavy duty long threaded type.
I. All conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from material equal
to that of the conduit with
which the coupling is to be used, having factory installed packing ring and pres
sure ring to prevent
entrance of moisture. All expansion couplings shall be equipped with earthing ri
ng or earthing conductor.
J. Where exposed conduits are used (plant rooms, electrical rooms, MDF and above
false ceiling) all
conduit runs shall be of galvanized steel and shall be fixed using spacer bar pa
ttern saddles giving not
less than 6mm clearance between the conduit and the surface to which it is fixed
. Saddles shall have
finish to match the conduit and saddle clips shall be secured to the bar by mean
s of brass screws.

Conduits shall be painted to match adjacent finish in line with other sections o
f the specifications.
Pull boxes and Junction Boxes
A. Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Each
shall be suitable in all
respects for the applications, and complete with screw-on hinged covers with gas
kets.
B. The physical size of pull boxes shall be in accordance with the wiring regula
tions to suit the number and
size of conduits and conductors.
C. All motors shall be factory fitted with stud terminals mounted on insulated p
late with appropriate
terminations for field wiring, all housed in a factory fitted terminal box.

Trunking
All cable trunking shall be galvanized heavy duty (minimum 1.0mm thick).
Thickness of cover shall be same as the trunking thickness. Same thickness is ap
plicable for all
accessories. So site fabrication is acceptable. Supply cable/wire retainer and c
ombs inside trunking.
Sizes shall be as shown on drawing.
Sleeves
In concrete slabs, except as noted below, sleeves shall be UPVC with an integral
flange to secure the
sleeve to formwork construction.
Execution
General Conduit and Conductor Installation Requirements
A. Install conduit and conductors concealed in all finished areas, and concealed
to the degree made possible
by finishes in partially finished and unfinished areas. Conduit may be exposed i
n unfinished areas such
as Electrical rooms, Mechanical rooms and similar rooms unless otherwise noted o
n the drawings or
specified herein. Refer to and examine the architectural drawings and room finis
h schedules to determine
finished, partially finished and unfinished areas of the building. Where conduit
s are installed exposed,
they shall be of galvanized steel painted to the Engineer's approval. Where cond
uits are installed
embedded, they shall be of heavy duty rigid PVC.
B. Where conduit and/or conductors are exposed, arrange same to avoid interferen
ce with other work and
parallel to the building lines. Where horizontal conduits and/or conductors are
exposed, install as high as
possible. Do not install conduit and/or conductors within 150mm of "hot" pipes o
r equipment unless the
conduit and/or conductors are associated with the equipment.
C. The drawings do not detail the exact routing of distribution conduits and in
the case of branch circuits do
not indicate the exact sizes or routing of conduit. The contractor shall prepare
rough-in detail drawings
detailing the size and routing of all conduits and shall submit these for the En
gineer's approval prior to
installation.
D. Be responsible for marking the location of all chases and holes on site. Prov
ide dimensioned drawings to
enable a check to be made of all holes and chases in concrete for the Engineer's
review.

Installation of Conduit
1. Provide conduit for all electric service distribution and branch circuit cond
uctors except where
armoured cable is specified and for applications where trunking duct, cable tray
and similar
raceway material is provided.
2. All exposed conduits shall be rigid seamless galvanised steel.
3. All conduits embedded in walls or floors shall be heavy duty rigid PVC.
4. Provide a separate ground conductor in all galvanized conduit. Size in accord
ance with local
regulations with a minimum size of 1.5mm2
5. Generally, distribution conduit is sized on the drawings. Conduit not sized o
n the drawings shall be
sized in accordance with IEE and/or local authority s regulations with 45% space f
actor. Note
that the sizes of branch circuit conductors scheduled and/or specified on the dr
awings are minimum
sizes and must be increased as required to suit length of run and voltage drop i
n accordance with
local requirements. Where conductor sizes are increased to suit voltage drop req
uirements, increase
the scheduled or specified conduit size to suit.
6. The maximum allowable size of conduit for installation in poured concrete wor
k must be
determined in consultation with the Engineer prior to installation. The placemen
t of reinforcing steel
in structural concrete work will take precedence over the placement of conduit.
Multiple runs of
conduit in poured concrete work must be adequately spaced as directed by the Eng
ineer.
Conduits installed in concrete or floor screed shall be sealed watertight. Every
circular box shall be
provided with extension rings. No offset from conduit to box is acceptable.
7. Do not install horizontal runs of conduit in masonry walls.
8. Provide a minimum of two (2) 25mm diameter conduits up to and into ceiling sp
aces from flush
mounted panel boards located below and/or near a hung ceiling.
9. Support all conduit installed underground on well tamped flat bed of earth, f
ree from rocks or
protrusions of any kind.
10. Conduit fittings shall be, unless otherwise noted, constructed of the same m
aterial as the conduit and
suitable in all respects for the application. Flanged couplers shall be used whe
n conduits are
terminated to panels.
11. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from site and checking fro
m drawings the
location of structural steelwork and the positions of holes, steelwork and finis
hes. No steelwork will
be drilled without first obtaining written approval from the Engineer.
12. All sets and bends in conduit runs shall be formed on site in bending machin
es using proper
formers, guides, springs, etc.
13. All conduit systems shall be installed so as to enable wiring to be carried
out by loop-in system that
is, arranged for the draw-in of cables at the outlet points. Where the Contracto
r considers the
installation of draw-in boxes unavoidable, the proposed conduit routes shall be
agreed with the
Engineer before work is put in hand.
14. The drawings provided with this specification indicate the approximate posit
ion only of outlet
points and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to mark out and centre on
site, the final
positions and he shall also be responsible for their accuracy.
15. The Contractor's attention is specially drawn to the necessity for keeping a
ll conduit entirely
separate from other piping services as direct connections will not be permitted
between the
conduits and such pipes, except where earthing is required. Conduit runs shall b
e determined by the
Contractor and agreed by the Engineer that cables installed in any particular ru
n are easily
withdrawable.
16. Conduit systems shall be mechanically continuous and water-tight after insta
llation. Conduit shall
be installed in such a manner as to ensure against the collection of trapped con
densation.
17. Runs of conduit between draw-in positions shall not have more than two right
angle bends or the
equivalent and the length of such runs shall be limited to permit the easy drawi
ng-in of cables.
The Contractor shall demonstrate as required by the Engineer that cables install
ed in any
particular run are easily withdrawable.
18. Draw-in boxes shall be provided in all straight conduit runs at intervals no
t exceeding 9m and
in runs containing two right-angled bends at intervals not exceeding 7.5m.
19. Where conduits cross expansion joints, the Contractor shall install expansio
n couplers at the
position of the expansion joint and at right angles to it.
20. Where conduit runs terminate in cable trunking, the termination shall be mad
e with flanged
couplings as specified for adaptable box entries.
21. Where conduit runs terminate in the boxes, the termination shall be made wit
h flanged couplings as
specified for adaptable boxes.
22. Where conduits enter boxes with tapped threads less than 20mm, the terminati
on shall be made with a
brass spout nipple.
23. Outlet boxes for wall lighting points shall be flush with the wall surfaces
unless indicated on the
drawings and twin parallel spout entries provided if necessary for looping purpo
ses. Outdoor outlets
shall be provided with grommets, gaskets and rust proof cover plate. Ball type o
utlets shall be used
to connect pendent lights with ceiling outlets through G.I conduits. No plug in
ceiling rose is
required in electrical-mechanical room and similar rooms.
24. Outlet boxes for luminaires shall be of the loop-in type where the installat
ion is concealed and the
Contractor shall allow for terminating arrangement and install any additional dr
aw-in boxes required
in accessible locations.
25. For luminaires fed by concealed cables and having boxes fitted flush with th
e ceilings, the
Contractor shall include for all the necessary extension rings or break joint ri
ngs. Pattress shall
be fitted where required to outlets on surface runs.
26. Heavy distance saddles shall be used for surface fixings of steel conduit.
27. Where any surface mounting control gear or other equipment is to be installe
d in conjunction with
concealed conduit work, the conduit shall be terminated at a flush mounted circu
lar or adaptable
box. The back of the equipment shall be drilled and bushed for back entry and th
e equipment
mounted so as to conceal the adaptable box.
28. Where conduits are specified in floor screeds, the Contractor must carefully
check the proposed
screed depths at all positions before installing conduits and shall, wherever po
ssible, arrange to
cross conduits where there is ample thickness of screed. If at isolated position
s, the crossing of
conduits in shallow screeds cannot be avoided, arrangements may be made to set t
he lower conduit
into a shallow chase performed in the slab, subject to the agreement of the Engi
neer.
29. The Contractor shall provide attendance during the pouring of concrete to en
sure that conduits and
accessories are not displaced or damaged.
30. No wiring shall be carried out before the particular section of the conduit
installation to be wired is
complete to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Erection of Metallic Conduits

A. The conduit shall be properly and tightly screwed between the various lengths
and to the boxes to
which it runs and terminates, so that the wiring is continuously and effectively
protected throughout
its entire length. The entire system shall be electrically and mechanically cont
inuous throughout
forming a completely bonded system, the whole being efficiently earthed in the s
upply point.
B. Where conduits are connected by means of a socket, the ends of the conduits s
hall butt together in the
centre of the socket and, except in the case of running joints, no exposed threa
ds shall be visible after
erection.
C. Where running joints are used, they shall be thoroughly coated immediately af
ter erection with cold
galvanizing primer and then painted. Where the finish of conduit is damaged in e
rection, it shall be
immediately made good with cold galvanized primer and an approved metallic paint
.
D. The inside surface and ends of conduits and fittings used in connection there
with, shall be smooth, cut
square and free from burrs and all other defects. Reamers shall be used on the e
nds of all conduits
after screw threads have been cut and all grease, enamel, etc. removed.
E. All steel conduits shall be jointed with solid screwed couplings and flanged
couplers at distribution
board.
F. All threads shall be clean and free from rust. Approved type lubricant shall
be used wherever threads
are cut.
G. All conduit outlets in malleable cast iron boxes and Tucson boxes shall be ad
equately spaced from the
edges of the box to allow correct fitting of nuts. Throats and bushings to be in
stalled at the ends of all
conduits.

Conduit Supports and Fixings

A. Surface mounted conduits shall be secured (at a maximum interval of 1.2m) by
means of space-bar
saddles where multiple runs occur. 'Distance' saddles shall be used on individua
l runs such as down
drops to switches and plug points.
B. In no case shall conduits be mounted directly on the surface of walls and cei
lings, a minimum space of
6mm to the back of the conduit being required.
C. All fixing shall be by means of screws and/or bolts. Where walls are plugged,
special plugs or plugging
material shall be used for fixing purposes. Wood plugs are not acceptable.
D. The use of crampets is restricted to securing of conduits in wall chases pend
ing plastering of other
finishes.
E. In ceiling voids and similar spaces where conduits pass across ceiling beams,
plain stamped saddles
shall be used. Elsewhere, on fair faced brickwork 12mm saddles shall be used, wi
th cast iron saddles
on rough concrete and brickwork.
Cleaning
The conduit outlets when installed and before wiring shall be temporarily closed
by means of well-fitting
wooden plugs, and immediately before cables are drawn in, conduit systems shall
be thoroughly swabbed out
until they are dry and clean.
Erection of Flexible Conduits
A. All conduits must be secured to outlet boxes, junction boxes or cabinets by p
lacing locknuts on
outside of box and locknuts and bushings on the inside of box.
B. Conduits connecting recessed fixtures and their adjacent junction boxes must
be flexible metallic
conduit 20mm (3/4") minimum size and shall be of sufficient length to permit the
dropping of the
fixture below the ceiling to gain access to the junction box.
C. Conduit to motors shall be terminated in the conduit fittings on the motors,
the final connection
being made with liquid tight low acid PVC coated metallic tight flexible conduit
and suitable liquid
tight connectors.
D. A green insulated 4mm2 (minimum) tinned copper earth connection shall be made
between the solid
conduit or cable sheath and the equipment, the copper cable being run inside the
flexible conduit.
Couplings fitted to removable covers or non-metallic equipment etc., shall be bo
nded to the earthing
terminal of the equipment etc. Where changes to flexible conduits occur, a water
tight outlet box with
threaded entries shall be inserted and the earth connection made to an internal
terminal. The cover
screws shall not be used for earthing connections. Refer to the Contract Documen
ts for sizes of
earthing conductors relative to associated circuit protective devices.

Draw Wires in Conduits

A. 2mm galvanized iron draw wire or approved equal shall be left in every condui
t which is left by
the Contractor for installation of wires and cables. The draw wire shall have a
tensile strength not
less than 90 kg.
B. No less than 300mm of slack shall be left at each end of the draw wire.
Color Coding for Exposed Conduits, trunking and bottom side of cable trays.
A. Provide color coding stripes as specified hereinafter. Stripes shall be 20mm
wide and 100mm long.
Where dual color coding is indicated, the base color stripe shall be 75mm long,
the secondary color
stripe 25mm long to form a total stripe length of 100mm. Stripes shall be placed
at 4m intervals.
B. Color Coding:

Fire alarm system

Red
CCTV & Security System
Blue
Lighting
Yellow
Small Power
Green
Telephone
Grey
Intercom
Beige
Low Voltage systems
Purple
BMS
Orange
Public address systems
Pink
Emergency/EXIT lighting
Purple

Color Coding
Installation of Pull boxes and Junction boxes
A. Provide pull boxes in conduit systems wherever necessary to facilitate conduc
tor installations.
Generally, conduit runs exceeding 30m in length, or with more than two (2) 90 de
grees bends shall be
equipped with a pull box installed at a convenient and suitable intermediate loc
ation.
B. Provide a junction box wherever required and where shown and/or specified on
the drawings.
C. All pull boxes and junction boxes must be accessible after the building is co
mpleted.
D. Accurately locate and identify all concealed pull boxes and junction boxes on
"as- built" record
drawings.
E. Support and secure all boxes independent of the conduit or cable connected th
ereto.
F. Install identification labels indicating system name on all pull boxes and ju
nction boxes.

Installation of Sleeves
A. Where conduits, raceways and conductors pass through structural poured concre
te, supply sleeves,
unless otherwise noted.
B. Size sleeves, unless otherwise noted, to leave 12mm clearance around the cond
uit, raceway, etc. Pack
and seal the void between the sleeves and the conduit, raceway, conductor etc. f
or the length of the
sleeves as follows:
C. Seal all sleeves with a one part intumescent elastomer, equal to 3m Brand Fir
e Barrier Caulk CP25.
Putty 303, sealing systems 7902 or 7904 series, composite sheet CS-195 or wrap s
top FS-195.
D. Interior partition sleeves: 1.5mm thick steel, galvanized.
E. Sleeves in Exterior Walls and Floors: Cast iron complete with pre-manufacture
d sealing rings and
pressure bushings of proper size. Keep pressure bushings accessible for future t
ightening.
F. Sleeves through Floors: To extend 50mm above finished floors unless otherwise
shown. All sleeves
for future use shall be capped.
G. Electrical riser closets shaft edge to extend 100mm above the finished floor
as an upstand.
H. Sleeves through roofs must be sheet metal flashing with sloping flanges betwe
en two layers of roofing
material and separate watertight counterflashing on conduit.
I. In poured concrete construction, accurately locate sleeves, and turn these sl
eeves over to the division
performing the concrete work for placement in the concrete formwork.
J. Submit to the concrete reinforcement detailer at the proper times, drawings,
indicating all required
sleeves, recesses and formed openings in poured concrete work. Such drawings sha
ll be completely
and accurately dimensioned and shall relate sleeves, recesses and formed opening
s to suitable grid
lines and elevation datum.
K. "Gang" type sleeping will be permitted only with the Engineer's approval.
L. Terminate sleeves for work which will be exposed so that the sleeve is flush
at both ends with the
wall, partition or slab surface so that the sleeves may be completely covered by
escutcheon plates.
M. Openings for multiple conduit or conductor runs, etc., will be provided by th
e division responsible for
the particular construction in which the opening is required. Carefully co-ordin
ate the opening
locations with the particular division and ensure that openings are suitably siz
ed and located. Seal the
space between the opening and the conduit, conductors, etc. for the length of th
e opening as for
sleeves in paragraph 2.1 above.
N. Where a round or formed opening is required, where placement of a sleeve has
been missed, or where
provision of an opening has not been properly co- ordinated, neatly cut a suitab
ly sized hole or
opening using proper tools to the approval of the Engineer. Prior to cutting any
such holes or
openings, determine whether or not any reinforcing steel or services, are concea
led behind the surface
where the hole or opening is to be cut and be responsible for all costs incurred
for correcting any
damage caused to the structure or services due to cutting holes or openings with
out prior study and
approval of the Engineer.
Installation of Inserts, Beam Clamps and Fasteners for Conduit Raceway Etc and E
quipment Hangers and
Supports.
A. Provide all inserts, beam clamps, fasteners, and similar hardware required fo
r conduit, duct, raceway,
conductor, etc., and equipment hanger and/or support materials unless otherwise
noted for casting into
concrete in accordance with specification.
B. Accurately and properly set concrete inserts in the concrete framework. Every
items in the areas
supported from soffit of the slab shall be fixed using inserts or bridge. No dri
lling in the concrete slab
is acceptable for fixing/supporting whatever items in any areas. This is applica
ble for all divisions of
this project.
C. For runs of three (3) or more conduits, raceways, or conductors in concrete f
ormwork, use multiple
type inserts used for the smallest conduit in the group.
D. Fasten hangers and support provisions to brick or masonry with expansion shie
lds and machine bolts,
or for light loads, use plugs and screws.
E. In cavity walls and/or ceilings use two (2) wing toggles and for heavy loads,
provide steel anchor
plates with two (2) or more toggles to spread the load.
F. Provide beam clamps for attaching, hanging and/or support provisions to struc
tural steel, or where
approved by the Architect, weld the hanging and support provisions to the struct
ural steel.
G. Explosive power actuated fasteners will not be permitted.
H. Use fibre or lead screw anchors for anchoring screws.

Access Doors
A. Access doors shall be provided under other divisions of the contract for the
particular type of
construction in which the access door is to be installed.
B. Prepare detail drawings indicating exact size and location of all access door
s required by this division
and submit to the Engineer for review. Access doors are required to access trays
, pull boxes, junction
boxes, VAV s, MFDs SFD s, and control panels.
C. Indicate access panels on "As built" drawings and note at each location the i
tems that access is being
provided for.
D. Provide lamacoid labels (white on black), screwed or riveted in place, for al
l access doors and access
tiles listing items or equipment which access is being provided for unless other
wise directed by the
Engineer.
Painting and Finishes
A. Painting of exposed electrical work will be done as part of the work.
B. All exposed electrical fittings, supports, hangers, frames conduit, racks, bo
xes, raceways and similar
material and apparatus within service room and similar rooms without false ceili
ng shall be galvanized
and finished with corrosion resistant primer ready to accept paint. Take special
care when priming
work exposed to the elements or in wet areas to prevent rust or corrosion from d
amaging adjacent
surfaces. Final finish color to be approved by the Engineer.
C. All large switchgear, transformers, distribution centres, panel board, starte
rs, disconnects or similar
apparatus shall be factory finished in gloss air dry enamel over corrosion resis
tant sealer primer.
Unless specified to the contrary, this finish shall be RAL 7032.

Standard Identification
A. Identify electrical work as specified below.
B. For each piece of electrical distribution equipment from the electrical sourc
e of supply up to and
including panel boards and motor systems, for special control panels and cabinet
s, and for any other
piece of equipment where specified in this section, provide engraved lamacoid id
entification
nameplates. Nameplates shall generally be black-white-black with bevelled edges,
secured to
apparatus with stainless steel screws. Warning signs shall be red with white let
tering.
C. Equip large multiple cell or component apparatus such as switchboards and dis
tribution panels with
main nameplates identifying the equipment, voltage characteristics and capacity,
and with subnameplates
clearly identifying each cell or component and its service.
D. Panel board nameplates shall identify the panel board references and numbers
designated on the
drawings, unless otherwise instructed. All nameplates for disconnect switches, c
ontrol panels, all
components of electrical systems, LV systems, fire alarm system, BMS, , MDB s, MCC s
, SMDB s,
DB s and all cabinets/boards/panels under all divisions shall outline their servic
e in English and
Arabic. Size of name plate and front plate shall be approved by the Engineer.
E. Motor starters, magnetic and manual, shall identify the piece of motorized eq
uipment being serviced.
F. Exact nameplate wording and sizes must be approved by and confirmed by the En
gineer prior to
manufacture.
G. Directories for branch circuit panel boards shall be clearly and neatly typew
ritten, accurately
identifying the type, location and wattage of the connected load for each circui
t breaker. Directories
shall be secured to the rear of the cabinet door under protective plastic. Incor
porate copies of all
panel board directories in each copy of operating and instruction manuals.
H. Clearly identify each branch circuit breaker with Z-type markers chevron cut
in a permanent manner
to correspond with directories. Glued paper identification will not be acceptabl
e.
I. Clearly identify main pull or junction boxes (excluding obvious outlet boxes)
by painting the outside
of the covers. Schedules of colors shall be as stated before.

In addition to painting miscellaneous signal boxes, clearly identify the specifi

c system in which the
box is installed by means of securely attached lugs on the inside of the cover p
late.
J. Color code empty conduit capped and terminated for future use as specified ab
ove and clearly identify
its intended use by means of securely attached tags on the inside of the cover p
late.
K. Conductors shall be color coded, throughout to identify phases, neutrals and
grounds, by means of
colored conductor insulation. Colors shall be as follows:
Conductors
Colors
Phase R
Red
Phase Y
Yellow
Phase B
Blue
Ground
Green/Yellow
Neutral
Black
Control
A/C Orange/D.C. Grey

Conductors
L. Control conductors, in addition, shall be numbered with Critchley Markers, or
Electrovert Ltd., Z-type
markers or equal. Color code conductors, for special component manufacturer's re
commendations.
M. All cables shall be labelled using Critchley markers at both ends of terminat
ion.
N. All wires shall be terminated using porcelain barrel type connectors or appro
ved equal. All multistring
wires and cables shall be crimped with lugs before termination. This applies to
all types of wires and
cables for all divisions in this project for site installations and also any wir
ing done at manufacture s
place.

Equipment Curbs, Bases and Supports

A. Set all floor-mounted equipment on 100mm high concrete housekeeping pads 100m
m wider and
longer than the equipment base dimensions unless otherwise directed by the Engin
eer for technical
reasons. Coordinate pad locations and surface treatment.
B. Furnish dimensioned drawings, templates and anchor bolts for proper setting o
f equipment on bases
and pads. Provide all structural steel frames, brackets, etc., for equipment bas
es and supports unless
otherwise noted, and be responsible for all required levelling, alignment and gr
outing of the
equipment.

Excavation and Backfill

A. For all electrical cables excavation, excavate to 750mm or 1200mm as applicab
le below and a
minimum of 200mm to either side of the cable or duct run. Fill back with a beddi
ng of granular 'A'
gravel or sand. Provide necessary cable marker, concrete tiles if cable level is
less than 600mm below
ground level. Brass cable service identification plates shall be provided every
20m run and on change
of direction.
B. Refer to the Contract Documents and to local authority s requirements for concr
ete encased duct
installation.
C. Where excavation is necessary in proximity to and below the level of any foot
ings, bed with concrete
to the level of the highest adjacent footing. Concrete strength shall be as dire
cted by the Engineer.
Prior to commencing work approval of all intended work shall be given by the Eng
ineer.
D. Carry out pavement cutting and repair of the Public Property as may be requir
ed for excavation and
backfill work.

Cutting and Patching

Inform other trades in time concerning required openings. In work already finish
ed, cutting and patching
shall be done by the trades installing the affected work at the expense of the G
eneral Contractor. Obtain the
approval of the Engineer before commencing with work.
14.6 Cable trays for electrical systems
General
Section Includes
A. Cable trays and accessories.
B. Firestopping within (not around) cable trays.
C. Related
References
ASTM A123/A123M
Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2012.
ASTM A653/A653M
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
NEMA VE 1
Metallic Cable Tray Systems; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2009.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most
Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All
Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
A. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be install
ed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
B. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, pip
ing, equipment and
other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
C. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, an
d equipment installed
under other sections or by others.
D. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that prese
rve the integrity of the
roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
E. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain direction
before proceeding with work.

Sequencing:
A. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of cond
uit is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions f
or storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations o
f supports.

Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilit
ies within 500 km
of Project.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitabl
e for the purpose specified
and indicated.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store cable trays in accordance with manufacturer'
s instructions.
Products
General
A. The cable trough system shall be of one manufacturer and shall include factor
y made trays, tray
fittings, connections, complete with accessories and supports to from a complete
tray support system.
B. The cable trough system shall include the following factory made tray element
s.

Straight trays and ladders, fittings and horizontal and vertical bends of variou
s angles crosses, tees,
wyes, reducers, vertical riser elements, connectors, joint plates and all necess
ary fixing accessories
including supports. No local or site fabrication of any cable trough system incl
uding ceiling and wall
supports are acceptable. Threaded rods for ceiling supports are not acceptable.
Cable Trough
A. The whole of the tray work, fittings, and supports shall be of mild steel hot
dipped galvanised after
manufacture. The thickness of the protective sheath on any element shall not be
less than 60 microns.
B. Cable trays shall be constructed from mild steel of minimum thickness 16 gaug
e (1.5mm). Height
shall be 60mm. Trays in excess of 300mm width shall be of minimum thickness 14 g
auge (2.0mm).
Flange height shall be 100mm.
C. Insert elements, bolts, screws, pins etc., shall be mild steel cadmium plated
/hot dip galvanized.
D. Tray work shall have oval perforations. Ladder type trays shall be used as re
quired and/or approved
by the Engineer.
E. All trays (straight and fittings) to be heavy duty returned flanged type unle
ss specified otherwise.
F. Tray component are to be accurately rolled or formed to close tolerance and a
ll edges rounded.
Flanges are to have full round smooth edges.
G. Ladder racks for widths up to and including 300mm shall be constructed from r
olled steel sections of
minimum thickness 16 gauge (1.5mm). Height shall be 60mm.
H. Ladders in excess of 300mm width shall be C Section construction with a minim
um thickness of 14
gauge (2.0mm). Height shall be 100mm. The rungs shall be spaced at a maximum 300
mm.
I. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, cable trays shall be used in the rang
e and 150mm to 750mm
wide, in five preferred standard sizes: 150, 300, 450, 600 and 750mm.
J. Other sizes shall be used where specified or previously agreed with the Engin
eer.
K. Return flanges shall be a minimum of 10mm deep, unless otherwise specified.
L. Minimum radii at side rails, horizontal, and vertical tees and crosses shall
be in accordance with the
Manufacturer's standard.
M. Refer to Specification in Section 05500 and the Architectural Contract Drawin
gs for description of
cable tray/ladder/girder of widths 1000mm and larger.

Execution
Installation
A. Install all cable trays and ladder racks strictly in accordance with IEE and
local authorities
requirements.
B. Drilling, machining or cutting shall not be carried out after application of
protective coat, unless
previously agreed by the Engineer. If cutting or drilling is necessary, edges sh
all be cleaned up
and painted with zinc based paint before erection.
C. Provision shall be made when installing all cables and cable trays for the ex
pansion and settlement
of the building.
D. Cables shall be fixed to the trays/ladders by means of PVC cleats and flame r
etardant cleats for
flame/fireproof cables with galvanised bolts, nuts and washers. Use galvanized m
etal trefoil cleats
with rubber pad for single core cables
E. Control cables run and clipped in groups shall not exceed twelve in number an
d shall be not more
than double banked. Power cables shall be laid in a single layer except with the
prior approval of the
Engineer. Power cables should be spaced 2D between centres of cables throughout
the run of cables.
Submit calculations for voltage drop for cables and increase the size if necessa
ry.
F. Vertical distance between trays mounted horizontally shall be minimum of 250m
m.

Local reduction of distances between trays will be allowed to a minimum of 150mm

with approval
from the Engineer.
G. Trays shall be adequately supported to prevent sagging by more than 3 Deg. be
tween fixed points.
All supporting steelwork shall be fixed at not more than 1 metre centres unless
otherwise
specified.
H. Where cable tray pass through floor arrange for 100mm concrete curb around op
ening and fire
sealants shall be provided.
I. The Contractor shall submit calculations relating to tray / ladder work and t
ray / ladder supports
demonstrating acceptable mechanical stresses and sag.
J. Where cable tray must pass below a beam a short length of tray shall be insta
lled on the underside of
the beam with 25mm spacers between the tray and the beam underside surface. Cabl
es shall be
strapped rigidly to the tray to prevent any possible sag in the cables.
K. Where cable tray is intended to cross a series of beams the tray shall be sup
ported from each
beam it crosses by metal supports suspended from below the underside of the beam
- the space
between the tray and the beam underside surface shall not exceed three times the
diameter of the
largest cable to be carried on the tray.
L. Cable tray covers are only required on roofs or outdoor where cables are inst
alled exposed to
weather conditions.

Earthing
Earthing
A. The entire cable tray and ladder system shall be bonded and 12mm x 1.5mm tinn
ed copper shall be
bolted across each joint in the system by means of galvanised nuts and bolts, co
mplete with flat
and spring washers.
B. Tray systems shall be bonded to the main building earthing system as required
or directed by the
Engineer.

Fire Barriers
A. Arrange for opening in fire rated walls, and floor for width and depth of cab
le trough to run through
in addition to the specified clearance of the above cable trays.
B. Arrange and make good fire rating of floors or walls after cables have been i
nstalled.

For all floor openings of all risers (telephone, power) except vertical telecom
cable risers where
grating shall be provided.
C. All openings / sleeves within floor slabs and fire rated walls shall be seale
d with proper fire
rated material.
14.7 Wiring Accessories
General
Section Includes
Accessories.
Reference Standard
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Mos
t Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d Supplements.
B. Sheet steel outlet box comply with BS 1353, BS 46621
C. Socket outlet comply with BS 1363

Administrative Requirements
Coordination:
Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract document
s. Obtain direction before
proceeding with work.

Sequencing:
Do not begin installation of wiring accessories until installation of conduit is
complete between outlet,
junction and splicing points.
Submittals
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
wiring accessories
Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescrib
es execution
requirements.

Delivery, Storage and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manu
facturer's instructions.
Products
Standard Outlet Boxes and Conduit Boxes
A. Sheet steel outlet boxes conforming to standards set by British Standards BS-
1353 and BS-4662l.
B. Galvanized conduit boxes and fittings conforming to Standards set by British
Standard BS-4568 Class
4 Heavy Protection ASTA certified to British Electrical Systems Association (B.E
.S.A.) certification
scheme as manufactured by Barton or equal.
C. Metallic conduit boxes shall be used throughout all conduit raceway systems,
and shall comply with,
or be of demonstrated equivalent quality and performance to BS- 4568 requirement
s. All boxes shall
be galvanized, zinc plated or equal rust-proofed finish equivalent to conduit fi
nish.
D. For surface exposed conduit installations, circular and/or rectangular boxes
shall be used for pull
boxes and terminating boxes, according to size and number of conduits connected
to box. Boxes shall
be either malleable iron or heavy duty steel construction with welded joints and
tapped holes to
receive metal threaded cover retaining screws. Self-tapping screws will not be p
ermitted.
E. All boxes, other than those to which a fitting or accessory is to be directly
mounted, shall be fitted
with covers screwed to the box by brass screws. Malleable iron covers shall be u
sed with malleable
iron boxes and heavy gauge steel covers shall be used with sheet steel boxes.
F. All cover and accessory fixing provisions shall be so positioned that the fix
ing screws lie completely
clear of cables entering the box. All fixing screws shall be brass.
G. All boxes installed in exterior locations, plantrooms, janitor's room, ducts
etc., shall be fitted with
approved type gaskets to provide a waterproof seal approved type gaskets to prov
ide a waterproof seal
between box and cover or other item fitted to the box.
H. All boxes other than those on which accessories or any item of equipment is t
o be mounted, or at
which flexible connections are to terminate, shall be provided with internal fix
ed brass earth terminals.
I. Patent box galvanized metal spacers shall be used to interlock both verticall
y and horizontally
between adjacent single gang boxes to achieve correct alignment and spacing betw
een overlapping
accessory plates.
J. All boxes provided as junction boxes where cable joints are specified or perm
itted, shall be provided
with fixed terminal blocks. Such boxes shall be of adequate size to contain the
terminal block and
sufficient cable to allow neat connections to be made. The terminal blocks shall
be fixed to the box by
brass screws and shall comprise brass conductor connectors, with brass clamping
screws enclosed in
porcelain or other heat resisting insulation material which will not distort or
otherwise have its
properties damaged by temperatures below the highest temperature at which the in
sulation of any
cable connected to it is destroyed.
K. Each outlet box must be suitable in all respects for the application, and com
plete with securing lugs,
knockouts, and where necessary, suitable plaster rings, concrete rings, covers a
nd any other required
accessory.
L. Provide blank cover plates for all boxes without wiring devices. Material and
cover to the approval of
the Engineer.

Standard Line Voltage Socket, Outlets and Plates

A. 13 Amp Socket Outlets:
1. All socket outlets shall comply with BS-1363 and shall incorporate switches u
nless specifically
indicated otherwise on the drawings or in these specifications.
2. Switched socket interiors shall be mounted to a grid assembly which shall hav
e provision for both
lateral and vertical adjustment. The grid shall be of 16 swg mild steel zinc pla
ted or approved
equal.
3. Socket outlet tunnel type terminals shall be of adequate capacity to accept t
wo 4mm sq. phase
conductors and one 4.0mm sq. earth conductor.
4. Wall mounting socket outlet boxes shall be a minimum of 40mm deep rust- proof
ed by
galvanizing or equal finish and complete with a brass earthing stud secured to t
he back of the box.
5. Surface pattern outlet boxes shall be either steel or cast iron, supplied wit
h knockouts for drilling
on site.
6. Socket outlets shall be provided in accordance with the following schedule:
a. Socket outlets shall be screwless fascia similar to MK Accent Range or Wandsw
orth Classic
Series 3 or crabtree, white finished or matching surrounding wall finish color (
to be agreed
with the Engineer during construction in consent with employer).
b. Surface mounted outlets for use in area such as, service rooms and electrical
rooms shall be
metal face plates. Color of faceplate shall be gray.
c. Socket outlets denoted as weatherproof (WP) or used in mechanical and pump ro
oms shall be
similar to MK Masterseal 56482 twin 13 amps switched socket side wired.

B. All wiring accessories shall be screwless type except those which are above f
alse ceiling in hidden
locations and weatherproof. Color of plate shall be same surrounding where they
are mounted.
C. Light switches denoted as weather proof (WP) shall be provided with IP55 prot
ection.
D. Miscellaneous outlets:
1. 13A switched fused connection unit shall be similar to MK 15731 WH1 plastic s
crew less in
concealed locations or Wandsworth series 3MSS wall color on visible locations as
described
before.
2. 20A double pole switch with neon indicator and flexible outlet shall be simil
ar to MK 15002
+15409+15399 RED screw less in concealed locations or Wandsworth series 3 in vis
ible
locations.
3. 13A-switched socket outlet with neon indicator shall be similar to MK screw l
ess range concealed
locations or Wandsworth series 3 in visible locations.
4. Emergency stop button, mushroom head complete with actuator, contact block, l
egend, enclosure
and auto-lock key release, equal to "Crabtree" 22509/MR.

Safety Switches (Isolators

A. Safety switches shall conform to IEC 947 - 3 and IEC 609473 and shall be heav
y duty type with
ampere capacity for AC23 duty type.
B. Each safety switch shall be front operated with a handle suitable for padlock
ing in the "OFF" position
and arranged so that the enclosure cover cannot be opened while the handle is in
the "ON" position.
Operating mechanisms shall be quick-make, quick-break, positive acting with visi
ble blades and a line
terminal shield. Each unit shall also be equipped with solderless lugs and a fro
nt cover nameplate
identifying the catalogue number and electrical characteristics.
C. Enclosures for safety switches shall be weather proof enclosures, type IP55,
made from die cast
aluminium.
D. The ampere rating and number of poles, for safety switches shall be as specif
ied on the drawings, or
required by equipment manufacturer whichever is higher.
Other Requirements
Every accessories or items such as lights, switches, sockets, outlets, speakers,
detectors, displays, buttons,
cameras etc. shall be provided with clean fascia without any visible screws, riv
ets, springs, fixing hardware,
product logo etc. These accessories and items fascia shall be as directed and ap
proved by the Engineer for
material, finish and color. The color of these accessories or items mounted in t
he wall shall match color of
wall. If they are mounted in ceiling they shall have same color as ceiling. Make
any changes required by
engineer to these accessories or items. Written approval shall be obtained from
the Engineer if there are any
deviations for these accessories or items. The Engineers decision will be final.

Execution
Installation of Outlet Boxes
A. Provide an outlet box for each lighting fixture, wiring device, telephone out
let and any other outlet
specified herein or shown or specified on the drawings, unless otherwise noted.
Provide galvanised
metal back box for every items mounted in wall and ceiling slab/false ceiling. I
P rating of box as per
area of application.
B. Generally, mounting heights and locations for outlets are shown on the drawin
gs and/or specified
herein, however, confirm the exact location and arrangement of all outlets with
the Engineer prior to
roughing-in. Architectural drawings and the Architect's instructions have preced
ence over electrical
drawing diagrammatic layouts and specified mounting heights and locations.
C. Do not install outlet boxes "back-to-back" in walls and partitions. Such outl
ets must be staggered and
sealed against noise transmission. "Thru-Wall" type outlet boxes will not be per
mitted for any
application.
D. Support and secure boxes independent of the conduit or cable connected theret
o.
E. All recessed outlet boxes for surface mounted devices or lighting fixtures mu
st be totally concealed by
the device or fixture. Face plate final finish of switches, socket outlets, tele
phone and data outlets
shall match surrounding finish unless instructed by the Engineer.

Installation of Standard Line Voltage, Socket Outlets and Plates

A. Provide socket outlets in locations shown and/or specified on the drawings.
B. Equip each socket outlet with a faceplate with an opening or openings suitabl
e for the device it
conceals. Secure faceplates to the device frames with metal screws finished to m
atch the faceplate,
except for wall installations, where they shall be screw less type.
C. Submit to the Engineer, for approval, a sample of each standard outlet to be
utilized on the project.
D. Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit providing distance does
not exceed 5m and
information is given before installation.
E. Final finish of the faceplates shall match the surrounding finishes unless ot
herwise instructed by the
Engineer.

Installation of Incandescent Dimmer Switches

A. Install dimmer switches to manufacturer s recommendations.
B. When grouping dimmers refer to manufacturers requirements regarding de rating
of dimming
switches.

Installation of Safety Switches (Disconnects)

A. Provide disconnects:
a. Wherever shown on required on the contract documents.
b. Wherever required by starter schedule drawings.
c. For motorized equipment which cannot be seen from the motor starter location
or is more than
10m away from the starter location.
d. For all "packaged" equipment supplied by other Divisions and fed from a motor
starter panel.
e. Where required by local regulations.
B. Enclosures for safety switches mounted indoors although not exposed to the we
ather and above false
ceiling shall be Type IP54.
C. Enclosures for safety switches mounted outdoors or in locations exposed to th
e weather shall be
weatherproof type IP65.
D. Where safety switches are not within reach of equipment shall be mushroom typ
e lockable pull / push
EMERGENCY stop button.

14.8 Identification for electrical systems

General
Section Includes
A. Electrical identification requirements.
B. Identification nameplates and labels.
C. Wire and cable markers.
D. Voltage markers.
E. Underground warning tape.
F. Floor marking tape.
G. Warning signs and labels.

Reference Standards
ANSI Z535.2
American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2007.
ANSI Z535.4
American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2007.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edit
ion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d
Supplements.
UL 969
Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination:
1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identi
fied prior to
fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended c
eilings, until
identification products have been installed.
2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and paint
ing are complete.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalogue pages and data sheets
for each product.
B. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed
designations,
materials, legends, and formats.
C. Samples:
1. Identification Nameplates: One of each type and color specified.
2. Warning Signs and Labels: One of each type and legend specified.
Quality Assurance
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
Field Conditions
Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommen
ded by manufacturer.
Products
Identification Requirements
A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to re
main that are not already
identified in accordance with specified requirements.
B. Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distributio
n and control
equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Switchboards:
1) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within si
ght of
equipment.
2) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch devic
e. Do not
identify spares and spaces.

b. Motor Control Centers:

1) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch devic
e. Do not
identify spares and spaces.

C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519
.
2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code f
or ungrounded
and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder o
r branchcircuit
distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by mo
re
than one nominal voltage system.

Identification Nameplates and Labels

A. Identification Nameplates:
1. Materials:
2. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up
to 25 mm high;
Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:
1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, h
eat, and abrasion
resistant.
2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten
text unless
otherwise indicated.

Wire and Cable Markers

A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth,
wrap-around selfadhesive
vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or v
inyl split sleeve
type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.
B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by n
ylon cable ties.
C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Minimum Text Height: 3 mm.
F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

Voltage Markers
A. Minimum Size:
B. Legend:
C. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.

Underground Warning and Tape

A. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct buri
al, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Non-detectable Type Tape: 152 mm wide, with minimum thickness of 0.1 mm.
C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.
D. Color:

Floor Marking Tape

Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive
vinyl or polyester tape
with over laminate, 76 mm wide, with alternating black and white stripes.
Warning Signs and Labels
A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.
B. Warning Signs:
1. Materials:
2. Minimum Size: 178 by 254 mm unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:
1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester
or self-adhesive
vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using
materials
recognized to UL 969.
2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and ac
cessories
recommended by label manufacturer.
3. Minimum Size: 51 mm by 102 mm unless otherwise indicated.
 Execution
Preparation
Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instruct
ions.
Installation
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjust
ment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment w
ith rear access.
4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of i

tem being identified.
D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel sc
rews and to interior
surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no
bubbles or wrinkles
and edges properly sealed.
F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench
at 75 mm below
finished grade.

14.9 Switchboards
General
Section Includes

A. Switchboards.
B. Sub-main board.

Scope of Work
A. Supply, install and connect all main distribution equipment and make the util
ity service
connections all as described hereinafter and in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract
Documents.
B. Supply, install and connect, QRM, TRM all as described in drawing and as per
ADDC
specification
C. Supply, install and connect 11/0.400KV 1500KVA oil type transformer all as de
scribed in drawing
and as per ADDC specification
D. Supply, lay 11KV MV cable from TRM, QRM up to the transformer including cable
gland,
supports etc as per drawing and ADDC specification
E. Supply, lay 1C 630 Sq.mm XLPE/AWA/PVC cable from Transformer to Main Switch B
oard as
per drawings and specification.
F. The switchboards shall comprise of main breakers, indicating instruments and
outgoing breakers to
provide a complete service and distribution system for the whole complex.
G. Generally the sub-distribution shall be carried out by means of:

XLPE/SWA/PVC multi-core armoured cables to the various locations terminating at

distribution
panel boards, M.C.C. panels and items of electrical equipment.
Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be install
ed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, pip
ing, equipment
and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, an
d equipment installed
under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that prese
rve the integrity of
the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:

Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit

is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.
Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions f
or storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations o
f supports.

Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilit
ies within 300 km of
Project.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitabl
e for the purpose specified
and indicated.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer
's instructions.
Products
TRM, QRM & 11/.400KV 1500 KVA Transformer
A. Provide TRM, QRM as detailed on the drawings and as per ADDC specification
B. Provide 11/0.400KV 1500KVA oil type Transformer as detailed on the drawings a
nd as per ADDC
specification

400/230 Volt Switchboards

A. Provide switchboards as specified hereinafter and as detailed on the drawings
.
B. General Switchboard Criteria.
C. Switchboards shall be 400/230 volt, 3 phase 4 wire 50 cycle AC, IP 42, metal
enclosed for use on solidly
grounded systems. The switchboard shall be in accordance with BS 5486: Part 1, F
orm 4 (Type 6) or equal
to IEC 439-1 and having a minimum class 3 protection IP-42. The switchboards sha
ll incorporate all of the
following:
1. Air circuit breakers up to 3500 amps complying with IEC 947 and as specified
hereinafter.
2. Current limiting and standard type non-fused moulded case circuit breakers an
d as specified
hereinafter.
3. Tested to ASTA certification IEC 439-1 or BS 5486 for a fault rating of 50 KA
for 3 secs at
400 volts or 100 KA for 1 sec. The ASTA certification or equal shall be valid fo
r
switchboard sections as well as field assembled complete switchboards.
4. Tin plated copper bus bars.

D. Casings & Enclosures

1. All switchboards shall be of indoor construction, dead front, metal enclosed
multi-cubicle
type, free standing, dust and vermin protected, front operated and of clean and
modern
appearance. All equipment shall be completely enclosed and the construction of e
ach cell
shall be in such a manner as to permit front and rear access to the interior of
any cell by
isolating the particular switch.
2. All switchboard sections shall be assembled and coordinated by one manufactur
er. Main
switchboards; motor control centers; owner equipment boards and motor control pa
nels used for
four pumps and above are to be Form 4, Type 6. Provide mimic diagram on the faci
a of the
switchboards. Indicating lamps shall be LED type and provide lamp test button. P
rovide
audio-visual alarm for trip indication with mute button. Space heaters shall be
provided with
humidistat and thermostat control, on/off switch and indicating lamp.
3. The main switchboard sections shall be completely made of folded steel constr
uction,
minimum 1.6 mm thickness, fully rustproofed and epoxy powder painted inside and
outside.
Any sheets not painted or any other materials such as Alu.Zinc etc. shall not be
acceptable.
Overall maximum height shall not exceed that shown on the drawings.
4. All external bolts or screw heads shall be brass or cadmium plated, complete
with required
washers.
5. All doors and removable covers or plates shall be provided with high quality
neoprene
gaskets to prevent the ingress of dust, vermin and insects. Doors shall have doo
r handle for
faster open/close but not screws/bolts.
6. All switchboard sections shall be of IP 42 construction in accordance with IE
C 439.
7. Each unit of the switchboards shall be housed in its own cell fittings with a
hinged door
mechanically interlocked in such a manner that the cell door can only be opened
when the
switch is in the 'OFF' position.
8. Switching units shall be arranged in separate compartments or sections to pro
tect against
accidental contact with adjacent equipment when handling the elements in the sec
tion and to
prevent the spreading of faults from one section to the other. Bushings shall be
 provided for all
outgoing cables including control and BMS cables.
9. Adequate cableways shall be provided in switchboards accessible by hinged lid
s or
removable covers. Arrangement shall be such that maximum accessibility is provid
ed to all
parts, incoming and outgoing wires and cables. They shall be factory assembled.
10. The equipment in switchboards shall be accessible with indicating instrument
s mounted not
higher than 1.8m and the centre lines of operating devices not higher than 1.8m
above
switchboard base. Draw out breakers (400amps and above) mounting height shall no
t exceed
1.4m from FFL. Switchboards shall be properly fixed to the floor with foundation
bolts grouted
in the floor / fixed to channel on trench wherever trench is available.
11. All switchboards shall have top or bottom cable/bus duct entry as required.

Basically main incoming cables shall be bottom entry and outgoing cables or bus
ducts top entry,
through suitable termination boxes and gland plates, all accessible from front o
r rear of panel. The
Contractor shall ensure that adequate access and termination provision is incorp
orated in complete
switchboards for all incoming and outgoing cables and bus ducts specified.
12. All panels and equipment shall be certified typed-tested, suitably rated for
operation in the
ambient conditions and supply characteristics stated.
13. Switchboards sections shall contain withdrawable type air circuit breakers,
bus bars, MCCBs,
instruments, earth bus, etc., as specified with ratings and arrangements as show
n on the Drawings
and shall be complete with all internal wiring and connections.
14. All switchboards shall be tested at the manufacturer's premises as well as a
fter installation.
15. The Contractor shall submit all technical details, wiring diagrams and inter
locking arrangements
to the Engineer for review prior to ordering. Detailed constructions and general
arrangements
shall be agreed with the Engineer during construction stage.
16. All doors and removable covers shall be provided with a flexible earth condu
ctor connected to the
switchboard frame.
17. BMS marshalling compartment of adequate size shall be provided in every swit
chboard and
motor control centre wired to units.

E. Busbars
1. Main bus bars shall be constructed of high strength, high conductivity, flat
tin plated hard drawn
copper throughout, fully braced by means of color code injection moulded glass f
illed polyester
insulation with joints bolted using high strength 12mm cadmium plated steel bolt
s and extra wide,
extra thick washers to ensure maximum pressure and current distribution at each
joint or fully
insulated with color coded fire retardant insulation. Bolts shall be tightened t
o torque wrench
prescriptions.
2. The bus bars shall be designed so that maximum temperature rise in any part o
f the switchboard
will not exceed 35 degree Cover 50 degree C ambient at full load. Reduced size n
eutral bus bars
shall not be permitted. Bus bars current density shall not be less than 1000 A/S
q. inch. T type
connection units shall be used for connection between main bus bars and branchin
g bus bars. Bus
bars end shall be tinned. Compartment temperature rise shall be within the limit
s to comply with
latest BS / IEC Standards.

F. Ground Bus

A continuous ground bus, not less than 50% of the main bus cross section area sh
all be provided for
the length of each switchboard and solidly bolted to the steel framework. The gr
ound bus shall be
constructed of the same materials as the main bus and shall be complete with sui
table lugs for
grounding connections outlined on the drawings. The ground bus shall have moment
ary current rating
equal to or greater than that of the apparatus in the switchboard. Removable lin
k is required between
the neutral bus and ground bus.
G. Control and Instrumentation Wiring
1. Control wiring will be with PVC insulated stranded copper conductors rated fo
r 750V and 90
Deg. C.
2. Connectors to be vinyl insulated compression terminals manufactured in one pi
ece from pure
electro tin plated copper. Insulation to be color coded with separate colors for
the following
applications:
a. 400 volts.
b. 230 volts.

3. Run wiring from current transformer to instruments or relays via terminal blo
cks with shorting
links for maintenance. CTs for transducers shall be separate. CTs or PTs used fo
r metering
protections, signaling, interlocking shall be separate and shall not be used for
multi-purpose.
4. Identify all wires at each end with wire tags. Wires in all switchboards to h
ave a unique
identification.

H. Digital Metering System

A digital metering system complete with all CTs and PTs for customer's use shall
be installed and
factory wired in locations in each switchboard as specified hereinafter. All PT
secondary s shall be
for 24V, and all CT secondary s shall be 5A. The system shall be an integrated mic
ro-processor based
metering package, capable of displaying phase voltage, linevolts for all phase ,
current for each phase,
power factor, frequency, kilovolt amperes, kilovolt amperes reactive, kilowatts
, Kilowatts hours,
megawatt hours, , maximum kilowatts demand, and display overflow. A standard ban
and jack test
block shall allow testing of the meter by injecting 230V and 5A while the phase
display indicates T.
Three set point dry contacts for load shedding or alarm shall be provided, each
being field
programmable to suit Employer requirements. The meter shall be designed to inclu
de provisions for
communication with external monitoring devices via an RS232C port or better. All
parameters shall
be available on LCD display only by selection button provided on meter.
The metering system and associated software shall be manufactured by the switchb
oard manufacturer.
The Contractor shall include for all hardware and software as required and recom
mended by the meter
manufacturer for remote monitoring at the BMS terminals for kilowatt-hour meter
readings and
failure alarm.
I. Switchboard Arrangements
1. Generally switchboards shall be as specified hereinafter. Specific items of e
quipment of each
switchboard shall be as detailed on the drawings and as listed hereinafter.
2. All MDBs
a. Incoming breakers controlling incoming service motor operated, withdrawable a
ir circuit
breaker, communicating type.
b. Other outgoing feeder breakers shall be of withdrawable moulded case circuit
breakers sized
as detailed on the drawings with a minimum short circuit interrupting capacity o
f 50 KA RMS
system at 400 volt 3 phase, communicating type.
c. Digital metering units located as shown on drawings.
d. Ground fault relays and CT's.
e. All MCCBs shall be solid state communicating type.
f. Digital Kilowatt Hr meters as required by ADDC.
g. Lamp test buttons

3. Low Voltage Motor Control Centre

a. Scope:

This specification covers design, engineering, assembly works testing of low vol
tage Motor
Control Centre. The Motor Control Centre shall provide power process equipments
in the
building. As such high reliability and continuity of supply / service are prime
requisites.
b. Ambient Conditions

Max. Ambient temperature 50C

Max. RH 100
c. System Voltage 400V/230V, 50Hz

3 phase 4 wire
d. Standard
Equipment offered shall conform to the latest issue of following standards:
BS 5486 part 1, 1986 Type Tested Assemblies for LV Switchgear for voltages not e
xceeding
1000V a/c

BS 4752 ACBs & MCBs

BS 3871 MCBs
BS 589 Direct Acting Meters
BS 1650 Capacitors for PF connection
BS 4941; 1-4 Motor Starters
BS 5424 Contactors
BS 5420 Degrees of protection of enclosures
In addition to the above, the switchgear equipment shall conform to local regula
tions.
It shall be floor mounting free standing or wall mounted sheet steel clad modula
r pattern
Cubicle type
. ASTA certified for 50 KA at 400V for 3 sec.
. Manufactured to BS5486: Part 1: 1986, Form 2B Type 2 or IEC 439-1
. Dead front design
. Top and / or bottom cable entry Front and / or rear access for cabling Degree
of Protection
IP54
e. Indication & Controls

All indication and controls shall be grouped together on the front of the ACBs a
nd shall be
accessible on the front door of the Cubicle through a suitable cut out on the cu
bicle door. The
arrangement shall be flush, neat aesthetic and modern.
The item shall generally comprise; Manual Spring charging
lever Indication of spring charged - yellow Indication of
Circuit breaker - Tripped Closing Push Button
Opening Push Button
Open / Closed Indication of ACB Racking in/ out device withdoor closed
Release lever for moving part of ACB
Service/Test/Isolator Position indicator Lamp test button.
Microprocessor based control with LCD display and all adjustable settings displa
yed.
f. Safety Shutters
Withdrawable ACBs shall be provided with shutters that drop automatically on wit
hdrawal.
Shutters shall be RED with markings to show live contact are behind the shutters
. Shutters
shall have padlocking facility.
g. Safety Interlocks

A lever shall be provided on the front of the ACB which shall be released to wit
hdraw or
insert the moving part. It shall not be possible to rack In or Out a closed ACB.

h. MCCBs
MCCBs shall be tripole pole manually operated fixed type with thermo magnetic re
leases for
overload and short circuit. Breaking capacity shall not be less than 25KA at 400
V, 50Hz
where 50 kA is not specified.
i. Starter Feeders
. Each starter feeder shall be equipped with but not limited to: Main TP MCCB wi
th door
interlocked rotary handle
. Triple pole thermal overload relay with built in single phasing prevention fea
ture, 2
auxiliary contacts for remote monitoring.
. Hand-Off-Auto Control Switch
. Common Duty Selector Switch where applicable Run/Trip Lamps
. Digital Ammeter with selector switch

Auto changeover key operated arrangement where applicable Wiring for interlockin
g
with Chiller Control Circuit
j. Interconnections

Interconnections shall be very short and neat using air insulated, tinned copper
bars.
k. Termination
. Unless otherwise indicated, cable entry shall be from bottom or top, cabling a
ccess is from
the front or rear as applicable.
. For Starter feeder s power and control cables shall be brought out neatly to ter
minal
blocks. Power and Control terminals shall be adequately segregated.
. Power wires shall be RYB color coded at the terminations. Control wires shall
be multi
stranded copper with black insulation and ferruled. Terminal Blocks should be su
itably
marked for identification and easy termination of field wires.
. Meters shall be multi-function digital type. Indicating lamps, push buttons, c
ontrol and
selector switches shall be neatly and logically flush mounted on the front of th
e respective
equipment compartment doors to IP54. Lamp test button shall be provided.
l. ACBs

ACBs shall be of modern, advanced design and construction, modular pattern with
features
for high breaking capacities, precise control, indication and protection. They s
hall be motor
operated 3 or 4 pole as specified on the drawings / schedules, and shall be of c
ommunicating
type.
m. Protection
Direct acting built in, solid state microprocessor (micro logic) based releases
shall be
provided for protection against Overload, short circuit and earth fault. Under v
oltage trip and
shunt trip shall be provided. LCD display for reading all parameters is required
. The activated
protection also shall be displayed or indicated.
Overload stage shall comprise an inverse Long Delay unit with settings from 0.4
to 1 x In, on
5 different characteristics curves.
Short Circuit Stage - Inverse short delay unit adjustable from 1 to 8 x In in de
finite steps on 7
different characteristic curves with adjustable time lag settings. The protectio
n specified is
applicable for all ACBs of Section 16400 & 16622 and 16800.
The trip unit of ACB shall provide measurement of current, voltage, active power
and
harmonics (3, 5, 7, 9, 11 & 13). These shall be displayed on LCD screen. The tri
p unit shall
also display histories of last 10 trips and maintenance indicator.
n. Operating Mechanism
The ACB shall be closed and opened by a stored energy spring charged operating m
echanism.
Closing springs shall be charged by motor operated with also provision for manua
l charging.
o. Construction

The switchboards shall be constructed with 1.6mm-thickness sheet steel and of ep

oxy powder
painted color RAL7032. These frames shall be fitted with gland plates or cover p
lates
depending on the cable entry. The top frame with provision of fitting lifting ey
e-bolts and the
bottom frame with mounting holes for fixing to foundation bolts. Functional unit
s shall be
mounted in multi-tier modular assemblies / compartments that are prefabricated t
o accept the
complete range of manufacturer s products. Minor adaptations to the mounting assem
blies
shall enable a host of other products to be mounted. Mounting assemblies, togeth
er with their
functional units shall be bolted to the basic structure, which is also modular.
The basic
structure shall be 16 modules high and capable of accepting mounting assemblies
that are in
multiples of a basic module.
The Compartment front doors shall be folded at the edges and welded at the corne
rs with
concealed hinges and with rotary front operating handles accessible externally.
Side and rear
covers shall completely enclose all live parts and complete switchboard shall pr
esent a neat
flush and aesthetic appearance.
p. Paint Finish

All steel work shall pass through a four stage finishing process, chemical spray
, degreasing,
iron phosphating and finally an electrostatically applied top coat of epoxy powd
er coating
which is cured in a high temperature over to give a strong molecular bonding wit
h the steel.
The top coat shall be RAL7032 color.
q. Busbars

The Main Horizontal busbars shall be HDHC tinned insulated copper with phase col
or sleeved
running in the full switchboard. Current rating as shown on the drawings rated f
or the ambient
specified. Supports shall be fibre glass reinforced, moulded type material with
large creepage
paths or as recommended by the manufacturer. They shall be totally enclosed in a
separate
sheet compartment and braced for the fault level specified. Temperature rise as
specified
earlier in this section.
The vertical busbars shall also be HCHC tinned insulated copper, suitably connec
ted to the
Main Horizontal busbar and run in a separate totally sheet steel enclosed Vertic
al busbar
chamber. The busbars shall be supported regularly at short intervals by fibre gl
ass reinforced
moulded type material or as recommended by the manufacturer. Current ratings sha
ll suit the
loads connected on each Vertical busbar.
The Horizontal and Vertical busbars shall be ASTA Certified or equal for Specifi
ed fault
level.
Neutral shall be of same size as the phases for Horizontal and Vertical busbar a
ssemblies and
sleeved completely black.
4. Air Circuit Breakers

. Air circuit breakers as listed in the switchboard arrangements shall conform t

o IEC
947-2 and shall be as specified hereinafter. Air circuit breakers shall be suppl
ied from
an approved manufacturer with a solid state microprocessor based release adjusta
ble
type, instantaneous short circuit protection, adjustable earth fault protection,
excess
temperature and built-in release malfunction alarm. The microprocessor shall ena
ble
building management system to monitor and control the air circuit breaker. Provi
de
LCD display for reading all parameters.
. Low voltage power air circuit breakers shall be 3 or 4 pole (as indicated in t
he
drawing) 600/1000-volt class with continuous current ratings and trip ratings as
detailed
on the plans. Breakers shall be rated for 65 KA interrupting capacity at 380 vol
t 3
phase for 3 seconds unless otherwise indicated. Breakers shall have double break
main
contacts, a 3 phase solid state overload relay, and earth fault relay and shall
be trip free
in operation. Under-voltage and shunt trip release shall be provided. A compress
ion
spring stored energy in closing mechanism (electrically charged) shall be used f
or all
ratings, with breakers being closed by means of a push button and shall have the
ability
to close and latch at interrupting rating at 600 volts. An emergency manual spri
ng
charging handle shall be supplied for electrically operated breakers. Handle sha
ll be
flush with the front panel of the air circuit breaker in the stored position.
. Breaker faceplate shall have "closed-open" indicator, spring "charged- dischar
ged"
indicator, provision to padlock manual charging handle, provision to lock breake
r in
"open" position, and provision to lock draw out mechanism. Draw out circuit brea
kers
shall be suitable for 3 position (connected, test, disconnected) racking with en
closure
door closed, and shall be equipped with an interlock to ensure breaker contacts
are open
and
. Closing spring is discharged when racking tool is inserted. Faceplate mounted
control
buttons indicators interlocks etc. shall be accessible without opening enclosure
door.
. Electrically operated breakers must have provision for emergency manual closin
g by
inserting a special tool through the faceplate. A control isolating switch shall
be
provided on the faceplate to isolate the supply to the spring charging motor.
. Relay pick-up and time delay settings shall be selected in discrete factory ca
librated
values by means of detent action thumbwheel actuated switches with gold-plated
contacts. The relay shall be equipped with Zone Selective Instantaneous Protecti
on
feature on short time and ground fault elements. A direct acting dedicated solen
oid
shall be used for initiating breaker tripping. All ACB's shall be provided with
auxiliary
contacts for local and remote trip alarm annunciation.
. All bus couplers shall be draw out type manually operated ACB with overload, s
hort
circuit and earth fault protections and shall be mechanically and electrically i
nterlocked
as shown on drawings. Removable links shall be provided in the main bus bar of e
ach
phase immediately after the incoming ACBs to enable easy maintenance and
replacement of current transformers of the measuring instruments.
J. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
1. All breakers shall be of the same switchboard manufacturer and standard ratin
gs and frame sizes
shall be used where appropriate and possible.
2. Moulded case circuit breakers shall be of the air break design type, quick ma
ke and quick break,
having free toggle mechanism ensuring full contact pressure until time of openin
g, whether
actuated automatically or manually. The mechanism shall be completely enclosed i
n a compact
moulded bakelite case, sealed to prevent tampering. Breakers shall be drawout ty
pe for MDBs and
MCCs and plugin / screw on type for OEBs and SMDBs.
3. Circuit breakers shall have inverse time tripping characteristics with automa
tic release secured
through action of a combination thermal magnetic trip element which shall trip f
ree of the handle
and operate in response to an overload or short circuit. Provide MCCB with adjus
table overload
and short circuit protections.
4. Breaker contacts shall be non-welding and non-corrodible silver tungsten comp
osition. Circuit
breaker handle shall have three positions, 'OFF', 'ON' and 'TRIP' thus indicatin
g clearly abnormal
conditions of the circuit. Single pole circuit breakers with handle tie or bar e
quivalent
construction are not acceptable for a multi-pole breaker. Breakers shall have ra
tings and breaking
capacity as indicated on the Drawings.
5. All circuit breakers shall be as indicated under the section of the documents
and as drawings.
All circuit breakers feeding motors shall be of motor protector type suitable to
withstand the
motor starting current at the full load current trip setting.
6. Current limiting circuit breakers shall be no fuse type and shall be used, as
specified
elsewhere on the distribution system to ensure that fault levels are restricted
to acceptable
levels for downstream devices and equipment. The characteristics of all current
limiting
breakers shall be submitted to the Engineer for review.
7. MCCBs shall be provided with padlocking in the 'OFF' position and shall be fi
tted with
shunt trips/undervoltage trips as required for proper operation and two sets of
N/O and N/C
auxiliary contacts.
8. Where indicated moulded case circuit breakers shall incorporate earth leakage
sensors as
detailed to trip the breaker and provide an alarm (except for fire pumps). The s
ensitivity
setting of the sensors shall be as detailed on the drawings.
9. All MCCBs shall have the capability of communicating with the BMS. Where indi
cated on
the drawings or BMS schedule, MCCB's shall be monitored/controlled as shown ther
ein.
10. MCCB s 100A and above shall be solid state communicating type for MDBs, MCCs &
SMDBs.

K. Outgoing Circuits and Connections

1. All outgoing circuits shall have separate compartment and/or be screened so t
hat equipment
for any one circuit can be maintained without risk of contact with live connecti
ons on any
other circuit, conforming to IEC 60439 form 4 type 6(c).
2. Feeders for circuits rated up to 63A shall be connected to terminal blocks lo
cated in separate
compartments at top or bottom, conveniently arranged to facilitate termination o
f cables and
suitably identified.
3. For feeders rated more than 63A copper links shall be suitably extended rigid
ly supported and
covered with colored PVC sleeves.
4. All feeders shall be provided with cable lugs and brass cable glands.
5. Vermin barrier and removable gland plates suitable for the glands required fo
r the specified
cables shall be provided. Where cables are single core, the gland plates shall b
e of a nonferrous
metal.
6. Bushes shall be provided at every compartment for outgoing cables.

L. Cable and Busbar/Busduct Interconnections

1. The Contractor shall supply and install all cable and busbar interconnections
 indicated on the
Contract Documents and/or required for correct operation of the equipment.
2. All cables must be in accordance with specification.

M. Cable Glands
1. Each panel sections shall be provided with cable glands to suit the type, siz
e and number of low
voltage cables as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provision shall be made for future additional cabling.
3. Cable glands or brackets where required shall be mounted inside the panel.

Sufficient space for cable connections and adjustments on site shall be provided
.
4. The Contractor shall supply approved bolted type compression terminals or equ
ivalent for
external cable connections.
5. All openings for external cable connections shall be suitably protected to pr
event ingress of dust,
vermin etc.
6. The panel sections shall be provided with proper cable fixing clamps and swea
ting terminal lugs
as well as bonding connections.

Distribution Panelboards (Sub Main Distribution Boards)

A. Distribution panelboards shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 60439 f
orm 2B type 2 and
shall be ASTA certified to 25 KA RMS symmetrical for one second. Provide deadfro
nt for
outgoing breakers. Incomer shall be provided with operating handle. Ambient temp
erature 50 degree
C.
B. Owner equipment board shall be manufactured in accordance with IEC 60439 Form
2B Type 2 and
shall be ASTA certified to 25KA RMS symmetrical for one second. Thickness of she
et 1.6mm epoxy
powder painted color RAL 7032 inside and outside.
C. Panelboards shall be factory assembled floor mounted type. Moulded case circu
it breakers shall be
provided to withstand a fault level of 25 KA at 400 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz. Moulded c
ase circuit breakers
shall have adjustable overload and short circuit protections. All MCCBs shall be
solid state type.
Panelboards shall have at least 10% spare circuits.
D. Panelboard Constructions.
1. Panelboards shall have 1.6 mm zinc coated sheet steel and all items shall be
flush mounted in the
panel. Unless otherwise specified all panels shall be so designed and constructe
d that all cable
installation and connections, and maintenance including the replacement of any i
tem, can be
carried out from the front. Panel shall be manufactured in accordance with IP 42
. Provide dead
front for outgoings.
2. All connections between bus bars and any incoming or outgoing protective devi
ces shall be made
using copper bar or cable. All items comprising the panel shall be so segregated
that maintenance,
other than to bus bar connections, can be carried out on any one item without di
srupting the
supplies fed by other items. The whole panel shall be finished in epoxy powder c
oating RAL
7032.
3. The front face of such panels shall comprise a lockable gasketed hinged door.
All internal connection cables shall be fitted with identity sleeves and all ter
minals with
identifying tabs. The markings for identifying sleeves and tabs shall be shown o
n all shop and
record drawings.
4. A main earth terminal shall be provided on all panels, the metal framework an
d casing of any type
of panel shall be bonded together and to the main earth terminal of the panel by
means of copper
earth conductor of adequate size.
5. All panelboards shall incorporate an earthing terminal busbar sized to accomm
odate earth
continuity conductors for each single pole, or multipole MCCB way, plus a minimu
m of five
additional terminals for supplementary earth bonding conductors of minimum 16mm
sq. size.
6. Removable gland plates shall be provided at the top and bottom of all panelbo
ard enclosures for
raceway termination and or cable gland termination. Where cables are single core
, the gland
plates shall be of a non-ferrous metal.
7. Where contactors are incorporated in panelboards, these shall be located in a
separate
compartment from protective devices, and have hinged lockable door access and me
ans of
ventilation.
8. Low voltage LED pilot lights shall be provided to indicate phase live conditi
ons.

E. Panelboard Busbars
1. Busbars shall be electrolytic hard drawn copper to BS 159 and tin plated with
rating as indicated
on the drawings, air insulated and rigidly supported by suitable non-hygroscopic
, anti-tracking
insulators so as to withstand forces due to thermal expansion under normal opera
ting conditions
and the fault currents at the point of installation, neatly arranged for 380V, 5
0 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire
operation, and fault rating not less than 25 KA sym. for 1 seconds. Busbars shal
l be designed for
35 Degree C temperature rise above an ambient temperature of 50 Degree C.
2. Busbars shall have the same cross section throughout.
3. Busbars bracing shall maintain the same mechani cal s t r ength and cur r ent
carrying
capacity under normal operation conditions and fault conditions.
4. Busbars shall be color coded.
5. Busbars shall not be exposed unless the complete panelboard doors and dead fr
ont is
removed.

F. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

1. All breakers shall be of the same manufacturer and standard ratings and frame
sizes shall be
used where appropriate and possible.
2. Moulded case circuit breakers shall be air break deion type, quick make and q
uick break,
having free toggle mechanism ensuring full contact pressure until time of openin
g, whether
actuated automatically or manually. The mechanism shall be completely enclosed i
n a
compact moulded bakelite case, sealed to prevent tampering. Breakers shall be pl
ug in / screw
on type.
3. Circuit breakers shall have inverse time tripping characteristics with automa
tic release secured
through action of a combination thermal magnetic or hydraulic magnetic trip elem
ent which
shall trip free of the handle and operate in response to an overload or short ci
rcuit.
4. Breaker contacts shall be non-welding and non-corrodible silver tungsten comp
osition. Circuit
breaker handle shall have three positions, 'OFF'. 'ON' and 'TRIP' thus indicatin
g clearly
abnormal conditions of the circuit. Single pole circuit breakers with handle tie
or bar
equivalent construction are not acceptable for a multi-pole breaker. Moulded cas
e circuit
breakers shall be Plug-in type. Breakers shall have ratings and breaking capacit
y in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
5. Moulded case circuit breakers shall withstand a fault level of 25KA at 400V,
3 phase, 50Hz.
6. Current limiting circuit breakers shall be no fuse type and shall be used on
the distribution
system as specified elsewhere, to ensure that fault levels are restricted to acc
eptable levels of
downstream devices, equipment and branch circuit panelboards. The characteristic
s of all
current limiting breakers shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. The con
tacts shall be
opened before the crest current value of the unrestricted short circuit current
is reached.
7. MCCB's shall have padlocking in the 'OFF' position and auxiliary contacts, sh
unt and under
voltage trips for proper operation. Provide a minimum of two sets of N/O and N/C
/ auxiliary
contacts.
8. Where indicated moulded case circuit breakers shall incorporate earth leakage
sensors as
detailed to trip the breaker and provide an alarm (except for fire pumps). The s
ensitivity
setting of the sensors shall be as detailed on the drawings.
9. All MCCB's shall be adjustable overload and short circuit setting type.

G. Digital voltmeter and digital ammeter with selector switches: 0-500V voltmete
r with selector
switch. Ammeter complete with selector switch and CT's with links for maintenanc
e.

Plant and Field Tests

Factory test all switchgears in accordance with ASTA Standards. Submit completed
sheets for each
switchboard to the Engineer for approval. Include approved field test sheets in
the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
Execution
Electric Service
Electric service at 400/230 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz A.C. will be rendered f
rom three 1500 KVA
power transformers as shown on the drawings.
A. Work to be part of the contract
1. Power cables (11KV) from TRM, QRM to Transformer
2. TRM & QRM
3. Three No. 1500 KVA 11KV/400V power transformers
4. Secondary service cables (11 x 630mm2 cables per transformer) from the powe t
ransformer to the
main switchboards.

B. Assume full responsibility for all co-ordination and liaison with ADDC and an
y other authority
having jurisdiction to ensure power supply to the building is connected within t
he approved time
scale and to facilitate building timely completion.
C. Requirements
1. All work performed as part of this section for the electric service shall con
form to all
requirements of ADDC.
2. Make all required arrangements with the authorities, in order that the electr
ic service is
installed and put into operation at the proper time.
3. Connection charges including material and labour costs of work classified und
er ADDC to be
paid by Contractor and to be reimbursed by the Employer as a variation to Contra
ct in line with
other sections of Contract Documents.

Installation of Switch Board

A. Install switchboards as noted on the drawings and secure to a concrete housek
eeping pad, unless
the switch board includes its own metal base.
B. Run grounding conductor 150mm2 PVC copper in 50mm conduit from main ground bu
s to earth
pits as per local authority requirements.

Installation of Switch Board

A. Provide factory assembled MDBs, SMDBs, as indicated on the drawings, each com
plete with panel
board directories.
B. Support cabinets and enclosures independent of connecting conduit and accurat
ely install with
reference to wall finishes.
C. The Contractor shall include for all necessary brackets, angle iron framework
s, supports, etc., for
fixing of panel boards. The Contractor's attention is specifically drawn in this
respect to the need for
frameworks where panel boards are mounted on dry lining stud partitions, where s
upport frames shall
fix to, and span between, vertical steel supports to partition lining.
D. Equip panel boards with suitable lugs or provisions to accommodate the main a
nd branch conductors
scheduled.
E. Turn over to the Employer upon acceptance of the project, 2 keys for every pa
nel board complete with
key rings, tags and key cabinets to the Engineer's approval.
F. Where two (2) or more panel boards are installed in one (1) cabinet, equip th
e panel board with
double lugs and increase gutter capacity to accommodate additional cabling. Busb
ars shall be rated for
the combined current carrying capacity of the panel boards.

H. Complete all panel board circuit directories to the Engineer's approval and m
ount it in a transparent
enclosure at the back of the panel door.
I. Fill in panel board directories using a typewriter, to identify circuits.

Testing and Coordication Study of Distribution

A. Inspection Testing
1. Include in the tender price the cost of on-site engineering inspection and te
sting of the following
main distribution equipment. Main Switchboards, M.C.C s, SMDB s Extent of Testing &
Inspection.
2. This engineering inspection and testing shall be done prior to the system bei
ng energised and shall
include the following items where applicable.
3. Testing, cleaning where necessary, and calibrating all relays and circuit bre
aker trip devices.
(Calibration of all protective devices shall conform to requirements of approved
co-ordination
curves).
4. Function test of associated control devices.
a. Meggar test interconnecting cables.
b. Carry out fault loop impedance test.
c. Continuity of protective conductors.
d. Earth resistance test.

5. Preparation of testing, inspection and commission report on the function and

operation of the
automatic transfer switches associated with the emergency generator.
6. An acceptance test in the presence of and satisfaction of the Employer and th
e Engineer.
7. The presence, for the length of the required, or qualified and competent equi
pment service
representatives during start-up.
8. Forward for approval prior to energization of the distribution system and equ
ipment, form neat
typewritten copies of the engineering and testing report.
Co-ordination Study
A. The coordination study shall be carried out by switchgear specialist to ensur
e that full electrical power
distribution system has proper protection devices to achieve proper protection a
nd to isolate minimum
possible faulty section from the system in case of any fault in any part of the
power system. The study
shall also ensure breakers can safely handle short circuit current derived at th
at point. KA rating and
protections shown in the drawings or specifications are minimum requirements whi
ch shall be
retained. But this value has to be varied and to be changed as per coordination
study by contractor to
the approval of Engineer before manufacturing the switchgear without any additio
nal cost /time to
contract.
B. Carry out the following:
1. Immediately upon award of the contract and prior to the manufacture of the sw
itchboards, prepare
a set of co-ordination curves on K.E. NO.336E time current characteristic graph
paper and
forward eight copies to the Engineer for his approval. Make any changes as direc
ted by the
Engineer at no additional charge to the Employer. Submit software copy for Engin
eer s review.
2. This shall be accompanied by supporting symmetrical as well as asymmetrical f
ault current
calculation data with tabulations to verify protection of the various elements o
f the system under
maximum and minimum fault conditions at the various points in the system.
3. The time-current characteristic curves for the following shall be plotted:
a. The relays and breakers protecting the incoming service.
b. Main and feeder protective devices at all voltage levels used in the distribu
tion system.
c. Protective devices associated with the largest motor in each MCC, the refrige
ration
compressor, and largest device in each distribution panel.
d. Motor generator protective devices, damage areas and current decrement areas.

4. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to examine the plans and spe
cifications to ensure
that all the relays and protective devices being installed in the distribution s
ystem will provide
satisfactory co-ordination.
5. Breaker frame sizes, sensors, and delay types, shall be provided in accordanc
e with the
approved co-ordination study.
6. Testing procedures shall be in accordance with the following Regulatory Autho
rities, British
Standards Institution, Lloyds Registry, and Veritos.

14.10 Final distribution boards and switchboard components

Section Includes
A. Final Distribution boards.
B. Switchboard Components

Scope of Work
A. Supply, install and connect all final distribution board connections all as d
escribed hereinafter and
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Generally the final distribution shall be carried out by means of:
1. Distribution from final boards shall be generally in conduit and single coppe
r conductors
drawn into the conduit all as specified in other sections of the specification.

Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be install
ed, including
adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, pip
ing, equipment
and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, an
d equipment
installed under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that prese
rve the integrity of
the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Consultant of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract docum
ents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.

B. Sequencing:
C. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of cond
uit is complete between
outlet, junction and splicing points.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points, and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions f
or storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations o
f supports.

Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years experience.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilit
ies within 300 km of
Project.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitabl
e for the purpose specified
and indicated.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer
's instructions.
Products
Final Distribution Boards
A. Factory assembled Final distribution Boards as scheduled on the drawings and
as specified hereinafter
to BS5486 Parts 12 1986 with IP31 degree of protection. Enclosure including all
other internal sheets
shall be sheet steel 1.4mm thick minimum with epoxy powder paint inside and outs
ide and color shall
be RAL 7032. Type of mounting flush or surface shall be agreed with the Engineer
during
construction stage.
B. Panel board Enclosure Provisions
1. Panel boards shall have sheet metal cladding and all items shall be flush mou
nted in the panel.
Unless otherwise specified all panels shall be so designed and constructed that
all cable
installation and connections, and maintenance including the replacement of any i
tem, can be
carried out from the front. Panel shall have dead front.
2. All connections between bus bars and any incoming or outgoing protective devi
ces shall be
made using copper bar or cable. All items comprising the panel shall be so segre
gated that
maintenance, other than to bus bar connections, can be carried out on any one it
em without
disrupting the supplies fed by other items. The whole panel shall be finished ep
oxy powder
paint color RAL7032.
3. The front face of such panels shall comprise a lockable hinged door. All inte
rnal connection
cables shall be fitted with identity sleeves and all terminals with identifying
tabs. The
markings for identifying sleeves and tabs shall be shown on all shop and record
drawings.
4. A main earth terminal shall be provided on all panels. The metal framework an
d casing of any
type of panel shall be bonded together and to the main earth terminal of the pan
el by means
of a copper earth conductor of adequate size.
5. All panel boards shall incorporate an earthing terminal busbar sized to

Accommodate earth continuity conductors for each single pole, or multipole MCB w
ay, plus a
minimum of five additional terminals for supplementary earth bonding conductors
of
minimum 16mm sq. size.
6. Removable gland plates shall be provided at the top and bottom of all panel b
oard
enclosures for raceway termination and or cable gland termination. Where cables
are single core,
the gland plates shall be of a nonferrous metal.
7. Final distribution power boards should be supplied with clear space between e
dge of outgoing
breakers and side of panel minimum 200mm. for wiring. This clear space for wirin
g shall be
available on both sides of the boards. Standard panels are not acceptable.

C. Panel boards Busbars

1. Busbars shall be electrolytic hard drawn copper to BS 159 with rating as indi
cated on the
drawings, air insulated and rigidly supported by suitable non- hygroscopic, anti
-tracking insulators
so as to withstand forces due to thermal expansion under normal operating condit
ions and the fault
currents at the point of installation, neatly arranged for 400V, 50Hz, 3 phase,
4 wire operation,
and fault rating minimum 10 KA symmetrical.
2. Busbars shall have the same cross section throughout.
3. Busbars bracing shall maintain the same mechanical strength and current carry
ing capacity under
normal operation conditions and fault conditions.
4. The bus bar system shall be capable of accepting 3 phase or 1 phase plug-on R
CBOs.
5. Earthing terminal bus bar to be provided.

D. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)

1. Miniature circuit breakers shall comply with IEC-60898 have a rated trip type
B or C (type 2 or 3)
as required by the drawings and shall have a minimum breaking capacity of 9KA. T
he frame size
of all MCBs shall be the same so that they can be easily interchanged. Breakers
can be either plug
on type or screw-on type. Circuit breaker devices shall be of the trip free patt
ern to prevent
closing the breaker on a fault and shall be engraved to indicate 'ON' and 'OFF'
positions.
2. MCBs shall be so arranged in the board that it shall be possible to replace a
triple pole MCB with
three adjacent single pole MCBs or vice versa. The boards shall be surface type
unless indicated
otherwise on the Contract Documents. Cable glands shall be provided where requir
ed.
3. All MCBs shall ensure protection against sub-circuit overloads by means of am
bient temperature
compensated thermal overload trips for ambient temperature 40 Deg. C and against
short circuits
by instantaneous magnetic overload trips.
4. Multi-phase MCBs shall so designed that if more than one trip mechanism opera
tes, all poles shall
open simultaneously. Three pole devices shall be installed for three phase suppl
ies.
5. Particular attention shall be paid to the utilisation of MCBs in respect of s
ystem characteristics,
such as fault capacity and discrimination protection, and where appropriate size
s or rating are not
specified, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the correc
t type of equipment is
installed and to submit his proposals to the Engineer for review before any equi
pment or
materials are placed on order.
6. All MCBs shall be clearly engraved to indicate the particular current rating.

E. Residual Current Device (ELCB) or RCBO

F. For all circuits serving socket outlets in the floor screed, either in the un
der floor duct system, the in
screed outlet boxes where indicated on drawings provide RCBO circuit breakers un
less otherwise
indicated.
G. Breakers shall comply with BS4293 (1993).
H. These breakers shall be all insulated type and consist of a current transform
er, tripping coil and
contact, 'ON'/'OFF' trip free front operated handle and a test push button. The
tripping mechanism
shall cause interruption of the supply on an earth fault current of 30 milliamps
or 100 milliamps or
adjustable as shown on the drawings. The tripping arrangement shall not be affec
ted by ambient
temperature changes. The current carrying contacts shall be of robust constructi
on, made of
suitable copper alloy and they shall be non-welding and self-wiping.

Plant and Field Tests

Factory test all switchgears in accordance with ASTA Standards. Submit completed
sheets for each
switchboard to the Engineer for approval. Include approved field test sheets in
the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
Switchgear Components for MDBS, MCCS, SMDBS and All Other Control Panels
A. A.C. Contactors
B. Magnetic full voltage contactors, heavy duty, non-reversing type for heating,
motor loads and lighting
loads. Each contactor shall be suitable in all respects for the application and
shall be recommended
type for its breaker shall be AC-23 duty type to IEC 60947-4.
C. Mount each contactor in an enclosure, complete with the necessary accessories
including pilot light in
cover.
D. The amperes rating number of poles, auxiliary contacts etc., for contactors s
hall be as noted on the
drawings and as required by equipment manufacturer.
E. Contactors shall have CE, CSA and UL approval.

Earth Leakage Relays

A. Relays shall have power green ON led, red trip LED, and test button, reset bu
tton, LED s for pre
warning of leakage current at early stage. 2 change over contacts.
B. Setting range (sensitivity) shall be 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1, 3, 5 amps.
C. Time delay setting range 0.025, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 seconds.
D. Pre warning LEDs for 15%, 30%, 45%, 60%, (yellow) and 100 % (red) of set sens
itivity value.
E. Auxiliary supply voltage, DIN rail mounting /separate base will be as require
d to suit the board
requirements. Provide clear glass window to see the relay. Relay shall be CE app
roved. Number of
poles as indicated on drawings.

Plug in Type Power/Auxi l iary Relays

A. Relays shall have silver-nickel plated contacts. No of poles 2/3, 8/11 pins a
s required.
B. Coil rating 24V/220V/110V as required. Contact rating 10 amps at 250 volts.
C. Mechanical flag indication and latching feature.
D. Operating temperature - 40 to +60 degree C. Electrical life shall be minimum
200,000. IP40 degree
of protection.
E. DIN rail mounting /separate base mounting will be as required to suit the boa
rd requirements.
Contacts shall be clearly visible. Relay shall be CE, CSA and UL approvals. Numb
er of poles as
indicated on drawings. Relay shall have manual operating button.

Undervoltag, Phase Failure, Phase Sequence, Timer, Thermistor Relays

A. Relays shall have power ON /tripled.
B. Setting range (sensitivity) as required.
C. Time delay settings range as required.
D. Supply voltage, DIN rail mounting /separate base will be as required to suit
the board requirements.
Ambient temperature -290 to +60 degree C. Relays shall be CE approval.
 Execution
Installation of Distribution Boards
A. Provide factory assembled FDBs as indicated on the drawings, each complete wi
th panel board
directories.
B. Support cabinets and enclosures independent of connecting conduit and accurat
ely install with
reference to wall finishes.
C. The Contractor shall include for all necessary brackets, angle iron framework
s, supports, etc., for
fixing of panel boards. The Contractor's attention is specifically drawn in this
respect to the need for
frameworks where panel boards are mounted on dry lining stud partitions, where s
upport frames shall
fix to, and span between, vertical steel supports to partition lining.
D. Equip panel boards with suitable lugs or provisions to accommodate the main a
nd branch conductors
scheduled.
E. Fill in panel board directories using a typewriter, to identify circuits.

Testing and Coordination Study of Distribution

A. Inspection Testing
1. Include in the tender price the cost of on-site engineering inspection and te
sting of the DB s.
2. This engineering inspection and testing shall be done prior to the system bei
ng energised and shall
include the following items where applicable.
a. Testing, cleaning where necessary, and calibrating all relays and circuit bre
aker trip devices.
(Calibration of all protective devices shall conform to requirements of approved
coordination
curves).
b. Function test of associated control devices.

Meggar test interconnecting cables.

Carry out fault loop impedance test.
Continuity of protective conductors.
Earth resistance test.
c. Preparation of testing, inspection and commission report on the function and
operation
of the automatic transfer switches associated with the emergency generator.
d. An acceptance test in the presence of and satisfaction of the Employer and th
e Engineer.

3. The presence, for the length of the required, or qualified and competent equi
pment service
representatives during start-up.
4. Forward for approval prior to energization of the distribution system and equ
ipment, form neat
typewritten copies of the engineering and testing report.

Co-ordination Study
A. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to examine the plans and spe
cifications to ensure that all
the relays and protective devices being installed in the distribution system wil
l provide satisfactory coordination.
B. Breaker frame sizes, sensors, and delay types, shall be provided in accordanc
e with the approved coordination
study.
C. Testing procedures shall be in accordance with the following Regulatory Autho
rities, British Standards
Institution, Lloyds Registry, Veritos.
14.11 Variable frequency motor controllers
General
Section Includes
A. Variable frequency controllers.
B. Soft Starter

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, rating
s and size of switching
and over current protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and encl
osure details.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimen
sions and weights
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examinat
ion, preparation, and
installation of product.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.

Reference Standards
A. Motor shall comply with IEC 34, IEC 85, DIN 57530/VDE 0530-1291
B. Motor fan shall comply with IEC 34 part 6
C. VFD Low voltage directive comply with 2006/95/EC, Machine directive 98/37/EC,
EMC
directive 2004/108/EC, Harmonics EN-610003-12

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an addition
al heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, a
nd trafic.
B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with
lugs provided for the
purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.
 Products
General
A. Provide all loose starters, and motor control centre and local isolating swit
ches as specified
hereafter and as detailed on the drawings. Ambient temperature 50 degree C.
B. Provide power supplies to all motor control centre loose starters, (and local
isolating disconnects)
together with associated motors, fan coil units etc. as required to conform to t
he Contract
Documents.
C. Provide power supplies and local isolating disconnects (isolators) to all mec
hanical equipment with
pre-packaged starter components as required to conform to the Contract Documents
.
D. Provide power supplies and local isolating disconnects (isolators) to all wat
er heaters, and treatment
plants as required to conform to the Contract Documents.
E. All equipment requiring power shall be wired and connected under this Divisio
n. The drawings do not
necessarily show the exact location of equipment and it shall be the responsibil
ity of this Division to
fully coordinate this work.

Motor Starters, Disconnects and Accessories

A. Motor starters for motorized mechanical equipment shall be in accordance with
the following
specification and the requirements of the equipment specified under other sectio
ns of the Contract
Specifications.
B. The maximum starting currents for motors shall be as detailed:

Up to 3 HP five times of full load current 3 HP to 35 HP three times of full loa

d current. 35 HP and
above 1.5 times of full load current. The starting equipment to limit the curren
t may consist of: Start-
Delta Starters. OR Soft starter OR Variable Frequency Controller
C. Other approved current limiting devices.
D. Electric motors rated at 1 HP and above shall incorporate capacitors to maint
ain a power factor
of 0.9 lagging throughout the normal working range of the units or motors.
E. Unless otherwise noted, starters for 3 phase motors shall be combination, cir
cuit breaker with
full voltage non reserving magnetic starters for across-the-line service. Full p
rotection of each
phase shall be provided in the starter by means of overload relay per phase per
starter.
F. Under voltage protection shall be provided by the starter coil which shall di
sengage on 65% of
rated voltage unless otherwise noted, for refrigerant machine etc. starters.
G. All starters shall come equipped with:
1. Selector switch: Either press to test/off/automatic or manual/off/auto, start
/stop push buttons.
2. Run, Stop and Trip' low voltage LED indicator lights (two lights for reversin
g or two speed
starters) complete with required interlocks. Provide R-Y-B phase healthy indicat
ors.
3. 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. auxiliary contacts for contactor.
4. Digital voltmeter with selector switch, Digital Ammeter with selector switch
to read each phase
current.
5. Control transformer - minimum size 100VA with a 24V secondary voltage.
6. Under voltage protection, adjustable between 65% - 85% of the service voltage
.
7. Phase sequence, phase failure relay, thermistor relay, and overload relay for
each phase. ELCB or
ELR for each outgoing circuit.
8. Lamp test button, audio alarm for trip with indicator in amber and mute butto
n.
9. Above requirements are minimum for all starters.

H. Circuit breakers shall have a short circuit rating as indicated on drawings w

ith a minimum of
25KA for 3 second at 400 volts.
I. Motors larger than 5KWshall be equipped with inherent overheating protection,
which shall
consist of thermistors, one for each phase, embedded in the stator windings. The
wires of the
thermistor shall be brought out to the motor terminal block for field wiring int
o the starter
holding coil through a conduit. Except for smoke exhaust fans fire pump set, spr
inkler fire pump
set a provide thermister over temperature protection for each winding. No thermi
stor is required
for motor less than 5 kW with constant speed, thermal overload will be accepted.
1. The motor tripping device shall be electronic O/L relay with pilot light and
alarm contacts.
2. The motor tripping device shall be housed in the individual starters.
3. Field install in starters, the tripping devices supplied by the motor manufac
turers for field wiring
connection to thermistor wires. Supply and install auxiliary relay in starter, i
f holding coil
rating exceeds capacity of tripping device.
4. All motors shall be supplied complete with a terminal box housing a standard
bakelite
terminal plate for windings and thermistor termination studs complete with neces
sary links for
field wiring.

J. Reduced voltage starters shall be provided where required to conform to the C

ontract Documents.
They shall be as previously mentioned
K. Key switch type emergency stop buttons shall be provided where shown on drawi
ngs. These shall
have red mushroom head, push to stop, and released only by means of the key swit
ch. Provide two
keys for each unit supplied.
L. Motor control centres shall be arranged as detailed on the starter schedule d
rawings. Each control
centre shall be IEC-60439 factory built assembled, dead front drawer, floor moun
ted control centre
with tinned copper bus (3 phase, neutral and earth) and a IP54 Form 2B Type 2 en
closure. Bus bars
shall have phase color coded Starters installed in control centres shall be as a
bove and complete with
load wiring and/or control wiring terminal boards. Motor control centres shall b
e complete with all
digital metering and shall display incoming volts and amps Thickness of sheet st
eel for complete
board shall be 1.6 mm and painted with epoxy powder paint RAL7032 inside and out
side
completely. Any sheets not painted or other materials such as Alu.zinc etc. shal
l not be
acceptable. Starter compartments shall be provided with sufficient space for mai
ntenance. Provide
space heater with humidistat and thermostat control with on/off switch and indic
ator. Busbar
temperature shall not exceed 35 degree C above ambient 50 degree C. temperature
rise shall be
within the limits to comply with latest BS/IEE standards

Motor control centre shall incorporate the following items in addition to the mo
tor starters for each
circuit:
1. Main power indicating lamps red-yellow-blue.
2. Earth leakage sensors with local audio/visual alarms

4. Run/trip pilot light for each motor.

5. Duty selector switch
6. Start/stop push-button for each motor.
7. Under Voltage relay.
8. Phase protection.
9. Digital metering shall be provided to display amps and volts of all three pha
ses of every
outgoing motor or item of equipment, as well as main incomer.
10. Phase sequence controller shall be provided for all 3-phase circuits.
M. Unless otherwise noted, starters, for single phase motors, shall be thermal o
verload protected
manual starting switches with and "ON/OFF" switch, a neon pilot light and a surf
ace or flush
mounting IP54 enclosure to suit the application. If, in certain cases, automatic
or remote operation is
required, magnetic starters as specified above for 3 phase motors shall be provi
ded but single phase
with unfused disconnects (isolators). Provide earth fault protection with flashi
ng amber light
indicating tripping condition.
N. All disconnects (isolators) shall be heavy duty, front operated with a handle
suitable for padlocking in
the "OFF" position and arranged so that the enclosure cover cannot be opened whi
le the handle is in
the "ON" position. Operating mechanisms shall be "quick-break" positive acting w
ith visible blades
and a line terminal shield. Disconnects (isolators) shall be either 3 or 6 poles
as required.
O. Control wiring from Motor Control Centres to Fans and Pumps required to run u
nder fire condition shall
be in with Fire resistance Cables.
P. All labels, color coding, identification, etc. shall be in accordance with th
e requirements of relevant
section.
Q. All motors below3 HP shall be equipped with factory fitted power factor corre
ction capacitor. Minimum
acceptable power factor is 0.95.

Soft Starter
A. Motor and soft-starter shall be of the same manufacturing group of company an
d the manufacturer
must be able to provide guarantee statement of performance of motor and drive sy
stem together.
B. Manufacturer must have its own subsidiary company or drive center based in UAE
with qualified
personnel for assistance and on site programming.
C. Soft-starter shall be rated for 50degreeC ambient temperature.
D. Soft-starter shall be designed for wide variation in input supply, from 208 V
to 500 V AC + 10% -
15% with 50-60 Hz 5% supply frequency.
E. Soft-starter shall have keypad for onsite programming.
F. Soft-starter shall have minimum but not limited to following software program
mable features
through keypad:
1. Programmable relays
2. Facility to auto-start on supply loss
3. Programmable kick-start feature
4. Programmable Pedestal current
5. Programmable current limit
6. Programmable acceleration and deceleration times
7. Protection against Excessive Starring Time
8. Programmable Instantaneous overload and under load protection
9. Locked rotor protection
10. Thermal overload protection
11. Reverse phase sequence protection
12. Facility to program Delay before Restart
13. LCD display

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

The Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall be capable of supplying the motor with
anAC current at
variable voltage and frequency according to the speed demand and up to its rated
output power.
To avoid any mismatch between the motor and its control equipment, the VFD shall
be capable of auto
adjustment by automatic measurement of the motor parameters while motor is at st
andstill.
The VFD shall be of modular design and adaptable to all types of applications by
means of an extensive
range of accessories and options. In particular it will be possible to configure
the VFD for constant torque
as well as for variable torque.
1. General Description: A reputable manufacturer, that has continuously manufact
ured VFD for at least
25years and whose manufacturing plants are ISO 9002 certified, shall manufacture
the VFD.
a. The AC Drive shall convert the input AC mains power to a variable frequency a
nd voltage, as
defined in the following sections.
b. The input power section shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating
diode rectifiers.
The diode rectifiers shall convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power to
fixed DC
voltage. This power section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the AC lin
e.
c. The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to variable frequency
AC voltage.
Depending on the VFD rating, this section shall utilize either intelligent power
modules (IPMs) or
6 IGBT power transistors.
d. A microprocessor based control module shall be used with LCD display. The inv
erter bridge
shall use the PWM technology with selected, as well as randomly modulated, switc
hing
frequency for motor noise reduction.

2. Standards and safety:

The VFD shall conform to international standards and meet the recommendations of
the following:
EMC Immunity:
a. IEC 1000-4-2/EN 61000-4-2 Level 3
b. IEC 1000-4-3/EN 61000-4-3 Level 3
c. IEC 1000-4-4/EN 61000-4-4 Level 4
d. IEC 1000-4-5/EN 61000-4-5 Level 3

EMC, conducted and radiated emissions:

a. IEC 1800-3-2/EN 61800-3, environment 1 (public sector) and 2 (industrial sect
or) under restricted
distribution
b. EN 55011 class A (RFI filters included)
c. EN 55022 class B, with additional filters Vibrations:
d. IEC 68-2-6, 1.5 mm peak from 2 to 13 Hz, 1g from 13 to 200Hz

The VFD shall have UL and CSA product certification approvals.

The VFD shall confirm Type 2 co-ordination as per IEC standards
The VFD shall consist of a Variable Frequency Drive controller, a circuit breake
r, a line
contactor and necessary indicating lights and switches/pushbuttons.
The VFD along with associated components shall be installed in an enclosure havi
ng sufficient
ventilation for heat dissipation. Color of epoxy powder paint shall be RAL7032.
Thickness of
sheet shall be 2mm. Panel shall be floor-mounting type IP55 rated with forced ve
ntilation and
thermostat with overhead alarm announced at BMS. Complete panel shall be rated f
or 50 degree
C ambient temperature. Cable entry from Bottom or Top. Bus bars shall be copper
with tinplated.

3. Output characteristics:
a. Start-up and permanent operation

The VFD shall be capable of continuously delivering its rated output voltage and
current to the
motor in the limits of acceptable input voltage variations.
The VFD shall be able to control a 3-phase squirrel-cage motor over a speed rang
e of 1%
(minimal speed) to 100% (maximum speed), continuously and smoothly. Within this
speed
range no de rating of nominal torque value is accepted.
The VFD shall be adaptable to various types of applications and in particular it
shall be possible
to select on site, one of the three following operating modes:
. For low speed machines and heavy loading, (i.e.: high U/f ratio)*
. For machines with average loading operating at low speed (i.e.: constant torqu
e, U/f ratio)*
. For pumps and fans (i.e.: variable torque, progressive U/f ratio)* (*): U= out
put voltage in Volt, f =
output frequency in Hz. The Sensor less Flux Vector Control (SFVC) technique can
be selected.

b. transient conditions:

For application requesting the VFD to operate in a constant torque configuration

, transient over
torque (for 60 sec.) shall be possible:
. 170% of nominal torque for motor up to 75 kW.
. For application requesting the VFD to operate in a variable torque configurati
on, transient over torque
of 120% of nominal torque shall be possible.

To protect the network against transient current, a current limitation function

shall be used:
. For constant torque applications, limitation at 150% of motor nominal current
for 60 s
. For variable torque applications, limitation at 120% of motor nominal current
for 60 s.

c. Inverter protections:

The VFD shall include the following auto protections against short- circuits:
. Between phase to phase,
. Between phase to earth,
. On internal supplies,
. On analogue and logic outputs.
. It shall also include the following protections:
. Overheating,
. Mains over voltage and under voltage,
. Loss of input phase.

d. Motor protections:

The VFD shall include the following motor protections:

Protection by continuous calculation of I2t, as a function of speed saving of mo
tor thermal state
when the VFD is powered off, Loss of phase.
Protection via PTC probes
Motor protection mode shall be adaptable to type of motor cooling, force- cooled
or self-cooled.
4. Input characteristics:
a. Input voltage

The VFD shall be capable of maintaining its output performances when powered und
er the following
conditions:
. Mains voltage 380V - 500V +/- 10%,
. Mains frequency 50 or 60 Hz +/- 5%.

In case of mains under voltage, the VFD shall have a minimum AC under voltage po
wer loss ride
through of 200 milliseconds (10 cycles)
b. Input current

During start-up sequences speed shall increase smoothly and limitation current c
an be reached.
For power ratings below 18.5 kW and higher than 75 kW, to protect upstream netwo
rk, input AC choke,
shall be used:
. To reduce harmonic currents feedback,
. To limit input voltage spikes.

For power ratings ranging from 18.5 kW to 75 kW, the line choke is built into th
e VFD.
In installations where harmonic current circulation may affect the operation of
sensitive equipment,
global or local compensation of harmonic currents shall be provided.
In this case only auto adaptable harmonic compensators are acceptable to cope wi
th permanent
modification of harmonic content. (e.g.: active harmonic compensators).
In all ratings up to 75 kW, the VFD shall have an integrated RFI Filter.
5. Environmental conditions:

The VFD shall be able to operate under the following conditions:

a. Ambient temperature: 0 to 50 DegreeC
b. Altitude from sea level: 1000 m, without de rating
c. Relative humidity: 100%.
d. It shall be enclosed in a casting providing the degree of protection IP55.
6. Keypad Display Interface
a. Keypad display interface shall offer the modification of AC Drive adjustments
via a touch keypad. All
electrical values, configuration parameters, I/O assignments, application and ac
tivity functional
access, faults, local control, and adjustment storage, and diagnostics shall be
in plain English. There
will be a standard selection of 4 additional languages built-in to the operating
software as standard.
b. Display will be a high resolution, LCD backlit screen.
c. AC Drive model number, torque type, software revision number, horsepower, out
put current, motor
frequency motor voltage and temperature within unit shall be listed on the drive
identification portion
of the LCD display.
d. Keypad display shall consist of programmable function keys that allow both op
erating commands and
programming options to be present by the operator. A hardware selector switch an
d password setting
shall allow the terminal keypad to be locked out from unauthorized personnel.
e. RUN key and a STOP key will command a normal starting and stopping as program
med when the
AC Drive is in keypad control mode.
f. The STOP key must be active in all control modes. Provisions for covering the
RUN and STOP keys
must be available for applications that do not allow starting and stopping from
the keypad.
g. AC Drive shall have two LEDs mounted on the front panel to indicate functiona
l status. A green LED
will verify that the AC Drive power supply is on. A red LED indicator will indic
ate an AC Drive
fault.
7. Adjustments & Configurations:
a. AC Drive will be factory programmed to operate all specified optional devices
.
b. Output frequency of the VFD is ranging from 0.1 to 500 Hz, for power ratings
up to 75kW, and from
0.1 to 300 Hz for powers between 75 kW to 630 kW.
c. Acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be variable from 0.1 to 999 se
conds.
d. Memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of the past fault. F
or power higher than 75
kW, the VFD will record the 16 last faults.
e. Software shall have an Energy Economy function that, when selected, will redu
ce the voltage to the
motor when selected for variable torque loads. A constant volts/Hz ratio will be
maintained during
acceleration.
f. The output voltage will then automatically adjust to meet the torque requirem
ent of the load.
g. As an option, the VFD shall also include facility for communication with indu
strial networks or
PLCs, using various communication protocols.
8. Acceleration and Deceleration:

The VFD shall be capable of smooth motor start and stop by controlling accelerat
ion and
deceleration ramps.
As a minimum the VFD shall be capable of the following adjustable ramps shapes:
. Linear, S shaped, U shaped.

Duration of the ramps shall be factory set up at 3 s, and shall be site adjustab
le from 0.1 to
999.9 s (resolution 0.1s).
Adaptation of ramp times shall be automatic in the event of exceeding available
braking
torque.
9. Braking to standstill from low speed:

The braking shall be automatic by DC injection for 0.5 s when frequency passes b
elow 0.1 Hz.
The following shall be site adjustable from the keypad of the equipment:
. Level of current
. Frequency threshold,
. Injection time.

For power ratings ranging from 75 kW up to 630 kW, the fast stop operation allow
s to quickly stop the
motor by dissipating the power in the motor, motor cable and drive is possible.
This is a low cost
alternative for simple applications, which avoids using an external braking unit
.
10. Automatic current limitation:

The VFD shall include a feature to adapt the current limitation according to the
thermal characteristics
of the motor to avoid nuisance tripping.
Other Requirements
A. Motor and Inverter shall be of the same manufacturing group of company and th
e manufacturer
must be able to provide guarantee statement of performance of motor and drive sy
stem together.
B. Manufacturer must have its own subsidiary company of drive center based in UAE
with qualified
personnel for assistance and on site programming.
C. Inverter shall be rated for Variable Torque application for pump and fan contro
l and shall have a
minimum overload capacity of 120% for 60 seconds.
D. Soft-starter shall be designed for wide variation in input supply, from 380 V
to 460 V AC 10%,
with 48-62 Hz supply frequency.
E. Output voltage to be from 0 to maximum input voltage, pulse width modulated (
PWM) using IGBT s
with software adjustable switching frequency up to 12 kHz.
F. Inverter shall have Serial communications: RS232 port, RS 485 port-isolated.
G. Inverter shall have minimum but not limited to following software programmabl
e features.

- One programmable relay

- 3 Analogue inputs which can be programmed to accept following inputs:
. 0-10 V DC
. 0-20 ma DC
. 4-20 ma DC
. PTC input
- 2 Analogue outputs
- Analogue inputs and outputs shall have facility to adjust gains.
- Programmable logic functions
- 2 Programmable thresholds
- Catching a spinning motor
- Mains dip ride through
- 7 Preset speeds
- Programmable acceleration time.
- Programmable deceleration time
- 3 skip frequencies with adjustable bandwidths so that it will not be applied t
o the motor (protection
against mechanical resonance).
- Full internal protections for inverter and motor with diagnostics
- Fault logging: last 10 trips stored
- Internal PID loop control with software selectable set point and / or analogue
input set point.
- Internal Run time logging and cost calculation facility
- 3 level security code to protect software settings.
H. Control and Power terminals shall be i sol at ed .
I. Provide bypass mode for VFD a star- delta starter.
J. Provide motor protections such as overload relay for each phase, short circui
t, under voltage, phase
failure, phase sequence ,thermistor relay, ELCB
K. Provide d i g i t a l voltmeter with selector switch to read phase to phase v
oltages and digital
ammeter to read each phase currents in both modes.
L. Provide indicators for power on (red), incoming phase indicators (red, yellow
, blue), Breaker
trip(amber), Bypass run, Off(green), Run(red), overload trip, earth leakage trip
(all trips amber),
Provide Manual- Off-Auto, VFD- Bypass, Test VFD(on-off) selector switch, audio f
or trip with
mute button, push buttons for on, off, lamp test in both mode. Provide potentiom
eter for manual
speed control of VFD and additional two fans for the external housing with therm
ostat.

Execution
Installation
A. Install starters, connect power and control as indicated.
B. Ensure correct fuses and overload devices elements are installed.
C. "Run" pilot lights shall be activated by a current signal from the equipment
circuit being served.

Test
A. Operate switches, contactors to verify correct functioning.
B. Perform starting and stopping sequence of contactors and relays.
C. Check the sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starter
s, equipment, control
devices, operate as indicated.
D. Check and verify BMS Control/monitoring points.
E. Check, test, demonstrate proper functions of all protective devices and fault
discriminations/clearance.
Adjust and calibrate all trip and display settings to the entire satisfaction of
the Employer and the
Engineer.
14.12 Battery emergency power supply
General
Section Includes
A. Emergency power supply.
B. Remote trouble alarm indicator.
C. The Emergency Lighting System and all of its components shall be manufactured
by an ISO 9001 / 9002
certified company to meet the requirements of BS 5266 , EN 50171, EN 50172 and t
he local Civil
Defence and the equipment must be field- tested in the Middle East for a minimum
period of 5 years.
The product shall have local civil defence authority approvals.

Reference Standards
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Mos
t Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments an
d Supplements.
B. NFPA 111 - Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power S
ystems; National
Fire Protection Association ; 2010
C. BSEN 12461, BS 5266 , EN 50171, EN 50172 Emergency lighting and standby power
system

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide catalog and data sheets showing electrical characterist
ics and connection
requirements. Include unit ratings, dimensions, and finishes. Include performanc
e data for batteries.
B. Manufacturer s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and l
imitations of use stipulated by
product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation,
installation, and starting of product.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified re
quirements.
A. Maintenance Data: Include battery maintenance and unit testing procedures.

Quality Assurance
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 70.

Maintain one copy of each document on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities w
ithin 100 miles of
Project.
C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store battery emergency power supply in accordance
with manufacturer's
instructions.
Products
Central Battery System
The Central Battery System shall comply of static inverters at varies locations
as indicated on the
drawing.
Electrical Construction
A. The system shall be a network of individual Static Inverters sited in approve
d locations with the
following specification:
B. Input Voltage = 220 / 230 / 240 V. A.C. 50 Hz Sine Wave
C. Output Voltage = 220 / 230 / 240 V. A.C. 50 Hz Sine Wave
D. It shall be possible to convert any fitting / lamp type for emergency lightin
g purpose without the use
of any additional / ancillary equipment. However for the purpose of monitoring,
an addressable interface
relay is permitted.

Rectifier
A.

Full Wave Controlled Thyristor / Diode Bridge

Charger and Controls

Mains Supply
230 + 10% VAC single phase.50hz
Input Control
MCB to BS3871 Pt. 1, or BS4752 Part 1.
Fuse gear
HRC type BS88
Terminals
DIN rail mounted near to cable entry
Transformer
Double wound with earth screen to BS171.
Contactor
Standard contactors comply with the requirements of BS 5424
Charger
Constant voltage, current-limited type with electronic solid
state controller. Voltage is controlled to within 2% of setting
at up to 10% mains supply variations
Temperature Compensation
Fitted as standard on all units with lead acid cells. The
charger voltage is automatically adjusted with reference to
ambient temperature to optimize charging and battery life.
Test Push-button: Simulates mains failure

B.

Inverter

Output voltage:
Pre-settable in the range 220-240VAC. Unless otherwise
advised, the output will be set at 230VAC. The voltage
tolerance is 2% on loads of 0-100% of system rating.
Frequency:
50 + 0.01%. Standard setting 50Hz. Waveform: Sinusoidal
Voltage Regulation:
Static 2%, dynamic 6%.
Isolation:
2kv rms between input and output terminals.
Total Harmonic Distortion:
Less than 3% into a linear load.
Power Factor:
Will supply load in the 0.3 lag-0.3 lead range.
Overload:
200% for 10 seconds, 125% for 20 minutes without reduction
in output voltage.
Start-up Time:
Standard 30mS. Soft start up to 10 seconds if required.
Efficiency:
85-89%.
Low voltage shut down:
The inverter module(s) automatically shut down when the
battery discharges to a pre-set level. Re-set is following a
combination of the restoration of the mains supply and an
increase in battery voltage above the disconnect threshold
level.
Residual current drain when the disconnect circuit has
operated is less than 1mA per module.

Inhibit: An inhibit switch to control the inverter is fitted on a

user control PCB in the cubicle.

Technology: Pulse width modulation with high frequency

switching.

Manufacture Standard: BS 5266 and EN 50171

A. Rectifier and B. Inverter

Mechanical Construction Mechanical Construction
The Central Battery Inverter cabinet shall be sheet steel, powder coated paintwo
rk RAL 9002, Grey in
color. If the batteries cannot be accommodated in the inverter enclosure then th
ey shall be installed in a
separate adjacent enclosure to the same specification at the inverter cabinet.
Addressable Final Sub-Circuit Monitoring
A. The Central Battery System design shall incorporate phase monitoring. When a
normal lighting
phase fails the dedicated emergency fittings shall be powered from the inverter
supply. The inverter
supply shall be either the incoming mains supply to the inverter cabinet or the
inverted battery supply
in the case of cabinet mains failure. This facility ensures that the batteries a
re only used on a full
mains failure.
B. For purpose of troubleshooting & maintenance, it is necessary that the sub -
circuit monitors be
addressable type.

Batteries
A. The Batteries shall be maintenance free sealed lead acid, gas recombination t
ype with a minimum
design life of 10 years. They shall have extremely low gas generation, low self-
discharge and have
permanently sealed pressure release vents.
B. The Batteries shall be sized to power the complete system for 3 hours followi
ng mains failure at
100% light output of all emergency lamps.

Central Monitoring
A. A Central Monitoring Control Panel shall be installed with each inverter syst
em.
B. The individual Central Monitoring Panel shall address each exit and emergency
fitting and label each
fitting with details in English text as follows:
1. Location details
2. Lamp type and Number
3. Failure information
4. Isolate / De-Isolate
5. Automatic test / Manual test

C. The facility of constant monitoring shall be available. Any exit sign or sub-
circuit failure shall be
immediately reported to the local monitoring panel and onward to all network pan
els. This facility
enables immediate response to fitting or / and area failures. This facility shou
ld not rely on automatic or
manual tests for failure indication.
 Execution
Installation
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install units plumb and level.
C. Provide interconnection between cabinets.

14.13 Static uninterruptible power supply

General
Section Includes
A. Charger/rectifier unit.
B. Inverter unit.
C. Batteries.

Reference Standards
IEEE 519
IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric
Power Systems; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
NEMA PE 1
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Specification and Performance Verification
;
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
NEMA 250
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
NFPA 70
National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edit
ion
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments
and Supplements.
BS EN 62040
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS)

Submittal
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirement
s.

Provide battery rack dimensions; battery type, size, dimensions, and weight; det
ailed equipment out
lines, weight, and dimensions; location of conduit entry and exit; single-line d
iagram indicating
metering, control, and external wiring requirements; heat rejection and air flow
requirements.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets and technical data sheets to indicate ph
ysical data and electrical
performance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protectio
n, examination,
preparation, installation, and starting of product. Include equipment installati
on outline, connection
diagram for external cabling, internal wiring diagram, and written instruction f
or installation.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified re
quirements.
E. Operation Data: Description of operating procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Description of servicing procedures; list of major componen
ts; recommended
remedial and preventive maintenance procedures; spare parts list.
Quality assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience with service facilities w
ithin 300Killo meter
of Project.
C. Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer wit
h minimum three years
documented experience.
D. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

A. Protect equipment from extreme temperature and humidity by storing in a condi
tioned space.
B. Protect equipment from dust and debris by wrapping unit in dust tight cover a
nd storing away from
construction activity.
C. Deliver batteries no sooner than 7 days before charging.

Products
System Operation
A. The UPS shall be an on-line double conversion system designed to operate in t
he following modes :
1. Normal:

The UPS shall deliver power to critical loads without interruption. The rectifie
r/charger shall draw
alternating current (AC) from the mains and convert it into direct current (DC)
for the inverter. The
inverter shall convert it back into clean AC current for the load. The rectifier
/charger shall also
charge the battery.
2. Mains Power failure :

In the event of a mains failure, the critical loads shall be supported by the in
verter with power from
the battery.
B. Recharge Cycle:

When mains power has been re-instated, the rectifier/charger shall again supply
the load via the
inverter and recharges the battery.
C. Static bypass mode:

The static switch shall transfer the load to the bypass AC power in the event of
an inverter shutdown
without interrupting the supply of power to the critical loads. Transfer back oc
curs when the inverter has
returned to normal operation.
D. Maintenance by pass/ Test mode:

A manual bypass switch shall be used to isolate the inverter output and the stat
ic bypass for maintenance
purposes. Isolation is achieved without load interruption.
E. Mode of operation and UPS ratings

UPS shall be single module (non-redundant) with built-in static and maintenance
by-pass. Furthermore,
external bypass facility shall be provided and this bypass facility shall automa
tically switch to mains
power in case of total UPS failure period. A key switch has to be provided for m
anual changeover from
U.P.S to external bypass facility. External bypass facility has to be completely
monitored by BMS.
F. Rectifier/Charger:

A solid state six pulse rectifier, fully microprocessor controlled, shall conver
t the AC power from the
mains into regulated DC power. A temperature sensor shall be used to control tem
perature
compensation. The power shall be filtered to supply the inverter and charge the
battery. The
rectifier/charger shall be sized to support the inverter at full rated load and
simultaneously charge the
battery to 95% of its full capacity over a period equal to ten times the battery
backup duration. The
rectifier/charger shall be of modular construction to facilitate maintenance.
G. Input protection:
1. The input of the rectifier/charger shall be protected by fuses.
2. Input current shall be limited to 125% for the nominal input current.

H. Battery Bank :
1. Battery shall be maintenance free VRLA batteries (internal gas recombination
type) with a design life of
10years.
2. Inverter :

Operation:
. The inverter shall be made of three inverter legs with IGBT transistors and pu
lse width modulation
(PWM). The built-in output transformer shall be of the delta/zigzag type.
I. Output voltage and frequency 400VAC 50Hz
J. Thermal overloads

The inverter shall continue to operate for a maximum time that depends on the cu
rrent drawn, before
shutting down to protect the various components against excessive temperature ri
se.
. 2 hours from 1.05 in to 1.1In
. 30 mins from 1.1 to 1.15 In
. 10 mins from 1.15 In to 1.25 In
. 3 mins from 1.25 In to 1.35 In
. 1 min from 1.35In to 1.65 In
K. Steady state regulation

. 1% voltage for the RMS values of the phase to neutral and phase to phase volta
ges.
L. Synchronization range :

. From 0.25 to 2 Hz in 0.25 Hz steps. May be personalized.

M. Transient conditions :

. Operation with battery power : 2% for 100% load steps

. Operation without battery power +2%/-4% for 100% load
. Return to the 1% voltage range in less than 20 milli second.
. Non-linear loads
. All phase conductors shall be sized for the rated current.
. The neutral conductor shall be sized for 1.5 times the rated current.
. Load crest factor up to 3
. Ph/Ph output voltage distortion =2% maximum
. Ph/N output voltage distortion=3% maximum
N. Overload
1. 125% for ten minutes and 150% for one minute

O. Mains (AC input to bypass):

Mains tolerances/transfer conditions:

The inverter shall transfer the load to the mains 2 supply without interruption
provided the
following conditions prevail:
1. voltage within the Un-10% to Un +10%
2. Frequency within the personalized tolerance range
3. phase shift between inverter and Main voltages less than 3 degrees
4. Overload capability of the static switch:

. Thermal overloads < 1.35 In: Same overload capability as the inverter ( not de
pendent on power
factor)
. Overloads > 1.35 In
5. Maintenance by pass :

. On -line UPS units, parallel redundant type shall be equipped with a maintenan
ce bypass which
may be used to transfer the load directly to Mains. This is carried out using th
ree switches. Step by
step help shall be provided on the front panel of the UPS when the doors are ope
n. Prior to
transferring the load to the maintenance bypass the inverter must be shut down.
6. Static by pass :

. Static bypass shall be sized for continuous operation under the following cond
itions :
. Transfer without interruption of power to the load
. The static bypass shall enable automatic transfer to the Main supply without i
nterruption of power
to the load, following detection by the control electronics of one of the follow
ing conditions:
. Load on inverter greater than the rated output
. Battery discharged to the end of its back up time, Main within tolerances.
. Inverter malfunction.
7. Microprocessor based control functions :

. UPS controls circuits shall be microprocessor based. All operations and parame
ters shall be
managed by internal software thus eliminating the need for manual settings and p
otentiometers.
Self-test and diagnostics circuits are used to detect and isolate a fault, right
down to the PC-board
itself or the connections. All individual circuits on the PC-board and all conne
ctions can be
checked.
8. Control and indication panel :

. The UPS shall be equipped with a control panel comprising system-status indica
tions that may be
used to control, monitor and display various system functions and parameters. Th
e graphic LCD
display shall be set to display data in English
. Monitoring System parameters : Parameters displayed (RMS)
. Input voltage phase-to-phase;
. Input current per phase;
. Bypass input voltage (phase to phase & phase to neutral);
. Bypass input frequency;
. Inverter output voltage (phase to phase & phase to neutral);
. Inverter output current per phase;
. Input, output current & bypass frequency;
. Percentage load at the inverter output;
. Inverter output power factor
. Inverter output in kVA and kW;
. DC voltage
. Load crest factor
. Battery current (charge/discharge);
. Battery backup time and remaining service life;
. Temperate in the battery cubicle
9. Mimic panel:

LEDs shall indicate the status of the following elements:

. Rectifier/charger
. Battery;
. Static switch
. Inverter
. Load
10. Buzzer reset button

Button shall be used to stop the buzzer. However, a new malfunction shall activa
te the buzzer
again.
Full shut down :
. Pressing the "full shutdown" button activates:
. Shut down of the inverter
. Opening of the static switch on the bypass
. Opening of the battery circuit breaker;
. Opening of an isolated relay contact

It is possible to activate the "full shutdown" function externally via a relay c

ontact.
The UPS shall also include the following functions:
1. Cold Start: This function shall make it possible to start the UPS even when M
ainis absent. The
power is supplied by the battery for a period determined by the battery charge l
evel and the power
required by the load. However, the battery discharge time can never exceed three
times the rated
back up time plus two hours.
2. Advanced Battery management: By using the Battery device, the UPS shall optim
ize the service life
of the battery and continuously maintain a high degree of operation security by
ensuring the
following functions:
(a) Calculation of the true available backup time, taking into account the batte
ry age, the
temperature and the charge level;
(b) Estimation of the battery service life;
(c) Protection against excessive discharges;
(d) Regulation of battery voltage depending on the temperature, which increases
battery service
life;
(e) Limiting of battery current;
(f) Automatic battery testing
(g) Battery discharge at programmable time intervals
(h) Battery status used for preventive detection of battery faults;
(i) Continuity of the battery circuit
(j) Protection against deep discharges depending on the discharge curves and bat
tery isolation
by the circuit breaker
(k) Progressive buzzer indicating the end of back up time
(l) Temperature monitoring
(m) Regulate the charger voltage depending on the temperature in the UPS room
(n) Warn the operator if the set permissible temperature are overrun to enhance
the accuracy of
the battery backup time calculation carried out by the standard UPS function
P. Event Log: This Monitoring system shall store 500 events (alarms, UPS status
information etc). It also
provides statistical information on a number of UPS parameter (battery backup ti
me, number of transfers
to battery power, number of transfers to the static bypass, current limiting, an
d operating time on the
inverter and on Main). This information may be accessed locally on the standard
display or on a remote
terminal via TCP/IP
Q. Communication Card: This board shall provide 6 isolated relay contacts that m
ay be used to activate
indicating lights or buzzers to inform the user of the operation status of the U
PS and the battery, for the
following information:
1. Load on UPS;
2. Load on battery power;
3. Load on bypass (maintenance position);
4. Low battery warning;
5. General alarm;
6. Complete shutdown.

R. UPS Software/Communication: Shall be installed on computer-network management

platforms, & will
be used to manage electrical power with customized supervision screens with desi
red equipment names
1. UPS programming
2. Display of mains voltage and frequency
3. Display of the battery status, charge level and remaining back up time
4. Logging of events occurring on the mains supply, etc

In the event of incidents on the mains supply, it will be possible to program th

e system to send warning
messages to BMS PC

S. Remote Monitoring: Remote Monitoring through the BMS

Electrical Characteristics

Power rating
Refer to drawing.
Power Factor
0.8 lagging
Normal AC input

Rated voltage
400V 10%, three phase (adjustable 15%)
Frequency
50 Hz 10%
Bypass AC input

Voltage
400V 10% three phase + neutral
Frequency
50 Hz 10%
Output
400 V 1% three phase + neutral
Frequency
50 Hz 0.05 Hz
Permissable overload
150% for one minute and 125% for ten minutes
Battery back up
15 minutes each (minimum)
Battery type
Sealed Lead acid maintenance free batteries (10 years design life)
Overall Efficiency
Double-conversion load
up to 93%
ECO mode
up to 97%
Noise level
60dBA
Storage temperature

UPSs with batteries

-25C +45C
Operating temperature
0 to 35C
Humidity condensation at temperature.
45% up to 95% without ambient
Standards & Certifications

Design and manufacture

ISO 9001, ISO 14001, IEC 60146
Construction and safety
IEC 60950, EN 50091-1, IEC 62040-1
Protection level
IEC60521IEC 62040-2,EN 50091-2
Certifications
TUV, CEc
Performance and topologies
IED 62040-3, EN50091-3
Degree of Protection
IP20
 Electrical Characteristics
Execution
Installation
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Tests
Demonstrate operation uninterruptible power supply by simulating an outage.
14.14 Capacitors
General
Section Includes
A. Capacitors.
B. Power factor controllers.
C. Capacitor supports.

Submittals
A. Product Data: Provide outline and mounting dimensions, weights, voltage and c
apacity ratings, fusing
and accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations
of use stipulated by product
testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examinat
ion, preparation, and
installation of product.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of capacitors.
D. Maintenance Data: Include cell and fuse replacement instructions.

. Include maintenance and troubleshooting instructions for electronic components

.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for client's use in maintenance
of project.

Standards
A. Capacitor shall comply with BS EN 60110, IEC 601110
B. Capacitor shall comply with BS EN 60831-1, BS EN 61921

Quality Assurance
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design power factor correction under direct supervis
ion of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in United Arab
Emirates.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the produc
ts specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable
for the purpose specified and
indicated.

Delivery, Storage, and Handling

Receive, inspect, handle, and store capacitors and cables in accordance with man
ufacturer's instructions.
Products
Capacitor Banks
A. The Contractor shall install the Automatic Power Factor Correction Equipment
/ capacitor bank as shown
in the drawings and in full compliance to this specification, the international
standards specified in the
following section & the local authority regulations. In case of difference betwe
en this specification and the
specified international standards and the local authority regulations, the more
stringent requirements in
compliance with local authority regulations shall prevail.
B. Unless specified otherwise Capacitor Banks shall conform in design, material,
construction and
performance to the latest editions of the IEC standards and its corresponding Br
itish / European standards
(BSEN standards) and in particular to the following publications :
C. In addition to the above listed standards, the local authority regulations sh
all also be adhered to

SITE CONDITIONS.
D. For general climatic conditions, refer and comply the specified project site
conditions. The capacitor bank
shall comply and perform satisfactorily at the below listed special design condi
tions as minimum:

Ambient temperature : 50C

Relative humidity : 100%
1. Design Considerations
a. The automatic power factor correction equipment / capacitor banks shall be of
standard, natural air
cooled, well tested and proven design which ensures maximum safety to personnel,
maximum
service reliability and economic operations for a lifetime of at least 20years.
Design and
construction shall be simple and well laid-out and shall provide good accessibil
ity to components
and parts.
b. Capacitor banks shall be rated on the basis of voltage, current, frequency, c
apacitance, harmonic
generating devices and the maximum demand inductive load at the installation. Th
e capacitor
banks shall be designed for automatic compensation to maintain the power factor
of the installation
between 0.93 lagging and unity. The following guide lines shall be applied while
se-lecting the type
of capacitor for limiting the harmonics associated with the capacitor bank:

. Gh <_ Ssc/120: Standard capacitors as per voltage ratings

. Ssc/120 <_ GHz <_ Ssc/70: Capacitors voltage rating shall be increased by 10%
. Gh > Ssc/70: Capacitors voltage rating shall be increased by 10% and suitably
rated
harmonic-suppression reactors.

(Where Gh is the sum of the KVA ratings of all harmonic generating devices (stat
ic convertors,
inverters, speed controllers, etc.) connected to the busbar from which the capac
itor bank is supplied
& Ssc is the 3-phase short circuit level in KVA at the terminals of the capacito
r bank)
c. The electrical system for all capacitor banks shall be 400V, 50Hz 3phase and
neutral, 4-wire solidly
earthed.
d. As the rating of the respective main distribution board. The breaking capacit
y of the switch-ing
devices shall be 25KA as minimum standard. Even under extreme conditions of majo
r short circuit
or mal-operation there shall be no danger to persons in the vicinity of the asse
mbly.
e. All equipment and components of the capacitor banks shall be capable of conti
nuous operation at
their full current and voltage ratings and without detriment or malfunction at s
ystem continuous
deviation of up to and including the following percentages of the normal values.

. Voltages 10%
. Frequency 5%

All components shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic, thermal and dielect
ric stresses
resulting from prospective short circuit currents without damage or injury to pe
rsonnel. Due to the
possible presence of harmonic currents and to manufacturing tolerances, componen
ts (MCCB /
Isolator, fuses, busbar & power cables) shall be oversized, and based on 1.5time
s nominal current.
f. The capacitors are automatically switched in steps and the peak value of tran
sient in-rush cur-rent
from the previously charged units in to the uncharged capacitor group at the ins
tant of switching it
into service must not exceed 100times the rated current of the capacitors in one
step of a multi-step
bank. Small series inductors may be used to achieve this limitation. The instant
aneous elements of
the protection devices shall be chosen suitably to avoid undesirable nuisance tr
ip-ping.
g. A typical capacitor bank shall be consist of, but not limited to the followin
g: - A suitably sized
enclosure with ventilation fan and air inlet filter unit.

1. Triple pole circuit breaker or on-load Isolator.

2. Suitable rated GL type fuses, switching contactor and capacitor for each swit
ching step.
3. Series reactors (where applicable and/or specified).
4. Multi switching step automatic power factor regulator.
5. Voltmeter with selector switch for mains supply.
6. R, Y, B phase indication lamps.
7. Busbars
2. Construction Requirements
a. The capacitor banks shall be assembled by an approved panel builder, who shal
l pre-qualify and
comply with requirements specified under panel assembler pre-qualification of th
is specification.
The panel builder / assembler, who do not fully comply pre-qualification clause
of this
specification are not approved and cannot be accepted as a manufacturer / assemb
ler / supplier for
capacitor banks. The capacitor bank shall be assembled by the same panel builder
/ assembler, who
shall assemble and supply the main distribution board.
b. Unless specified / approved otherwise, all the switching devices and other co
mponents used for
assembly of the capacitor bank shall be from franchised manufacturer or from the
same group of
companies of the franchised manufacturer. Design drawings and component catalogu
es shall be
submitted for consultant approval prior to placement of order for the capacitor
banks.

3. Enclosure Construction
a. Capacitor bank enclosure shall be original from approved manufacturer.
b. Wherever the capacitor bank is part of the main distribution board and interc
onnected internally
with busbars, the en-closure be of same construction as the approved main distri
bution board.
c. Standalone capacitor panels shall be of simple cubicle design and robust cons
truction. Enclosure
shall be fabricated of minimum 1.5mm thick electro-galvanized sheet steel folded
and welded
construction. Hinged doors with concealed type of hinges shall be provided at th
e front. Removable
gland plates shall be available at the bottom or top of the enclosure, as per ca
ble en-try. Enclosure
shall be provided with suitable
d. Mounting plates to accommodate all the compo-nents. Wherever applicable, cubi
cles those are
similar in construction, height and depth may be joined together to assemble the
higher rated
capacitor banks.
e. Rear access type panels shall have a hinged door at front, door or cover at t
he rear for ac-cess. The
front door shall have a standard handles with an optional feature of having a ke
y lock, wherever
required.
f. The complete enclosure assembly shall be coated with durable scratch resistan
t textured paint
finish, epoxy powder polymerized at high temperatures to an approved color.
g. Unless specified otherwise, the stand alone capacitor banks shall be with ing
ress protection rating
of IP42 as per IEC standards as minimum.
h. The capacitor banks shall be of multi-step automatic switching type rated as
per the require-ment.
General arrangement of the capacitor bank shall be arranged in a systematic mann
er. The general
arrangement shall be preferably arranged in such a way that the incoming switchi
ng de-vice is
positioned vertically at the bottom corner of the cubicle after leaving sufficie
nt space for incomer
cables below the switching device. The busbar assembly shall be arranged to be p
osi-tioned above
the incoming switching device. The fuses for the capacitor steps shall be fitted
on one side of the
busbar assembly and interconnected with rigid busbar links. Switching contactors
for each step
shall be positioned next to the fuses and interconnected by suitably sized heat
resis-tant flexible
cables. The capacitor may be positioned next to the contactor or elsewhere at a
con-venient
location inside the cubicle and interconnected to the contactor by heat resistan
t flexible cables.
i. Capacitor bank, where provided as part of main distribution board, shall be a
rranged in such a way
that each step capacitor assembly including all the protection fuses and the swi
tching contac-tor
shall be assembled on a dedicated pate and shall be mounted inside a modular cub
icle, which shall
have a busbar chamber. The fuses in the capacitor assembly shall be interconnect
ed to the main
busbar by rigid busbars.
j. Arrangement of the capacitor bank assembly and the clearance between the comp
onents like
capacitors, de-tuning reactors etc. shall be strictly as per manufacturer recomm
endations and shall
be well arranged considering the heat dissipation and ventilation arrangement.
k. The live busbars shall be fully shrouded to comply at least to comply with Fo
rm-2 requirements as
per IEC standards.
l. Neutral busbar and earth busbar shall be positioned adjacent sides of the inc
oming switching device
facilitating easy connection of the cables.
m. Unless specified otherwise, the capacitor bank shall be always suitable for w
all mounting or floor
mounting. Wherever required, the capacitor bank shall be supplied as suitable fo
r top entry cables.
n. Ventilation fan and air inlet filter unit shall be provided for the capacitor
banks to facilitate bet-ter
heat dissipation. The ventilation fan shall be operated by thermostat and also b
y the switching of
the capacitor.
o. Where applicable and/or specified and/or required to comply with local regula
tions, detuning
reactor shall be provided for each steps of the capacitor bank. The detuning rea
ctor shall be integral
in the capacitor bank.

Busbars
A. Busbars shall be tin plated copper, rectangular and rigid construction. The p
hase busbars shall be
arranged systematically and assembled using insulators. The busbars shall be pro
tected poly
carbonate shrouds from all sides. The busbar assembly shall be fully shrouded (a
t least IP20), so
that no live parts are accessible. Phase identification shall be done systematic
ally. The ratings of
the main busbar assembly shall be to suit the incoming switching device rating.
The main busbars of
the capacitor banks are preferred and recommended to be in separate busbar chamb
er, wher-ever
applicable.
B. Tin plated copper earth busbar shall be located on both the sides of the pane
l..Tin plated copper neutral
busbar shall be located on side of the panel. Busbars shall be provided with a s
uitable termination
facility for connecting the main neu-tral and earth cable. Extra terminals shall
be provided on the earth
bar for bonding purpose.

Switching Components of Power Factor Correction System

A. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) as per the capacitor bank ratings and short
circuit fault
level shall be provided in the capacitor bank as incoming switching device. The
construction,
characteristics and features of the MCCB shall be same as used in the upstream m
ain distribution
boards.
B. Fuses

Power fuses shall be provided for protection of each step of the capacitor bank
to protect against
short circuit currents. The fuses shall be rated to suit the capacitor ratings a
nd the detuning reacttor
ratings, as applicable. Each phase of the capacitor element shall be protected i
ndividually by
fuse. The fuses shall comply with the applicable IEC standards.
C. Capacitors
1. Capacitors as per the ratings as shown on the drawings shall be provided in t
he capacitor bank. The
capacitors shall be suitable for operating at temperature up to +40C ambient.
2. The capacitor units shall comply with the applicable IEC standards. The capac
itors shall have a
rated operational voltage of 400/460V AC, 50Hz, and 3Phase and rated insulation
level of 6KV for
1 minute at 50Hz.The capacitors shall be suitable for withstanding a current ove
rload of at least
30% and a voltage overloads of at least 10% as standard. The tolerance on capaci
tance values shall
be in the range of 0 to +10%. The current consumption of the capacitor unit shal
l not exceed
2.2A/Kvar.
3. The capacitors shall be of modular design and suitable for vertical or horizo
ntal mounting. The
capacitors shall be of dry-type low loss units comprising self-healing metallize
d polypropylene film
in the form of a two-film roll and shall not require any gas or liquid impregnat
ion. Use of poly
chlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and oil as capacitor impregnation will not be permitt
ed.
4. The Capacitors shall be made of insulating material providing them with doubl
e insulation and
avoiding the need for a ground connection. Plastic enclosure shall be used for t
he capacitors. The
group of elements forming a three phase capacitor unit shall be installed in pla
stic enclosure. The
plastic material used for enclosure shall provide excellent mechanical propertie
s and maximum
self-extinguishing ratings. Each capacitor shall be provided with three terminal
pads and shall not
require earth connection.
5. The capacitor units shall be protected by a high-quality system which switche
s off the capacity-tor
if an internal fault occurs. The protection system shall be integrated in to eac
h capacitor element to
provide total safety. The protection system shall protect the capacitor against
high current faults
and low current faults. Protection against high currents shall be provided by an
HRC cartridge fuse
and protection against low current faults shall be provided by an overpressure d
isconnect device
and the HRC fuse. The electrical current in the capacitor on both high current a
nd low current
faults shall be always opened by a standard HRC fuse. The capacitor shall have s
elf-healing
characteristics.
6. The capacitors shall be designed so as to care of the fault pressure inside t
he capacitor element is
always limited to a value far lower than the maximum admissible pressure.
7. Each capacitor element shall have an in-built discharge resistor to fully dis
charge the capacitor
before energizing and re-charging the capacitor to minimize the voltage transien
ts.
8. Wherever the distribution network system is highly polluted (Gh > Ssc/70), de
tuning reactors shall
be used in conjunction with the capacitors to make an assembly tuned to 190Hz fo
r a 50Hz
network. The detuning rectors shall be from the same manufacturer of the capacit
or. Wherever the
system is very highly polluted filter shall be used in conjunction with the capa
citors.

D. Power Factor Regulator

1. Regulator shall be of user programmable type microprocessor based or electron
ic controller.
Regulator shall be suitable for 6step switching or 12 step switching with variou
s switching
programming option. The regulator shall have soft touch keys integral to program
the unit. The
regulator unit in addition to switching the capacitor for automatic compensation
shall provide the
alarms for over compensation. There shall be alarm for over voltage also. The un
it shall have a 7
segment LED display unit which shall display the parameters for programming and
status. The
regulator shall be suitable for flush mount and shall be mounted on the front do
or of the capacitor
bank. The regulator accuracy class shall be at least 1.5%. The regulator shall b
e suitable for
operating at temperature up to +40C ambient.
2. Regulator shall be suitable for the supply voltage, frequency and current inp
ut.

Regulator shall be insensitive to CT direction and insensitive to phase rotation

polarity. Regulator
shall be with 6 or 12 Regulator shall include momentary no voltage function. Upo
n no voltage
detection the regulator shall disconnect all steps and upon supply restoration f
or more than 15ms,
automatic reconnection shall be made.
3. Regulator shall provide information of cosO, connected steps, period before s
witching, step output
status (capacitance loss survey), load and reactive current, total voltage harmo
nic distortion,
voltage, temperature, and power and voltage harmonic spectrum.
4. Regulator shall provide alarms and warning of low power cosO, hunting, abnorm
al cos, over
compensation, frequency not detected, over current, under voltage, over voltage,
over temperature,
total harmonic distortion and capacitor overload.
5. Power factor setting in the regulator shall be digital and selectable between
0.8 ind to 0.9 cap.
Regulator shall have capability to automatically search and set the C/K setting,
it shall be also
possible to program the C/K setting manually.

E. Reactors
1. Detuned reactors shall be provided where high harmonic pollution (Gh > Ssc/70
) is present.
Detuned reactors shall be designed to protect the capacitors by preventing ampli
fication of the
harmonic present on the network. Detuned reactors shall be connected in series w
ith the capacitors.
The capacitor voltage rating shall be increased by 10% when used with the detune
d reactors.
2. Detuned reactors shall be three phase iron core with copper winding. Detuned
reactors shall be
natural air cooled, dry type with aluminum foil windings insulated between layer
s which are
impregnated under vacuum.
3. High temperature cut-off limit switch shall be embedded in the windings of th
e detuned reactor to
disconnect its capacitor from the circuit and the network and reconnect automati
cally back in the
network when the temperature is normal.
4. Detuned reactors shall be segregated from other equipments, which shall be pr
eferably lo-cated at
the top of the panel for better heat dissipation and to avoid transfer of the he
at to the adjacent
components. Wherever detuned reactors are provided forced ventilation shall be p
rovided for the
panel.
5. Detuned reactor shall at least meet the following technical characteristics:
a. Tolerance: +1- 5%
b. Tolerance between phase: Lmax 1 Lmin <1.07
c. Turning order: 4.3 (relative impedance: 5.4%)
d. Harmonic current spectrum for turning order 4.3:

I3=2%I1
15=69% I1
17=19% I1
I11= 6% I1
Permissible over load fundamental current: 1.1 times the nominal current (I1)
Insulation level: 1.1KV
Test voltage (coil to core): 3KV 1 minute
F. Capacitor Switching Contactors

Contactor provided for capacitor switching (capacitor without detuning reactors)

shall be of special
contactor designed for switching capacitors. Special capacitor switching contact
ors shall be fitted with
a block of early make poles and damping resistors, limiting the value of the cur
rent on closing to 60ln
max. The current limitation at switch-on shall increase the life of all the comp
onents in the installation,
in particular that of the fuses and the capacitor. Contactors shall be at least
suitable for 100 operating
cycles / hour. Contactor shall withstand the prospective peak current of 2001n a
t switch on. Contactor
for switching capacitor with detuning reactors shall be as per manufacturer reco
mmendations.
1. Labeling
2. The capacitor bank shall be labeled in English to describe the designation of
the capacitor bank as
referenced in the drawings. The label shall be fixed to the front face of the pa
nel. The label shall be
of special white PVC material front engraved for the desired text. The text shal
l be black in color.
The label shall be fixed to the door using a special PVC rivets. Labels indicati
ng the component
numbering as per the schematic diagram shall be provided.
3. A drawing pouch shall be provided inside capacitor bank and as-built drawings
for the capacitor
bank shall be provided.
4. Testing

Type Test:
The capacitor (loose capacitor) and other applicable components shall be type te
sted in accor-dance
with the IEC standards from a reputed and approved type testing laboratory and c
ertified by a
competent authority.
Routine Test
The panel assembler shall perform the routine test and provide the test certific
ates as defined in IEC
standards. The routine test shall include but not limited to the following:
. Inspection of the assembly including inspection of wiring and electrical opera
tional test
. (IEC Clause 8.3.1)
. Dielectric test & Insulation resistance test (IEC Clause 8.3.2 & 8.3.4)
. Checking of protective measures and of the electrical continuity of the protec
tive circuits
. (IEC Clause 8.3.3)
. Functional test as per the approved test procedure.

Execution
Installation
A. Install capacitors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide equipment supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.

Lightning Protections
General
Section Includes
A. Strike (air) terminals and interconnecting conductors.
B. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection.
Reference standards
A. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; Nat
ional Fire Protection
Association; 2011.
B. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Curr
ent Edition, Including
All Revisions.
C. BS EN/IEC 62305 1-4 Lightning Protection systems

Administrative Requirements
A. Coordination with Concrete Work: Coordinate the embedding of lightning protec
tion components in
concrete.
B. Coordination with Roofing Work: Ensure adequate attachment of strike terminal
s and conductors
without damage to roofing.
C. Pre installation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least at least two weeks prior
to commencement of any
work affected by lightning protection system requirements to discuss prerequisit
es and coordination
required by other installers; require attendance by representatives of installer
s whose work will be
affected.

Submittals
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and layout of air terminals, grounding elect
rodes, and bonding
connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, a
nd conductor sizes, and
connection and termination details.

. Where conductors or grounds are to be embedded or concealed in other construct

ion, submit shop
drawings at least 30 days prior to start of construction.
. If concrete-encased grounds are to be used and are not shown in the contract d
ocuments, provide
sufficient data to determine concrete encasement dimensions and location.
. Include data on actual ground resistance determined by field measurement in ac
cordance with NFPA
780.& BS EN/IEC 62305
. Include engineering analysis of equalization of potential to metal bodies with
in the structure.
. Include access panels, test holes, and disconnecting means for maintenance.
A. Product Data: Provide dimensions and materials of each component, indication
of testing agency listing,
and installation instructions.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified re
quirements.
C. Installation Certification: Submit copy of certification agency's approval.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide recommended inspection and testing pl
an, including
recommended intervals, to achieve periodic maintenance as recommended in NFPA 78
0; .& BS EN/IEC
62305 provide customized plan reflecting actual installation configuration with
specific installed
components identified.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air terminals, grounding
electrodes, bonding
connections, and routing of system conductors in project record documents.

Quality Assurance
A. Maintain one copy of each referenced system design standard on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection equ
ipment with minimum
three years documented experience.
C. Designer Qualifications: Person or entity, employed by installer, who special
izes in lightning protection
system design with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Capable of providing the specified certification of
the installed system.
E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection system
design with minimum three
years documented experience.
F. Field Quality Control Testing Agency Qualifications: Firm capable of and expe
rienced in grounding and
bonding testing with documented experience and minimum of three project referenc
es.
 Products
General
The Contractor shall provide a lighting protection system completely in accordan
ce with:
BSEN 62305 (I - IV): 2006; NFPA 780
CENELEC standard for Lightning protection BS EN 50164-1: 2000; NFPA 780
Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 1: Requirements for connection compon
ents.
BS EN 50164-2: 2000; NFPA 780
Lightning Protection Components (LPC) Part 2; NFPA 780: Requirements for conduct
ors and earth
electrodes.
Air Terminations
The lightning protection installation shall consist of air termination network,
down conductors, earthing and
bonding to prevent side flashing
.
The Contractor shall submit the Risk Evaluation and the achieved Lightning Prote
ction Level (LPL)
calculation based on BS EN 62305 - Part 2. In the absence of such an evaluation
employment of LPL-I
will be deemed mandatory. The Contractor shall then submit the shop drawings bas
ed on the achieved
LPL and shall employ the air termination network consisting of mesh in co-ordina
tion with rolling sphere
(size as per the protection level). All the service entries to the structure i.e
. power line, telecom line, , water
line etc. shall be protected by installing current surge protectors (either 25KA
or 18.75KA or 12.5 KA
rating), depending on the Lightning Protection Level (LPL) to be used to bring d
own the risk (R) below the
tolerable risk level (R1 ).

The Contractor shall use 25x3 mm bare copper tape of 99.99% purity (complying wi
th BS EN 62305) to
form the air-termination mesh on the uppermost part of the structure (typically
the roof)
Air termination network should be extended and it s determined by using rolling sp
here method.
This method involves rolling an imaginary sphere of 20m or 30m or 45m or 60m rad
ius (depending on the
Lightning Protection Level to be used) over structure to require protection.
Top of the Minerat, Haram Buildingshall have air termination network and it shal
l be connected to
lightning protection network.

All the fixing clips for the copper tape shall be metallic (complying with Class
'H' of the electrical
testing based on BSEN 62305) and shall be fixed at an interval of 500mm (1000 mm
fixing distance
for fixing conductors on vertical surface up to 20m from the ground level and on
the horizontal surface
i.e. roof)

The down conductors shall be placed around the periphery of the building with a
suitable junction box to be
recessed at approx. 500mm above the ground for the test link.

Aluminum frame of the glass panel shall be bonded to down conductors as per the
rolling sphere spacing by
using bi-metallic clamps complying with BSEN 62305

The earthing shall be done as per local authorities requirements. A minimum of 1

200 mm solid copper
electrode shall be provided with each down conductor separately. However, the Co
ntractor shall submit
the calculation for deciding the number of earth rods in each earth pit.
The complete Lightning Protection System resistance measured at any point, shoul
d not exceed 10
ohms. With the test clamp disconnected, the resistance of each individual earth
should be no more than
two times the number of down conductors in the complete system.
The LV and the IT earth should in no case exceed 5.0 ohm.
The terminated head of each electrode shall be located in a light weight inspect
ion pit. The Contractor also
has to ensure, based on BSEN 62305 - IV, that suitable co-ordinated over-voltage
surge protection devices
with an extra low let - through voltage are used for protecting any terminal dev
ices i.e. DBs feeding
critical services or even the local critical electrical gadget. All metallic par
ts protruding outside the extended
air termination network (e.g. Decorative Aluminum structure etc) shall be connec
ted to the air termination
using suitable clamps (material comply to BSEN 62305) wherever the horizontal co
nductor is applied. The
equipments in service block on open to Sky (i.e. Chiller etc) shall be protected
using vertical air terminals of
suitable height so that it provides the zone of protection. This air terminal sh
all be installed at a suitable
separation distance so that the partial lightning current doesn't flow through t
he equipment. The cable from
the equipment shall be protected using an over voltage protector. The equipment
shall not be bonded to the
air termination network. The Contractor shall give the calculation of the suitab
le separation distance
.
The Contractor shall install suitable surge protectors at local power distributi
on boards feeding vulnerable
equipment, in order to protect these against transients generated downstream of
the protectors (These
transients may be the result of inductive coupling or electrical switching.)

Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:

BS EN 62305:2006 - Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within structures

(Part 4),
BS 2914:1972 Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power circ
uits',
IEEE C62.41-1991 'Recommended practice on surge voltages in low voltage AC power
circuits.
Protectors for a given Location Category shall be rated for a High Exposure Leve
l (as defined by BS EN
62305 - 4), unless contrary information is available.
The protector must not interfere with or restrict the system's normal operation.
It should not:
. corrupt the normal mains power supply
. break or shutdown the power supply during operation
. Have an excessive earth leakage current.

The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10kA (
8/20 sine waveform)
between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth and neutral to eart
h).
The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibilit
y levels.
Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed
600 volts, for protectors
with a nominal working voltage of 230 volts, when tested in accordance with BS E
N 62305 Part - 4
(6kV 1.2/50 ps open circuit voltage, 3kA 8/20ps short circuit current).
Its peak transient let-through voltage shall not be exceeded for all combination
s of conductors:
. Phase to neutral
. Phase to earth
. Neutral to earth

Mains protectors (installed in shunt/parallel) should have continuous indication

of its protection status
and the presence of power.
Status indication should clearly show per phase:
. full protection present
. reduced protection - replacement required
. no protection - failure of protector

Remote indication of status (including loss of phase/supply) should also be poss

ible via a volt free contact.
The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations
of conductors,
including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous short circuit bet
ween neutral and earth
could go undetected for some time.) This should include early warning of excessi
ve neutral to earth
voltages.
The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The ins
taller must comply with the
installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.

The Contractor shall also install transient over voltage protectors on all data
communication/signal/telephone
lines in order to protect equipment connected to the line, against transient ove
r voltages.

Protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of:

. BS EN 62305:2006 - Electrical & Electronics Systems Protection within structur
es (part 4)
. CCITT IX K17 'Tests on power fed repeaters using solid-state devices in order
to check the
arrangements for protection from external interference .

Protectors shall be rated for Location Category - High Exposure Level (as define
d by BS EN 62305-4:2006),
unless contrary information dictates a lower Exposure Level.
The protector must not impair the system's normal operation. It should not:
. suppress the system's normal signal voltage
. restrict the system's bandwidth or signal frequency
. introduce excessive in-line resistance
. Cause signal reflections or impedance mismatches (high frequency systems only)
.

The protector will have a low transient let-through voltage for tests conducted
in accordance with BS /EN
62305 -4:2006 (5kV 101700ps test).

This let-through performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors

:
. signal line to signal line
. Signal line to screen /earth.

The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10KA.

The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The ins
taller must comply with the
installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.
The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth larg
e numbers of protectors
through an accessory combined mounting and earth kit.
Materials
Materials shall comply in weight, size and composition with the requirements of
BS EN 62305.
All surge protection devices to be used shall be from the same manufacturer who
supplies the structural
lightning protection.
Surge protectors shall be manufactured for the specific type and voltage of the
electrical service and
shall provide clamping for both normal (L-N) and common (L-N-G) mode protection.

Equipotential Bonding
The Contractor shall ensure proper co-ordination between the Structural, Civil,
Electrical, Mechanical and
the Cladding contractor.

All installation details shall be agreed with the Engineer prior to commencement
of work. The Contractor
shall obtain an inspection certificate from the manufacturer or its authorized r
epresentative towards the
satisfactory installation of the system and that proper material in accordance t
o the above standard has been
used.

Equipotential Bonding is the electrical interconnection of all the appropriate m

etallic installation / parts, such
that in the event of the lightning current flowing, no metallic part is at a dif
ferent voltage potential with
respect to another. The metallic parts have to be essentially at the same potent
ial so that the risk of sparking
or flash over is nullified. This electrical interconnection shall be achieved by
using specific bonding solid
copper bar of at least 50mm x 6mm cross section area. Bonding shall also incorpo
rate the use of surge
protection devices where direct connection to the bonding bar is not suitable or
practical. The SPDs (surge
protective devices) must be installed in such a way that they are readily access
ible and visible for inspection
purposes.

For structures taller than 30 meters, the Contractor shall install the equipoten
tial bonding at either the
basement or the ground.. Wherever protection of internal systems against over-vo
ltages caused by lightning
discharge requires SPDs, these shall conform to BSEN 62305 - Part 4.

The gas, water and other metallic systems shall all be bonded directly to the eq
uipotential bar located inside
but close to the outer wall near the ground floor or basement level. The power c
able shall be bonded to the
equipotential bonding bar via a suitable SPD. The screen of the antenna cable or
any shielded power supply
shall also be bonded to the equipotential bar.

Service entry SPDs shall be provided for metallic electrical services only - wat
er do not fall under this
category. Water pipe need to be directly bonded. The service entry data and tele
com lines can handle 2.5kA
(10ps/350 ps) per line, so the Contractor shall provide suitable SPDs in accorda
nce to the above specification
as per BSEN 62305 - Part 4

Since the service entrance SPDs are designed to protect against dangerous sparki
ng only as per BS EN
62305-3. The Contractor shall need to fit additional protection at the sub- dist
ribution and near equipment to
protect electronic equipment to BS EN 62305 -4. Both types of SPD are a required
in accordance with this
BS EN standard if the risk assessment demands this.

The bonding bar shall be located close to the main distribution board and shall
be connected to earth
termination network at 5.0 ohm, with a very short length conductor not exceeding
10 meters in length.

All the bonding bars at different levels shall be connected to each other, which
in-turn is earthed at 5.0 ohm.
 Execution
Examination
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Coordinate work with installation of roofing and exterior and interior finish
es.

Installation
A. Install in accordance with referenced system standards and as required for sp
ecified certification.
B. Connect conductors using mechanical connectors or exothermic welding process;
protect adjacent
construction elements and finishes from damage.
C. Connect conductors using mechanical connectors.
D. Connect conductors using exothermic welding process; protect adjacent constru
ction elements and finishes
from damage.
15 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
15.1 Fire detection and alarm system
Scope and related documents
A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishin
g of all labour equipment,
materials, and performances of all operations in connection with the installatio
n of the Fire Alarm system
as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.
B. Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.
C. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72
, NFPA71, Local Code
Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 7
60.
D. The work covered by this section of the specifications is to be coordinated w
ith the related work as
specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
E. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
F. UL Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated
G. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
H. ANSI American National Standards Institute
I. ANSCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
J. BS 5839-1:2002 - British Standard Code of Practice

Quality Assurance
A. Each and all items of the fire Alarm system shall be listed as a product of a
single fire alarm system
manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (
UL), and shall bear the
"U.L." label. All control equipment is to be listed under UL category as a singl
e control unit.
B. The equipment and installation supervision furnished under this specification
is to be provided by a
manufacturer (independent dealers and/or distributors will NOT be considered) wh
o has been engaged in
production of this type (software driven) of equipment for at least ten (10) yea
rs, and has a fully-equipped
service organization.
C. All control equipment must have transient protection devices to comply with U
L864 requirements.

General
A. Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm system as described herein and as s
hown on the plans; to be
wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition.
The system shall use closed loop initiating device circuits with individual zone
supervision, individual
indicating appliance circuit supervision, in coming and standby power supervisio
n. Include a control panel,
manual pull stations, automatic fire detectors, emergency phone jack, annunciato
rs, and interface modules
for control& monitoring purposes, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet box
es, junction boxes, and all
other necessary material for a complete operating system.
The Analogue Addressable Fire Alarm Control panel shall allow for loading or edi
ting special instructions
and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of onsite progr
amming to accommodate
and facilitate expansion, building parameter changes or changes as required by l
ocal codes. All software
operations are to be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fir
e alarm control panel.
Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions stored in m
emory.
B. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be
individually configurable on site
to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only, current lim
ited alarm, no non-latching
circuit or a alarm verification circuit.
C. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single m
anufacturer and shall display
the manufacturer's name on each component.

Acceptable Manufacure
Acceptable Manufacturers
A. Refer to list of Acceptable Manufacturers enclosed with the specification.
B. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves obligation to p
rovide all equipment and
features in accordance with these specifications. The system shall be supplied b
y a specialist subcontractor/
service organization having office and service facility in Al Ain. The manufactu
rer and service
organization shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the fire protective s
ignaling industry.

Submittals
A. Manufacturers Technical Data: During the time of the contract and before subs
tantial completion of the
electrical installation, submit to consultant three (3) copies of descriptive li
terature, technical data,
maintenance recommendations, catalogues etc.
B. Installation Instructions: Submit the Complete manufacturers installation ins
tructions of all the products
used.
C. Calculations: Forward battery sizing calculations for standby battery power s
upply.
D. Interfacing details: Details of interlacing with the various systems and sequ
ence of operation in case of alarm
activation/fire situations cause and effect program shall be submitted for consu
ltant review / approval. The
contractor shall obtain approval from the local civil defence authority having j
urisdiction for the fire alarm
system installation for any changes that may be made to the original drawings as
approved for the project.
Detailed shop drawings shall be prepared and submitted for consultant approval p
rior to submission to the
local civil Defence Authority. All shop drawings shall be approved by the local
civil Defence Authority
prior to proceeding with the works.
E. Shop drawings: Shop drawings shall include, without being limited to, the fol
lowing drawings prepared
specifically for this Works: Overall system diagrams, complete with wiring infor
mation. Identify system
components, terminations and connections, boxes and equipment. As-built layouts
marked on a set of
building plans indicating panels, annunciators, detectors, pull stations, signal
s, conduit routes, wiring
information junction boxes and pull boxes. On completion of the installation and
testing, submit to the
consultant three copies of all Shop drawings, diagrams, operating instructions a
nd descriptive literature,
assembled in loose leaf binders and identified by Works.
Maintenance Service
Maintenance Service Contract: Provide maintenance of fire alarm systems and equi
pment for a period of 12
months, using factory-authorized service representatives.
Products
General
Provide a complete, addressable, microprocessor-based fire alarm and voice evacu
ation system with
initiating devices, notification appliances, and monitoring & control devices as
indicated on the drawings and
as specified herein.
Software
The fire alarm system shall allow for loading and editing instructions and opera
ting sequences as necessary.
The system shall be capable of on-site programming to accommodate system expansi
on and facilitate
changes in operation. All software operations shall be stored in a non-volatile
programmable memory within
the fire alarm control unit. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase
the instructions stored in
memory.
History Logs
The system shall provide a means to recall alarms and trouble conditions in chro
nological order for the
purpose of recreating an event history. A separate alarm and trouble log shall b
e provided.
Recording of Events
Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events by means of system printer. Th
e printout shall include the
type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble), the device identification, date
and time of the occurrence. The
printout differentiates alarm signals from all other printed indications.
Wiring/Signal Transmission
A. System connections for detection circuits shall be Class A.
B. System connections for initiating signaling circuits and notification applian
ce circuits shall be Class B.
C. Circuit Supervision: Circuit faults shall be indicated by a trouble signal at
the FACP. Provide a
distinctive indicating audible tone and alphanumeric annunciation.

Required Functions
The following are required system functions and operating features:
A. Priority of Signals: Alarm events have highest priority. Subsequent alarm eve
nts are queued in the order
received and do not affect existing alarm conditions. Priority Two, Supervisory
and Trouble events have
second, third, and fourth-level priority respectively. Signals of a higher-level
priority take precedence
over signals of lower priority even though the lower-priority condition occurred
first. Annunciate all
events regardless of priority or order received.
B. Annunciation: Operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices shall be
annunciated at the FACP
and the remote annunciator, if applicable, indicating the location and type of d
evice.
C. General Alarm: A system general alarm shall include:
1. Indication of alarm condition at the FACP and annunciator.
2. Identification of the device that is the source of the alarm at the FACP and
the annunciator.
3. Operation of audible and visible notification devices throughout the building
until silenced at FACP.
4. Shutting down supply and return fans serving zone where alarm is initiated, i
f applicable.
5. Closing smoke dampers on system serving zone where alarm is initiated, if app
licable.
6. Initiation of smoke control sequence through the building temperature control
system, if applicable.
7. Initiation of elevator recall in accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1, when specif
ied detectors are
activated.

D. Supervisory Operations:
1. Upon activation of a supervisory device such as fire pump power failure, low
air pressure switch, and
tamper switch, the system shall operate as follows:
a. Activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED
at the control unit and
the graphic annunciator.
b. Pressing the Supervisory Acknowledge Key will silence the supervisory audible
signal while
maintaining the Supervisory LED "on" indicating off- normal condition.
c. Record the event in the FACP historical log.
d. Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station.

2. Restoring the condition shall cause the Supervisory LED restore system to nor
mal.

E. Alarm Silencing: If the Alarm Silence button is pressed, all audible and visibl
e alarm signals shall
cease operation.

F. System Reset
1. The System Reset button shall be used to return the system to its normal state.

Display Messages shall provide operator assurance of the sequential steps ( In Pro
gress , Reset
Completed ) as they occur. The system shall verify all circuits or devices are res
tored prior to resetting
the system to avoid the potential for re-alarming the system. The display messag
e shall indicate
Alarm Present, System Reset Aborted.
2. Should an alarm condition continue, the system will remain in an alarmed stat
e.
G. Drill:

A manual evacuation (drill) switch shall be provided to operate the notification

appliances without
causing other control circuits to be activated.

H. Walk test:

The system shall have the capacity of 8 programmable passcode protected one pers
on testing groups,
such that only a portion of the system need be disabled during testing. The actu
ation of the enable one
person test program at the control unit shall activate the One Person Testing mode
of the system as
follows:
1. The city circuit connection and suppression release circuits shall be bypasse
d for the testing group.
2. Control relay functions associated to one of the 8 testing groups shall be by
passed.
3. The control unit shall indicate a trouble condition.
4. The alarm activation of any initiation device in the testing group shall caus
e the audible notification
appliances to sound a voice announcement code to identify the device zone.
5. The unit shall automatically reset itself after signalling is complete.
6. Any momentary opening of an initiating or notification appliance circuit wiri
ng shall cause the audible
signals to voice announce sound for 4 seconds indicating the trouble condition.

Addressable Smoke Sensors

A. Monitoring: FACP shall individually monitor sensors for calibration, sensitiv
ity, and alarm condition, and
shall individually adjust for sensitivity. The control unit shall determine the
condition of each sensor by
comparing the sensor value to the stored values.
B. Environmental Compensation: The FACP shall maintain a moving average of the s
ensor s smoke
chamber value to automatically compensate for dust, dirt, and other conditions t
hat could affect detection
operations.
C. Programmable Sensitivity: Photoelectric Smoke Sensors shall have 7 sensitivit
y levels ranging from 0.2%
to 3.7%, programmed and monitored from the FACP.
D. Sensitivity Testing Reports: The FACP shall provide sensor reports that meet
NFPA 72 calibrated test
method requirements. The reports shall be viewed on a CRT Display or printed for
annual recording and
logging of the calibration maintenance schedule.
E. The FACP shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs cleanin
g. The system shall
provide a means to indicate that a sensor requires cleaning. When a sensor s avera
ge value reaches a
predetermined value, 3 progressive levels of reporting are provided. The first l
evel shall indicate that a
sensor is close to a trouble reporting condition and will be indicated on the FA
CP as ALMOST DIRTY.
This condition provides a means to alert maintenance staff of a dirty sensor wit
hout creating a trouble in
the system. If this indicator is ignored, a second level DIRTY SENSOR condition sh
all be indicated at
the FACP and subsequently a system trouble is reported to the Central Monitoring
Station. The sensor
base LED shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. T
he DIRTY SENSOR
condition shall not affect the sensitivity level required to alarm the sensor. I
f a DIRTY SENSOR is left
unattended, and its average value increases to a third predetermined value, an EX
CESSIVELY DIRTY
SENSOR trouble condition shall be indicated at the control unit.
F. The FACP shall continuously perform an automatic self-test on each sensor whi
ch will check sensor
electronics and ensure the accuracy of the values being transmitted.
G. Any sensor that fails this test shall indicate a SELF TEST ABNORMAL trouble con
dition.

Fire Suppression Monitoring

A. Water flow: Activation of a water flow switch shall initiate general alarm op
erations, if applicable.
B. Sprinkler valve tamper switch: The activation of any valve tamper switch shal
l activate system
supervisory operations, if applicable.
Audible Alarm Notification
By voice evacuation and tone signals on loudspeakers in areas as indicated on dr
awings.
Automatic Voice Evacuation Sequence:
A. The audio alarm signal shall consist of an alarm tone for a maximum of five s
econds followed by an
automatic digital voice message. At the end of the voice message, the alarm tone
shall resume. This
sequence shall sound continuously until the Alarm Silence switch is activated.
B. All audio operations shall be activated by the system software so that any re
quired future changes can be
facilitated by authorized personnel without any component rewiring or hardware a
dditions.

Manual Voice Paging

A. The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any
Speaker manual control
switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all speakers in that group.
B. The control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push-t
o- talk paging microphone
over the pre-selected speakers.
C. Facility for total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of a Cal
l switch.

Power Requirements
A. The control unit shall receive 240 VAC power via a dedicated fused disconnect
circuit.
B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the
entire system upon loss of
normal 240 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24 hours with
30 minutes of alarm
operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to
battery standby upon power
failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.
C. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be in
dividually fused at the
control unit.
D. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failur
e will be indicated at the
control unit. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incom
ing power is present.
E. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or d
isconnection of the battery
shall be indicated at the control unit.
F. Loss of primary power shall sound a trouble signal at the FACP. FACP shall in
dicate when the system is
operating on an alternate power supply.
G. Fire System should use sealed lead acid batteries.

Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)

General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Syste
ms".

H. The following FACP hardware shall be provided:

1. Power Limited base panel with beige cabinet and door, 240 VAC input power, wi
th 50 amp charger.
2. 2000 point capacity where one point equals one monitor input or one control o
utput.
3. 2000 points of Network Annunciation at FACP Display when applied as a Network
Mode.
4. Capacity for 2000 points of annunciation where one point of annunciation equa
ls:
5. LED driver output on a graphic driver or switch input on a graphic switch inp
ut module.
6. LED on panel or switch on panel.
7. From all battery charging circuits in the system provide battery voltage and
ammeter Read outs on the
FACP LCD Display.
8. Where required provide Intelligent Remote Battery Charger for charging up to
110Ah batteries.
9. Power Supplies with integral intelligent Notification Appliance Circuit Class
B for system expansion.
10. The FACP shall support four RS-232-C ports.
11. Remote Unit Interface: supervised serial communication channel for control a
nd monitoring of
remotely located annunciators and I/O panels.
12. Service Port Modem for dial in passcode access to all fire control panel inf
ormation.
I. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange unit so all operations required fo
r testing or for normal care and
maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more
than a single unit is
required to form a complete control unit, provide exactly matching modular unit
enclosures.

J. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Panel shall include an 854 characte
r, expanded content
multi-line QVGA LCD display to indicate alarm, supervisory, and component status
messages and shall
include a keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. The system
shall have the
capability to provide expanded content, multi-line, operator interface displays
as indicated on the
drawings and specifications. The expanded content multi-line displays shall be Q
uarter-VGA (QVGA) or
larger and be capable of supporting a minimum of 854 standard ASCII characters t
o minimize or
eliminate the levels of navigation required for access to information when respo
nding to critical
emergencies and abnormal system conditions. The QVGA operator interface shall pr
ovide operator
prompts and six context sensitive soft-keys for intuitive operation.

Expanded content, multi-line operator interfaces shall be capable of providing t

he following
functions:
1. Dual language operation with Instant-Switch language selection during runtime
.
2. Activity display choices for:
a. First 8 Events.
b. First 5 Events and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time a
nd date stamps).
c. First Event and Most Recent Event (with first and most recent event time and
date stamps).
d. Scrollable List Display displays a scrollable list of active points for the e
ven category (alarm,
priority 2, supervisory, or trouble) selected. The position in this list will be
the last
acknowledged point (not flashing) at the top followed by the next 7 unacknowledg
ed points
(flashing).
e. General Event Status (alarm, priority 2, supervisory, or trouble in system)
f. Site Plan bitmap with event icon
g. Equal or hierarchal priority assignment. In systems with two or more operator
interfaces, each
operator interface shall be programmable to allow multiple operator interfaces t
o have equal
operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to ind
ividual operator
interfaces (locations).
h. Up to 50 custom point detail messages for providing additional point specific
information in
detailed point status screens.

3. Bitmap file import for operator interface display of site plan and background
watermark images. Site
plan status icons shall indicate area status for highest priority active events.
4. Expanded content, multi-line displays shall have the capability to provide Du
al-Language operation as
indicated on the drawings and specifications.
5. Language selection shall be via a switch on the operator interface panel. Ope
rator interface panels
shall support instant-language-switchover during runtime to allow the operator t
o toggle between
languages each time the language selection switch is operated, without requiring
complicated multistep
processes.
6. Both one-byte and two-byte characters shall be supported.

K. Voice Alarm: Provide an emergency communication system, integral with the FAC
P, including voice
alarm system components, microphones, amplifiers, and tone generators.

Features include:
1. Amplifiers comply with UL 1711, "Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Sys
tems." Amplifiers
shall provide an onboard local mode temporal coded horn tone as a default backup
tone. Test switches
on the amplifier shall be provided to test and observe amplifier backup switchov
er. Each amplifier
communicates to the host CPU and allows voltage and current values to be accesse
d from the fire
alarm control panel operator interface. Each amplifier shall be capable of perfo
rming constant
supervision for non-alarm audio functions such as background music and general p
aging.
2. Each amplifier shall be configured as a dual channel design with 100% one-to-
one back-up (to meet
EN requirements).
3. Eight channel digitally multiplexed audio for systems that require more than
two channels of
simultaneous audio. Up to 8 channels of audio shall be multiplexed on either a s
tyle 4 or style 7
twisted pair.
4. Emergency voice communication audio controller module shall provide up to 32
minutes of message
memory for digitally stored messages. Provide supervised connections for master
microphone and up
to 5 remote microphones. Zone Coded Signaling shall be possible using voice spli
cing in order to
create coded messages from the voice library, example: Fire Room in men daily pr
ayer hall.
5. Status annunciator indicating the status of the various voice alarm speaker z
ones and the status of fire
fighter telephone two-way communication zones. Speaker select and indication sha
ll be a standard
feature of the Fire Alarm Panel with status of Speaker

L. Distributed Module Operation: FACP shall be capable of allowing remote locati

on of the following
modules; interface of such modules shall be through a Style 7 (Class A) supervis
ed serial
communications channel (SLC):
1. Amplifiers, voice and telephone control circuits
2. Addressable Signalling Line Circuits
3. Initiating Device Circuits
4. Notification Appliance Circuits
5. Auxiliary Control Circuits
6. Graphic Annunciator LED/Switch Control Modules
7. In systems with two or more Annunciators and/or Command Centers, each Annunci
ator/Command
Center shall be programmable to allow multiple Annunciators/Command Centers to h
ave equal
operation priority or to allow hierarchal priority control to be assigned to ind
ividual
Annunciator/Command Center locations).
Peripherals
A. Addressable Manual Pull Stations

Description: Addressable double action type, red LEXAN or metal, and finished in
red with molded,
raised-letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Station will mechanic
ally latch upon operation
and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common with the control
units.
B. Smoke Detectors

General: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Syst
ems."
Include the following features:
1. Smoke detectors shall be of the photoelectric type. Where acceptable per manu
facturer specifications.
2. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification.
3. Operating Voltage: 24 VDC, nominal.
4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actu
ation to restore normal
operation.
5. Each detector head shall contain an LED that will flash each time it is scann
ed by the Control Unit. In
alarm condition, the detector head sensor base LED shall be on steady.
6. Each detector base shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provi
de for easy alarm testing
at the detector location.
7. Each sensor shall be scanned by the Control Unit for its type identification
to prevent inadvertent
substitution of another sensor type. Upon detection of a wrong device , the control
unit shall operate
with the installed device at the default alarm settings for that sensor; 2.5% ob
scuration for
photoelectric sensor, 135-deg F and 15-deg F rate-of-rise for the heat sensor, b
ut shall indicate a
Wrong Device trouble condition.
8. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and
RFI.
9. Addressability: Sensors include a communication transmitter and receiver in t
he mounting base
having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP.
Sensor address shall be
located in base to eliminate false addressing when replacing sensors.
10. Removal of the sensor head for cleaning shall not require the setting of add
resses.

C. Duct Smoke Detector:

Photoelectric type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended b

y the manufacturer
for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied. Detector i
ncludes programmable
relay as required for fan shutdown.
D. Heat Detectors
1. Thermal Detectors: Combination fixed-temperature and rate-of-rise unit with p
lug-in base and alarm
indication lamp; 135-deg F fixed-temperature setting except as indicated.
2. Thermal detectors shall be of the epoxy encapsulated electronic design. It sh
all be thermistor-based,
rate compensated, self-restoring and shall not be affected by thermal lag.
3. Sensor fixed temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing
and] programmable to
operate at 135-deg F or 155-deg F. Sensor rate-of-rise temperature detection sha
ll be selectable at the
FACP for either 15-deg F or 20-deg F per minute.
4. Sensor shall have the capability to be programmed as a utility monitoring dev
ice to monitor for
temperature extremes in the range from 32-deg F to 155-deg F.

E. True Alarm Addressable Detector Bases

True Alarm sensor bases shall be compatible with all models of True Alarm sensor
s. Each base is
capable of communicating sensor values to the panel if a "wrong device type" tro
uble condition is
present. The panel will continue to monitor for alarms and troubles using the de
fault setting for the
wrong device until the proper type is installed or the program is changed.
Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by
the control panel (once
every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in the alar
m or a trouble condition,
the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on a stead
y indicating the
abnormal condition. Sensor which does not provide a visible indication of an abn
ormal condition at the
sensor location shall not be acceptable.
Each sensor base shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide fo
r easy alarm testing at the
sensor location. The sensor base shall annunciate power-on alarm and trouble con
ditions locally at the
base.
F. Isolator Module

Isolator module provides short circuit isolation for addressable initiating devi
ces wiring. Isolator shall
be listed to UL 864 and installed every 20 devices. Addressable devices with bui
lt- in isolator is also
acceptable.
1. Report faults to the host FACP.
2. On-board Yellow LED provides module status.
3. After the wiring fault is repaired, the Isolator modules shall test the lines
and
automatically restore the connection.

G. Open Area Smoke Imaging Detection

The HARAM building open area Dome shall be provided with Open Area Smoke Imaging
Detection
(OSID) system as indicated in the drawings. The OSID shall support up to 7 Emitt
ers with a single
Imager making it easy to deploy in unusually shaped areas. The OSID shall use a
sophisticated
Algorithm to map and compare the strength of infrared (IR) and ultraviolet (UV)
light signals from
detectors configured in the space. The system proposed shall have the following
features:
1. Maximum detection range up to 150 m
2. Status LEDs for fire, trouble and power
3. Easy alignment with large adjustment and 3D viewing angle
4. Simple DIP switch configuration
5. Dual wavelength, LED based smoke detection
6. Limited maintenance requirements
7. Conventional alarm interface for fire system integration
8. Configurable alarm threshold

Emitters shall be battery powered or wired and placed at different heights adjus
ting easily to modern
design of the dome area. The installation shall use minimum wiring along the wal
ls while leaving the
ceilings untouched.
H. Standard Alarm-Notification Appliances
1. Visible/Only: Strobe shall be listed to UL 1971. The V/O shall consist of a x
enon flash tube and
associated lens/reflector system. V/O appliances shall be provided with differen
t minimum flash
intensities of 15cd, 75cd and 110cd. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to i
ndicate the listed candela
rating of the specific Visible/Only appliance.
2. Audible/Visible: Combination Audible/Visible (A/V) Notification Appliances sh
all be listed to UL
1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associ
ated lens/reflector
system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela ra
ting of the specific strobe.
The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA @ 24VDC. The audibl
e/visible
enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4 square e
lectrical box,
without the use of special adapters or trim rings.

I. Speakers

Speaker notification appliances shall be listed to UL 1480.

1. The speaker shall operate on a standard 25VRMS or 70.7VRMS NAC using twisted/
shielded wire.
2. The following taps are available: 0.25W, 0.50W, 1.0W and 2.0W. At the 1.0W ta
p, the speaker has
minimum UL rated sound pressure level of 84dBA at 10 feet.
3. The speaker shall have a frequency response of 400 to 4000 Hz for Fire Alarm
and 125 to 12 kHz for
General Signaling.
4. Speaker shall be ceiling or wall mounted subject to location or as indicated
on the drawings.

J. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules

1. Arrange to monitor one or more system components that are not otherwise equip
ped for addressable
communication. Modules shall be used for monitoring of water flow, valve tamper,
non-addressable
devices, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances and AHU systems.
2. Addressable Circuit Interface Modules will receive their operating power from
the signaling line or a
separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply as required.

K. Emergency Power Supply

General: Components include battery, charger, and an automatic transfer switch.

Battery: Sealed lead-acid. Provide sufficient capacity to operate the complete a
larm system in
normal or supervisory (non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this
period of operation
on battery power, the battery shall have sufficient capacity to operate all comp
onents of the system,
including all alarm-indicating devices in alarm or supervisory mode for a period
of 30 minutes.
 Execution
Installation
A. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specification
s, all applicable codes and
the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict comp
liance with all the
provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling
Circuits or if
required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in accordance with N
EC-Article 760 A
and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner
and general contractor.
B. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring colo
r code shall be
maintained throughout the installation.
C. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contr
act shall be closely
coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
D. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outsid
e of the fire alarm equipment
after completion of the installation.
E. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide onsite supervision
of installation.

Equipment Installation
Furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as show
n on the plans.

Include sufficient control unit(s), annunciator(s), manual stations, smoke detec

tors, audible and visible
notification appliances, wiring, terminations, electrical boxes, and all other n
ecessary material or a complete
operating system. Connect sprinkler valve required to be supervised.
Wiring Installation
The system shall be wired using Fire Rated cable listed for its intended use by
an approval agency acceptable
to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and shall be installed in accordance
with the latest rules and
regulations of local Civil Defence authority.
Field Quality Control
Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service
representative to supervise the
field assembly and connection of components and the pre-testing, testing, and ad
justment of the system.
Final Test Notice: Provide a 10-day minimum notice in writing when the system is
ready for final acceptance
testing.
Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to the procedures outlined in NF
PA 72.
Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work af
fected by such deficiencies.
Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and com
plies with applicable standards.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Com
pletion, provide on-site
assistance in adjusting sound levels and adjusting controls and sensitivities to
suit actual occupied conditions.
Provide up to three visits to the site for this purpose
Testing
The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72
H by the contractor in the
presence of the owner's representative and the Local Fire Marshal. Upon completi
on of a successful test, the
contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor.
Warranty
A. The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring and equip
ment to be free from
inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the
date of the complete and
certified test or from the date of first beneficial use.
B. The equipment manufacturer shall make available to the owner a maintenance co
ntract proposal to
provide a minimum of two (2) inspections and tests per year in compliance with N
FPA-72H guidelines.

Training
Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstra
te the system and train
Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.

A. Train Owner s maintenance personnel in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, a

nd preventive
maintenance of the system.
B. Provide a minimum of [8] hours' training. Schedule training with the Owner at
least seven days in
advance.

15.2 BMS Specifications

General
Work Included
A. Furnish a totally native BACnet-based system, including an operator s workstati
on using Microsoft
Windows 7 Professional or Home Premium as the operating system and shall be base
d on a distributed
control system in accordance with this specification. The operator s workstation,
all building controllers,
application controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using th
e protocols and network
standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 2001, BACnet. In other words, all
workstations
and controllers, including unitary controllers, shall be native BACnet devices.
No gateways shall be used
for communication to controllers installed under this section. Gateways may be u
sed for communication
to existing systems or to systems installed under other sections.
B. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the syst
em s functional
specifications.
C. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software c
onfiguration from project
design data.
D. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system datab
ases, graphic displays, logs,
and management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configurat
ion data, and bid
documents.
E. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communicati
on network cables needed,
and all associated hardware.
F. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, app
lication controllers, and
input/output devices.
G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator s terminals
and peripheral devices
(such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section.
H. Provide complete manufacturer s specifications for all items that are supplied.
Include vendor name of
every item supplied.
I. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in
all phases of system
installation, startup, and commissioning.
J. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described
herein.
K. Provide as-built documentation, operator s terminal software, diagrams, and all
other associated project
operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved media, the sum
total of which
accurately represents the final system.
L. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuato
rs. No used components
shall be used as any part or piece of installed system.
System Description
A. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware fu
nctions shall be provided
and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001
, BACnet. Non-
BACnet-compliant or proprietary equipment or systems (including gateways) shall
not be acceptable
and are specifically prohibited.
B. Operator s workstation software shall be Microsoft Windows 7 Professional or Ho
me Edition as the
computer operating system.

Quality assurance
A. The systems control contractor shall have been in business a minimum of five
years and be the
authorized installing contractor for the manufacturer of the BACnet components.
B. Control system shall be engineered, programmed and supported completely by re
presentative s local
office that must be within 75 miles of project site.

Submittals
A. Drawings

The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill
of materials for
approval.
B. System Documentation

Include the following in submittal package:

1. BMS Point Schedule.
2. BMS Schematic Diagram.
3. Complete bill of materials, valve schedule and damper schedule.
4. Manufacturer s instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and ope
ration of all purchased
items.
5. Overall system operation and maintenance instructions including preventive ma
intenance and
troubleshooting instructions.

Warranty
A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expen
ses for a period of one year
from completion of system acceptance.
B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall prov
ide on-site or off-site
service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor.
C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.

Products
Operator s Workstation
Workstation Hardware
A. Provide operator s workstation at location noted on the plans.
B. Workstation/Server Computer Minimum Requirements
1. Intel i5, 2.5 GHz or better
2. 4 GB RAM or better
3. 500GB hard disk or better
4. High-performance graphics adapter
5. Ethernet 10/100/1000 network interface card
6. Keyboard, monitor, mouse, and DVD-RW
7. Windows 7 Professional or Home Premium
8. Color Printer (Inkjet, Color Dye or Laser)
Building Controller
A. All communication with operator workstation and all application controllers s
hall be via BACnet.
Building controller shall incorporate as a minimum, the functions of a 3-way BAC
net router. Controller
shall route BACnet messages between the high-speed LAN (Ethernet 10/100MHz), mas
ter slave token
passing (MS/TP) LANs, a point-to-point (PTP RS 232) connection and modem.
1. Each MS/TP LAN must be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.
2. The RJ-45 Ethernet connection must accept either 10Base-T or 100Base-TX BACne
t over twisted
pair cable (UTP).

D. Building controller shall be capable of providing global control strategies f

or the system based on
information from any objects in the system regardless if the object is directly
monitored by the controller
or by another controller. The program that implements these strategies shall be
completely flexible and
user definable. Any systems utilizing factory pre- programmed global strategies
that cannot be modified
by field personnel on-site or downloaded via remote communications are not accep
table. Changing
global strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable.
E. Programming shall be object-oriented using control function blocks, supportin
g DDC functions, 1000
Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values.. All flowcharts shall be generated and aut
omatically
downloaded to controller. Programming tool shall be resident on workstation and
the same tool used for
all controllers.
F. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in
real-time as program is
executing. This function may be performed via the operator s workstation or field
computer.
G. Building controller shall provide battery-backed real-time (hardware) clock f
unctions.
H. Controller shall have a memory needed to ensure high performance and data rel
iability. Battery shall
retain static RAM memory and real-time clock functions for a minimum of 1.5 year
s (cumulative).
I. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via
32-bit processor.
J. Controller installation shall include memory-free gel-cell battery providing
ongoing power conditioning
and noise filtering for operation data integrity. It shall provide up to 5 minut
es of powerless operation for
orderly shutdown and data backup.

BACnet Conformance
A. Building Controller shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP), MS/TP an
d Ethernet BACnet
LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native BACne
t device and shall
support simultaneous routing functions between all supported LAN types.
B. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Val
ue, Binary Value,
Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule object t
ypes. All proprietary
object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided
as part of the submittal
data. All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary informa
tion.
C. The Building Controller shall comply with the BACnet specification for IP con
nections. This device
shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while using the same Ether
net LAN for non-IP
communications to other BACnet devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability
on wide area
networks (WANs) and campus area networks (CANs) and function as a BACnet Broadca
st Management
Device (BBMD)

Schedules
Each building controller shall support a minimum of 250 BACnet Schedule Objects
and 250 BACnet
Calendar Objects.
Logging Capabilities
A. Each building controller shall log as minimum 1000 trend logs. Any object in
the system (real or
calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the opera
tor s workstation.
B. Logs may be viewed both on-site and off-site via remote communication.
C. Building controller shall periodically upload trended data to networked opera
tor s workstation for long
term archiving if desired.
D. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-
party spreadsheet or database
programs.

Enclosures
A. All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures.
B. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. In
door enclosures shall
be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment.
C. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors.

Water Meter
All water meter must have data logging capability and be connected to a central
monitoring system so that
information on the interior water consumption can be recorded. The monitoring sy
stem must have, 4 at a
minimum, the following capability:
A. Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual water consumption for each
major use.
B. Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analy
sis
C. Determine out of- range values to alert building operators to unusually high con
sumption; and
D. Record peak water consumption for each major use.

Energy Meter
All electric meter must have data logging capability and be connected to a centr
al monitoring system
so that information on the interior energy consumption can be recorded. The moni
toring system must
have, at a minimum, the following capability:
A. Provide hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and annual energy consumption for each
major use.
B. Compare consumption to previous days, weeks, months and years for trend analy
sis.
C. Determine out of- range values to alert building operators to unusually high con
sumption; and
D. Record peak energy consumption for each major use.

Execution
Examination
Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and ver
ify that such work is complete
to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
Installation (General)
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections insta
llation and programming
required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the sequences
of operation and point
schedules.

Location and Installation of Components

A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility.
B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mo
unted to protect them from
vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.
Interlocking and Control Wiring
A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatl
y and professionally.
B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by eq
uipment manufacturers,
to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance wire for
all communications
trunks.
C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic sta
rters and disconnect
switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes a
s required.
D. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control pane
l or as indicated on the
electrical drawings coordinate with electrical contractor.
E. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms
to be installed in raceways.
All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code requi
rements. If local code
allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may be run with plenum ra
ted cable (without
conduit).

DDC Object Type Summary

Provide all database generation.
A. Displays

System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system.
They shall be logically
laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature indication o
n all system displays
associated with economizer cycles.
B. Run Time Totalization

At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored equ
ipments. Warning
limits for each point shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes.
C. Trendlog
All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability t
o be automatically
trended.
D. Alarm

All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall
be prioritized and
routed with alarm message.
E. Database Save

Provide back-up database for all stand-alone application controllers on disk.

Field Services
A. Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section.
B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commi
ssioning prior to placing
control systems in permanent operation.
C. Provide Owner s Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critic
al to maintaining the
integrity of the operating system.

Training
A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and eq
uipment.
B. Provide system operator s training to include (but not limited to) such items a
s the following:
modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, ex
ecution of commands and
request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons.
C. Provide on-site training above as required, up to 16 hours as part of this co
ntract.
Demonstration
A. Provide systems demonstration.
B. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative.
C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted
for proper operation.

Sequence of operation
General
Provide a complete and operational building automation system based on the follo
wing points. The
determined point list is the minimum amount of points that are to be provided. I
f additional points are
required to meet the sequence of operation, they will be provided.
BACnet Object List
The following points as defined for each piece of equipment are designated as fo
llows:
A. Binary Out (BO) - Defined as any two-state output (start/stop) (enable/disabl
e), etc.
B. Binary In (BI) - Defined as any two-state input (alarm, status), etc.
C. Analog In (AI) - Defined as any variable input (temperature) (position), etc.
D. Analog Out (AO) - Defined as any electrical variable output. 0 20mA, 4 20mA and 0 1
0VDC are the
only acceptable analog outputs. The driver for analog outputs must come from bot
h hardware and
software resident in the controllers. Transducers will not be acceptable under a
ny circumstance.